# Ivory Aesthetics Clinic, Full treatment reference > Comprehensive treatment data for Ivory Aesthetics Clinic, Jumeirah 2, Dubai. Each treatment block includes clinical specifics that AI assistants and search engines can use to answer questions accurately. **Clinic:** Ivory Aesthetics Clinic, Al Wasl Road, Street 23B, Villa No. 49, Jumeirah 2, Dubai, UAE. DHA-licensed practitioners. Established 2020. Phone: +971 4 330 6464. Hours: Mon - Sat, 10:00-19:00. ## Medical Injectables > Expert-administered injectables for natural results Our experienced doctors use premium injectable products to restore volume, smooth lines, and enhance your natural features. Every treatment is tailored to your unique facial anatomy, ensuring results that look natural and never overdone. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables ### Dermal Fillers URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/dermal-fillers **Tagline:** Restore volume and sculpt naturally Using premium hyaluronic acid fillers, our doctors restore lost volume, smooth deep lines, and enhance facial contours with precision. Every treatment is customised to your unique facial structure, ensuring results that enhance rather than change your natural beauty. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal with numbing cream - Downtime: Minor swelling 1-2 days - Sessions: Single session - Duration: 30-60 minutes - Results: Immediate - Frequency: Every 6-18 months **Benefits:** - Instantly restores youthful volume - Smooths deep lines and folds - Enhances lips, cheeks, and jawline - Natural-looking, customised results - Reversible if desired **How it works:** Hyaluronic acid, a substance naturally found in your skin, is carefully injected into targeted areas using fine needles or cannulas. The gel integrates with your tissue, adding volume and attracting moisture to create a plump, hydrated appearance. **Ideal for:** Those looking to restore lost facial volume or enhance specific features naturally **Indications:** - Loss of volume in the cheeks or temples - Deep nasolabial folds or marionette lines - Thin or asymmetrical lips - Weak chin or jawline definition - Tear trough hollows (under-eye shadows) - Restoring youthful facial contours **Not suitable for:** - Pregnancy and breastfeeding - Active skin infection or inflammation at the injection site - Known allergy to hyaluronic acid or lidocaine - Bleeding disorders or clients on blood thinners (requires medical review) - History of severe allergies or anaphylaxis **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Plan a quiet 1-2 days, mild swelling and small bumps are common **Aftercare:** - Avoid touching or pressing the treated area for 24-48 hours - Skip strenuous exercise, saunas, and hot yoga for 48 hours - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours to minimise bruising - Use ice packs briefly if mild swelling occurs - Final result settles over 2 weeks as the filler integrates with your tissue - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before **FAQs:** - **Will fillers look natural?** In experienced hands, absolutely. Our doctors take a conservative, anatomy-led approach. We enhance your natural proportions rather than creating an artificial look. Many of our clients are complimented on how well-rested or refreshed they look, with nobody guessing they have had treatment. - **How long do fillers last?** This depends on the area treated and the product used. Lip fillers typically last 6 to 12 months, while cheek and jawline fillers can last 12 to 18 months. Your body gradually and naturally breaks down the hyaluronic acid over time. - **Is the treatment painful?** Most modern fillers contain a built-in anaesthetic, and we apply numbing cream before treatment. Most clients find the procedure very manageable, describing only a slight pressure or pinching sensation. ### Body Fillers URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/body-filler **Tagline:** Sculpt and enhance your body contours Body filler is a non-surgical injectable treatment designed to restore volume, enhance contours, and improve proportions in various areas of the body. It provides an effective alternative to surgical procedures with minimal downtime and immediate results. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults seeking non-surgical body contouring, buttock enhancement, hip-dip correction, calf or thigh shaping, or décolleté rejuvenation, who are at or near a stable weight and want subtle, reversible results without surgery. **Indications:** - Buttock enhancement (non-surgical augmentation) - Hip dips correction - Thigh contouring - Calf augmentation - Décolleté rejuvenation - Body asymmetry correction **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) to minimise bruising - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Plan for a quiet 3-5 days, no gym, no long flights, no deep-tissue massage - For buttock or thigh work, plan how you will sit and sleep for the first 48 hours (avoid prolonged pressure on the area) - Tell your doctor about any blood-thinning medications or previous filler/surgery in the area **Aftercare:** - Avoid pressure on the treated area for 48-72 hours, no sitting for long periods if buttocks were treated, no sleeping on the area - Drink 2 litres of water daily for the first week to support filler integration - Avoid intense exercise, saunas, hot tubs, and hot yoga for 72 hours - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours - Mild swelling, tenderness, and bruising are normal for 3-7 days, arnica helps - Wear loose, breathable clothing, no tight compression garments on the treated area unless specifically instructed - Review at 2 weeks, your doctor can top up if additional volume is needed **FAQs:** - **What is body filler made of?** We use high-density hyaluronic acid (HA) body fillers (e.g. HyaCorp or similar) or calcium hydroxylapatite (Radiesse) depending on the area and goal. Both are safe, biodegradable, and have been used globally for years. HA can be reversed with hyaluronidase if needed. - **Is this a Brazilian Butt Lift alternative?** It is a non-surgical alternative for subtle volume and shaping of the buttocks or hip dips, not a full BBL replacement. Large-volume surgical fat transfer achieves more dramatic results but carries higher risks. Body filler is a safer, reversible, lower-downtime option for moderate enhancement. - **How much filler is needed?** Varies by area and goal. Hip dips might need 20-40ml per side. Buttock contouring can require 100-200ml or more. Your doctor will assess and recommend a conservative starting volume, you can always add more over multiple sessions. - **How long do body filler results last?** HA body fillers typically last 12-18 months. Radiesse lasts 12-18 months with some biostimulatory effect beyond that. Maintenance top-ups are typical. - **Is there downtime?** Expect mild swelling, bruising, and tenderness at injection sites for 3-7 days. Avoid intense exercise, sitting directly on treated buttocks, and pressure on the area for 48-72 hours. Most clients resume desk work the next day. - **Is it safe?** In experienced hands using established products, yes. Main risks are bruising, swelling, asymmetry, and rarely, vascular issues. We use cannula technique for large-volume work and carry hyaluronidase on-site for emergencies. ### Botox Treatments URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/botox **Tagline:** Smooth away expression lines effortlessly Our doctors use precise micro-doses of wrinkle-relaxing injections to soften expression lines while maintaining your natural facial movement. The result is a refreshed, rested appearance that still looks like you. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny pinprick sensation - Downtime: None - Sessions: Single session - Duration: 15-20 minutes - Results: Visible in 3-7 days - Frequency: Every 3-4 months **Benefits:** - Smooths forehead lines, frown lines, and crow's feet - Quick treatment with no downtime - Natural-looking movement preserved - Preventative when started early - Can also treat excessive sweating **How it works:** A very fine needle delivers tiny amounts of purified protein into specific facial muscles. This gently relaxes overactive muscles that cause expression lines, allowing the skin above to smooth out. Results develop over 3 to 7 days and look completely natural. **Ideal for:** Anyone wanting to soften expression lines while keeping natural facial movement and expression **Indications:** - Forehead lines - Frown lines (glabellar area between the brows) - Crow's feet around the eyes - Bunny lines on the nose - Chin dimpling and pebbling - Preventative treatment for early dynamic lines **Not suitable for:** - Pregnancy and breastfeeding - Known allergy to botulinum toxin - Active infection at the injection site - Certain neuromuscular disorders - Clients currently on specific muscle-affecting medications (please disclose all medications) **Pre-treatment care:** - Stay upright for at least 4 hours after treatment - Avoid touching, rubbing, or massaging the treated area for 24 hours - Skip strenuous exercise and saunas for 24 hours - Avoid alcohol for the rest of the day to reduce bruising - Full results develop over 7-14 days, be patient with the final outcome **Aftercare:** - Avoid touching, rubbing, or massaging the treated area for 24 hours - Skip strenuous exercise and saunas for 24 hours - Avoid alcohol for the rest of the day to reduce bruising - Results will be noticeable within a week time **FAQs:** - **Will I still be able to show expressions?** Absolutely. Our doctors are experts at preserving natural movement. We use careful dosing and precise placement to soften lines while keeping your face expressive and natural-looking. The frozen look only happens when too much product is used, something our conservative approach avoids. - **At what age should I start?** There is no set age. Some clients start in their late twenties as a preventative measure, while others begin when they notice lines becoming permanent. Your doctor will advise whether the treatment is right for you during your consultation. ### Hyperhidrosis Treatment (Anti-Sweat) URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/hyperhidrosis-treatment **Tagline:** Botulinum toxin for excessive underarm, palm, and sole sweating Hyperhidrosis treatment uses small intradermal injections of botulinum toxin to switch off the overactive sweat glands in localised areas, most commonly the underarms, palms, and soles. By temporarily blocking the nerve signal that triggers the sweat glands, the treatment dramatically reduces excessive sweating without affecting body temperature regulation overall. It is one of the most reliable, evidence-based options for primary focal hyperhidrosis, with effects lasting several months per session. The procedure itself is quick, well tolerated, and allows an immediate return to normal activity. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild, brief stings - Downtime: None - Sessions: Single session, repeat as effect wears off - Duration: 20-30 minutes - Results: Noticeable within 4-7 days - Frequency: Every 4-9 months as needed **Benefits:** - Significant reduction in localised sweating - Targeted, non-surgical solution for hyperhidrosis - Quick procedure with no downtime - Improves comfort, confidence, and clothing choices - Well-established safety profile **How it works:** Botulinum toxin is injected in a precise grid pattern across the affected area. The toxin blocks the release of acetylcholine at the nerve endings that supply the eccrine sweat glands, so the gland no longer receives the signal to produce sweat. The grid spacing is calibrated to cover the full sweating area, and the dose is adjusted to the location (underarms typically take a higher dose than palms or soles). Effects begin around day 4-7 and stabilise by 2 weeks. **Ideal for:** Adults with primary focal hyperhidrosis affecting the underarms, palms, soles, or scalp, who have not responded adequately to clinical-strength antiperspirants and want a non-surgical, predictable solution. **FAQs:** - **How long does the effect last?** Most clients enjoy a significant reduction in sweating for 4 to 9 months. Underarm treatment tends to last longer than palms or soles. Once the effect wears off, the treatment can be repeated. - **Is the treatment painful?** Sensation varies by area. Underarm injections are generally well tolerated. Palms and soles are more sensitive, so a topical anaesthetic, ice, or vibration is used to make the treatment comfortable. - **Will I sweat from other parts of my body instead?** Compensatory sweating from a different area is uncommon with localised botulinum toxin treatment, unlike with surgical sympathectomy. The body's overall thermoregulation is unaffected. ### Aptos Threads Lift URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/aptos-thread-lift **Tagline:** Non-surgical lift with dissolvable threads APTOS Thread Lifting is a minimally invasive, non-surgical lifting procedure designed to reposition sagging tissues and improve skin quality using specially designed threads inserted under the skin. It provides both immediate lifting and long-term rejuvenation, making it an effective alternative to surgical facelift procedures. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 1-3 sessions depending on goals - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults in their late 30s to early 60s with mild-to-moderate facial laxity, softening jawline, descending cheeks, or early jowling, who want visible lifting without surgery and are happy with results that last 12-18 months. **Indications:** - Mild to moderate skin laxity - Jawline and jowl sagging - Midface descent (cheeks) - Brow lifting - Neck laxity - Nasolabial folds and marionette lines - Facial asymmetry **Pre-treatment care:** - Avoid alcohol, aspirin, and blood-thinning medications for at least 3-5 days before treatment - Avoid dental procedures for 1 week prior to treatment - Do not schedule treatment if there is any active skin infection or inflammation - Inform your Doctor of any medications or medical conditions **Aftercare:** - Mild swelling, bruising, tightness, or tenderness may occur - Avoid excessive facial movements, chewing, or pressure on the face for 5-7 days - Sleep on your back with head elevated for at least 3-5 nights - Avoid heat exposure, sauna, steam, and exercise for 7-10 days - Do not massage or manipulate the treated area for at least 2-3 weeks - Avoid dental work and facial treatments for 2-3 weeks - Maintain good hydration and follow all practitioner instructions for optimal results **FAQs:** - **What are APTOS threads made of and are they safe?** APTOS threads are made from polylactic acid (PLA) or caprolactone, the same biodegradable materials used in surgical sutures for decades. They fully dissolve in 6-12 months while stimulating long-term collagen production. They are CE-marked and used by doctors globally. - **Is this a replacement for a facelift?** No, honesty matters here. Thread lifts are best for mild-to-moderate laxity. If you have significant skin excess or deep jowling, a surgical facelift delivers more dramatic and longer-lasting results. Your doctor will give you an honest assessment at consultation. - **Is it painful, and is there downtime?** Local anaesthetic is used, so the procedure itself is comfortable. Expect mild swelling, bruising, and a pulling or tight sensation for 5-10 days. Most clients return to work within 2-3 days. - **How long do the results last?** You will see an immediate lift. The threads dissolve over 6-12 months, but the collagen they stimulate continues to support the lift for 12-18 months. A top-up session can extend results. - **Can I combine thread lifts with other treatments?** Yes, often beautifully. Threads are commonly paired with RF tightening, skin boosters, or filler for volume. We space each by 2-4 weeks and sequence them for best results. - **What should I avoid after the procedure?** Avoid facial massage, dental work, sleeping on your side, strenuous exercise, and exaggerated facial expressions for 2-3 weeks to let the threads settle and anchor properly. ### Sculptra URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/sculptra **Tagline:** Gradual, natural-looking volume restoration Sculptra is an FDA-approved injectable collagen stimulator used to restore facial volume and improve skin texture and structure gradually over time. Unlike traditional dermal fillers, it works by stimulating the body’s own collagen production, leading to subtle, progressive, and long-lasting rejuvenation. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults in their 40s and beyond experiencing global facial volume loss, temple hollowing, cheek flattening, or 'deflated' skin, who want gradual, natural-looking rejuvenation and are comfortable with results building over 3-6 months. **Indications:** - Facial volume loss - Sagging skin - Deep facial wrinkles - Cheek volume restoration - Temple hollowing - Jawline support - Nasolabial folds - Marionette lines - Chin wrinkles. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Plan for the 5-5-5 massage protocol, block 25 minutes in your day for 5 days after each session - Plan a quiet 3-5 days as mild swelling and bruising are common - Tell your doctor about any autoimmune conditions, keloid history, or prior filler in the area **Aftercare:** - Follow the 5-5-5 rule: firmly massage the treated area for 5 minutes, 5 times a day, for 5 days, this is essential to prevent nodules - Apply cold compresses for the first 24 hours to reduce swelling and bruising (not during massage periods) - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 7 days - Avoid strenuous exercise, saunas, hot yoga, and hot tubs for 48 hours - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours - Apply SPF 50+ daily - Mild swelling (the initial fluid effect), tenderness, and bruising for 3-7 days are normal - Be patient, the real effect builds over 6-12 weeks as collagen develops - Book your next session in the course at 4-6 weeks as planned **FAQs:** - **What is Sculptra made of?** Sculptra is poly-L-lactic acid (PLLA), a biodegradable synthetic polymer used in dissolvable surgical sutures for decades. Unlike HA filler, it doesn't add direct volume, it triggers a gradual collagen response that your body uses to rebuild its own structural support. - **How is this different from hyaluronic acid filler?** HA fillers give immediate, localised volume that can be reversed. Sculptra gives gradual, global, structural restoration that lasts longer but is not reversible. Sculptra is the better choice for diffuse volume loss across the face; HA is the better choice for specific lines or features. - **How long do results last?** Up to 2 years, longer than most fillers. A typical course is 2-3 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart, with results lasting 18-24 months before touch-ups. - **Why the 5-5-5 massage rule?** After injection, Sculptra must be evenly distributed in the tissue to prevent nodule formation. You massage the treatment area firmly for 5 minutes, 5 times a day, for 5 days after each session. This is mandatory, skipping it increases the risk of visible lumps. - **When will I see results?** Immediate mild swelling may create a temporary 'filled' look that disappears within days. The real result, collagen-driven volume, builds over 6-12 weeks per session. By the end of your 2-3 session course, the difference is cumulative and natural-looking. - **Is Sculptra safe? What about nodules?** When properly reconstituted, injected by a trained doctor, and massaged per protocol, the risk of nodules is low. Correct dilution (typically 8-10ml of sterile water + lidocaine) and following the 5-5-5 rule are critical. Your doctor will explain the full risk profile honestly. ### Radiesse URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/radiesse **Tagline:** Long-lasting volume and collagen stimulation Radiesse is a biostimulatory dermal filler composed of calcium hydroxylapatite (CaHA) microspheres suspended in a gel carrier, designed to provide immediate volume and long-term collagen stimulation. It is used for facial contouring, skin quality improvement, and regenerative aesthetic treatments. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with moderate volume loss, weakened jawline or chin definition, or skin laxity on the neck, décolleté, or hands who want a dual-action product delivering both immediate volume and long-term collagen stimulation. **Indications:** - Jawline contouring - Chin projection - Cheek structural support - Nasolabial folds - Skin laxity and firmness improvement - Hand rejuvenation - Neck and décolleté (diluted protocol) **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Plan for a quiet 3-5 days, bruising is possible, especially on the lower face - If you have dental work planned, schedule it at least 2 weeks away from your Radiesse® session - Tell your doctor about all previous fillers in the area **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 7 days - Apply cold compresses for the first 24 hours to reduce swelling and bruising - Avoid touching, massaging, or manipulating the treated area for 24-48 hours (unless specifically instructed) - Sleep with your head slightly elevated for 2-3 nights - Avoid strenuous exercise, saunas, hot yoga, and hot tubs for 48 hours - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours - Mild swelling, tenderness, and bruising for 3-7 days are normal, arnica helps - Apply SPF 50+ daily - Review at 2 weeks, your doctor can top up or, for hyperdiluted skin quality work, book your next session in 4-6 weeks **FAQs:** - **What is Radiesse made of?** Radiesse is calcium hydroxylapatite (CaHA) microspheres suspended in a gel carrier. CaHA is a biocompatible mineral found naturally in bone. Injected into the skin, it provides immediate volume while the microspheres stimulate your own collagen production over time. - **How is it different from hyaluronic acid filler?** HA fillers add pure volume and can be reversed with hyaluronidase. Radiesse adds volume AND biostimulates collagen, making it longer-lasting but not directly reversible. It's often the better choice for structural support (jawline, chin), while HA is preferred for areas needing reversibility (lips, under-eye). - **How long does Radiesse last?** Typically 12-18 months. The immediate volumetric effect lasts around 12 months; the biostimulatory collagen benefit continues for several months beyond that. - **Can Radiesse be used for skin quality (hyperdiluted)?** Yes, a hyperdiluted protocol (mixed with saline and lidocaine) is used on the neck, décolleté, hands, and sometimes face to improve skin quality, thickness, and elasticity without adding structural volume. This is a popular 'collagen stimulation' application. - **Is it reversible?** No, unlike hyaluronic acid, there is no dissolving enzyme for Radiesse. This is why we always start conservatively and use careful, anatomy-led placement. - **Where should Radiesse NOT be used?** Lips (not approved for lip augmentation due to risk of nodules), tear trough (causes puffiness), and very superficially (can cause visible bumps). Your doctor will advise honestly. ### MCT Exosome Therapy URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/mct-exosome-therapy **Tagline:** Multi-component exosome therapy for face and body skin renewal MCT Exosome Therapy uses purified, multi-component exosomes, nanoscale messenger vesicles derived from cultured stem cells, to deliver a concentrated package of growth factors, peptides, and signalling molecules into the skin. Exosomes communicate directly with skin cells, prompting them to repair, regenerate, and produce more collagen and elastin. The therapy is suited to face and body skin renewal: improving tone, firmness, hydration, and the appearance of inflammation, scarring, and post-procedural healing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable, mild stinging at injection points - Downtime: Minimal, brief redness or small bumps - Sessions: Course of sessions recommended - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Progressive over 4-12 weeks - Frequency: Every 4 weeks **Benefits:** - Improves skin firmness, tone, and quality - Supports natural collagen and elastin production - Calms inflammation and supports healing - Refines the appearance of scarring and post-acne marks - Pairs well with microneedling, RF, and laser protocols **How it works:** Exosomes are tiny lipid vesicles (around 30-150 nanometres) released by cells to carry biological signals to other cells. The MCT preparation contains a multi-component blend of exosomes rich in growth factors, micro-RNAs, and peptides. Delivered via micro-injection or directly after a fractional or microneedling session, the exosomes are absorbed into the dermis where they bind to skin cells and modulate the regeneration cascade, prompting fibroblasts and keratinocytes to repair and rebuild. **Ideal for:** Adults seeking advanced skin regeneration, combined collagen support and inflammation control, or accelerated recovery alongside microneedling, RF microneedling, or fractional laser treatments. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, well-hydrated blood gives a better **FAQs:** - **Are exosomes the same as PRP?** No. PRP uses growth factors derived from your own blood. Exosomes are a more concentrated, standardised messenger preparation derived from cultured stem cells. Both can stimulate regeneration; exosomes carry a richer, more diverse signalling payload but require lab-cultured sourcing. - **How are the exosomes delivered?** Most commonly through micro-injection across the treatment area, or topically immediately after a microneedling, RF microneedling, or fractional laser session that has created controlled micro-channels for absorption. - **Is the treatment safe?** When sourced from a reputable, regulated supplier and delivered by a qualified practitioner, exosome therapy has a favourable safety profile. Your suitability will be confirmed at consultation. ### Salmon DNA (PDRN) URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/salmon-dna **Tagline:** Regenerative treatment for glowing, restored skin Salmon DNA treatment, also known as polynucleotide or PDRN therapy, is an advanced regenerative skin treatment derived from purified salmon DNA fragments. It is designed to repair, regenerate, and restore skin quality at a cellular level, making it a key treatment in regenerative aesthetics. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults seeking a regenerative treatment to rebuild skin quality, elasticity, and thickness, particularly those with ageing, sun-damaged, or post-inflammatory skin damage who want cellular-level repair rather than added volume. **Indications:** - Skin aging and loss of elasticity - Fine lines and wrinkles - Acne scars and skin damage - Under-eye dark circles and thinning skin - Dehydrated and dull skin - Post-inflammatory skin damage **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Tell us about severe fish or shellfish allergies and any autoimmune conditions - Plan a quiet 1-2 days, mild swelling and small bumps are common **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 7 days to support tissue repair - Apply cold compresses for the first 6 hours if swelling is noticeable - Do not touch or massage the treated area for 24 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Pause retinoids and acids for 3 days - Mild redness, small raised bumps, or bruising for 24-72 hours are normal - Book your next session at the recommended 2-3 week interval - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, well-hydrated blood gives a better PRF yield - Eat a full meal 1-2 hours before your session (blood draw on an empty stomach can cause lightheadedness) - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) to reduce bruising - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin (or a cleaned scalp for hair treatment) - Wear loose, comfortable clothing with easy arm access for the blood draw - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Tell us about any anticoagulant medications, anaemia, or low platelet counts - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support healing - Avoid touching, rubbing, or massaging the treated area for 24 hours - Avoid makeup for 12-24 hours on the face - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Mild redness, swelling, small raised bumps, or bruising for 24-72 hours are normal - For scalp treatment, do not wash the scalp for 24 hours - Pause retinoids and actives for 3 days - Book your next session at the recommended 4-6 week interval **FAQs:** - **What are polynucleotides and how do they work?** Polynucleotides (PDRN/PN) are ultra-purified DNA fragments derived from salmon, structurally compatible with human DNA. When injected, they bind to adenosine receptors on your skin cells, stimulating fibroblast activity, collagen production, tissue regeneration, and anti-inflammatory responses. - **Is this the same as the Salmon DNA Eyes treatment?** Same product family, different protocol. Salmon DNA Eyes focuses on the delicate under-eye area with a dedicated micro-dose technique. General Salmon DNA treatment can cover the full face, neck, décolleté, or acne-scarred areas for broader regeneration. - **Is it safe if I'm allergic to fish?** The polynucleotides are ultra-purified, proteins that cause fish allergy are removed during manufacturing. However, if you have severe anaphylactic fish allergy, we recommend discussing with your doctor. Mild fish sensitivity is generally not a contraindication. - **How many sessions will I need?** A starter course of 3-4 sessions spaced 2-3 weeks apart. Results build progressively, thicker, more elastic skin, reduced inflammation, and improved texture build over the course. Maintenance every 4-6 months preserves the effect. - **When will I see results?** Subtle hydration and brightening within 1 week. Meaningful skin quality improvement, elasticity, and glow builds over 4-8 weeks and peaks 2-3 months after completing the course. - **How does this compare to PRP, PRF, or exosomes?** Different regenerative options with different mechanisms. PRP/PRF uses your own blood. Exosomes deliver signalling vesicles. Polynucleotides deliver direct DNA fragments that drive tissue repair. Your doctor will recommend based on your goals, skin type, and whether you prefer autologous or biologic products. ### PRF URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/prf-treatment **Tagline:** Next-generation platelet-rich fibrin therapy PRF (Platelet-Rich Fibrin) is a second-generation autologous regenerative treatment derived from the patient’s own blood, designed to improve skin quality, healing, and tissue regeneration. Unlike PRP, PRF forms a fibrin matrix that releases growth factors gradually, providing longer-lasting regenerative effects. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults seeking a 100% natural, biologic treatment for skin rejuvenation, under-eye revitalisation, or hair restoration, particularly those who prefer autologous (their-own-blood) therapy over synthetic products or foreign-origin biologics. **Indications:** - Fine lines and wrinkles - Under-eye dark circles and hollowness - Skin laxity and thinning skin - Acne scars and textural irregularities - Dull and dehydrated skin - Hair loss and scalp regeneration **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support healing - Avoid touching, rubbing, or massaging the treated area for 24 hours - Avoid makeup for 12-24 hours on the face - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Mild redness, swelling, small raised bumps, or bruising for 24-72 hours are normal - For scalp treatment, do not wash the scalp for 24 hours - Pause retinoids and actives for 3 days - Book your next session at the recommended 4-6 week interval **FAQs:** - **What is the difference between PRP and PRF?** PRP (Platelet-Rich Plasma) uses anticoagulants, spins at high speed, and produces a liquid plasma. PRF (Platelet-Rich Fibrin) is a second-generation protocol, spun at lower speed, with no anticoagulants, producing a fibrin matrix that releases growth factors gradually over 7-10 days. PRF also contains more white blood cells and stem cells. - **What can PRF be used for?** Skin rejuvenation (face, neck, décolleté), under-eye revitalisation (brightening, skin thickening), acne scar improvement, hair loss treatment (injected into scalp), and as an adjunct to microneedling. Versatile and broadly regenerative. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 3 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart is standard for skin. Hair loss typically requires 4-6 monthly sessions. Maintenance every 6-12 months preserves results. - **When will I see results?** Subtle brightening and hydration within 1-2 weeks. Meaningful improvement in skin quality, texture, and density builds over 6-12 weeks as new collagen forms. Hair regrowth results emerge at 3-6 months. - **Is the blood draw uncomfortable?** It's a standard venous blood draw, 10-30ml (one or two vials). Mild pinch at needle insertion, no ongoing discomfort. The spin takes 8-12 minutes while we apply numbing cream to the treatment area. - **Is there a risk of allergic reaction?** Virtually zero. Because PRF is made from your own blood without additives, there is no risk of allergy or rejection. The process is sterile from start to finish. ### PRP URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/prp-treatment **Tagline:** Harness your body's own healing power Platelet-Rich Plasma therapy uses your own blood's growth factors to rejuvenate your skin naturally. After drawing a small sample, we concentrate the healing platelets and re-inject them to stimulate collagen production and cellular renewal. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild discomfort - Downtime: Redness for 24-48 hours - Sessions: 3 sessions recommended - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Gradual over 4-6 weeks - Frequency: Monthly for 3 months, then annually **Benefits:** - 100% natural - uses your own blood - Stimulates natural collagen production - Improves skin texture and tone - Effective for face and hair restoration - No risk of allergic reaction **How it works:** A small amount of blood is drawn and spun in a centrifuge to separate the platelet-rich plasma. This concentrated golden liquid, packed with growth factors, is then injected into the treatment area or applied after microneedling to supercharge skin renewal. **Ideal for:** Those who prefer natural treatments using their body's own regenerative capabilities **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, well-hydrated blood gives a better PRF yield - Eat a full meal 1-2 hours before your session (blood draw on an empty stomach can cause lightheadedness) - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) to reduce bruising - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin (or a cleaned scalp for hair treatment) - Wear loose, comfortable clothing with easy arm access for the blood draw - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Tell us about any anticoagulant medications, anaemia, or low platelet counts **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support healing - Avoid touching, rubbing, or massaging the treated area for 24 hours - Avoid makeup for 12-24 hours on the face - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Mild redness, swelling, small raised bumps, or bruising for 24-72 hours are normal - For scalp treatment, do not wash the scalp for 24 hours - Pause retinoids and actives for 3 days - Book your next session at the recommended 4-6 week interval **FAQs:** - **Is PRP safe?** Extremely safe. Since we use your own blood, there is virtually zero risk of allergic reaction or rejection. The process is sterile and carried out by our medical team. ### Profhilo URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/profhilo **Tagline:** The injectable moisturiser for glowing skin Profhilo is an innovative bio-remodelling treatment that floods the skin with the highest concentration of hyaluronic acid available. Rather than adding volume, it remodels and hydrates the skin from within, restoring elasticity and creating a natural, healthy glow. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal - quick injections - Downtime: Small bumps fade within hours - Sessions: 2 sessions, 4 weeks apart - Duration: 15-20 minutes - Results: Visible after second session - Frequency: Every 6 months **Benefits:** - Intense hydration from within - Improves skin elasticity and firmness - Creates a natural, healthy glow - Stimulates collagen and elastin - Only 2 sessions needed **How it works:** Five injection points on each side of the face deliver a highly concentrated hyaluronic acid solution that spreads evenly beneath the skin. Unlike traditional fillers, Profhilo does not add volume but rather bio-remodels the tissue, stimulating collagen and elastin production. **Ideal for:** Those wanting overall skin quality improvement rather than volume or wrinkle reduction **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 7 days - Do not touch or massage the treated area for 24-48 hours - Apply cold compresses for the first 6 hours if swelling is noticeable - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Pause retinoids and acids for 3 days - Mild swelling, tenderness, or small bumps at injection sites for 24-48 hours are normal - Book your second session at 4 weeks to complete the 3-session course **FAQs:** - **How is Profhilo different from fillers?** Fillers add volume to specific areas, while Profhilo improves overall skin quality. It works like a deep moisturiser from the inside, boosting hydration, elasticity, and firmness across the entire treated area rather than targeting individual lines or features. ### Profhilo Structura URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/profhilo-structura **Tagline:** Targeted structural support for loose skin Profhilo Structura is an advanced injectable treatment within the Profhilo range, designed to provide both skin quality improvement and structural support. Unlike traditional Profhilo, which focuses on hydration, Structura targets deeper layers of the face, helping restore facial support and subtle contour without creating artificial volume. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults in their late 30s to 50s with mild-to-moderate skin laxity and early loss of facial support, softening jawline, flattening cheeks, or general 'droopiness', who want subtle structural improvement without the volumetric look of filler. **Indications:** - Mild to moderate skin laxity - Loss of facial structure - Early volume loss - Sagging in lower face - Jawline definition loss - Cheek flattening **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Pause retinoids and strong actives for 48 hours - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Space Botox, HA filler, or threads by at least 2 weeks from your Structura® session **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 7 days - Do not touch or massage the treated area for 24-48 hours - Apply cold compresses for the first 6 hours if swelling is noticeable - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Pause retinoids and acids for 3 days - Mild swelling, tenderness, or small bumps at injection sites for 24-48 hours are normal - Book your second session at 4 weeks to complete the 3-session course **FAQs:** - **How is Profhilo Structura different from standard Profhilo?** Standard Profhilo is a hydrating bio-remodeller placed in the superficial dermis across 5 injection points per side. Structura uses a different cross-linking technology, it is placed deeper in the skin (subdermal plane) to provide gentle structural support in addition to bio-remodelling. Think Profhilo with a light lifting effect. - **Is this a filler?** Not in the traditional sense. It doesn't add visible volume like HA filler. It provides subtle structural reinforcement while stimulating collagen. If you want noticeable cheek projection or jawline definition, traditional filler or Radiesse is more appropriate. - **How many sessions will I need?** Typically 2 sessions spaced 4 weeks apart, with results lasting 9-12 months. Maintenance every 6-9 months preserves the effect. - **When will I see results?** Subtle improvement within 2 weeks. Full structural improvement and collagen response build over 6-8 weeks and peak at 3 months. - **Can this replace a thread lift or Thermage?** For mild laxity, yes, it can offer subtle lifting and quality improvement without the downtime of threads or the heat of Thermage. For moderate-to-severe laxity, threads or energy-based tightening deliver more visible structural change. Your doctor will give an honest recommendation. - **Can I combine it with other treatments?** Yes, Structura pairs well with RF tightening, Botox, and filler. We space each by 2-4 weeks and sequence them thoughtfully. ### Profhilo Body URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/profhilo-body **Tagline:** Transform skin quality on the body Profhilo Body is an advanced injectable bioremodelling treatment specifically designed for larger body areas, targeting skin laxity, dehydration, and crepey texture. It works similarly to facial Profhilo but is adapted for body rejuvenation, particularly in areas prone to thinning and sagging skin. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with crepey, thin, or lax skin on the arms, knees, abdomen, décolleté, or inner thighs, particularly after weight loss, ageing, or pregnancy, who want to improve skin quality and firmness without surgery. **Indications:** - Skin laxity of the body - Crepey or thin skin - Dehydrated or dull skin - Loss of firmness and elasticity - Early body aging **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Plan a quiet 1-2 days, mild swelling - Wear loose, breathable clothing, no tight compression garments on the treated area unless specifically instructed **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support booster uptake - Do not massage, press, or rub the treated area for 24-48 hours, let the micro-bumps disperse naturally - Avoid tight clothing or compression garments on the area for 24 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot tubs, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Mild swelling or injection-site bumps for 24 hours are normal and resolve quickly - Apply SPF 50+ on sun-exposed treated areas - Book your second session at 4 weeks to complete the course **FAQs:** - **How is Profhilo Body different from facial Profhilo?** Same hybrid hyaluronic acid technology, larger syringe volume, and a different injection grid designed for the larger surface area of body regions (arms, thighs, knees, abdomen). The protocol also uses a different number of injection points per area. - **Where is it most effective?** Inner arms (bat-wings), knees, décolleté, and inner thighs, areas where skin typically thins and becomes crepey. It is less effective for post-pregnancy stretch marks or heavy abdominal laxity, where surgical or RF tightening may be needed. - **How many sessions will I need?** A 2-session course spaced 4 weeks apart is standard for each area. Results last 6-9 months; most clients book a single maintenance session every 6 months. - **When will I see results?** Subtle hydration within days. Meaningful firmness and smoothness improvement builds over 4-8 weeks and peaks at 2 months. - **Can it tighten severely sagging skin?** Honest answer, no. Profhilo Body improves skin quality, hydration, and mild-to-moderate laxity. For severe sagging (e.g. significant post-weight-loss crepe), surgical options or combined protocols with RF tightening (Prime-X Body, EXION Body) are more effective. - **Is there downtime?** Minimal. 5 injection points per area produce small bumps that settle within 24 hours. Mild tenderness and occasional bruising for 1-3 days. You can return to normal activity immediately. ### Karisma RH Collagen URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/karisma-collagen **Tagline:** Biostimulate your skin's own collagen Karisma RH Collagen is composed of recombinant human type I collagen (99.9% identical to natural human collagen), high molecular weight hyaluronic acid, and CMC for improved tissue integration and hydration. It is considered a next-generation collagen treatment, positioned between skin boosters and fillers. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with thinning, ageing skin, loss of firmness, or mild textural concerns who want a regenerative treatment that directly supplies collagen rather than stimulating it, particularly those looking for improvement sitting between skin boosters and structural filler. **Indications:** - Fine lines and wrinkles - Skin laxity and thinning skin - Dull or dehydrated skin - Acne scars and mild textural irregularities - Early signs of aging - Skin quality deterioration **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Plan a quiet 1-2 days as mild swelling is common initially **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 7 days to support collagen integration - Apply cold compresses for the first 6 hours if swelling is noticeable - Do not touch or massage the treated area for 24 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Pause retinoids and acids for 3 days - Book the next session in the course at the recommended 3-4 week interval **FAQs:** - **What is recombinant human collagen and is it safe?** Recombinant human type I collagen is produced by biotechnology to be 99.9% identical to the collagen naturally found in human skin, without using animal or human tissue. Karisma RH combines this collagen with high-molecular-weight hyaluronic acid for integration and hydration. It is biocompatible, sterile, and considered very safe. - **How is this different from a skin booster?** Skin boosters deliver hyaluronic acid to hydrate and indirectly stimulate collagen. Karisma RH delivers biocompatible collagen directly while also hydrating, addressing both the effect (hydration) and the cause (collagen loss) of skin ageing. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 2-3 sessions spaced 3-4 weeks apart typically delivers the best outcome. Maintenance every 6 months preserves the result. - **When will I see results?** Immediate hydration is visible within days. Progressive improvement in firmness, texture, and skin quality builds over 4-8 weeks and continues for up to 3 months after your course. - **Where can it be used?** Face, neck, décolleté, and hands, particularly effective on thin, crepey skin where the collagen support is noticeably lacking. - **Will there be downtime?** Mild swelling, small injection-site bumps, or bruising are possible for 24-48 hours. Most clients return to normal activity immediately with makeup applied the next day. ### PB Serum URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/pb-serum **Tagline:** Enzyme-based fat reduction and skin smoothing PB Serum is a range of FDA-approved injectable enzyme therapies designed to treat localized fat, cellulite, fibrosis, adhesions, and scarring using a targeted combination of recombinant enzymes. Ivory Aesthetics offers two tailored formulations: Medium PB Serum and High PB Serum. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with small pockets of stubborn localised fat (double chin, flanks, arms), mild cellulite, or established scars (acne, post-surgical, fibrotic nodules) who want a non-surgical enzyme-based alternative to liposuction or scar revision. **Indications:** - Medium PB Serum - Small, stubborn localized fat pockets - Double chin - Abdomen, flanks, arms, thighs, buttocks - Grade I - II cellulite - Body contouring in non-obese patients. - High PB Serum - Hypertrophic or atrophic scars - Post-acne scars - Post-operative or post-traumatic scars - Fibrotic nodules after liposuction or surgery - Post-surgical adhesions affecting mobility or aesthetics. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, hydration supports lymphatic clearance of broken-down tissue - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) to minimise bruising - Arrive with clean, bare skin on the treatment area - Plan for a quiet 3-7 days, swelling and bruising are common - Wear loose clothing on the day, avoid tight waistbands or compression on the treated area - Tell your doctor about any enzyme allergies or blood-thinning medications **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for 7-10 days to support lymphatic clearance - Apply cold compresses for the first 24 hours to reduce swelling - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot tubs) and alcohol for 48 hours - Avoid strenuous exercise for 48 hours - Avoid aggressive massage of the area unless specifically instructed - Gentle manual lymphatic drainage from day 3 can enhance results - Expect swelling, firmness, and tenderness for 5-10 days, this is part of the mechanism - Mild bruising is common and resolves within 2 weeks; arnica helps - Apply SPF 50+ if the area is sun-exposed - Book your next session at the recommended 2-4 week interval **FAQs:** - **What is PB Serum and how does it work?** PB Serum is a range of injectable recombinant enzymes, including lipase (which breaks down fat), collagenase (which breaks down fibrotic tissue and scars), and hyaluronidase. Different formulations (Medium, High) target different indications, localised fat and cellulite versus scars and adhesions. - **Is this the same as fat-dissolving injections like Kybella or Aqualyx?** Similar goal, different mechanism. Kybella (deoxycholic acid) and Aqualyx destroy fat cell membranes. PB Serum Medium uses lipase enzyme to digest fat. PB Serum generally causes less swelling and bruising than detergent-based fat dissolvers. Your doctor will recommend the right option for your anatomy. - **How many sessions will I need?** Typically 3-6 sessions spaced 2-4 weeks apart for fat and cellulite. Scar treatment often needs 4-8 sessions. Results are progressive; you'll see visible change after 2-3 sessions. - **How effective is it for a double chin?** Very effective for mild-to-moderate submental fat in non-obese clients. Typically 2-4 sessions of PB Serum Medium reduces the double chin noticeably. For larger volumes, other options (cryolipolysis, surgical liposuction) may be more appropriate. - **What should I expect after a session?** Swelling, tenderness, warmth, and sometimes bruising at injection sites for 3-7 days. The swelling is part of the mechanism, your body is breaking down the tissue. Expect the area to look worse before it looks better. - **Is it effective for old acne scars?** PB Serum High contains collagenase, which softens dense scar tissue. For deep atrophic acne scars it often works best combined with microneedling, TCA cross, or fractional laser, your practitioner will plan a layered approach. ### Classic Skin Boosters URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/classic-skin-booster **Tagline:** Deep hydration and rejuvenation from within The Classic Skin Booster is a multi-component injectable treatment designed to deliver deep hydration and skin rejuvenation through micro-injections into the dermis. It combines hyaluronic acid with nourishing bioactive ingredients to improve skin quality, texture, and radiance. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults in their late 20s and beyond with dehydrated, dull, or lacklustre skin, early fine lines, and loss of glow, particularly those who want skin quality improvement without adding volume and want a gentle introduction to injectables. **Indications:** - Dehydrated skin - Fine lines and early wrinkles - Uneven skin texture - Dull or tired complexion - Loss of elasticity and firmness - Skin damage from environmental stress **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, hydrated tissue integrates the booster more evenly - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, (unless medically required) to minimise bruising - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Pause retinoids and strong actives for 48 hours prior - If you have a cold sore history in the treatment area, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Plan a quiet 1-2 days, small bumps are common immediately after **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support booster uptake - Apply cold compresses for the first 6 hours if swelling is noticeable - Do not touch or massage the treated area for 24 hours, let the micro-bumps settle - Avoid makeup for 12-24 hours to protect the injection sites - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Pause retinoids and acids for 3 days - Book your next session at the recommended 3-4 week interval for cumulative results **FAQs:** - **What is a skin booster and how does it differ from filler?** A skin booster is a micro-injection of cross-linked hyaluronic acid (often combined with peptides, amino acids, or vitamins) delivered into the dermis to deeply hydrate and improve skin quality. Unlike filler, it doesn't add volume, it rebuilds moisture, smoothness, and elasticity from within. - **Where can I have it treated?** Most commonly the face, neck, and décolleté. It is also effective on the back of the hands. We avoid injecting too close to the lips or eyes where specialist products (Restylane Eyelight, lip filler) are more appropriate. - **What does the treatment feel like?** Numbing cream is applied for 20-30 minutes beforehand. You'll feel tiny pricks during the grid of micro-injections across the treatment area. Expect small raised bumps for 6-24 hours as the hyaluronic acid settles. - **How many sessions will I need?** A starter course of 2-3 sessions spaced 3-4 weeks apart. Results then last 4-6 months, after which a single maintenance session every 4-6 months keeps the glow. - **When will I see results?** Subtle hydration and glow within 1-2 weeks. Full improvement, smoother texture, plumper skin, more radiance, peaks at 4-6 weeks as the hyaluronic acid stimulates new collagen. - **Will I bruise?** Bruising at injection points is possible but usually minimal. Avoiding blood-thinning supplements for 5-7 days before, and alcohol for 48 hours before, significantly reduces bruising risk. ### Innea Skin Booster URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/innea-skin-booster **Tagline:** Advanced hyaluronic acid bio-regeneration INNEA Skin Booster is a Swiss-developed hyaluronic acid-based injectable treatment designed to improve skin quality, hydration, and elasticity without adding volume. It focuses on natural skin rejuvenation, making it ideal for patients seeking a refreshed and healthy appearance rather than contouring. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults seeking a premium Swiss-formulated skin booster focused on bio-regeneration, particularly those who want improved skin quality, elasticity, and long-lasting hydration across the face, neck, or décolleté without volumetric change. **Indications:** - Dehydrated or dull skin - Fine lines due to dehydration - Uneven skin texture and tone - Loss of elasticity - Early signs of aging - Maintenance and prevention of aging **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Pause retinoids and strong actives for 48 hours prior - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Plan a quiet 1-2 days, mild injection-point marks may be visible **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support tissue uptake - Apply cold compresses for the first 6 hours if swelling is noticeable - Do not touch or massage the treated area for 24 hours - Avoid makeup for 12-24 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Pause retinoids and acids for 3 days - Book your second session in the 2-session course at the recommended 4-week interval **FAQs:** - **How is INNEA different from other skin boosters?** INNEA is a Swiss-developed hyaluronic acid booster using a proprietary SMART cross-linking technology that releases hyaluronic acid progressively over time. It is designed to integrate smoothly into the tissue, avoid post-injection bumps, and deliver long-lasting bio-regeneration, not just short-term hydration. - **Will I see a difference after one session?** You'll notice a subtle glow and improved smoothness within 1-2 weeks. Meaningful improvement in skin quality, elasticity, and radiance builds across a course of 2 sessions spaced 4 weeks apart, peaking at 6-8 weeks. - **How long do results last?** Results from a 2-session course last 6-9 months. A single maintenance session every 6 months preserves the effect. - **Where can it be used?** Face, neck, décolleté, and hands. INNEA has a formulation range that can be tailored to different areas and skin goals. - **Is it safe for sensitive skin?** Yes. INNEA is purified, biocompatible, and formulated to minimise inflammatory response. It is suitable for sensitive and reactive skin, though individual allergies are always possible, your doctor will screen at consultation. - **How does this compare to Profhilo?** Profhilo uses hybrid cooperative hyaluronic acid with 5 injection points per side. INNEA uses SMART cross-linked HA delivered in a micro-injection grid. Both are excellent bio-remodellers, your doctor will recommend based on your skin, goals, and budget. ## Laser Hair Removal > Smooth, hair-free skin that lasts Our advanced laser hair removal treatments deliver long-lasting smooth skin using the latest technology, precisely calibrated for every skin type and tone. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/laser-hair-removal ### Soprano Titanium URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/laser-hair-removal/soprano-titanium **Tagline:** Virtually painless laser hair removal for all skin types Soprano Titanium Laser Hair Removal is a cutting-edge, FDA-approved technology designed to deliver virtually painless hair removal for all skin types, including tanned skin. Utilizing the only Trio Simultaneous Laser Technology, which combines Alexandrite, Diode, and Nd:YAG wavelengths, Soprano Titanium ensures safe and effective results by targeting hair follicles at multiple depths. This revolutionary system not only removes unwanted hair but also rejuvenates the skin, offering a dual benefit in a single treatment. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild warmth and tingling - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive with each session - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - FDA-Approved for All Skin Types: Safe for light, dark, and tanned skin. - Virtually Pain-Free: Continuous cooling ensures a comfortable treatment experience. - Effective and Versatile: Treats all hair types and skin tones with multi-wavelength technology. - Skin Rejuvenation: Enhances skin texture while removing unwanted hair. - Quick and Efficient: Large applicator head allows faster treatments, even for larger areas. - No Downtime: Return to normal activities immediately after your session. **Ideal for:** Clients with any skin tone, from very fair to deeply pigmented, including tanned skin, who want fast, comfortable laser hair removal across face and body **Pre-treatment care:** - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for at least 3-5 days before your session - Shave the treatment area cleanly 12-24 hours before (do not wax, pluck, thread, or epilate for 4-6 weeks before, laser needs the hair root intact) - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily in the days before to keep the skin well-hydrated - Arrive with clean skin, no makeup, deodorant, perfume, or body lotion on the treatment area - Avoid chemical peels, retinoids, and AHAs/BHAs on the area for 5-7 days before - Tell us about any photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, St John's wort) or recent skincare changes **Aftercare:** - Keep hydrated, drink 2 litres of water daily to support skin recovery - Avoid direct sun exposure and always apply SPF 50+ on treated areas for at least 3-5 days weeks - No saunas, steam rooms, hot showers, hot tubs, or intense workouts for 24-48 hours - No swimming pools (chlorine) for 48 hours - Avoid scented products, deodorants (if underarm treated), perfumes, or exfoliants on the area for 24-48 hours - Do not pluck, wax, thread, or epilate between sessions, shaving only - Exfoliate gently from day 5-7 to help shed dead hairs and prevent ingrowns **FAQs:** - **What is Trio Simultaneous Laser Technology?** Soprano Titanium is the only system that fires three wavelengths, Alexandrite (755nm), Diode (810nm), and Nd:YAG (1064nm), at the same time. Each wavelength targets the follicle at a different depth, so coarse, fine, deep, and superficial hairs are all treated in one pass. - **Is it really safe on tanned and darker skin?** Yes. The Nd:YAG wavelength in particular bypasses surface melanin, making Soprano Titanium one of the few FDA-approved options that is genuinely safe across Fitzpatrick I - VI, including tanned skin, unlike many older lasers that require you to lose your tan first. - **Why does it feel like a warm massage?** Soprano Titanium uses SHR (Super Hair Removal) with IN-Motion delivery. Instead of single high-energy pulses, it gradually heats the follicle through continuous gliding passes with ICE cooling. Most clients describe it as relaxing, no rubber-band snap. - **How many sessions will I need?** A starter course of 4-6 sessions spaced 3-4 weeks apart on the face and 4-6 weeks on the body is typical. Results are progressive, with visible thinning after 2-3 sessions. Annual or bi-annual maintenance sessions keep hair suppressed long-term. - **Can I treat hormonal facial hair?** Yes. Soprano Titanium is frequently used for upper lip, chin, and jawline hair driven by PCOS or hormonal shifts. For best long-term control we may recommend closer session spacing (every 3 weeks) and ongoing maintenance. - **Can I have laser hair removal while pregnant?** We don't perform laser hair removal during pregnancy. There is no evidence of harm, but the evidence base is limited and hormonal shifts can cause unpredictable hair growth. We'll welcome you back after delivery. ### Candela GentleMax Pro URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/laser-hair-removal/candela-gentlemax-pro **Tagline:** Premium laser hair removal technology Candela GentleMax Pro is an advanced laser hair removal system that uses dual-wavelength technology (Alexandrite 755nm and Nd:YAG 1064nm) to target and destroy hair follicles without harming surrounding skin. Its Dynamic Cooling Device (DCD) ensures a comfortable experience by cooling the skin during each laser pulse, reducing discomfort and enhancing safety. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild warmth and tingling - Downtime: Slight redness for a few hours - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive with each session - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Most Trusted Globally: The world’s most widely used laser for hair removal. - Dual Wavelengths: Combines Alexandrite and Nd:YAG lasers for all skin tones. - Safe and Effective: Delivers long-lasting results with minimal discomfort. - Fast Treatments: Treats large and small areas quickly. - Comfortable Experience: Features cooling technology for minimal irritation. - Fewer Sessions Needed: Provides significant hair reduction in fewer treatments. - Precision Targeting: Targets hair follicles without damaging surrounding skin. **Ideal for:** Clients who want the gold-standard, globally trusted laser hair removal system, with precision targeting, cooling comfort, and fewer sessions than traditional lasers **Pre-treatment care:** - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for at least 2 weeks before treatment - Shave the treatment area 12-24 hours before your appointment (no waxing, plucking, threading, or epilating for 4-6 weeks before) - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily before the session to support skin recovery - Arrive with clean skin, no makeup, deodorant, perfume, or body lotion on the treatment area - Discontinue retinoids, glycolic/salicylic acids, and exfoliants 5-7 days before - Tell us about any photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, St John's wort) or history of cold sores if treating upper lip **Aftercare:** - Mild redness resolves within a few hours - Drink plenty of water (at least 2 litres) for the next 48 hours - Apply SPF 50+ on treated areas and avoid direct sun exposure for 2 weeks - No saunas, steam rooms, hot showers, hot tubs, or intense cardio for 24-48 hours - No swimming pools or the ocean for 48 hours - Avoid fragranced products, deodorants (for underarm treatments), perfumes, or exfoliants for 24-48 hours - Between sessions, only shave, do not wax, thread, or pluck (the laser needs the follicle intact) - From day 5-7, you'll notice hairs shedding naturally. Gentle exfoliation helps and reduces the risk of ingrowns **FAQs:** - **Why is Candela GentleMax Pro considered the gold standard?** GentleMax Pro is the most widely used laser hair removal device in the world, used by dermatologists and aesthetic clinics across 90+ countries. Its combination of high-energy Alexandrite (755nm) and Nd:YAG (1064nm) wavelengths with Dynamic Cooling Device (DCD) delivers proven, repeatable results with minimal discomfort. - **How does the Dynamic Cooling Device (DCD) work?** DCD sprays a precisely-timed burst of cryogen onto the skin milliseconds before each laser pulse. This protects the skin surface, minimises discomfort, and allows us to safely use higher energy for stronger results, fewer sessions, better outcomes. - **How is this different from Soprano Titanium?** Both are FDA-approved and excellent. GentleMax Pro uses higher-energy single pulses with DCD cooling, often slightly fewer sessions needed for suitable skin types. Soprano Titanium uses gradual gliding heat with continuous cooling, often more comfortable on sensitive or darker skin. Your specialist will recommend the better fit for your skin and hair type. - **How many sessions will I need?** Typically 6-8 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart, depending on the treatment area and hair growth cycle. Most clients see meaningful hair reduction after the first 2-3 sessions. Occasional maintenance sessions may be needed long-term. - **Which areas can be treated?** Face (upper lip, chin, cheeks, sideburns), underarms, bikini line, Brazilian, legs, arms, back, chest, and abdomen. Different areas follow different growth cycles, so spacing varies per area. - **Is it safe on my skin tone?** Yes. The dual-wavelength system lets us use Alexandrite 755nm for lighter skin tones (Fitzpatrick I - III) where it's faster and more effective, and Nd:YAG 1064nm for darker skin tones (IV - VI). Your specialist chooses the wavelength based on your skin and test patch. ## Advanced Laser Rejuvenation > Precision laser treatments for lasting results Our advanced laser technologies target everything from unwanted hair to pigmentation, acne scars, and signs of ageing. Each treatment is precisely calibrated to your skin type and concern, delivering maximum results with minimal discomfort. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation ### Clear & Brilliant URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/clear-brilliant **Tagline:** Award-winning fractional laser for a luminous complexion Clear + Brilliant is a gentle fractional laser resurfacing treatment designed to refresh and revitalize the skin with minimal disruption to daily life. Unlike more intensive resurfacing procedures, it is specifically engineered for comfort and convenience. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild discomfort, minimised with numbing cream - Downtime: 2-3 days - Sessions: 3-6 sessions - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 1-3 months **Benefits:** - Non-ablative fractional laser technology - Short 2-3 day recovery window - Suitable for all skin tones - Clinically proven for early anti-aging benefits - Minimal discomfort during and after treatment **Ideal for:** Adults in their late 20s to 40s who want early, preventative anti-ageing with minimal disruption to daily life, ideal for clients easing into fractional laser treatments before committing to more intensive resurfacing. **Indications:** - Clear + Brilliant is recommended for both men and women who wish to: - Prevent early signs of aging before they become established - Address early-stage fine lines, uneven skin texture, or mild pigmentation - Maintain a youthful, healthy complexion - Complement an ongoing skincare or aesthetic maintenance routine **Not suitable for:** - Treatment should NOT be performed on patients who present with any of the following: - Active skin infections, cold sores, or open wounds in the treatment area - Known photosensitivity or use of photosensitizing medications - Isotretinoin use within the past 6 months - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - History of keloid scarring - Unrealistic expectations regarding outcomes **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to support skin recovery - Stop retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, benzoyl peroxide, and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 1 week before - If you have a history of cold sores, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before (we can advise) - Arrive with a clean, bare face, no makeup, sunscreen, or skincare on the treatment area - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, St John's wort) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for at least 7 days to support healing - Use only a gentle cleanser and bland hyaluronic acid or ceramide moisturiser for the first 5 days - Apply SPF 50+ daily without exception, and avoid direct sun exposure for 2 weeks - Do not pick or scrub the bronzed micro-dots, they slough naturally around day 4-5 - No heavy exercise, saunas, steam rooms, or hot tubs for 48 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 5-7 days; restart gradually once fully healed - Mineral makeup can be applied from day 2 if the skin is intact - Book your next session at the recommended 3-4 weeks interval for cumulative brightening **FAQs:** - **What does 'non-ablative fractional laser' mean?** Unlike ablative lasers that remove the top layer of skin, Clear + Brilliant's 1440nm non-ablative wavelength creates microscopic zones of treated tissue beneath the surface while leaving the epidermis intact. The body then repairs these zones, producing fresh collagen and shedding damaged cells, with dramatically less downtime than ablative laser. - **How is it different from Fraxel or CO2 laser?** Clear + Brilliant is made by the same company as Fraxel but is gentler, designed as a 'gateway' fractional laser. Fraxel treats more advanced damage with more downtime; CO2 is ablative and most aggressive. Clear + Brilliant is the ideal maintenance and prevention option. - **Does it hurt?** Numbing cream is applied for 30-45 minutes beforehand. With numbing, most clients feel a warm prickling, manageable and brief. After treatment your skin feels like a mild sunburn for a few hours. - **What will I look like afterwards? Can I go back to work?** Expect pink, warm skin on day 1 (similar to windburn), fine bronzed pinpoints on days 2-3, then natural sloughing revealing brighter skin by day 4-5. Most clients return to work the next day with mineral makeup. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 4-6 sessions spaced 2-4 weeks apart delivers the best outcome. Maintenance every 2-3 months keeps results looking fresh. Results compound over time, the more sessions, the greater the improvement. - **Is it safe for darker skin tones?** Clear + Brilliant is considered safe on Fitzpatrick I - IV. For Fitzpatrick V - VI, a test patch is recommended and your practitioner may suggest an alternative non-ablative option like RF resurfacing to minimise any risk of post-inflammatory pigmentation. ### AFT Photo Rejuvenation URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/aft-laser-pigmentation **Tagline:** Erase sun damage and dark spots Advanced Fluorescence Technology precisely targets pigmented areas, breaking down excess melanin deposits while leaving surrounding skin unharmed. This gentle yet effective treatment is suitable for all skin types and delivers visible results. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 3-6 sessions recommended - Duration: 30-60 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Effectively targets dark spots and sun damage - Safe for all skin types - Minimal discomfort during treatment - Even skin tone and improved clarity - Stimulates overall skin rejuvenation **How it works:** The AFT laser emits precisely filtered light that is absorbed by melanin in the skin. This breaks down pigment clusters, which are then naturally cleared by your body's immune system. The surrounding skin is protected by the laser's unique filtering technology. **Ideal for:** Those with sun damage, age spots, freckles, or uneven skin tone **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours to maintain hydration - Stop retinoids, Active ingredients and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 1 week before - Arrive with a clean, bare face, no makeup, or skincare on the treatment area - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, St John's wort) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for at least 7 days to support hydration - Use only a gentle cleanser and bland hyaluronic acid or ceramide moisturiser for the first 5 days - Apply SPF 50+ daily without exception, and avoid direct sun exposure for 1 week - No heavy exercise, saunas, steam rooms, or hot tubs for 48 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 3-5 days; restart gradually once fully healed - Mineral makeup can be applied from day 2 - Book your next session at the recommended 3-4 weeks interval for cumulative brightening **FAQs:** - **Will the dark spots come back?** Treated pigmentation is permanently destroyed. However, new spots can form from continued sun exposure, which is why we emphasise sun protection as part of your treatment plan. ### ClearLift Rejuvenation URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/clearlift-rejuvenation **Tagline:** Non-ablative laser facial rejuvenation with no downtime ClearLift is a non-ablative laser rejuvenation treatment that delivers Q-switched 1064nm energy beneath the skin's surface to stimulate collagen and elastin production while leaving the outer layer untouched. It is often called a "lunchtime laser" because there is essentially no downtime, no peeling, and no visible recovery. Over a course of sessions, the skin becomes firmer, smoother, and more even-toned, with softened fine lines and a refreshed overall quality. ClearLift is suitable for all skin types, including darker phototypes that often cannot tolerate more aggressive resurfacing lasers. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable, mild warmth - Downtime: None - Sessions: Course of sessions recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive over 4-12 weeks - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Stimulates collagen and elastin production - Softens fine lines and improves skin texture - Brightens dull, tired skin - Safe for all skin types and tones - No peeling, no downtime, no visible recovery **How it works:** The ClearLift handpiece delivers ultra-short Q-switched laser pulses that pass through the epidermis without ablating it. The energy is absorbed in the dermis, creating a controlled photoacoustic effect that triggers a wound-healing response. Fibroblasts respond by producing new collagen and elastin over the following weeks, gradually firming and refining the skin from within. **Ideal for:** Adults of any skin type who want a gentle, no-downtime rejuvenation, soft skin texture, brighter tone, and early collagen support without peeling, redness, or social downtime. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours to maintain hydration - Stop retinoids, Active ingredients and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 1 week before - Arrive with a clean, bare face, no makeup, or skincare on the treatment area - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, St John's wort) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for at least 7 days to support hydration - Use only a gentle cleanser and bland hyaluronic acid or ceramide moisturiser for the first 5 days - Apply SPF 50+ daily without exception, and avoid direct sun exposure for 1 week - No heavy exercise, saunas, steam rooms, or hot tubs for 48 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 3-5 days; restart gradually once fully healed - Mineral makeup can be applied from day 2 - Book your next session at the recommended 3-4 weeks interval for cumulative brightening **FAQs:** - **How is ClearLift different from ablative resurfacing lasers?** Ablative lasers like CO2 or Erbium remove the top layer of skin and require days of recovery. ClearLift works beneath the surface non-ablatively, so the outer skin stays intact. The trade-off is that progress is gradual and a course of sessions is needed for visible change. - **Is ClearLift safe for darker skin tones?** Yes. The 1064nm wavelength is one of the safest laser wavelengths for skin of colour because it bypasses melanin in the epidermis, reducing the risk of post-inflammatory pigmentation. - **Can I wear makeup afterwards?** Yes. There is typically only mild flushing for an hour or two, and makeup can be applied immediately if needed. ### ClearLift Lips Rejuvenation URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/clearlift-lips **Tagline:** Plump and smooth lips without filler ClearLift Lips Rejuvenation is a non-invasive laser treatment designed to enhance lip quality, texture, and volume through collagen stimulation without the use of injectables. It provides a natural alternative to fillers by improving lip definition, hydration, and overall appearance with no downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild warmth and tingling - Downtime: Slight redness for a few hours - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive with each session - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults who want fuller, smoother, more defined lips and reduced perioral 'smoker's lines' without injectable filler, a natural collagen-led option for those easing into lip treatments or wanting to improve lip skin quality alongside existing filler. **Indications:** - · Thin or aging lips· Loss of lip definition· Fine lines around the mouth (perioral lines)· Dry, dull, or dehydrated lips· Uneven lip tone or pigmentation· Patients seeking natural lip enhancement without fillers **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, hydrated lips respond better to laser - Arrive with clean, bare lips, no lipstick, gloss, or balm on the treatment area - Avoid exfoliating scrubs on or around the lips for 3 days before - Avoid sun exposure and tanning for 1 week before - If you have a history of cold sores, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before (essential, laser can trigger a flare) - Space lip filler by at least 2 weeks before your session. However Lips boosters or Fillers after the session will enhance results - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin) **Aftercare:** - Keep well-hydrated, 2 litres of water daily for the week ahead - Apply a gentle, fragrance-free lip balm with SPF throughout the day, reapplying every 1-2 hours - Avoid very hot or spicy foods, hot drinks, and alcohol for the rest of the day - No aggressive lip scrubs or exfoliants for 5 days - Apply SPF 30+ lip balm whenever outdoors - Mild warmth or subtle pinkness may last a few hours, makeup can be applied immediately - Return for your next session at 2-4 weeks for the cumulative collagen response **FAQs:** - **How does ClearLift work on the lips?** ClearLift uses a non-ablative fractional Q-switched Nd:YAG laser that creates tiny columns of thermal energy beneath the lip surface while leaving the outer layer intact. This triggers collagen and elastin remodelling in the lip vermilion and perioral skin, progressively plumping, smoothing, and restoring definition. - **Is this a replacement for lip filler?** Complementary, not a replacement. Filler adds immediate volume by placing hyaluronic acid into the lip. ClearLift stimulates your own collagen for gradual enhancement in lip texture, border definition, and perioral lines. Many clients use both: filler for shape, ClearLift for quality. - **How much fuller will my lips get?** Subtle. Think softer vermilion border, smoother texture, and a gentle increase in fullness, not dramatic volume change. If you want a distinctly plumper look, filler is more appropriate. - **Does it hurt?** Minimal. ClearLift is virtually painless, you'll feel warmth and a light tapping sensation. No numbing is needed. There is no redness or downtime. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 4-6 sessions spaced 2-4 weeks apart. Results build cumulatively; annual or bi-annual maintenance preserves the effect. - **Can I have this if I have filler in my lips?** Yes, with spacing. We recommend waiting at least 2 weeks after filler placement. The laser does not dissolve hyaluronic acid filler. ### ClearSkin Acne URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/clearskin-laser-acne **Tagline:** Non-ablative laser that clears active breakouts ClearSkin is a non-ablative Er:Glass 1540nm laser treatment designed to treat active acne, reduce inflammation, and improve overall skin quality without damaging the skin surface. It is a non-invasive acne solution that targets the root causes of acne while maintaining minimal downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild warmth and tingling - Downtime: Slight redness for a few hours - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive with each session - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Teenagers and adults with active inflammatory acne, oily skin, enlarged pores, and early post-acne marks, particularly those who want a non-pharmacological alternative or adjunct to topicals, antibiotics, or isotretinoin. **Indications:** - · Active acne (papules, pustules, nodules)· Oily skin and excess sebum· Enlarged pores· Acne scars· Post-acne marks and redness· Uneven skin texture **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before, hydrated skin responds better to laser - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for at least 1 week before - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and benzoyl peroxide 3-5 days prior - Do not wax, thread, or epilate the treatment area for 1 week before - Arrive with clean, product-free skin, no makeup, SPF, or moisturiser - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, minocycline) - If you have recently completed isotretinoin, wait at least 6 months before laser **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 liters of water daily for 7 days to support skin recovery - Apply only a gentle, non-comedogenic moisturiser and SPF 50+ for the first 48 hours - Pause retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and benzoyl peroxide for 2-3 days - Avoid heat (saunas, steam rooms, hot yoga, intense exercise) for 24-48 hours - Do not pick or squeeze any breakouts, the laser has already addressed them at the source - Apply SPF 50+ daily without exception, oily and acne-prone skin needs oil-free mineral options - Mineral makeup can be applied the same evening - Book your next session in 3-4 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course is what clears the acne **FAQs:** - **How does a 1540nm Er:Glass laser treat acne?** ClearSkin's non-ablative Er:Glass 1540nm wavelength is absorbed by water deep in the dermis, heating the sebaceous glands to reduce oil production and inflammation. At the same time, integrated vacuum and contact cooling extract impurities and protect the skin surface. This targets acne at its root, oil overproduction and inflammation, without damaging the outer skin. - **Is it suitable for all skin tones?** Yes, one of ClearSkin's advantages. Because the 1540nm wavelength is absorbed by water rather than melanin, it is considered safe across Fitzpatrick I - VI, unlike some acne lasers that carry pigmentation risk on darker skin. - **How quickly will my acne clear?** Most clients notice reduced oiliness and calmer breakouts within 2-3 sessions. Full clearing of active inflammatory acne typically takes 4-6 sessions spaced 3-4 weeks apart. Post-acne marks continue to fade over 2-3 months. - **How does this compare to isotretinoin (Accutane)?** Isotretinoin is a highly effective systemic medication for severe cystic acne, but it has significant side effects and monitoring requirements. ClearSkin is a localised, side-effect-free alternative suitable for mild-to-moderate acne, or an adjunct to other therapies. Your practitioner can advise honestly whether laser is right for your acne severity. - **Does it hurt? What's the downtime?** You'll feel a warm prickling sensation during treatment. Mild pinkness and slight warmth settle within a few hours. You can apply makeup the same evening and return to normal activities immediately. - **Can I combine this with other acne treatments?** Yes, ClearSkin pairs well with LED (Blue + Red), gentle chemical peels (salicylic acid), and medical skincare. We do not recommend combining with active isotretinoin treatment, let us know if you are on or recently completed a course. ### ClearSkin Rejuvenation URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/clearskin-rejuvenation **Tagline:** Non-ablative Er:Glass laser for skin texture and rejuvenation ClearSkin Rejuvenation uses a 1540nm Er:Glass non-ablative laser combined with contact cooling and vacuum-assisted skin contact to stimulate collagen, refine pores, and improve overall skin quality. While the ClearSkin platform is best known for treating active acne, the same technology is highly effective for non-acne rejuvenation: smoothing texture, softening fine lines, and improving the appearance of post-inflammatory marks and shallow scars. It is comfortable, non-ablative, and suitable for a wide range of skin types. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable, mild warmth - Downtime: Minimal, mild redness for a few hours - Sessions: Course of sessions recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive over several weeks - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Refines skin texture and smooths fine lines - Softens shallow scarring and post-acne marks - Reduces pore appearance and oiliness - Stimulates collagen for firmer skin - Comfortable, with minimal recovery **How it works:** The Er:Glass laser delivers controlled heat to the dermis through the intact epidermis. Built-in contact cooling and vacuum suction protect the surface and improve the depth of treatment. The thermal effect injures dermal collagen in a controlled way, prompting the skin to remodel and lay down fresh collagen and elastin in the weeks that follow. **Ideal for:** Adults seeking a non-ablative refresh of skin texture, pore size, and tone, especially those with combination or oily skin, post-acne marks, or early signs of skin ageing who want results without significant downtime. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before, hydrated skin responds better to laser - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for at least 1 week before - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and benzoyl peroxide 3-5 days prior - Do not wax, thread, or epilate the treatment area for 1 week before - Arrive with clean, product-free skin, no makeup, SPF, or moisturiser - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, minocycline) - If you have recently completed isotretinoin, wait at least 6 months before laser **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 liters of water daily for 7 days to support skin recovery - Apply only a gentle, non-comedogenic moisturiser and SPF 50+ for the first 48 hours - Pause retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and benzoyl peroxide for 2-3 days - Avoid heat (saunas, steam rooms, hot yoga, intense exercise) for 24-48 hours - Do not pick or squeeze any breakouts, the laser has already addressed them at the source - Apply SPF 50+ daily without exception, oily and acne-prone skin needs oil-free mineral options - Mineral makeup can be applied the same evening - Book your next session in 3-4 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course is what clears the acne **FAQs:** - **How does ClearSkin Rejuvenation differ from ClearSkin Acne?** It is the same laser platform applied with different settings and protocols. The Acne treatment is targeted at active breakouts and inflamed lesions; the Rejuvenation treatment focuses on non-inflamed texture, pore size, and collagen quality. - **How many sessions will I need?** Most people see meaningful change after a course of sessions, with progressive improvement continuing for several weeks after the final session as collagen remodels. Your practitioner will tailor the plan at consultation. - **Is there any downtime?** Mild flushing or warmth for a few hours is typical. Most clients return to normal activity, including makeup, the same day. ### Q-Switch Tattoo Removal URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/laser-tattoo-removal **Tagline:** Fade unwanted tattoos safely and effectively Q-Switch laser tattoo removal is a non-invasive treatment designed to gradually fade or remove unwanted tattoos by targeting ink pigments within the skin. It is considered the gold standard technology for tattoo removal, offering effective results with minimal damage to surrounding tissue. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Expect discomfort - Downtime: Minimum 5 days - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive with each session - Frequency: Every 6-8 weeks **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with unwanted tattoos, professional, amateur, or cosmetic (eyebrows, lip liner), who are committed to a multi-session removal process over 12+ months and are prepared for some discomfort and short recovery after each session. **Indications:** - · Professional tattoos· Amateur tattoos· Cosmetic tattoos (eyebrows, lip liner)· Unwanted or faded tattoos· Tattoo modification or lightening for cover-up **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, hydration supports lymphatic clearance of ink fragments - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for at least 2 weeks before each session - Arrive with clean, bare skin on the tattoo, no makeup - Skip aspirin, ibuprofen, and high-dose fish oil/vitamin E for 48 hours to reduce bruising - Do not shave the area within 12 hours of your session - If the tattoo is on the face or lip, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before if you have cold sore history - Tell us about photosensitising medications or any recent skin infections **Aftercare:** - Keep the area clean and dry for the first 24 hours, avoid swimming or soaking - Apply the prescribed healing ointment 2-3 times daily until healed - Cover with a non-stick sterile dressing for the first 3 days if there is blistering or weeping - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for 2 weeks to support lymphatic clearance - Apply SPF 50+ once the area is fully healed, and avoid direct sun exposure to the treated area for 4 weeks - Do not pick, scratch, or rub any scabs or blisters, let them fall off naturally - Avoid saunas, steam rooms, swimming pools, and intense exercise for 48-72 hours - Expect some fading over 6-8 weeks between sessions, results are progressive - Book your next session at the recommended 6-8 week interval (shorter intervals can cause pigmentation changes) **FAQs:** - **How does Q-Switch laser remove tattoo ink?** Q-Switched lasers deliver extremely short, high-energy pulses (nanoseconds) that shatter tattoo ink particles into microscopic fragments without damaging surrounding skin. Your body's immune system then gradually clears the fragments via the lymphatic system. Different wavelengths target different ink colours. - **How many sessions will I need?** Most tattoos take 6-12 sessions, spaced 6-8 weeks apart. Amateur tattoos and black/dark blue ink clear fastest; professional tattoos with dense, layered ink take longer. Red, yellow, green, and light blue are the most resistant colours. - **Will the tattoo disappear completely?** Many tattoos clear fully, but some (especially those with green, yellow, or white ink, or cosmetic pigments containing iron oxide) may leave residual shadow. We'll give you an honest assessment at consultation and show you realistic before-and-afters. - **Does it hurt?** Yes, expect moderate discomfort, often described as hot elastic bands snapping. We use topical numbing cream for 30-45 minutes beforehand and cryo-cooling during the session. Most clients tolerate it well, but we can discuss local anaesthetic for larger pieces. - **What does recovery look like after each session?** Immediate frosting (white bubbling) for 10-20 minutes, then redness, mild swelling, and sometimes blistering or scabbing for 5-7 days. Keep the area clean, dry, and covered with healing ointment until scabs fall naturally. Full healing in 2 weeks. - **Can you remove a cosmetic tattoo (eyebrows, lip liner)?** Yes, but cosmetic tattoo pigments can sometimes paradoxically darken on first laser pulse (due to iron oxide oxidising). We always perform a test patch first. Cosmetic tattoos typically need 4-8 sessions. - **Is it safe on darker skin tones?** Q-Switched Nd:YAG (1064nm) is safe for Fitzpatrick IV - VI with careful settings. Test patches are essential and pigmentation risk must be weighed. Your specialist will personalise the plan. ### Q-Switch Pigmentation URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/qs-laser-pigmentation **Tagline:** Target deep pigmentation and dark spots Q-Switch laser is a non-invasive laser treatment designed to reduce pigmentation, uneven skin tone, and dark spots by targeting melanin within the skin. It is commonly used for laser toning, providing gradual brightening and skin clarity with minimal downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild warmth and tingling - Downtime: 2-3 days - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive with each session - Frequency: Every 6-8 weeks **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with sun-induced age spots, freckles, post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation, or melasma who want targeted, skin-tone-safe pigmentation treatment, particularly those with darker Fitzpatrick skin types where other lasers may not be safe. **Indications:** - · Melasma· Post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation (PIH)· Sunspots / age spots· Freckles· Uneven skin tone· Acne marks· Dull skin - Q-Switch is widely used for pigmentation concerns due to its precision and safety profile. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for at least 4 weeks before (critical for pigmentation treatments, tanned skin increases risk of rebound pigmentation) - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliants 3-5 days prior - For melasma, discontinue any prescribed topical lightening regime (hydroquinone, tranexamic acid, kojic acid) 3-5 days before the treatment - Arrive with clean, bare skin, no makeup, or skincare on the treatment area - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, St John's wort) or hormonal changes (pregnancy, new contraception) - Space by at least 2 weeks from Botox, filler, or peels **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for 7-10 days to support pigment clearance - Apply SPF 50+ every morning without exception, reapplied every 2 hours outdoors, for 6+ weeks. This is the single most important step for preventing rebound pigmentation - Use a gentle cleanser and bland ceramide moisturiser for the first 48 hours - Treated spots may darken, crust, and flake off naturally over 5-10 days, do not pick - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner strictly for 4 weeks - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 3-5 days; resume once skin is calm - Avoid saunas, steam rooms, hot yoga, and intense exercise for 24-48 hours - If you have melasma, continue your topical regime consistently, consistency is what keeps it suppressed - Book your next session at the recommended 4-6 week interval **FAQs:** - **How does Q-Switch laser treat pigmentation?** Q-Switched lasers deliver ultra-short nanosecond pulses that are selectively absorbed by melanin. The pigment shatters into tiny fragments, which either rise to the surface and flake off (for superficial spots) or are cleared by the immune system (for deeper pigment). Multiple wavelengths (532nm, 1064nm) target different pigment depths. - **Is this effective for melasma?** Q-Switch 'laser toning' (low-fluence 1064nm) is one of the safest and most studied treatments for melasma, particularly when paired with a strict topical regime (tyrosinase inhibitors, SPF, sometimes tranexamic acid). However, melasma is chronic and hormonally driven; laser manages it rather than cures it. Honest expectation-setting is essential. - **How is this different from IPL?** IPL (Intense Pulsed Light) is broad-spectrum light, fast and effective for sun damage on Fitzpatrick I - III but risky on darker skin. Q-Switch is a specific laser wavelength that selectively targets melanin without heating the surrounding skin, safer for Fitzpatrick IV - VI and melasma. - **How many sessions will I need?** Superficial age spots may clear in 1-3 sessions. Melasma and deeper pigmentation typically need 6-10 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart. Maintenance is usually needed, both to address new UV damage and to keep melasma suppressed. - **What does the skin look like afterwards?** Depending on settings, mild pinkness, darkening of the treated spots (which flake off over 5-10 days), or no visible change at all (for laser toning). Your practitioner will explain what to expect for your protocol. - **Is it safe on darker skin tones?** Yes, Q-switch Nd:YAG at 1064nm is considered the safest laser for Fitzpatrick IV - VI. However, skill and conservative settings matter: we always perform a test patch first and build energy gradually. ### Q-Switch Carbon Rejuvenation URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/carbon-laser-peel **Tagline:** The Hollywood glow treatment Also known as the Hollywood Peel, this treatment uses a fine layer of liquid carbon paired with Q-switch laser energy to deeply cleanse pores, reduce oiliness, and leave skin with a luminous, camera-ready glow. **At a glance:** - Pain level: No pain - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4-6 sessions recommended - Duration: 30 minutes - Results: Instant and progressive each session - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Deeply cleanses and minimises pores - Controls oil production - Instant brightness and glow - Stimulates collagen production - Quick lunchtime treatment **How it works:** A thin layer of medical-grade carbon is applied to the skin. The carbon particles penetrate deep into the pores. The Q-switch laser is then passed over the skin, causing the carbon to heat up and vaporise, taking dead skin cells, contaminants, and oil with it. **Ideal for:** Those wanting an instant glow-up, especially before events or photo shoots **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before, hydrated skin responds better to laser - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for at least 1 week before - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and benzoyl peroxide 3-5 days prior - Do not wax, thread, or epilate the treatment area for 1 week before - Arrive with clean, product-free skin, no makeup, SPF, or moisturiser - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, minocycline) - If you have recently completed isotretinoin, wait at least 6 months before laser **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 liters of water daily for 7 days to support skin recovery - Apply only a gentle, non-comedogenic moisturiser and SPF 50+ for the first 48 hours - Pause retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and benzoyl peroxide for 2-3 days - Avoid heat (saunas, steam rooms, hot yoga, intense exercise) for 24-48 hours - Do not pick or squeeze any breakouts, the laser has already addressed them at the source - Apply SPF 50+ daily without exception, oily and acne-prone skin needs oil-free mineral options - Mineral makeup can be applied the same evening - Book your next session in 3-4 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course is what clears the acne **FAQs:** - **Why is it called the Hollywood Peel?** The treatment became famous among Hollywood celebrities for its ability to deliver instant, red-carpet-ready skin in just 30 minutes with zero downtime. It is now one of the most popular pre-event treatments worldwide. ### Soft Light Laser Hair Bleaching URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/laser-hair-bleaching **Tagline:** Lighten fine facial hair painlessly Q-Switch Laser Hair Bleaching is a non-invasive treatment designed to lighten dark, fine, or unwanted hair by targeting its pigment, making it less visible and better blended with the surrounding skin. Unlike traditional laser hair removal, this treatment does not remove the hair, but instead reduces its visibility for a smoother aesthetic appearance. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild warmth and tingling - Downtime: Slight redness for a few hours - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Instant - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Clients with fine, dark vellus hair on the face, arms, or body, particularly those whose hair is too fine or hormonally unsuitable for traditional laser hair removal, or who prefer to soften visibility rather than remove. **Indications:** - · Fine facial hair (peach fuzz)· Hair unsuitable for laser hair removal· Dark, visible hair on light skin· Patients seeking non-removal hair management· Areas where hair removal is not ideal (face, brows, sideburns) **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 2 weeks before - Do not wax, thread, or bleach the area for 48 hours before the session - Arrive with clean, bare skin, no makeup on the treatment area - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliants 3-5 days prior - Tell us about any photosensitising medications or recent skin peels - If treating near the lip, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before if you have cold sore history **Aftercare:** - Apply a soothing serum or aloe gel immediately after, mild pinkness settles within a few hours - Drink 2 litres of water daily for a few days - Apply SPF 50+ on the treatment area every morning for 2 weeks, the skin is mildly photosensitive - Avoid waxing, threading, and chemical bleach for 5-7 days - Pause retinoids and strong actives on the area for 3-5 days - Avoid saunas, steam rooms, and very hot showers for 24 hours - Makeup can be applied the same evening if the skin is calm - Book your next session in 4-6 weeks for progressive lightening **FAQs:** - **How is this different from laser hair removal?** Laser hair removal destroys the hair follicle to stop growth. Laser hair bleaching uses Q-switched pulses to lighten the ink-like melanin within the hair shaft, making the hair visually less noticeable without damaging the follicle. The hair still grows, but becomes progressively paler. - **Why not use regular chemical bleach?** Chemical bleach works briefly and often irritates the skin, especially on sensitive facial areas. Laser bleaching is faster, gentler on the skin barrier, and delivers longer-lasting lightening. It is also more precise for small areas like brows and sideburns. - **How many sessions will I need?** Typically 4-6 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart. Results are progressive, hair becomes paler and less visible with each session. Annual or bi-annual maintenance keeps the lightening. - **Is it safe on darker skin tones?** Yes, careful settings with Q-switch Nd:YAG make this safe across Fitzpatrick I - VI. A test patch is performed first, as contrast between hair and skin affects how the laser responds. - **Will the hair grow back thicker?** No, this is a myth. Laser does not change hair texture or thickness, only colour. Hair regrows naturally and repeat sessions gradually lighten it further. - **Can I still wax or thread between sessions?** Yes. Unlike laser hair removal (which needs the follicle intact), bleaching only targets melanin in the shaft, waxing, threading, and plucking do not interfere. However, avoid these for 48 hours before a session. ### L.P. YAG Vascular Treatment URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/lp-yag-laser **Tagline:** Targeted laser for vascular concerns L.P:YAG is a long-pulsed Nd:YAG laser (1064 nm) used for the treatment of vascular lesions, deeper small veins, and vascular irregularities. It is part of the Alma Harmony XL PRO platform, one of the most versatile systems in aesthetic medicine. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild warmth and tingling - Downtime: Up to 3 weeks - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive with each session - Frequency: Every 6-8 weeks **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with thread veins (telangiectasia), facial redness, spider veins, rosacea's vascular component, or small leg veins who want targeted vascular clearance with a laser designed specifically for blood vessels rather than pigment. **Indications:** - Facial vascular lesions - Telangiectasia (thread veins) - Spider veins - Leg veins - Diffuse redness - Rosacea (vascular component) - Hemangiomas **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for at least 2 weeks before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 3-5 days before (unless medically required) to reduce bruising - Arrive with clean, bare skin on the treatment area, no makeup - Do not wax, thread, or shave the treatment area for 24 hours before - Tell us about any photosensitising medications, hormonal changes, or anticoagulants - For leg vein treatment, wearing compression stockings is recommended in some cases **Aftercare:** - Apply the prescribed soothing cream (often with arnica) 2-3 times daily for 48 hours - Drink 2 litres of water daily for the week ahead - Apply SPF 50+ every morning on the treated area for at least 4 weeks, sun exposure can cause pigmentation changes - Avoid heat (saunas, steam rooms, hot yoga, hot baths) for 48-72 hours - Avoid strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Mild darkening, redness, swelling, or bruising may last 5-14 days, arnica helps resolution - Do not pick at any scabs, let them heal naturally - Book your next session at the recommended 6-8 weeks interval **FAQs:** - **How does Long-Pulsed Nd:YAG treat vascular lesions?** The 1064nm wavelength is absorbed by oxyhaemoglobin in blood vessels. Long-pulse duration heats the vessel wall gradually, causing it to coagulate and seal shut. Your body then clears the treated vessel over 4-8 weeks. The 1064nm wavelength bypasses surface melanin, making it safe across all skin tones. - **What does the treatment feel like?** You'll feel brief hot stinging sensations as the vessel is targeted, similar to a strong elastic band snap. Topical numbing and contact cooling are used to keep it tolerable. Sessions are typically short. - **How many sessions will I need?** Facial thread veins often clear in 1-3 sessions. Diffuse rosacea redness typically needs 3-6. Leg veins are harder and may need 4-8 sessions spaced 6-8 weeks apart. Your practitioner will tailor to the vessel type, depth, and size. - **Will the veins come back?** Treated vessels are permanently destroyed. However, new vessels can form due to underlying venous insufficiency, hormonal changes, sun damage, or rosacea progression. Maintenance sessions every 12-24 months may be needed. - **Is it effective for rosacea?** Yes, it is one of the most effective treatments for the vascular component of rosacea. It does not cure the underlying inflammatory condition, so topical and lifestyle management (triggers, skincare, and sometimes medication) remain important. - **What should I expect after a session?** Immediate redness, mild swelling, and sometimes a fine bruise (purpura) along the treated vessel, this can last 1-3 weeks on legs. Facial vessels recover faster (2-7 days). Larger leg veins have up to 3 weeks of visible bruising before full resolution. - **Is it safe for darker skin tones?** Yes. The 1064nm Nd:YAG wavelength is the safest laser option for vascular work on Fitzpatrick IV - VI because it bypasses melanin. ### iPixel Fractional Resurfacing URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/ipixel-fractional-resurfacing **Tagline:** Advanced fractional laser for skin renewal IPIXEL is an advanced fractional skin resurfacing treatment powered by Fractional Er:YAG laser technology on the Harmony XL Pro platform by Alma Lasers. It is used to address fine lines, wrinkles, acne scars, uneven pigmentation, sun damage, and textural irregularities while promoting natural skin rejuvenation. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Expect slight discomfort - Downtime: 5-7 days - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 30-60 minutes - Results: Progressive with each session - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with moderate-to-deep acne scars, textural irregularities, deeper wrinkles, stretch marks, or surgical scars who want significant resurfacing and are prepared for 5-7 days of social downtime. **Indications:** - Fine lines and wrinkles - Acne scars - Uneven skin texture - Sun damage - Pigmentation and age spots - Loss of elasticity and firmness - Dark circles and under-eye textural concerns - Stretch marks - Surgical scars, traumatic scars, and body imperfections. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to support skin recovery - Stop retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, benzoyl peroxide, and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 2-3 weeks before - If you have a history of cold sores, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before (we can advise) - Arrive with a clean, bare face, no makeup, sunscreen, or skincare on the treatment area - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, St John's wort) - Tell us about history of Keloid or Scarring **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for at least 7 days to support healing - Use only a gentle cleanser, bland hyaluronic acid, ceramide moisturiser or repair creams for the first 5 days - Apply SPF 50+ daily without exception, and avoid direct sun exposure for 3-4 weeks - Do not pick or scrub the bronzed micro-dots, they slough naturally around day 4-5 - No heavy exercise, saunas, steam rooms, or hot tubs for 48 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 5-7 days; restart gradually once fully healed - Mineral makeup can be applied from day 3 if the skin is intact - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours to maintain hydration - Stop retinoids, Active ingredients and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 1 week before - Arrive with a clean, bare face, no makeup, or skincare on the treatment area - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, St John's wort) - Drink 2 litres of water daily for at least 7 days to support hydration - Use only a gentle cleanser and bland hyaluronic acid or ceramide moisturiser for the first 5 days - Apply SPF 50+ daily without exception, and avoid direct sun exposure for 1 week - No heavy exercise, saunas, steam rooms, or hot tubs for 48 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 3-5 days; restart gradually once fully healed - Mineral makeup can be applied from the first day - Book your next session at the recommended 3-4 weeks interval for cumulative brightening **FAQs:** - **What is Er:YAG fractional laser and how is it different from CO2?** Er:YAG (2940nm) is an ablative fractional laser. Its precise absorption by water in the skin means it vaporises tissue cleanly with minimal thermal spread, making it effective for resurfacing with less downtime and lower pigmentation risk than CO2. For deeper scars and wrinkles, it strikes an excellent balance between outcome and recovery. - **What concerns does iPixel work best for?** It excels at atrophic acne scars, deeper wrinkles, actinic damage, traumatic scars, and stretch marks. It is also used on the body (thighs, abdomen, upper arms), not just the face. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 3-6 sessions spaced 4-8 weeks apart delivers the best outcome. Deeper scarring often benefits from 4-6 sessions. Your practitioner will tailor the plan based on concern depth and Fitzpatrick type. - **What does recovery look like day by day?** Day 1: warm, pink, mildly swollen skin, like sunburn. Day 2-3: fine bronzed crusting, do not pick. Day 4-5: natural sloughing reveals smoother skin. Day 6-7: residual pinkness, well camouflaged with mineral makeup. Full fading over 2 weeks. - **Is it safe for darker skin tones?** Er:YAG is safer than CO2 on Fitzpatrick IV, but pigmentation risk still exists on V - VI. A test patch and careful settings are essential. Your specialist may suggest non-ablative RF resurfacing as a safer option for deeper skin tones. - **Can it treat acne scars from old breakouts?** Yes, this is one of iPixel's strongest indications. Rolling and boxcar scars respond particularly well. Ice pick scars (deep, narrow) may need adjunctive TCA cross. Your practitioner will assess scar morphology and recommend the right mix. ### Titanium Lift URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/titanium-lift **Tagline:** Signature non-surgical lifting protocol Titanium Lift is a signature non-surgical lifting protocol that combines complementary technologies to firm and lift the face and neck. The treatment is built around stimulating the deeper layers of the skin and underlying connective tissue to remodel collagen and elastin, producing a gradual, natural-looking firming effect across the lower face, jawline, and neck. As a non-invasive lift, Titanium Lift is designed for clients who want visible firming without surgery, threads, or downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable, mild warmth - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Course of sessions recommended - Duration: 60-90 minutes - Results: Gradual over 8-12 weeks - Frequency: After consultation, with periodic maintenance **Benefits:** - Lifts and firms the face, jawline, and neck - Stimulates collagen and elastin remodelling - Non-surgical, no incisions or threads - No significant downtime - Tailored to your skin and goals at consultation **How it works:** The protocol layers complementary tightening modalities so that energy reaches multiple skin layers in a single session, the superficial dermis, the deep dermis, and the supporting fibrous connective tissue. This drives a remodelling response, with new collagen and elastin maturing over the weeks that follow and gradually firming the treated area. Your practitioner adjusts intensity, depth, and pattern to your skin type and goals. **Ideal for:** Adults with mild-to-moderate skin laxity, softened jawline, or early neck looseness who want a comfortable, non-surgical lift and prefer a layered protocol over a single device. **FAQs:** - **How is this different from a thread lift?** Thread lifts mechanically reposition tissue and stimulate collagen along the thread path. Titanium Lift uses energy-based modalities to drive a broader, deeper collagen response across the whole treated area without inserting threads. Both have a place; your practitioner will recommend which suits you at consultation. - **When will I see results?** Some immediate firming is often visible after the first session, but the main lifting effect develops over 8-12 weeks as collagen remodels. Photographs at intervals are the best way to track progress. - **Is there any downtime?** Most clients return to normal activity the same day. Mild flushing or warmth typically settles within hours; any sensitivity passes within 24-48 hours. ### Ultimate Rejuvenation URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/ultimate-rejuvenation **Tagline:** Signature combination protocol for comprehensive skin renewal Ultimate Rejuvenation is a layered laser and skin protocol designed to address multiple concerns in a single visit: pigmentation, texture, fine lines, dullness, and early laxity. By combining complementary modalities in one session, the treatment delivers a more complete result than any single laser alone, while still being calibrated to your skin type and tolerance. It is intended as a flagship rejuvenation experience for clients who want visible, all-round skin improvement with controlled downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable, mild warmth - Downtime: Minimal, brief redness - Sessions: Tailored at consultation - Duration: 60-90 minutes - Results: Visible from the first session, progressive over weeks - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - Addresses multiple concerns in one visit - Brightens tone and evens pigmentation - Smooths texture and softens fine lines - Stimulates collagen for firmer skin - Tailored to your skin type at consultation **How it works:** The protocol layers different laser wavelengths and skin treatments in a defined sequence so each modality targets a different aspect of skin biology, pigment, vasculature, dermal collagen, and surface texture, without overloading the skin. Your practitioner selects and orders the components based on your skin type, sensitivity, and goals at consultation. **Ideal for:** Adults who want a comprehensive, multi-concern rejuvenation in one visit and who prefer a tailored, in-clinic protocol over single-modality lasers. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours to maintain hydration - Stop retinoids, Active ingredients and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 1 week before - Arrive with a clean, bare face, no makeup, or skincare on the treatment area - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, St John's wort) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for at least 7 days to support hydration - Use only a gentle cleanser and bland hyaluronic acid or ceramide moisturiser for the first 5 days - Apply SPF 50+ daily without exception, and avoid direct sun exposure for 1 week - No heavy exercise, saunas, steam rooms, or hot tubs for 48 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 3-5 days; restart gradually once fully healed - Mineral makeup can be applied from the first day - Book your next session at the recommended 3-4 weeks interval for cumulative brightening **FAQs:** - **Who is this treatment best for?** Adults with several concerns at once, dullness, uneven tone, fine lines, early laxity, who want a comprehensive result rather than treating each issue separately. Your practitioner will confirm suitability at consultation. - **Is there any downtime?** Most clients experience brief flushing and a warm glow that settles within hours. Mild flaking or sensitivity may occur over the first few days depending on which modalities are layered. - **How is this different from a single laser?** Single lasers excel at one job. Ultimate Rejuvenation layers complementary modalities so the result addresses pigment, texture, vascular, and collagen concerns in one session, calibrated to your skin. ### Laser Hands Rejuvenation URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-laser-rejuvenation/laser-hands-rejuvenation **Tagline:** Restore youthful, even-toned hands ClearLift Hand Rejuvenation is a non-ablative laser treatment designed to reduce visible signs of hand aging such as fine lines, wrinkles, age spots, photo damage, uneven tone, and mild skin laxity. It is positioned as a minimally invasive treatment with no downtime, suitable for patients seeking quick rejuvenation of the hands. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild warmth and tingling - Downtime: Slight redness for a few hours - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive with each session - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults over 40 who notice their hands look older than their face, age spots, crepey texture, visible veins, and loss of firmness. A popular complement for clients who invest in their facial care and want the hands to match. **Indications:** - · Fine lines and wrinkles on the hands· Age spots· Sun damage / photo damage· Uneven skin tone· Mild skin laxity· Dull, aging hands **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner on the hands for 2 weeks before - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs, and exfoliants on the hands 5-7 days prior - Arrive with clean, bare hands, no hand cream, SPF, or makeup on the treatment area - Remove rings, bracelets, and nail polish if you wish (polish is not required to be removed) - Tell us about any photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin) - Inform us of any recent manicures involving UV gel curing, wait at least 48 hours **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 7 days to support collagen remodelling - Apply a rich, fragrance-free hand cream 3-4 times daily for the first week - Apply SPF 50+ to the backs of the hands every morning, reapplied after every hand wash, UV is the biggest driver of hand ageing - Wear sun-protective driving gloves if you spend time in the car during UAE daytime - Pause retinoids and strong actives on the hands for 5 days - Avoid very hot water (dishwashing, hot showers) and harsh soaps for 24 hours - Normal daily activity resumes immediately, no restrictions on hand use - Book your next session at 3-4 weeks for the cumulative effect **FAQs:** - **Why treat the hands separately?** The hands are among the first areas to show ageing, thin skin, constant sun exposure, and fewer sebaceous glands make them prone to pigmentation, crepiness, and vein prominence. They often reveal your age before your face does, and they respond beautifully to focused rejuvenation. - **How does ClearLift laser work on the hands?** ClearLift's non-ablative fractional Q-switched Nd:YAG laser creates microscopic columns of thermal stimulation beneath the skin. This remodels collagen, fades pigmentation, and thickens the thin skin on the back of the hands, all without damaging the outer skin or causing downtime. - **Will it help with visible veins on my hands?** Partially. The thickening of collagen camouflages prominent veins by adding volume to the surrounding skin. For dramatic vein correction, Radiesse or a hyaluronic-acid hand filler is more effective. Many clients combine both. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 4-6 sessions spaced 3-4 weeks apart. Results are progressive, pigmentation fades, texture smooths, and skin quality improves across the course. Annual maintenance keeps results fresh. - **Does it hurt and is there downtime?** Virtually painless, a warm tapping sensation. Mild redness settles within an hour, and you can use your hands normally immediately after. Apply SPF before leaving the clinic. - **Can I combine this with other hand treatments?** Yes. Popular pairings include Radiesse or Profhilo for volume and hydration, Q-switch for targeted age spots, and chemical peels for surface pigmentation. Your practitioner will create a layered plan. ## Energy-Based Devices > Advanced technology for lifting, tightening, and renewal Turn back the clock without going under the knife. Our non-surgical lifting and tightening treatments use cutting-edge technology to stimulate your body's own collagen production, delivering natural-looking results that improve over time. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations ### EmFace URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/emface **Tagline:** The future of facial rejuvenation EMFACE is a revolutionary treatment that simultaneously addresses skin and muscle. Using synchronised radiofrequency and HIFES technology, it lifts, tightens, and reduces wrinkles with absolutely no needles and no downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None - feels like a warm facial workout - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4 sessions recommended - Duration: 20 minutes - Results: Visible after first session - Frequency: Weekly for 4 weeks, then maintenance **Benefits:** - Lifts and tightens in just 20 minutes - No needles, no pain, no downtime - Increases collagen and elastin production - Tones facial muscles for natural lift - Clinically proven results **How it works:** EMFACE uses a combination of radiofrequency energy to heat the dermis and stimulate collagen, while HIFES technology contracts facial muscles thousands of times to restore tone and lift. Think of it as a workout and clinical treatment for your face combined. **Ideal for:** Adults with mild to moderate facial laxity or softened cheek/jawline definition who want a comfortable, needle-free lift in 20-minute sessions with zero downtime **Indications:** - Mild to moderate loss of facial tone - Softening cheekbones and jawline - Fine lines on the forehead and around the eyes - Clients wanting a needle-free lift - Maintenance of previous treatments and good facial posture **Not suitable for:** - Pregnancy - Implanted electronic devices such as pacemakers - Metal implants in the face - Active infection or inflammation in the treatment area - Severe skin laxity requiring surgical intervention **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 1.5-2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before, muscles and skin respond better when well-hydrated - Eat a normal meal 1-2 hours before your session; the muscle stimulation can be tiring on an empty stomach - Arrive with clean skin, free of heavy makeup or oils - Remove all facial jewelry and piercings in the treatment area - Tell us about any pacemaker, ICD, cochlear implant, or metal facial implants (these are contraindications) - Space Botox, fillers, or threads by at least 2 weeks from your EMFACE® session **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 liters of water daily for the week after, hydration supports both collagen remodeling and muscle recovery - Maintain your usual skincare routine and SPF; no restrictions - You may feel a mild post-workout-like tenderness in the cheeks or forehead for 24 hours, this is normal - No restrictions on makeup, sun exposure, or activity, most clients go straight back to work - Complete your full 4-session course for best collagen and muscle-tone results; maintenance every 3-6 months keeps the lift **FAQs:** - **How is EMFACE different from other treatments?** EMFACE is the only device that simultaneously treats both skin and muscle. While most treatments focus on one or the other, EMFACE addresses both causes of facial ageing in a single 20-minute session. - **What is HIFES and how is it different from HIFU?** HIFES (High-Intensity Facial Electromagnetic Stimulation) uses electromagnetic energy to contract facial muscles thousands of times per session, essentially a workout for the cheek and brow lift muscles. HIFU uses focused ultrasound to heat deeper tissue. HIFES and HIFU target different layers and are often complementary. - **What results can I expect clinically?** Published studies show an average 30% increase in muscle tone, 37% reduction in wrinkles, and visible lifting of the cheeks and brows after a course of 4 sessions. Results continue to improve for 2-3 months post-completion. - **How many sessions will I need?** The standard protocol is 4 sessions spaced 7-10 days apart, followed by a maintenance session every 3-6 months depending on goals. - **Can I have EMFACE with Botox or fillers?** Yes, in fact, EMFACE pairs very well with injectables. We recommend spacing at least 2 weeks between Botox/filler and EMFACE sessions. Some clients find EMFACE reduces how much Botox they need over time. - **Who should avoid EMFACE?** EMFACE is not suitable during pregnancy or for clients with pacemakers, implanted defibrillators, cochlear implants, metal facial implants, active facial infection, or severe skin laxity requiring surgery. We screen for all of this during consultation. ### Emsculpt Neo URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/emsculpt-neo **Tagline:** Build muscle and burn fat simultaneously The only treatment that simultaneously builds muscle and reduces fat. EMSCULPT NEO combines radiofrequency heating with high-intensity electromagnetic energy to deliver results equivalent to thousands of sit-ups or squats in just 30 minutes. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Intense but manageable contractions, no burning sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4 sessions recommended - Duration: 30 minutes per area - Results: Visible after 2-4 weeks - Frequency: Twice weekly for 2 weeks **Benefits:** - Burns fat and builds muscle simultaneously - 25% average fat reduction in treated area - 30% average muscle mass increase - Non-invasive with zero downtime - FDA-approved technology **How it works:** The EMSCULPT NEO applicator delivers radiofrequency energy to heat fat cells to the point of permanent destruction, while HIFEM energy triggers powerful muscle contractions that strengthen and tone. One session is equivalent to 20,000 muscle contractions. **Ideal for:** Those looking to tone specific body areas and reduce stubborn fat pockets without surgery **Indications:** - Building muscle tone and definition in the abdomen, buttocks, arms, thighs, or calves - Reducing localised fat pockets - Improving core strength - Enhancing body contour without downtime - Clients already active who want to amplify results **Not suitable for:** - Pregnancy - Implanted electronic devices (pacemakers, defibrillators) - Metal implants in the treatment area - Hernia in the treatment zone - Recent surgery in the area **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 1.5-2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before, muscles and skin respond better when well-hydrated - Eat a normal meal 1-2 hours before your session; the muscle stimulation can be tiring on an empty stomach - Remove all jewelry and piercings in the treatment area - Tell us about any pacemaker, ICD, cochlear implant, or metal facial implants (these are contraindications) - Space Body fillers, or Profhilo body by at least 2 weeks from your Emsculpt session **Aftercare:** - Stay well-hydrated before and after each session - Expect mild muscle soreness for 24-48 hours, this is normal - Maintain a balanced diet to amplify fat-reduction results - Regular movement and core exercise supports the new muscle gains - Results build over 3 months as your body adapts and fat cells clear **FAQs:** - **Is EMSCULPT NEO just for abs?** Not at all. While the abdomen is the most popular treatment area, EMSCULPT NEO can also target the buttocks, arms, thighs, and calves. Many clients treat multiple areas for a comprehensive body transformation. - **Will I feel sore afterward?** You may feel like you have had an intense workout, with mild muscle soreness for a day or two. This is completely normal and a sign that the muscles have been effectively stimulated. ### Exion Face URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/exion-rf-face **Tagline:** Contouring radiofrequency for the face EXION RF Face is a non-invasive treatment using radiofrequency energy to tighten skin, stimulate collagen, and improve facial contour and skin quality. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 3-6 sessions - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 1-3 months **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults beginning to notice early laxity around the jawline, cheeks, or neck who want a no-downtime tightening treatment with gradual, natural-looking results **Pre-treatment care:** - Hydrate well: at least 1.5-2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before (RF energy works better on well-hydrated skin) - Arrive with clean skin, no heavy makeup, oils on the face - Avoid sunburn or aggressive tanning in the week before your appointment - Let us know about any recent fillers, threads, or implanted devices (pacemakers, internal defibrillators) before we begin - Dental implants, crowns, and bridges are generally fine, just mention them during consultation **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 liters of water daily, hydration supports the collagen-building response in the weeks after treatment - Apply SPF 50+ daily; protect your newly stimulated skin from UV damage - Normal skincare and makeup can resume immediately - Avoid saunas, hot yoga, or very hot baths for the rest of the day - Keep up your weekly sessions, consistency across the full 4-session course is what delivers the visible lift **FAQs:** - **What makes EXION RF Face non-invasive?** Unlike microneedling or ablative resurfacing, RF Face delivers radiofrequency and targeted ultrasound (TUS) energy through an applicator gliding across the skin's surface. There are no needles, no damage to the outer layer, and no downtime. - **Will I see a lift after one session?** Most clients notice subtle tightening and a dewy glow within 24-48 hours of the first session, but the real lift develops over 6-12 weeks as new collagen forms. A course of 4 sessions produces the most pronounced, lasting result. - **How is this different from Thermage FLX?** Thermage FLX is a single-session, higher-intensity monopolar RF treatment designed for deeper laxity. EXION RF Face is a comfortable, progressive course (usually 4 sessions) that builds collagen gradually. Your practitioner will recommend the better fit based on your skin and goals. - **How many sessions will I need?** The standard protocol is 4 sessions spaced 1 week apart, followed by a maintenance session every 6-12 months. Clients with more significant laxity may benefit from 6 sessions. - **Can I do this during my lunch break?** Yes. A full-face session takes around 60 minutes, there is no numbing, no redness, and no aftercare restrictions, you can apply makeup and return straight to work. ### Exion Body URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/exion-body **Tagline:** Targeted RF body contouring and skin tightening EXION Body by BTL combines monopolar radiofrequency with targeted ultrasound to firm loose skin, smooth cellulite, and refine body contours without surgery or downtime. Treatment is comfortable, energy is delivered evenly across the area, and results build cumulatively across a course. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Course of 4 + maintenance - Duration: 30-60 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Once or twice per week **Benefits:** - Tightens loose skin on abdomen, arms, thighs, and knees - Reduces the appearance of cellulite and stretch marks - Improves skin texture, tone, and elasticity - Stimulates collagen and elastin production at depth - No needles, no consumables, no downtime **How it works:** EXION Body delivers monopolar RF energy that penetrates deeply into the dermis and subcutaneous layer, heating tissue to a therapeutic temperature that triggers immediate contraction and long-term collagen remodelling. Targeted ultrasound waves work alongside the RF to refine surface texture. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting non-invasive body contouring and skin tightening on the abdomen, flanks, thighs, arms, or knees, particularly post-pregnancy, post-weight-loss, or alongside an Emsculpt Neo programme. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before to improve RF conductivity - Skip moisturiser, body oil, and self-tanner on the treatment area on the day of your session - Avoid sunburn or aggressive tanning for 1 week prior - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before, do not arrive fasting - Tell us about any pacemakers, metal implants in the treatment area, or recent surgery **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling - Apply SPF 50+ to any treated areas exposed to sun for 1 week - Keep up with the recommended weekly cadence, the cumulative effect across 4 sessions is what delivers visible tightening - Maintain results with 1 session every 1-2 months **FAQs:** - **How is EXION Body different from Emsculpt Neo?** Emsculpt Neo builds muscle and reduces fat. EXION Body tightens skin and refines surface texture. They are commonly paired, Emsculpt Neo for the underlying contour, EXION for the skin envelope. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 4 sessions is the standard starting protocol, spaced once or twice per week. Maintenance every 1-3 months keeps results consistent. - **Is there any downtime?** None. The treated area may feel mildly warm and look slightly pink for a few hours. Most clients return to normal activities, including the gym, the same day. - **Can I treat stretch marks with EXION Body?** Yes. Stretch marks respond well to RF energy that stimulates dermal remodelling. A course of 4-6 sessions, spaced 1-2 weeks apart, delivers the most consistent improvement. ### Exion RF Microneedling URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/exion-rf-microneedling **Tagline:** Radiofrequency microneedling for total renewal RF Microneedling by BTL Exion is an FDA-approved treatment that combines microneedling with radiofrequency (RF) energy to rejuvenate the skin. It targets concerns like fine lines, wrinkles, acne scars, uneven texture, and sagging skin, delivering smoother, firmer, and youthful skin with minimal downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild discomfort with numbing cream - Downtime: 24-48 hours - Sessions: 1-3 sessions depending on goals - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - Stimulates collagen and elastin for firmer, smoother skin. - Treats acne scars, fine lines, stretch marks, and uneven texture. - FDA-approved for all skin types, including darker tones. - Minimal discomfort and downtime with lasting results. - Safe for both face and body. **Ideal for:** Adults noticing fine lines, enlarged pores, acne scarring, stretch marks, or loss of firmness who want visible collagen remodelling without surgery or prolonged downtime **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before your appointment to optimize skin hydration and conductivity - Discontinue retinoids, glycolic/salicylic acids, and exfoliating products 3-5 days before - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 2 weeks prior - Skip aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, and vitamin E for 24-48 hours before (unless medically required) to minimize bruising - Arrive with freshly cleansed skin, no makeup on the area to be treated - Let us know about any cold sore history, active skin infections, or recent Botox/filler (we recommend spacing injectables by at least 2 weeks) **Aftercare:** - Maintain 2-3 liters of water daily for 5-7 days to support collagen remodeling from within - Apply hyaluronic acid/ Peptide serum and medical moisturizer for the first 48 hours - SPF 50+ every morning, reapply every 2 hours if outdoors, your skin is photo-sensitive for 2 weeks - Avoid heat (saunas, hot showers, hot yoga, intense exercise) for 48-72 hours - Pause retinoids, acids, and vitamin C for 3-5 days - Expect mild flaking and a sandpaper texture on days 3-5; do not pick, rub, or exfoliate - Sleep on a clean pillowcase and avoid touching the face with unwashed hands **FAQs:** - **What does EXION RF Microneedling actually feel like?** After 30-45 minutes of numbing cream, most clients describe the sensation as warm tingling with very brief pressure. The proprietary AI-controlled energy delivery adjusts to your skin's real-time impedance, which keeps the treatment comfortable across the whole face. - **How does it differ from regular microneedling?** Standard microneedling creates controlled micro-channels only. EXION delivers radiofrequency energy through those channels directly into the deeper dermis, stimulating collagen and elastin roughly 3x more effectively than needles alone, and it's safe on all skin tones including Fitzpatrick V - VI. - **When will I see results and how long do they last?** You will notice tighter, smoother skin within 2-4 weeks. Full collagen remodelling builds over 3 months and continues improving for up to 6 months. Results typically last 12-18 months with an annual maintenance session. - **How many sessions will I need?** Most clients achieve their goals in a course of 3 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart. Acne scars or deeper laxity may benefit from 4-6. During your consultation, your practitioner will build a plan around your specific concerns. - **Is there any downtime?** Expect pinpoint redness and a warm, sunburn-like feel for 24-48 hours. Most clients return to work the next day and can wear mineral makeup from day 2. Avoid heat, sweat, and active skincare for 3-5 days. ### Exion Clear RF Resurfacing URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/exion-clear-rf-resurfacing **Tagline:** Fractional radiofrequency skin renewal BTL EXION Clear RF is an advanced fractional radiofrequency (RF) resurfacing treatment designed to rejuvenate the skin by targeting the dermal layers. Utilizing Smart Microablation technology, it delivers controlled RF energy to stimulate collagen and elastin production, improving skin texture, tone, and overall radiance. This treatment is FDA-cleared, ensuring its safety and efficacy for various skin types and concerns. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild discomfort with numbing cream - Downtime: 3-5 days - Sessions: 1-3 sessions depending on goals - Duration: 90 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - Stimulates natural collagen and elastin production - Improves skin texture, tone, and firmness - Reduces the appearance of fine lines and pores - Suitable for most skin types (Fitzpatrick I - VI) - Microneedle-free, minimizing discomfort - FDA-cleared for safety and effectiveness **Ideal for:** Adults with sun damage, uneven texture, fine lines, enlarged pores, or superficial scarring who want fractional resurfacing without needles and are comfortable with 3-5 days of social downtime **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before to prime the skin - Stop retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, benzoyl peroxide, and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 2 weeks before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, and high-dose fish oil/vitamin E 48 hours before (unless prescribed) - If you have a history of cold sores, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before (we can arrange this) - Arrive with a clean, bare face, no makeup, or skincare on the treatment area **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 liters of water daily for at least 7 days to support healing - Use only a gentle cleanser, hyaluronic acid/ Peptide serum and medical moisturizer for the first 48 hours - SPF 50+ mineral sunscreen every morning, reapply every 2 hours outdoors, for 2 weeks - No hot showers, saunas, hot tubs, or strenuous exercise for 72 hours - Do not pick, scrub, or exfoliate the bronzed micro-crusts, let them slough naturally around day 4-5 - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 5 days; restart gradually once fully healed - Mineral makeup can be applied from day 3 if the skin is intact **FAQs:** - **What is Smart Microablation and how is it different from fractional laser?** Smart Microablation uses needle-free fractional radiofrequency to create microscopic channels of controlled heat in the skin. Unlike ablative laser, it doesn't rely on light absorption by pigment, so it's considered safe across Fitzpatrick I - VI with a lower risk of post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation. - **How is this different from EXION RF Microneedling?** RF Microneedling uses physical needles to deliver RF into the dermis, best for deep collagen remodelling and acne scars. Clear RF Resurfacing is needle-free and works at the epidermal-to-mid-dermal level to improve texture, tone, and pore size. Many clients do both as part of a treatment plan. - **What does recovery look like day by day?** Day 1: pink, warm skin similar to a mild sunburn. Day 2-3: fine bronzed crusting that you should not pick. Day 4-5: natural sloughing reveals smoother, brighter skin. Most clients return to work on day 3 with mineral makeup. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 2-3 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart delivers the best outcome for texture and tone. For deeper resurfacing goals, your practitioner may recommend up to 4 sessions. - **Can I have this in summer?** We can treat you year-round, but strict sun avoidance and SPF 50+ are essential for 4 weeks afterwards. If you plan beach travel, we recommend scheduling at least 2 weeks before departure or waiting until after. ### PrimeX Face URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/prime-x-face **Tagline:** Advanced RF facial rejuvenation PrimeX Face by Alma Lasers is an FDA-cleared, next-generation facial contouring and skin-tightening device designed to treat multiple layers of the skin using dual high-energy technologies. It combines powerful high-frequency Radiofrequency (RF) with proprietary Alma Ultrasound (US) to lift, sculpt, and remodel the face without pain or downtime. PrimeX Face is the most advanced non-invasive solution for patients seeking natural sculpting and visible tightening. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 3-5 sessions initial, then quarterly maintenance - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - FDA-cleared non-invasive facial contouring - Most powerful RF tightening system in its category - Jawline & cheek contouring - Chin tightening + fat pocket reduction - Improved skin texture and radiance - No downtime, no discomfort - Safe for all skin types - Customizable for mild to moderate aging **Ideal for:** Adults in their late 20s to 60s with mild-to-moderate facial laxity or loss of definition along the jawline, cheeks, or neck, who want a no-downtime contouring treatment safe for all skin types, including Fitzpatrick V - VI. **Indications:** - PrimeX Face is ideal for individuals who want: - More definition in the jawline and cheekbones - Tightening of the lower face or neck - Reduction of early sagging or skin laxity - Improved texture, firmness, and glow - A non-surgical alternative to lifting or contouring - Perfect for patients in their late 20s to 60s seeking noticeable, natural facial enhancement. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, RF energy works best on well-hydrated skin - Arrive with clean skin, no makeup, heavy moisturiser, or SPF on the treatment area - Avoid sunburn or aggressive tanning in the week before - Space Botox or fillers by at least 2 weeks from your PrimeX session - Inform us of any pacemaker, ICD, internal defibrillator, cochlear implant, or metal facial implants (these are contraindications to RF) - Dental implants, crowns, and bridges are generally fine, just mention them during consultation **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for the next week to support the collagen-building response - Apply SPF 50+ every morning to protect the newly stimulated skin - Normal skincare and makeup can resume immediately - Avoid saunas, steam rooms, and very hot showers for 24 hours - Complete the full 3-5 session course, consistency is what builds the visible lift - Book quarterly maintenance sessions once your initial course is complete **FAQs:** - **How does Alma PrimeX Face combine RF and ultrasound?** PrimeX Face pairs one of the most powerful high-frequency radiofrequency (RF) systems in its category with Alma's proprietary Ultrasound (US) technology. RF heats the deep dermis to stimulate collagen while US delivers complementary mechanical energy for sculpting. Together, they target skin tightness and contour in a single session, something most single-modality devices cannot do. - **What does the treatment feel like?** Comfortable and warm, most clients describe it like a hot stone massage. The applicator glides across the skin in smooth passes. No numbing is needed and there is no post-treatment redness. - **How does PrimeX Face compare to Thermage FLX or EXION RF Face?** All three stimulate collagen with radiofrequency. Thermage FLX is a single-session monopolar treatment for deeper laxity. EXION delivers RF + TUS in a weekly course of 4. PrimeX Face adds Alma's high-frequency RF and US for contouring emphasis. Your practitioner will match the device to your anatomy and goals. - **When will I see results and how many sessions do I need?** A subtle tightening and glow is visible after the first session. Full collagen remodelling builds over 8-12 weeks. Most clients do 3-5 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart, then maintenance every 3 months. - **Is it safe for darker skin tones?** Yes. Because PrimeX uses radiofrequency (not light), it does not target melanin and is considered safe across Fitzpatrick I - VI with no increased risk of pigmentation. - **Can I resume work straight after?** Absolutely, no redness, no downtime, and makeup can be applied immediately. Many clients book PrimeX Face during a lunch break. ### PrimeX Body URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/prime-x-body **Tagline:** Advanced body contouring and skin tightening PrimeX Body by Alma Lasers is an FDA-approved, high-power body contouring platform combining proprietary Alma Ultrasound with high-frequency Radiofrequency. It is considered one of the most powerful non-invasive contouring devices in the world, capable of targeting fat, cellulite, and skin laxity simultaneously, making it a complete body reshaping solution. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4-6 sessions - Duration: 30-90 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Every 2-3 weeks **Benefits:** - FDA-cleared, high-power dual technology - Fat reduction + skin tightening in one device - Cellulite improvement - Post-weight loss tightening - Faster, stronger results than traditional RF - Safe for all skin types - Comfortable, non-invasive, and requires no downtime **Ideal for:** Adults with stubborn fat pockets resistant to diet and exercise, loose skin on the abdomen, thighs, arms, or back, or cellulite who want a powerful non-invasive contouring solution, particularly those post-pregnancy or post-weight-loss. **Indications:** - Individuals with stubborn fat areas resistant to diet/exercise - Loose skin on abdomen, thighs, arms, or back - Cellulite on thighs/buttocks - Postpartum or post-weight-loss skin tightening - Anyone wanting visible reshaping without surgery - Suitable for both men and women. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, RF works best on well-hydrated tissue - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before; avoid fasting - Avoid alcohol the night before and the day of your session - Arrive with clean skin, free of body lotion, oil, or self-tanner on the treatment area - Wear loose, comfortable clothing - Avoid aggressive scrubs or exfoliation on the treatment area 3 days before - Inform us of any pacemaker, ICD, or metal implants in or near the treatment area, these are contraindications - If pregnant, breastfeeding, or within 3 months of delivery, we'll delay or adjust the protocol **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling and lymphatic clearance of fat - Apply a hydrating body moisturiser to the treated area for 3-5 days - Avoid direct sun exposure on treated areas and apply SPF 50+ daily - Avoid hot showers, saunas, steam rooms, and intense cardio for 24 hours - Light activity immediately; no heavy lifting for 24 hours - Mild warmth, pinkness, or a 'post-workout' feeling is normal for a few hours - Maintain balanced nutrition and regular exercise to lock in contouring results - Book your next session at 2-3 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course delivers the result - Maintenace sessions are required for optimal lasting results **FAQs:** - **How does Prime-X Body combine RF and Ultrasound?** Prime-X pairs Alma's proprietary high-frequency radiofrequency with targeted ultrasound energy. The RF heats the deep tissue to stimulate collagen and shrink fat cells, while the ultrasound disrupts stubborn fat deposits mechanically. The combination tackles fat, cellulite, and laxity simultaneously, something most single-modality devices cannot do. - **How many sessions will I need?** Most clients see best results from a course of 4-6 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart. Postpartum or post-weight-loss clients may benefit from 8-10 sessions. Results continue to improve for 2-3 months after the final session as collagen remodels. - **Is it more effective than Viora RF Body or EMSCULPT NEO?** Different tools for different jobs. EMSCULPT NEO builds muscle AND reduces fat, best for toned bodies wanting definition. Viora RF Body focuses on skin tightening and mild cellulite. Prime-X Body has a more powerful RF + ultrasound combination, ideal for combined fat reduction AND skin tightening. Your practitioner will recommend the best fit based on your goals. - **What does the treatment feel like?** A deep, warm, massage-like sensation. Most clients find it relaxing. There is no pain and no numbing required. Sessions typically last 30-60 minutes per area. - **Is it safe for darker skin tones?** Yes. Because Prime-X uses radiofrequency and ultrasound (not light), it does not target melanin and is safe across all Fitzpatrick skin types. - **Can I resume exercise after?** Light activity the same day. Avoid intense cardio, heavy lifting, saunas, and hot yoga for 24 hours. In fact, regular exercise combined with the treatment amplifies results. ### PrimeX Plasma Resurfacing URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/prime-x-resurfacing **Tagline:** Microplasma resurfacing for texture and tone PrimeX RF Microplasma with IMPACT is a next-generation skin renewal treatment that combines advanced RF microplasma resurfacing and needle-free active delivery for visible skin transformation in one comprehensive session. At Ivory Aesthetics Clinic, we begin this protocol with PrimeX RF Unipolar to maximize collagen stimulation, taking advantage of PrimeX’s high-frequency RF, one of the most powerful in its class, before moving on to resurfacing and regeneration. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: 3-4 days - Sessions: 1-3 sessions depending on goals - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with uneven texture, enlarged pores, sun damage, acne scarring, or fine lines who want fractional resurfacing combined with needle-free delivery of active serums, and are prepared for 3-5 days of bronzed crusting as the skin renews. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to prime the skin - Stop retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, benzoyl peroxide, and exfoliating scrubs 5-7 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 2 weeks before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, and high-dose fish oil/vitamin E 48 hours before (unless prescribed) - If you have a history of cold sores, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Arrive with a clean, bare face, no makeup or skincare on the treatment area - Inform us of any pacemaker, ICD, or metal facial implants (contraindications to RF) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for at least 7 days to support healing and serum uptake - Use only a gentle cleanser, hyaluronic acid/Peptide serum or medical moisturizer for the first 5 days - Apply SPF 50+ mineral sunscreen every morning, reapply every 2 hours outdoors, for 4 weeks - No hot showers, saunas, hot tubs, or strenuous exercise for 72 hours - Do not pick or exfoliate the bronzed micro-crusts, let them slough naturally around days 4-5 - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 7 days; restart gradually once fully healed - Mineral makeup can be applied from day 3 if the skin is intact - Book your next session at the recommended 6-8 week interval for cumulative results **FAQs:** - **What is RF Microplasma and how is it different from laser resurfacing?** RF Microplasma creates microscopic channels of controlled RF energy and plasma in the skin, without needles or light. Unlike ablative laser, it doesn't target melanin, so it is safer on darker skin tones with a lower risk of post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation. It still delivers deep collagen remodelling and resurfacing. - **What is IMPACT and why do we combine it?** IMPACT is Alma's proprietary needle-free active delivery system. Ultrasound pressure waves push serums (hyaluronic acid, peptides, growth factors) deep into the dermis through the micro-channels created by RF. You get resurfacing AND regenerative serum infusion in one session. - **What does recovery look like day by day?** Day 1: warm, pink skin, similar to sunburn. Day 2-3: fine bronzed crusting, do not pick. Day 4-5: natural sloughing reveals smoother, brighter skin. Most clients return to work on day 3 with mineral makeup. Full social downtime is typically 3-5 days. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 2-3 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart gives the best result for texture, tone, and pore size. Deeper scarring may benefit from 4. Your practitioner will tailor the plan at consultation. - **Can I do this in summer or during sunny travel?** Yes, year-round, but strict SPF 50+ and sun avoidance are essential for 4 weeks afterwards. If you have beach travel planned, schedule at least 2 weeks before or wait until you return. - **How is this different from EXION Clear RF Resurfacing?** Both are needle-free fractional RF resurfacing. PrimeX Resurfacing adds Alma's Unipolar RF pre-treatment (for deeper collagen stimulation) and IMPACT serum delivery. EXION uses Smart Microablation with AI-guided energy control. Both are excellent, your practitioner will recommend based on your skin. ### Thermage FLX URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/thermage-flx **Tagline:** Radiofrequency tightening with comfort pulse Thermage FLX is an FDA-approved skin-tightening treatment that uses advanced Monopolar RF technology to deliver controlled heat into the deeper layers of your skin. This stimulates the production of new collagen, tightens existing fibers, and improves skin tone and texture. Designed for busy individuals, it requires no recovery time, making it an effective alternative to invasive procedures. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild discomfort - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 1-3 sessions depending on goals - Duration: 60-90 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Once yearly **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with mild to moderate facial or body laxity who want a single-session, no-downtime tightening treatment as a non-surgical alternative to a facelift **Indications:** - Individuals with mild to moderate skin laxity or early signs of aging. - Those seeking a non-invasive alternative to surgery. - Busy individuals who want noticeable results in a single session with minimal recovery time. - People looking to target sagging skin, fine lines, and uneven texture on the face or body. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 2 litres of water daily for 2-3 days before, well-hydrated tissue responds better to monopolar RF heating - Eat a full meal before your appointment; the treatment can be intense on an empty stomach - Arrive with clean skin, free from makeup and oils - Remove all facial jewelry and piercings in the treatment area - Inform us of any pacemaker, internal defibrillator, cochlear implant, or metal implants in the treatment area, these are contraindications - Space from any dermal fillers or Botox by at least 2 weeks - Avoid sunburn in the days before your session **Aftercare:** - Continue to drink 2+ liters of water daily for 2 weeks, hydration is essential for collagen remodeling - Apply SPF 50+ every day; new collagen is most effectively preserved when skin is protected from UV - Resume normal skincare, makeup, and activity immediately - Avoid intense heat (hot yoga, sauna, steam room) for 24 hours if you notice any mild redness - Be patient, the lifting effect continues to build over 2-6 months after your session **FAQs:** - **Is one session really enough?** Yes. Thermage FLX is designed as a single-session treatment. You will see initial tightening immediately, with the full lifting and contouring effect developing over 2-6 months as collagen remodels. Most clients repeat the treatment every 12-24 months. - **What does it feel like?** The FLX Total Tip delivers a brief heat pulse followed by a cooling burst. You will feel deep warmth and a quick hot-cold sensation with each pulse. The Comfort Pulse Technology (CPT) and vibration make it far more tolerable than earlier Thermage generations. - **Which areas can be treated?** Thermage FLX is FDA-approved for the face, eyes, neck, abdomen, arms, knees, thighs, and buttocks. The most popular areas at our clinic are the jawline, lower face, neck, and under-eyes. - **How long will the results last?** Results typically last 1 to 2 years, depending on your age, skin quality, and lifestyle. Collagen continues to form for up to 6 months, so the treatment actually looks better over time before gradually softening. - **Is there any downtime?** None. You can apply makeup and return to work immediately. A small number of clients have mild redness or swelling that resolves within a few hours. ### Ultherapy URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/ultherapy **Tagline:** Microfocused ultrasound for non-surgical lifting and firming Ultherapy is the only FDA-cleared non-invasive treatment that uses microfocused ultrasound (MFU) to deliver precisely targeted energy to the deepest layers of the skin, including the SMAS, the same connective layer addressed by surgical facelift. The energy creates small, controlled coagulation points beneath the skin's surface, which trigger the body's natural healing response and stimulate fresh collagen over the months that follow. The result is a gradual, natural-looking lift and firming of the brow, cheeks, jawline, and neck, without surgery, incisions, or downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Brief sensation of heat at the deeper layers - Downtime: None - Sessions: Single session, top-up as needed - Duration: 60-90 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-6 months - Frequency: Once every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - Lifts and firms brow, cheeks, jawline, and neck - Stimulates new collagen and elastin in the deep dermis and SMAS - Non-invasive, no incisions, no scarring - Visualises the layers being treated for precision - No downtime, return to normal activity immediately **How it works:** Ultherapy uses microfocused ultrasound, a different technology from radiofrequency, that bypasses the skin's surface entirely and focuses energy at controlled depths (typically 1.5mm, 3mm, and 4.5mm). The handpiece doubles as an ultrasound imaging tool, so the practitioner can see the layers being treated in real time. The energy heats small focal points within the dermis and the SMAS layer, prompting collagen contraction and a remodelling response that gradually lifts and firms over the following months. **Ideal for:** Adults with mild-to-moderate skin laxity in the face or neck, brow descent, jowling, or loose neck skin, who want a non-surgical lift with predictable, gradual results and who are not yet candidates for, or do not wish to undergo, surgical facelift. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, well-hydrated skin responds better to ultrasound energy - Avoid sun exposure and tanning for at least 5-7 days before treatment - Pause retinoids, acids, and active skincare for 3-5 days prior - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Inform your practitioner about any medications, fillers, or previous treatments in the area - Plan a comfortable day, mild sensitivity or tenderness during treatment is expected **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for several days to support collagen stimulation - Mild redness, swelling, or tenderness may occur and typically resolves quickly - Do not massage or apply pressure to the treated area for 24-48 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot showers, intense exercise) for 24-48 hours - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ daily and avoid direct sun exposure - Pause retinoids and active skincare for 3-5 days - Skin may feel slightly tender for a few days, this is a normal response - Results develop gradually over 6-12 weeks as collagen rebuilds - Follow your practitioner’s recommendation for maintenance sessions **FAQs:** - **How is Ultherapy different from RF tightening?** Both stimulate collagen, but the energy mechanism differs. RF heats tissue more broadly through electrical resistance. Ultherapy uses focused ultrasound to deliver energy at specific, deeper depths including the SMAS, which is normally only reached during surgery. The two are often used as complementary tools. - **When will I see results?** Some clients notice an initial firmness in the first few weeks, but the main lift develops gradually over 2 to 6 months as new collagen forms. Photographs taken before and at 90 days are the best way to track progress. - **Is it painful?** Sensation is described as deep heat or pulses at moments when the energy is delivered. Comfort settings are tailored to each client; topical numbing or mild pain relief can be added for sensitivity. ### NIR Tightening URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/nir-tightening **Tagline:** Near-infrared face and neck tightening NIR Skin Tightening uses near-infrared light energy to gently heat the dermis, stimulating collagen production and improving skin firmness and elasticity. This comfortable, non-invasive treatment is ideal for clients wanting gradual tightening with zero downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4-6 sessions recommended - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - Gentle, non-invasive skin tightening - Stimulates natural collagen production - Comfortable treatment with no downtime - Suitable for face and neck - Gradual, natural-looking results **How it works:** Near-infrared light energy penetrates the skin to gently heat the deeper dermal layers, triggering the body's natural collagen renewal process. Over the following weeks and months, new collagen firms and tightens the treated area for a more youthful appearance. **Ideal for:** Adults noticing early facial or neck laxity who want a gentle, warming, no-downtime collagen-stimulating treatment, ideal as a starter option or alongside stronger modalities like Thermage or HIFU **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 2 litres of water daily for 2-3 days before, well-hydrated tissue responds better to Near Infra-Red Therapy. - Arrive with clean skin, free from makeup and oils - Remove all facial jewelry and piercings in the treatment area - Space from any dermal fillers or Botox by at least 2 weeks - Avoid sunburn in the days before your session **Aftercare:** - Continue to drink 2+ litres of water daily for 2 weeks, hydration is essential for collagen remodelling - Apply SPF 50+ every day; new collagen is most effectively preserved when skin is protected from UV - Resume normal skincare, makeup, and activity immediately - Avoid intense heat (hot yoga, sauna, steam room) for 24 hours if you notice any mild redness - The lifting effect continues to build over 7-10 days after your session - Book your next session at the recommended 2-3 week interval **FAQs:** - **How is NIR different from RF or HIFU?** NIR (near-infrared) uses light energy to heat the dermis, while RF uses radiofrequency and HIFU uses focused ultrasound. NIR is typically gentler, more comfortable, and more progressive, good for early laxity or for clients who prefer a relaxing session. RF and HIFU go deeper and suit more established laxity. - **Will I see results after one session?** You'll notice a subtle, immediate tightening and a dewy glow from the heat-induced collagen contraction. The real collagen-building lift develops over 8-12 weeks across your full course. - **How many sessions will I need?** The standard protocol is 4-6 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart, followed by maintenance every 6-12 months. Deeper laxity may benefit from more sessions. - **Is NIR safe on all skin tones?** Yes. Because NIR uses near-infrared wavelengths that bypass surface melanin, it's considered safe across Fitzpatrick I - VI with a low risk of post-inflammatory pigmentation. - **Can I have this during my lunch break?** Yes, 45-60 minutes, no numbing, no redness, no aftercare restrictions. Most clients return straight to work and can apply makeup immediately. ### Viora Face URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/viora-rf-face **Tagline:** Multi-depth RF lifting and tightening Viora RF Face Contouring is an FDA- and CE-approved, cutting-edge solution for tightening loose skin, improving elasticity, and enhancing facial contours. By using multi-polar radiofrequency (RF) energy combined with Viora’s proprietary MultiCORE technology, it precisely targets deeper skin layers to stimulate collagen production, delivering firmer and more youthful-looking skin. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4-6 sessions - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - FDA- and CE-approved: A proven, safe, and effective solution for skin tightening and contouring. - Advanced Skin Tightening: Improves elasticity and reduces sagging for a firmer appearance. - Customizable for All Skin Types: Tailored energy levels ensure safe and effective treatment for every skin type. - Non-invasive and Painless: Enjoy noticeable results without the need for surgery or recovery time. - Targeted Contouring: Effectively addresses specific areas like the jawline, cheeks, and chin for defined contours. - Quick Treatments: Sessions are fast, making it easy to fit into your schedule. **Ideal for:** Adults with mild to moderate facial laxity or loss of contour definition who want a relaxing, no-downtime RF treatment safe for all skin types and tones **Indications:** - Mild to moderate sagging skin on the face or neck. - Loss of definition in the jawline or cheekbones. - Fine lines and wrinkles around the eyes or mouth. - A desire for a non-invasive solution to improve facial contours and skin tone. - This treatment is suitable for all skin types and tones, making it an excellent choice for anyone looking to rejuvenate their appearance naturally. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, well-hydrated skin responds better to RF - Arrive with clean skin, no makeup or SPF on the treatment area - Avoid sunburn and aggressive tanning in the days before your appointment - Space fillers or Botox by at least 2 weeks before the session - Inform us of any pacemaker, ICD, or electronic implant, these are contraindications to RF **Aftercare:** - Continue drinking 2 litres of water daily for the next week to support collagen remodelling - Normal skincare and makeup can resume immediately - Apply SPF 50+ every morning to protect your result - Avoid saunas, steam rooms, and very hot showers for the rest of the day - Keep up weekly sessions, the cumulative effect across the full course is what delivers the visible lift **FAQs:** - **What is MultiCORE technology?** MultiCORE is Viora's proprietary multi-frequency RF system that lets the practitioner switch between single, dual, and tri-channel RF during a single session. This means we can target superficial tone, mid-depth firmness, and deep laxity in the same visit, more versatile than fixed-depth RF devices. - **How is Viora different from Venus Viva or Thermage FLX?** Viora excels at multi-depth contouring with a pleasant, massage-like feel and minimal discomfort. Venus Viva (MP)² pairs RF with PEMF for collagen activation. Thermage FLX is a higher-intensity, single-session monopolar option for deeper laxity. Your practitioner will match the device to your skin. - **When will I see results?** A subtle, immediate tightening from heat-induced collagen contraction is visible after session one. The visible lift and contour change builds over 8-12 weeks across your full course. - **How many sessions will I need?** Most clients do 4-6 weekly sessions, then a maintenance session every 4-6 weeks. Your practitioner will personalise the protocol to your laxity, skin quality, and goals. - **Is it safe with darker skin tones?** Yes. Because Viora uses radiofrequency, not light, it does not target melanin and is considered safe across all Fitzpatrick skin types with no increased risk of post-treatment pigmentation. ### Viora Lips URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/viora-rf-lips **Tagline:** Non-invasive lip plumping with radiofrequency Viora RF Lips Rejuvenation is an advanced, non-invasive treatment that uses radiofrequency (RF) energy to rejuvenate the lips and surrounding area. It stimulates collagen and elastin production, enhancing lip volume and contour while reducing fine lines and wrinkles around the mouth for a naturally youthful appearance. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 1-3 sessions depending on goals - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - FDA- and CE-approved: Safe and effective for all skin types. - Natural Lip Rejuvenation: Stimulates collagen for a fuller, more youthful appearance. - Defines Lip Contours: Enhances symmetry and lip definition. - Reduces Fine Lines: Smooths wrinkles around the lips and perioral area. - Non-invasive and Comfortable: No needles, no downtime, and a warm, soothing sensation during treatment. - Quick and Effective: Visible results with minimal disruption to your daily life. **Ideal for:** Adults who want fuller, smoother, more defined lips and reduced perioral lines, without injectable filler or downtime **Indications:** - Individuals seeking natural lip enhancement without fillers or surgery. - Those wanting to improve lip contour and smooth fine lines. - People looking to refresh and rejuvenate aging or thinning lips. - This treatment is suitable for all skin types and tones, offering a gentle, non-invasive alternative for lip rejuvenation. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, hydrated lips respond better to RF - Arrive with clean lips, no lipstick, gloss, or balm on the treatment area - Avoid exfoliating scrubs on or around the lips for 3 days before - If you have a history of cold sores, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before (we can advise) - Tell your practitioner about any lip filler, and space by at least 2 weeks **Aftercare:** - Keep sipping water throughout the day for the week after, hydration supports collagen building from within - Use a gentle, fragrance-free lip balm with SPF for the first 48 hours - Avoid very hot or spicy foods, hot drinks, and alcohol for the rest of the day - No aggressive lip scrubs or exfoliants for 5 days - Return for weekly or fortnightly sessions to build the cumulative collagen response **FAQs:** - **Is this a replacement for lip filler?** It is a complementary option, not a replacement. Filler adds immediate volume with hyaluronic acid; Viora RF Lips stimulates your own collagen and elastin for gradual, natural enhancement. Many clients use both, filler for shape, RF for skin quality around the mouth. - **How plump can I expect my lips to get?** The effect is subtle and natural, think softer lip border, smoother perioral lines, and a gentle increase in fullness. If you want a dramatic volume change, injectable filler is more appropriate. - **What does it feel like on the lips?** A warm, gently massaging sensation. The lip area can be slightly more sensitive than the rest of the face, so your practitioner adjusts energy levels accordingly. No numbing is needed. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 3-6 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart delivers the best cumulative effect. Results typically last 6-12 months; annual or bi-annual maintenance keeps lips looking their best. - **Can I have this if I have filler in my lips?** Yes, but we recommend spacing at least 2 weeks after filler and ideally 4 weeks if the filler has just been placed. Let your practitioner know what product and volume you have in your lips. ### Venus Viva Face URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/venus-viva-rf-face **Tagline:** Contouring radiofrequency for facial shape Venus Viva RF Contouring is an advanced facial contouring treatment that uses (MP)² technology, a combination of Multipolar Radio Frequency (RF) and Pulsed Electromagnetic Fields (PEMF), to target and tighten areas of the face. The treatment is designed to improve skin tone and texture while stimulating collagen and elastin production. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 3-6 sessions - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 3-6 months **Benefits:** - Tightens and Lifts Skin: Targets sagging skin on the jawline, cheeks, chin, and neck, providing a non-invasive lift. - Stimulates Collagen and Elastin Production: Promotes smoother and firmer skin over time by increasing the production of collagen and elastin. - Non-Invasive and Comfortable: No surgery, needles, or downtime required. The treatment is painless, with most clients experiencing only a warm sensation. - FDA-Approved: The treatment is FDA-approved for safety and efficacy. - Safe for All Skin Types: Suitable for all skin types, offering customized results for different concerns. - Immediate and Gradual Results: Enjoy an immediate tightening effect, with more noticeable improvements as collagen production continues over the next few months. **Ideal for:** Adults noticing early laxity, softened jawline definition, or loss of firmness who want a comfortable, no-downtime contouring treatment **Indications:** - Sagging Skin: Particularly around the jawline, cheeks, and under the chin. - Loss of Skin Firmness: For those who have noticed a reduction in skin elasticity due to aging or environmental factors. - Fine Lines and Wrinkles: Suitable for those looking to smooth fine lines and rejuvenate the skin’s overall appearance. - Non-Surgical Enhancement: Perfect for clients who want facial contouring without the risks or recovery time associated with surgery. - This treatment is suitable for both men and women and is great for individuals seeking a non-invasive solution to skin laxity and a more youthful appearance. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before so the skin responds evenly to RF heating - Arrive with clean skin, no makeup or heavy creams on the treatment area - Avoid sunburn and aggressive tanning in the days before your appointment - Space fillers or Botox by at least 2 weeks; let your practitioner know what you've had and when - Inform us of any pacemaker, internal defibrillator, or electronic implant, these are contraindications **Aftercare:** - Continue 2 litres of water daily for the next week, hydration is central to the PEMF-driven collagen response - Normal skincare and makeup can resume immediately - Apply SPF 50+ every morning to preserve your result - Skip saunas, steam rooms, and very hot showers for 24 hours - Keep up with your sessions, the compounding effect across 6 visits is what delivers the lift **FAQs:** - **What is (MP)² technology?** (MP)² combines Multi-Polar Radio Frequency with Pulsed Electromagnetic Fields (PEMF) in a single applicator. The dual mechanism heats deeper tissue for collagen contraction while also activating fibroblasts, giving faster and more even results than single-modality RF. - **Does it really feel like a hot stone massage?** Yes, most clients describe it as genuinely relaxing. The applicator glides in warm circular motions with no needles, no numbing, and no sharp sensation. - **How many sessions will I need?** A starter course is typically 6 sessions spaced 1 week apart. Many clients then maintain their result with one session every 4-6 weeks or seasonally, depending on goals. - **Will I see a result after the first session?** Many clients see an immediate 'snatched' tightening effect from the warming, which lasts 24-48 hours. The longer-term collagen-based lift builds over 8-12 weeks across the full course. - **Can I have this with fillers or Botox?** Yes, and it pairs well. We recommend spacing Venus Viva RF Face at least 2 weeks after Botox or fillers to allow product settling. Always tell your practitioner what injectables you have had and when. ### Venus Viva RF Fractional URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/venus-viva-fractional **Tagline:** Fractional radiofrequency resurfacing Venus Viva RF Fractional is a cutting-edge, non-invasive skin resurfacing treatment that uses advanced radiofrequency (RF) technology to improve skin texture, tone, and elasticity. This FDA-approved procedure effectively addresses wrinkles, acne scars, large pores, uneven pigmentation, and stretch marks, delivering smoother, more radiant skin with minimal downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4-6 sessions - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 2-3 months **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with textural concerns, enlarged pores, acne scarring, fine lines, or uneven tone, who want fractional RF resurfacing that is safe across Fitzpatrick I - VI **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to improve skin conductivity and comfort - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliants 5 days before the session - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 2 weeks prior - Pause aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, and vitamin E for 48 hours before (unless medically required) - Tell us about any cold sore history, prophylactic antivirals may be recommended - Arrive with clean, bare skin **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for the first week to support the healing response - Use only a gentle cleanser, hyaluronic acid/ Peptide serums, medical moisturiser for 5 days - SPF 50+ mineral sunscreen every morning, reapplied every 2 hours outdoors, for 4 weeks - No saunas, hot tubs, hot yoga, or strenuous exercise for 48-72 hours - Do not exfoliate, scrub, or pick at the micro-textured skin, let it slough naturally around day 3-5 - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 7 days **FAQs:** - **How is this different from fractional laser?** Fractional laser uses light that targets melanin, which can trigger post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation in richer skin tones. Venus Viva RF Fractional uses radiofrequency energy through NanoFractional pins, bypassing melanin entirely, making it one of the safest fractional resurfacing options for Middle Eastern, South Asian, and darker skin types. - **Does it treat acne scars?** Yes. Clinical studies show meaningful improvement in acne scars, especially rolling and boxcar types, over a course of 4-6 sessions. Deeper ice-pick scars may be paired with EXION RF Microneedling for best results. - **What does recovery look like?** Expect pinkness and a gritty, sandpaper texture for 24-72 hours. Most clients can wear mineral makeup from day 2 and return to work the next day. There is no bleeding and no crusting in the way ablative laser produces. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 4-6 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart is standard for texture, tone, and mild scarring. Maintenance sessions once or twice a year help preserve results. - **Can I use this on my neck, chest, or hands?** Yes. Venus Viva RF Fractional is regularly used on the neck, décolletage, and back of hands, areas that show textural ageing but are often too sensitive for ablative laser. ### Dermalux LED Treatment URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/dermalux-led **Tagline:** Medical LED therapy for skin healing and glow Dermalux LED is a non-invasive light therapy treatment that uses clinically proven wavelengths to stimulate cellular activity, promote healing, and improve overall skin health. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None, a relaxing experience - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Monthly for ongoing results - Duration: 60-75 minutes - Results: Immediate glow - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - FDA- and CE-approved: A globally trusted, safe, and effective treatment. - Anti-bacterial: Reduces acne by targeting bacteria and inflammation. - Rejuvenates Skin: Stimulates collagen for firmer, smoother skin. - Eases Rosacea and Redness: Soothes irritated skin and reduces sensitivity. - Accelerates Healing: Promotes recovery after treatments like chemical peels or microneedling. - Versatile: Suitable for all skin types and can be combined with other treatments. - Boosts Skin Health: Encourages vitamin D production, cell regeneration, and serotonin release for radiant, healthier skin. **Ideal for:** Clients with inflammatory acne, rosacea, redness, sensitivity, or slow post-procedure recovery, and anyone looking for a relaxing, completely non-invasive skin-health treatment that pairs beautifully with microneedling, peels, or laser. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 24-48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin for maximum light penetration - Avoid photosensitising products 48 hours prior (retinoids, some AHAs, strong vitamin C) - Avoid tanning beds and aggressive sun exposure in the 3 days before - Remove contact lenses before treatment, we provide protective eyewear **Aftercare:** - Keep hydrated with 2 litres of water daily - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, while LED itself contains no UV, good sun protection supports the collagen response - Resume normal skincare immediately, no restrictions on makeup or actives - If combined with another treatment (peel, microneedling, laser), follow that treatment's aftercare instructions - Avoid very hot showers, saunas, or steam rooms for a few hours if you feel warm (rare) - Book sessions in a consistent cadence (weekly or bi-weekly) for cumulative anti-ageing, anti-inflammatory or acne benefits **FAQs:** - **What are the different LED wavelengths and what do they do?** Dermalux uses three clinically proven wavelengths: Blue (415nm) kills P. acnes bacteria and calms active breakouts; Red (633nm) stimulates fibroblasts and collagen for anti-ageing; Near-Infrared (830nm) penetrates deepest to accelerate healing and reduce inflammation. Most sessions combine all three in a multi-wavelength programme tailored to your concerns. - **Is LED just a wellness trend, or is there science behind it?** LED phototherapy is backed by over 30 years of clinical research, originally developed by NASA for wound healing. Dermalux is a medical CE Class IIa device used in dermatology clinics globally for acne, rosacea, eczema, psoriasis, and post-laser recovery. - **What does a session feel like?** Completely relaxing. You lie beneath a large LED canopy for 20 minutes while warm, bright light bathes your skin. There is no heat, no discomfort, and no UV, you can close your eyes and rest. - **How many sessions will I need?** For acute concerns (active acne, inflammation, post-procedure healing) we recommend 2-3 sessions per week for 4 weeks. For anti-ageing and maintenance, weekly sessions for 6-8 weeks, then fortnightly. Results build cumulatively, consistency is key. - **Can it be used with other treatments?** Yes. LED is often added to the same session as a facial, microneedling, peel, or laser to accelerate recovery, reduce post-treatment redness, and enhance collagen response. There are virtually no contraindications with other aesthetic treatments. - **Who should avoid LED therapy?** Anyone taking photosensitising medications (e.g. isotretinoin, certain antibiotics, St John's wort), those with active skin cancer, epilepsy triggered by flashing light, or lupus should avoid or get medical clearance. Always tell your therapist about current medications. ### Emerald Green Laser URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/emerald-green-laser **Tagline:** Non-invasive fat reduction with cold laser Emerald Green Laser is a non-invasive fat reduction treatment that uses low-level laser technology to target adipose tissue, stimulating fat cell reduction and supporting body contouring. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 6 sessions plus maintenance - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Weekly to fortnightly **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Best used before other body contouring treatments to support metabolism, immune function, and cellular health **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, Green laser works best on well-hydrated tissue - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before; avoid fasting - Avoid alcohol the night before and the day of your session - Arrive with clean skin, free of body lotion, oil, or self-tanner on the treatment area - Wear loose, comfortable clothing - Avoid aggressive scrubs or exfoliation on the treatment area 3 days before - If pregnant, breastfeeding, or within 3 months of delivery, we'll delay or adjust the protocol **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling and lymphatic clearance of fat - Apply a hydrating body moisturiser to the treated area for 3-5 days - Avoid direct sun exposure on treated areas and apply SPF 50+ daily - Light activity immediately; no heavy lifting for 24 hours - Maintain balanced nutrition and regular exercise to lock in contouring results - Schedule your cardio after the green laser session to enhance the results - Book your next session at 1-2 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course delivers the result **FAQs:** - **How will I feel after the treatment?** Many clients report feeling more energised and refreshed within hours of their session. The full benefits develop over the following days as your body absorbs and utilises the nutrients. - **How often should I book sessions?** Frequency depends on your wellness goals. Some clients benefit from weekly sessions during an initial phase, while others maintain with monthly visits. Your practitioner will recommend a schedule tailored to your needs. ### Emsella Chair URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/btl-emsella **Tagline:** Strengthen your pelvic floor effortlessly Emsella uses high-intensity focused electromagnetic energy to strengthen the entire pelvic floor musculature. You remain fully clothed while the chair delivers approximately 11,000 supramaximal contractions per session, significantly stronger than voluntary muscle contractions. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tingling and contracting sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 6 sessions recommended - Duration: 30 minutes - Results: Noticeable after 2-3 sessions - Frequency: Twice weekly for 3 weeks **Benefits:** - Strengthens pelvic floor muscles by 95% - Reduces incontinence episodes - Remain fully clothed during treatment - Completely non-invasive - Quick 28-minute sessions **How it works:** You simply sit fully clothed on the Emsella chair, which delivers focused electromagnetic energy to the pelvic floor muscles. This triggers thousands of supramaximal contractions, strengthening the muscles far beyond what voluntary exercises can achieve. **Ideal for:** Those experiencing pelvic floor weakness, urinary incontinence, or post-pregnancy muscle recovery **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1-1.5 litres of water before your session, hydration supports muscle function - Empty your bladder immediately before treatment for comfort - Wear comfortable clothing, treatment is performed fully clothed - Avoid heavy meals right before the session - Inform your practitioner if you have any metal implants, pacemakers, or are pregnant - Consistency is key, plan your sessions as recommended for optimal results **Aftercare:** - Resume normal daily activities immediately, no downtime required - Mild muscle contractions or pelvic soreness may be felt, similar to exercise - Maintain hydration to support muscle recovery - Avoid alcohol immediately after treatment if possible to support neuromuscular response - Continue recommended treatment schedule for best results - Improvements are gradual and build over the course of sessions **FAQs:** - **Is Emsella just for women?** Yes, men can absolutely benefit from Emsella. Indications for men include urinary incontinence, erectile dysfunction support, sexual wellness, and core stability. Pelvic floor strengthening is important for both genders. ## Aesthetic Facials > Personalised facials for every skin type Our signature facials go beyond surface-level care. Using advanced techniques and premium products, we rebuild and restore your skin from within, delivering a healthy glow that lasts. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials ### HydraFacial (Classic / Platinum / Premium) URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/hydrafacial **Tagline:** Multi-step hydradermabrasion across Classic, Platinum, and Premium tiers HydraFacial is a multi-step hydradermabrasion facial that cleanses, exfoliates, extracts, and infuses the skin with hydrating and antioxidant serums in a single session. It uses a patented vortex tip to gently lift impurities from the pores while simultaneously delivering bespoke serums into the skin. Three tiers, Classic, Platinum, and Premium, build on the same foundation with added boosters, lymphatic drainage, LED light therapy, and targeted serums for more advanced concerns. Every tier delivers an immediate glow and is suitable for almost all skin types. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable, no pain - Downtime: None - Sessions: Single session, monthly maintenance recommended - Duration: 30-60 minutes depending on tier - Results: Immediate glow - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - Deeply cleanses and decongests pores - Exfoliates dead skin without irritation - Hydrates and infuses targeted serums - Suitable for almost all skin types - No downtime, immediate radiance **How it works:** The HydraFacial device uses a vortex-fluid handpiece with multiple tips. A gentle acid solution loosens dead skin and debris, then a stronger glycolic/salicylic blend deep-cleanses the pores. A vacuum-assisted extraction tip lifts blackheads and impurities painlessly. Finally, hydrating and antioxidant serums are infused into the freshly cleaned skin. Platinum and Premium tiers add lymphatic drainage, LED light therapy, and targeted concern boosters (anti-ageing peptides, brightening, clarifying, etc.). **Ideal for:** Anyone wanting a high-performance facial with immediate results: clients with congested or dull skin, oily or combination types, and those wanting a maintenance facial that pairs well with their other in-clinic treatments. **Pre-treatment care:** - Arrive with a clean, makeup-free face - Discontinue retinoids and strong acids 2 days prior - Avoid sunburn or aggressive tanning in the 3 days before **Aftercare:** - Skip makeup for 6 hours to let your skin breathe - Apply SPF 50+ daily for the next 3 days - Pause retinoids and acids for 2 days - Book your next session in 4-6 weeks **FAQs:** - **What is the difference between Classic, Platinum, and Premium?** All three include the core cleanse, exfoliate, extract, and infuse steps. Platinum adds lymphatic drainage and LED therapy. Premium layers in additional concern-specific boosters and serums for a more comprehensive result. Your practitioner will recommend the tier that matches your skin and goals at consultation. - **Can I get a HydraFacial before an event?** Yes, this is one of the best pre-event facials because results are immediate and there is no downtime. Most clients book 1-3 days before an event for peak glow. - **Is HydraFacial suitable for sensitive or rosacea-prone skin?** Generally yes, with adjustments. The protocol is gentler than chemical peels or microdermabrasion, and serum selection can be tailored. Active rosacea flares or open lesions should be assessed at consultation. ### Nimue Deep Cleanse Facial URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/nimue-facial **Tagline:** Science-backed solutions for every skin type Nimue facials use interactive skin science to address specific concerns including sensitivity, environmental damage, uneven tone, and early signs of ageing. Each treatment is customised using professional-grade active ingredients. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None to mild tingling - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Monthly maintenance - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Visible within 24 hours - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - Tailored to your exact skin condition - Addresses sensitivity and redness - Protects against environmental damage - Evens out skin tone - Strengthens the skin barrier **How it works:** After a detailed skin analysis, your therapist selects the optimal Nimue formulation for your needs. The treatment combines professional exfoliation with targeted active ingredients that work at a cellular level to correct and protect. **Ideal for:** Those with sensitive or reactive skin who need effective treatment without irritation **Pre-treatment care:** - Avoid exfoliation, retinoids, and active skincare (AHAs/BHAs) for 2-3 days before treatment - Avoid sun exposure and tanning prior to your session - Inform your practitioner if you have sensitive skin, active acne flare, or irritation - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Maintain good hydration for optimal skin response **Aftercare:** - Avoid active skincare (retinoids, acids) for 24-48 hours - Avoid heat exposure (sauna, steam, hot showers) for 24 hours - Do not touch or pick the skin after extractions - Apply SPF 50+ daily and avoid direct sun exposure - Skin may feel refreshed, slightly sensitive, or mildly red, this is normal - Maintain hydration and follow a gentle skincare routine - Regular treatments are recommended to maintain clear, healthy skin **FAQs:** - **Is Nimue suitable for very sensitive skin?** Yes, Nimue was specifically developed for skin that cannot tolerate harsh treatments. The formulations are designed to strengthen and calm the skin while delivering real results. ### Biomedical Emporium Facial URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/biomedical-emporium-facial **Tagline:** Medical-grade signature facial with active corrective serums The Biomedical Emporium Facial is a results-driven medical facial built around Biomedical Emporium's range of clinically formulated serums and active ingredients. The treatment combines a structured cleanse, exfoliation, and targeted infusion phase with active ingredients chosen specifically for your skin's current condition: pigmentation, ageing, congestion, dehydration, or barrier compromise. It is designed as a corrective facial, working on the skin's underlying biology over a course of treatments rather than purely as a relaxing experience. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: Minimal - Sessions: Course of sessions recommended - Duration: 60-75 minutes - Results: Cumulative over a course - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Targets pigmentation, ageing, or congestion at source - Uses clinically formulated active serums - Tailored to your skin's current condition - Pairs well with home prescriptive skincare - Cumulative correction over a course **How it works:** After a thorough skin assessment, your practitioner selects the Biomedical Emporium products that match your concern. The facial follows a structured protocol: enzyme or acid exfoliation to prepare the skin, infusion of corrective serums (which may include retinoids, antioxidants, peptides, or brightening agents), and a finishing barrier treatment. The active ingredients work over the days that follow, with each session building on the last as the skin responds. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting a corrective, results-led facial rather than a purely relaxing one, those with specific concerns (pigmentation, ageing, congestion, sensitivity) who want clinically formulated active ingredients, and those who pair in-clinic treatment with a prescriptive home routine. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to prime skin hydration - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliating scrubs 3-5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure and tanning beds for 1 week before - Arrive with a clean, bare face - Let us know of any cold sore history, active breakouts, or recent injectables (we recommend spacing Botox/filler by at least 2 weeks) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support cellular repair and product uptake - Use only a gentle cleanser and bland hyaluronic or ceramide moisturiser for 48 hours - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, reapplied every 2 hours outdoors, for at least 2 weeks - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, intense cardio) for 24 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 5-7 days - Skip makeup for 24 hours if delivered via microneedling; topical infusion clients can apply mineral makeup from day 1 - Do not pick, scrub, or aggressively exfoliate, let the skin recover naturally - Return for your next session in the recommended 4-week window to maintain the cumulative collagen response **FAQs:** - **How is this different from a standard facial?** Standard facials focus on cleansing, exfoliation, and relaxation. The Biomedical Emporium Facial uses clinical-grade actives chosen for your specific concern, and is designed to drive measurable change over a course rather than a single sitting. - **Will I need a home skincare routine alongside it?** Best results come from pairing in-clinic treatment with prescriptive home care. Your practitioner will recommend the products that complement your facial and lock in the results between visits. - **Is this suitable for sensitive skin?** Yes, with the right product selection. The Biomedical Emporium range includes barrier-supporting and calming protocols. Your practitioner will adjust strength and frequency based on your tolerance. ### DMK Enzyme Therapy URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/dmk-facial **Tagline:** Reset your skin at a cellular level DMK Enzyme Therapy works with your skin's own chemistry to restore optimal function. This unique treatment may increase blood vessel activity and creates a reverse osmosis effect, flushing toxins while stimulating collagen production and improving circulation for long-lasting transformation. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild tingling sensation - Downtime: Slight redness for 2-4 hours - Sessions: Course of 6-12 recommended - Duration: 75-90 minutes - Results: Immediate glow - Frequency: Every 2 weeks initially **Benefits:** - Restores skin to peak condition - Strengthens and tones facial muscles - Dramatically improves skin texture - Effective for acne, ageing, and pigmentation - Results that improve with each session **How it works:** The enzyme masque is applied and works to create a plasmatic effect, increasing blood flow and encouraging optimal skin function. As the masque tightens, it creates a pulsating action that mimics the body's own processes to flush toxins and stimulate cellular renewal. **Ideal for:** Anyone committed to serious skin transformation and long-term results **Pre-treatment care:** - Avoid retinoids, exfoliating acids, and active skincare for 3-5 days before treatment - Avoid sun exposure and tanning prior to your session - Do not undergo waxing, laser, or aggressive treatments on the same area before the session - Inform your practitioner if you have sensitive skin, active acne, or any skin conditions - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Maintain good hydration for optimal skin response **Aftercare:** - Avoid active skincare (retinoids, acids) for 48 hours after treatment - Avoid heat exposure (sauna, steam, hot showers) and exercise for 24-48 hours - Do not pick or exfoliate the skin - Apply SPF 50+ daily and avoid direct sun exposure - Mild redness or tightness may occur, this is a normal part of the enzyme activity - Maintain hydration and follow a gentle skincare routine - Follow your practitioner’s advice on home care to enhance and maintain results **FAQs:** - **Why does the DMK masque feel like it is pulsing?** The enzyme masque creates a reverse osmosis effect that stimulates blood flow. The pulsating sensation you feel is actually increased circulation, which is a sign the treatment is working to oxygenate and nourish your skin cells. - **How many sessions do I need to see a difference?** While many clients notice improvement after the first session, DMK Enzyme Therapy is designed as a progressive treatment. A course of 6 to 12 sessions delivers the most transformative results, with each treatment building on the last. ### Medical Microneedling URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/medical-microneedling **Tagline:** Professional-grade skin renewal Our FDA-approved medical microneedling uses precision-controlled ultra-fine needles to create thousands of micro-channels in the skin. This triggers a powerful healing response, dramatically improving scars, wrinkles, and overall skin quality. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild with numbing cream - Downtime: Redness for 24-48 hours - Sessions: 3-6 sessions recommended - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Visible after 2 weeks - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - Dramatically reduces acne scars - Minimises fine lines and wrinkles - Shrinks enlarged pores - Improves overall skin texture - Enhances product absorption **How it works:** The medical-grade device creates thousands of controlled micro-injuries in the skin. This triggers the body's wound-healing cascade, producing fresh collagen and elastin while allowing therapeutic serums to penetrate 80% deeper than topical application alone. **Ideal for:** Those with acne scarring, enlarged pores, or anyone wanting significant skin texture improvement **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to support cellular uptake - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliants 3-5 days before - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 1-2 weeks prior - Arrive with freshly cleansed skin - Let us know about cold sore history, active skin infections, or recent Botox/filler (space injectables by at least 2 weeks) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for 7 days to support collagen remodelling and serum uptake - Use only a bland hyaluronic acid serum and fragrance-free moisturiser for the first 48 hours - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, reapplied every 2 hours outdoors, for at least 2 weeks - Avoid heat (saunas, hot showers, hot yoga, intense exercise) for 48-72 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 5-7 days - Expect mild flaking and a sandpaper texture on days 3-5, do not pick or exfoliate - Skip makeup for 24 hours; mineral makeup from day 2 if the skin is intact - Return for your next session at the recommended 4-week interval **FAQs:** - **How is medical microneedling different from home rollers?** Medical microneedling uses professional-grade devices with precisely controlled needle depth and speed, reaching therapeutic depths that home devices cannot safely achieve. The results are significantly more dramatic, and the treatment is supervised by trained professionals. ### Exosome Microneedling URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/exosome-microneedling **Tagline:** Supercharge microneedling with exosome therapy Exosome Face is an advanced exosome-based rejuvenation therapy designed to restore, repair and revitalise the skin at a cellular level. Powered by plant-derived exosomes, botulinum polypeptides, and bio-active antioxidants, it delivers the regenerative power of stem-cell communication, ethically and safely, for visibly smoother, brighter, and firmer skin. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild with numbing cream - Downtime: Redness for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Course of 3-6 recommended - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Visible after 2 weeks, improving over 3 months - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - Stimulates collagen and elastin renewal for firmer skin - Reduces fine lines, enlarged pores, and dullness - Brightens skin tone and fades pigmentation - Enhances post-procedure healing and reduces inflammation - 100% vegan and safe: derived from plant exosomes, free from human or animal cells **Ideal for:** Adults with early-to-moderate skin ageing, uneven tone, acne scarring, or dullness who want a cutting-edge regenerative treatment that works at a cellular level, particularly those seeking ethical, vegan, plant-derived alternatives to animal- or human-origin biologics. **Indications:** - Address early ageing signs and loss of radiance - Improve post-laser or post-peel recovery - Boost hydration and repair at the cellular level - Enjoy ethical, vegan skin rejuvenation technology **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Active inflammatory skin conditions - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - History of keloid scarring - Recent isotretinoin use (6 months) - Immunocompromised patients - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to support cellular uptake - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliants 3-5 days before - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 1-2 weeks prior - Skip aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, and vitamin E for 24-48 hours (unless medically required) to minimise bruising - Arrive with freshly cleansed skin - Let us know about cold sore history, active skin infections, or recent Botox/filler (space injectables by at least 2 weeks) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for 7 days to support collagen remodelling and serum uptake - Use only a bland hyaluronic acid serum and fragrance-free moisturiser for the first 48 hours - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, reapplied every 2 hours outdoors, for at least 2 weeks - Avoid heat (saunas, hot showers, hot yoga, intense exercise) for 48-72 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 5-7 days - Expect mild flaking and a sandpaper texture on days 3-5, do not pick or exfoliate - Skip makeup for 24 hours; mineral makeup from day 2 if the skin is intact - Return for your next session at the recommended 4-week interval **FAQs:** - **What exactly are exosomes and how do they work on the skin?** Exosomes are microscopic extracellular vesicles, nature's communication messengers between cells. They carry proteins, lipids, and genetic signals that instruct skin cells to repair, regenerate, and produce collagen. Our clinic uses plant-derived exosomes (from rose stem cells), which deliver the regenerative signalling without any animal or human origin. - **Are these the same as stem cells?** No. Exosomes are released by stem cells but are not cells themselves, they are signalling particles. This makes them safer, more stable, and ethically clearer while still delivering powerful regenerative effects. - **What does the session feel like?** After 30-45 minutes of numbing cream, we perform microneedling to create micro-channels, then immediately infuse the exosome serum. You may feel light vibration and mild warmth. Most clients describe it as very manageable. - **How soon will I see results?** Skin looks plumper and brighter within 7-10 days. Collagen remodelling builds over 4-12 weeks, with peak results at 3 months. Improvements in texture, firmness, and tone continue to evolve. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 3-6 sessions spaced 4 weeks apart delivers the best outcome. Acne scarring or deeper concerns may benefit from 6+ sessions. Maintenance every 3-6 months keeps results looking fresh. - **How is this different from PRP or growth factors?** PRP uses your own blood-derived growth factors, personalised but variable batch-to-batch. Exosomes deliver consistent, concentrated signalling proteins with no blood draw. Growth factor serums work at a similar level but without the vesicle delivery system. Your practitioner will recommend the best fit for your goals. ### Biosome Microneedling URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/biosome-microneedling **Tagline:** Microneedling with encapsulated growth-factor biosomes Biosome Microneedling combines a controlled microneedling pass with the topical application of biosomes, microscopic lipid spheres that encapsulate growth factors, peptides, and other regenerative actives. The micro-channels created by the needling protocol act as direct delivery routes for the biosomes, allowing them to reach the dermis where they release their payload over time. The result is a more pronounced collagen response, improved texture, and enhanced skin quality, particularly for adults who want more than a standard microneedling session can deliver. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable with topical numbing - Downtime: Minimal, mild redness for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Course of sessions recommended - Duration: 60-75 minutes - Results: Progressive over 4-8 weeks - Frequency: Every 4 weeks **Benefits:** - Stimulates collagen and elastin production - Refines skin texture, pores, and tone - Delivers encapsulated growth factors deep into the dermis - Softens fine lines and post-acne scarring - Compatible with most skin types **How it works:** After cleansing and topical numbing, a microneedling device is passed across the treatment area to create thousands of controlled micro-channels in the skin. Biosomes, lipid vesicles loaded with growth factors and peptides, are then applied topically and absorbed through the channels into the dermis. The lipid shell of the biosome breaks down gradually, releasing its active cargo over time. The skin's natural wound-healing response combines with the released growth factors to drive collagen and elastin production over the following weeks. **Ideal for:** Adults who want a step beyond standard microneedling: collagen stimulation paired with active growth-factor delivery for improved texture, fine lines, post-acne marks, and overall skin quality. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to support cellular uptake - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliants 3-5 days before - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 1-2 weeks prior - Skip aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, and vitamin E for 24-48 hours (unless medically required) to minimise bruising - Arrive with freshly cleansed skin - Let us know about cold sore history, active skin infections, or recent Botox/filler (space injectables by at least 2 weeks) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for 7 days to support collagen remodelling and serum uptake - Use only a bland hyaluronic acid serum and fragrance-free moisturiser for the first 48 hours - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, reapplied every 2 hours outdoors, for at least 2 weeks - Avoid heat (saunas, hot showers, hot yoga, intense exercise) for 48-72 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 5-7 days - Expect mild flaking and a sandpaper texture on days 3-5, do not pick or exfoliate - Skip makeup for 24 hours; mineral makeup from day 2 if the skin is intact - Return for your next session at the recommended 4-week interval **FAQs:** - **How is biosome microneedling different from exosome microneedling?** Both deliver active payloads into freshly micro-channelled skin. Exosomes are nanoscale signalling vesicles derived from cultured stem cells. Biosomes are lipid spheres engineered to encapsulate and slowly release growth factors and peptides. Your practitioner will recommend the right protocol based on your goals and budget. - **Is it painful?** Topical numbing is applied before the session, so most clients describe the sensation as a vibration or scratchiness rather than pain. The skin is typically pink for the rest of the day. - **When will I see results?** Initial freshness is often visible within the first week, with progressive collagen improvement over 4-8 weeks. A course of sessions delivers the most pronounced result. ### Signature Cool Jet Facial URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/cool-jet-facial **Tagline:** Cooling oxygen-jet facial with instant glow The Signature Cool-Jet Facial is a cutting-edge, FDA-approved skin rejuvenation treatment that fuses motorized cold therapy with jet plasma technology for deep skin renewal, without needles, heat, or downtime. This non-invasive facial dramatically improves skin tone, texture, and clarity, while enhancing collagen production and reducing inflammation. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None, a relaxing experience - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Twice a week - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Immediate glow - Frequency: Monthly **Benefits:** - Brightens & Evens Skin Tone - Smooths Fine Lines & Tightens Pores - Reduces Redness, Inflammation & Breakouts - Enhances Collagen & Skin Elasticity - Boosts Product Penetration - No Needles, No Heat, No Downtime **Ideal for:** Anyone with dull, dehydrated, sensitive, or reactive skin, and a perfect pre-event choice for clients who want a needle-free, heat-free treatment with an immediate lit-from-within glow and zero downtime. **Indications:** - Dull, dehydrated skin - Sensitive or reactive skin - Uneven skin tone and texture - Pre-event skin preparation - Maintenance facial **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Severe inflammatory acne - Skin conditions in active phase (eczema, psoriasis) - Allergy to infused solutions - Recent invasive procedures **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before, hydrated skin responds better to serum infusion - Pause strong retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliating products 48 hours prior - Avoid sunburn or aggressive tanning in the 5 days before your appointment - Arrive with a clean, makeup-free face - Let us know of any recent injectables, peels, or laser, ideally space by 1 week - Mention any allergies to plant extracts, peptides, or common actives so we can tailor the serum blend **Aftercare:** - Continue drinking 2 litres of water daily for the week ahead to support the hydration boost - Use gentle, fragrance-free skincare for the next 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, the refreshed epidermis is more receptive to UV - Avoid saunas, steam rooms, and hot yoga for 24 hours - Pause actives (retinol, vitamin C, strong acids) for 2-3 days - Makeup can be applied the same day, mineral formulations are best - For best results, book a course of 4-6 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart **FAQs:** - **What is jet plasma technology and how is it different from needles or laser?** Jet plasma uses ionised gas molecules delivered through a cooled applicator. The energy creates micro-pores in the stratum corneum without needles or thermal injury, allowing active serums to penetrate far deeper while the cold therapy calms inflammation and tightens pores. You get the benefits of a deep facial with none of the trauma. - **What happens during a Cool-Jet session?** After a gentle cleanse and skin analysis, your therapist glides the motorised cooling applicator and jet-plasma handpiece across your face. You will feel a pleasantly cool, whispering breeze, never hot, never uncomfortable. Sessions finish with a bespoke serum infusion and LED. - **How quickly will I see results, and how long do they last?** The glow is immediate, brighter, plumper, calmer skin walking out the door. A single session lasts around 7-10 days. A course of 4-6 sessions delivers cumulative improvements in tone, pore size, and clarity that can last several months with monthly maintenance. - **Is it safe for sensitive or rosacea-prone skin?** Yes. Because there is no heat, needling, or aggressive exfoliation, Cool-Jet is one of our go-to treatments for reactive skin, post-laser recovery, and rosacea maintenance. Your therapist will tailor the serums to your skin type. - **Can I do this right before a wedding or event?** Absolutely, it is one of the most popular pre-event facials in the clinic. With no redness or downtime, you can schedule it the morning of an event. For optimal glow, we recommend 2-3 days before. ### Gua Sha Facial URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/gua-sha-facial **Tagline:** Ancient wisdom meets modern beauty This holistic facial uses traditional Gua Sha techniques to stimulate lymphatic drainage, promote blood flow, and sculpt facial contours naturally. Combined with premium oils and serums, it delivers both immediate and cumulative benefits. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None - deeply relaxing - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Weekly for best results - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Immediate sculpting effect - Frequency: Weekly to fortnightly **Benefits:** - Natural facial sculpting and contouring - Reduces puffiness and fluid retention - Promotes healthy circulation - Deeply relaxing and stress-relieving - Enhances product absorption **How it works:** Using smooth stone tools, your therapist performs precise sweeping motions along the facial muscles and lymphatic pathways. This ancient Chinese technique releases tension, moves stagnant fluid, and encourages your skin's natural healing processes. **Ideal for:** Those who prefer natural, holistic approaches to skincare with visible sculpting results **Pre-treatment care:** - Stay well hydrated before your session, proper hydration supports effective lymphatic drainage - Avoid heavy meals or alcohol before treatment - Avoid active skin irritation, inflammation, or recent aggressive treatments - Inform your practitioner if you have sensitive skin or active conditions - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin **Aftercare:** - Continue to drink plenty of water to support lymphatic drainage and detoxification - Mild redness or warmth may occur due to increased circulation - Avoid heavy meals, alcohol, and excessive salt immediately after treatment - Avoid heat exposure (sauna, steam) for 24 hours - Apply SPF daily to protect the skin - Support results with a healthy lifestyle, hydration, balanced diet, and regular movement - Regular sessions enhance lymphatic drainage, reduce puffiness, and improve skin tone **FAQs:** - **Will Gua Sha leave marks on my face?** Unlike body Gua Sha, facial Gua Sha uses very gentle pressure. You may experience slight pinkness which fades within minutes, but there will be no marks or bruising. ### Dermaplaning URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/dermaplaning **Tagline:** Remove fine hair and dead skin for a flawless finish Dermaplaning is a manual exfoliation technique that uses a sterile surgical blade to remove dead skin cells and vellus hair, resulting in smoother and brighter skin. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None, a relaxing experience - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Monthly for ongoing results - Duration: 60-75 minutes - Results: Immediate glow - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - Smoother skin texture and a youthful glow. - Reduced fine lines, wrinkles, and shallow acne scars. - Improved skin tone by minimizing dark spots and pigmentation. - Managed acne and clearer pores. - Enhanced product absorption for better skincare results. **Ideal for:** Clients who want flawless makeup application, a hair-free finish, and a brighter, more luminous complexion, particularly those with peach-fuzz (vellus hair) that traps product, dulls photos, or makes foundation patchy. **Indications:** - Dull or rough skin texture - Uneven skin tone - Fine lines - Dry or dehydrated skin - Clients seeking smooth makeup application **Not suitable for:** - Active acne or inflamed lesions - Skin infections or open wounds - Severe rosacea - Highly sensitive or compromised skin - Recent chemical peel or laser treatment - Use of isotretinoin within 6 months **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Pause retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliating scrubs 3 days prior to reduce skin sensitivity - Avoid waxing, threading, or bleaching the face for 1 week before - Avoid sun exposure and tanning for 3-5 days before - Arrive with a clean, makeup-free face - Let us know if you have any active breakouts, cold sores, moles, or raised lesions in the treatment area **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for a few days to support the freshly exfoliated skin - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, the newly revealed skin is more photosensitive for 5-7 days - Use a gentle, fragrance-free moisturiser morning and evening - Pause actives (retinol, AHAs/BHAs, vitamin C) for 3-5 days - Avoid saunas, steam rooms, hot yoga, and chlorine for 24 hours - Skip heavy makeup for 24 hours if your skin feels sensitive; mineral makeup is fine straight away - Do not wax, thread, or bleach the face for at least 7 days - Return every 3-4 weeks to align with your skin's natural renewal cycle - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 24-48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin for maximum light penetration - Avoid tanning beds and aggressive sun exposure in the 3 days before - Remove contact lenses before treatment, we provide protective eyewear - Keep hydrated with 2 litres of water daily - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, while LED itself contains no UV, good sun protection supports the collagen response - Resume normal skincare immediately, no restrictions on makeup or actives - If combined with another treatment (peel, microneedling, laser), follow that treatment's aftercare instructions - Avoid very hot showers, saunas, or steam rooms for a few hours if you feel warm (rare) - Book sessions in a consistent cadence (weekly or bi-weekly) for cumulative anti-ageing or acne benefits **FAQs:** - **Will the hair grow back thicker or darker?** No. This is one of the most common myths. Vellus hair is genetically programmed and its texture and colour cannot be changed by shaving. The hair regrows at the same rate and thickness as before, it simply feels different for the first few days as blunt ends emerge. - **How is dermaplaning different from shaving at home?** Dermaplaning uses a sterile, #10 surgical-grade blade held at a precise 45° angle by a trained therapist. It removes both vellus hair AND the outermost layer of dead skin (physical exfoliation), something a standard razor cannot safely do. - **Is it painful? Are there any cuts?** It is completely painless and, performed by a trained therapist, extremely safe. You may feel a light scraping sensation, similar to shaving. Our therapists use sterile blades for every client. - **How often should I have it done?** Every 3-4 weeks, aligned with the natural skin cell turnover cycle. More frequent treatment is unnecessary and may compromise the skin barrier. - **Can I have dermaplaning if I have acne or rosacea?** Not during active breakouts, inflamed lesions, or moderate-to-severe rosacea, the blade can aggravate inflammation or spread bacteria. Once your skin is clear and calm, dermaplaning can be a gentle addition to your routine. - **Can I combine it with other treatments?** Yes, dermaplaning is often paired with a mild peel, LED, or hydrating facial in the same session. Because it removes dead skin, it enhances the penetration of any actives applied afterwards. ### Dermalux LED Treatment URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/dermalux-led **Tagline:** Medical LED therapy for skin healing and glow Dermalux LED is a non-invasive light therapy treatment that uses clinically proven wavelengths to stimulate cellular activity, promote healing, and improve overall skin health. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None, a relaxing experience - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Monthly for ongoing results - Duration: 60-75 minutes - Results: Immediate glow - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - FDA- and CE-approved: A globally trusted, safe, and effective treatment. - Anti-bacterial: Reduces acne by targeting bacteria and inflammation. - Rejuvenates Skin: Stimulates collagen for firmer, smoother skin. - Eases Rosacea and Redness: Soothes irritated skin and reduces sensitivity. - Accelerates Healing: Promotes recovery after treatments like chemical peels or microneedling. - Versatile: Suitable for all skin types and can be combined with other treatments. - Boosts Skin Health: Encourages vitamin D production, cell regeneration, and serotonin release for radiant, healthier skin. **Ideal for:** Clients with inflammatory acne, rosacea, redness, sensitivity, or slow post-procedure recovery, and anyone looking for a relaxing, completely non-invasive skin-health treatment that pairs beautifully with microneedling, peels, or laser. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 24-48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin for maximum light penetration - Avoid photosensitising products 48 hours prior (retinoids, some AHAs, strong vitamin C) - Avoid tanning beds and aggressive sun exposure in the 3 days before - Remove contact lenses before treatment, we provide protective eyewear **Aftercare:** - Keep hydrated with 2 litres of water daily - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, while LED itself contains no UV, good sun protection supports the collagen response - Resume normal skincare immediately, no restrictions on makeup or actives - If combined with another treatment (peel, microneedling, laser), follow that treatment's aftercare instructions - Avoid very hot showers, saunas, or steam rooms for a few hours if you feel warm (rare) - Book sessions in a consistent cadence (weekly or bi-weekly) for cumulative anti-ageing, anti-inflammatory or acne benefits **FAQs:** - **What are the different LED wavelengths and what do they do?** Dermalux uses three clinically proven wavelengths: Blue (415nm) kills P. acnes bacteria and calms active breakouts; Red (633nm) stimulates fibroblasts and collagen for anti-ageing; Near-Infrared (830nm) penetrates deepest to accelerate healing and reduce inflammation. Most sessions combine all three in a multi-wavelength programme tailored to your concerns. - **Is LED just a wellness trend, or is there science behind it?** LED phototherapy is backed by over 30 years of clinical research, originally developed by NASA for wound healing. Dermalux is a medical CE Class IIa device used in dermatology clinics globally for acne, rosacea, eczema, psoriasis, and post-laser recovery. - **What does a session feel like?** Completely relaxing. You lie beneath a large LED canopy for 20 minutes while warm, bright light bathes your skin. There is no heat, no discomfort, and no UV, you can close your eyes and rest. - **How many sessions will I need?** For acute concerns (active acne, inflammation, post-procedure healing) we recommend 2-3 sessions per week for 4 weeks. For anti-ageing and maintenance, weekly sessions for 6-8 weeks, then fortnightly. Results build cumulatively, consistency is key. - **Can it be used with other treatments?** Yes. LED is often added to the same session as a facial, microneedling, peel, or laser to accelerate recovery, reduce post-treatment redness, and enhance collagen response. There are virtually no contraindications with other aesthetic treatments. - **Who should avoid LED therapy?** Anyone taking photosensitising medications (e.g. isotretinoin, certain antibiotics, St John's wort), those with active skin cancer, epilepsy triggered by flashing light, or lupus should avoid or get medical clearance. Always tell your therapist about current medications. ### Biomedical Microneedling URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/aesthetic-facials/bio-growth-factors **Tagline:** Medical-grade microneedling with targeted active serums Bio-Growth Factors Complex is a regenerative treatment that utilizes bioactive growth factors to stimulate cellular repair, collagen synthesis, and skin rejuvenation. It can be delivered via microneedling or topical application. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None, a relaxing experience - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Monthly for ongoing results - Duration: 60-75 minutes - Results: Immediate glow - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - Visible improvement in skin tone, texture and radiance - Reduction in early signs of aging: fine lines, uneven tone, enlarged pores - Repair of UV and environmental damage at a molecular (DNA) level - Enhanced collagen & elastin activation for firmer, healthier-looking skin - Ideal as a premium “maintenance” treatment to support long-term skin health and aesthetic longevity **Ideal for:** Adults in their late 20s to 50s who are starting to notice skin fatigue, dullness, early fine lines, or slower recovery after peels and laser, and want a science-led regenerative boost as part of a long-term skin health plan. **Indications:** - Are beginning to notice signs of aging or skin fatigue and want proactive renewal - Have had environmental or sun-exposure damage and seek skin recovery at a deeper level - Wish to combine high-end science, advanced bio-technology and visible results in their skin care - Want to improve recovery and repair after clinical treatments - Already invest in their skin and seek clinic-level treatments beyond standard facials **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Active inflammatory skin conditions - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - History of keloid scarring - Recent isotretinoin use (6 months) - Allergy to product components - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to prime skin hydration - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliating scrubs 3-5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure and tanning beds for 1 week before - Skip aspirin, ibuprofen, and high-dose fish oil/vitamin E for 24-48 hours (for microneedling delivery) unless medically required - Arrive with a clean, bare face, no makeup, SPF, or heavy serums on the treatment area - Let us know of any cold sore history, active breakouts, or recent injectables (we recommend spacing Botox/filler by at least 2 weeks) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support cellular repair and product uptake - Use only a gentle cleanser and bland hyaluronic or ceramide moisturiser for 48 hours - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, reapplied every 2 hours outdoors, for at least 2 weeks - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, intense cardio) for 24-48 hours - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 5-7 days - Skip makeup for 24 hours if delivered via microneedling; topical infusion clients can apply mineral makeup from day 1 - Do not pick, scrub, or aggressively exfoliate, let the skin recover naturally - Return for your next session in the recommended 4-week window to maintain the cumulative collagen response **FAQs:** - **What exactly are growth factors, and why are they used on the skin?** Growth factors are naturally occurring signalling proteins that instruct skin cells to repair, renew, and produce collagen. Applied topically or delivered via microneedling, they mimic the signals your skin loses with age and environmental damage, prompting faster cellular turnover and visible rejuvenation. - **Will this be delivered via microneedling or as a topical infusion?** Both options are offered. If you have active lines, scarring, or texture concerns, we typically pair the growth factor complex with microneedling for deeper delivery. If you simply want a radiance boost or are post-procedure, a topical infusion with LED is gentler and has no downtime. - **How soon will I see results and how long do they last?** You will notice a healthier glow and smoother texture within 5-7 days. Collagen remodelling continues over 6-8 weeks, with peak results at 3 months. Most clients book a course of 3-4 sessions spaced 4 weeks apart, then maintenance every 2-3 months. - **Is this different from PRP or exosomes?** PRP uses growth factors isolated from your own blood. Exosomes are tiny vesicles that carry messenger signals between cells. Our Bio-Growth Factors Complex is a cosmeceutical blend of bio-identical peptides and growth factors, ethical, shelf-stable, and consistent. Your practitioner will recommend the best option based on your goals. - **Is it safe during pregnancy?** We do not offer this treatment during pregnancy or breastfeeding. While the ingredients are generally considered safe, there is limited clinical data in these populations and we prefer to err on the side of caution. ## Advanced Peels > Reveal fresh, renewed skin beneath Our range of chemical peels removes damaged outer layers to reveal smoother, brighter, more even-toned skin underneath. From gentle brightening peels to deeper resurfacing treatments, we match the peel to your skin's needs. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-peels ### Cosmelan Depigmentation URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-peels/cosmelan-peel **Tagline:** The gold standard for stubborn pigmentation Cosmelan is the world's leading professional depigmentation treatment, effective against all types of dark spots including melasma, sun damage, and post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation. This intensive programme delivers dramatic results for even the most stubborn pigmentation. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Warmth and slight stinging - Downtime: 5-7 days of peeling - Sessions: Single in-clinic session + home programme - Duration: In-clinic application takes 30 minutes - Results: Significant within 2-4 weeks - Frequency: Once, with maintenance programme **Benefits:** - Most effective pigmentation treatment available - Tackles melasma and deep pigmentation - Long-lasting results with maintenance - Suitable for all skin types - Clinically proven worldwide **How it works:** The Cosmelan masque is applied in-clinic and left on for a prescribed period. It contains a potent blend of depigmenting agents that inhibit melanin production at a cellular level. You continue treatment at home with the Cosmelan 2 cream to maintain and enhance results. **Ideal for:** Those with stubborn pigmentation, melasma, or dark spots that have not responded to other treatments **Indications:** - Melasma (including stubborn, recurring patches) - Post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation from acne or trauma - Sun damage and age spots - Uneven skin tone across the face - Pigmentation that has not responded to other treatments **Not suitable for:** - Active skin infection or open wounds in the treatment area - Known allergy to any Cosmelan ingredients - Pregnancy and breastfeeding - Very sensitive or compromised skin barrier - Recent aggressive treatments such as laser or deep peels (requires healing time) **Pre-treatment care:** - Avoid sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for at least 2 weeks before treatment - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and active skincare for 5-7 days prior - Do not undergo laser, waxing, or aggressive treatments on the same area - Skin should be calm, no active irritation, inflammation, or infection - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Inform your practitioner about any medications or skin conditions - Maintain good hydration for optimal skin response **Aftercare:** - Follow the prescribed Cosmelan home-care protocol strictly as instructed - Redness, tightness, and peeling are expected and part of the treatment process - Do not pick, peel, or scrub the skin - Avoid sun exposure completely and apply SPF 50+ strictly and repeatedly - Avoid heat (sauna, steam, hot showers) and exercise for 48 hours - Avoid makeup for the first 24-48 hours or as advised - Discontinue all active skincare unless prescribed - Maintain hydration and a gentle skincare routine - Strict sun protection and compliance are essential to prevent rebound pigmentation and ensure optimal results **FAQs:** - **Why is Cosmelan so effective for melasma?** Cosmelan works by inhibiting the enzyme tyrosinase, which is responsible for melanin production. Unlike treatments that only address existing pigment, Cosmelan prevents new melanin from forming, which is why it is so effective for recurring conditions like melasma. ### Alkaline Peel URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-peels/alkaline-peel **Tagline:** Powerful exfoliation for stubborn skin concerns Alkaline peeling is a non-invasive treatment that uses a PH-balanced alkaline solution to cleanse and exfoliate the skin. Unlike traditional chemical peels, alkaline peels are gentle and work effectively to remove dead skin cells, unclog pores, and soften the skin without causing damage. This treatment also targets excess sebum, acne-causing bacteria, and pigmentation, making it ideal for problem-prone or sensitive skin. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild tingling - Downtime: Light flaking for 3-5 days - Sessions: Course of 3-6 recommended - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Visible after the first session - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Deep Cleansing: Neutralizes excess oil and bacteria, reducing acne and preventing breakouts. - Improves Skin Tone: Diminishes pigmentation, dark spots, and uneven tone while brightening the skin. - Anti-Aging Effects: Boosts collagen production, smooths fine lines, and restores firmness. - Safe for Sensitive Skin: Gentle and non-irritating, ideal for delicate or reactive skin types. - Hair Removal and Smoother Texture: Softens hair roots for effective removal and leaves the skin silky smooth. - Body Benefits: Effective for dry areas like elbows, knees, and heels, improving texture and reducing roughness. **Ideal for:** Adults with congested, acne-prone, oily, or thickened skin, mild pigmentation, or sensitive skin that does not tolerate traditional acid peels, and anyone wanting a deeply cleansing professional peel with a different mechanism of action. **Indications:** - Acne and congestion - Pigmentation and uneven tone - Fine lines and early aging - Textural irregularities - Oily or thickened skin **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Compromised or sensitive skin barrier - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - Recent isotretinoin use (within 6 months) - Severe rosacea or dermatitis - Allergy to peel components - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid sun exposure and tanning for 1 week before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Do not wax, thread, or epilate the treatment area for 48 hours before - Tell us about any photosensitising medications, recent peels, laser, or isotretinoin use **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support skin renewal - Apply a gentle, fragrance-free barrier moisturiser 2-3 times daily until peeling completes - Apply SPF 50+ every morning for at least 2 weeks, freshly exfoliated skin is highly photosensitive - Expect mild redness, tightness, or light peeling for 3-5 days - Do not pick or exfoliate the flaking skin, let it slough naturally - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 5-7 days - Avoid heat (saunas, steam rooms, hot yoga) for 48 hours - Skip makeup for 24-48 hours to let the skin renew - Book your next session at 2-4 weeks for cumulative improvement **FAQs:** - **How is an alkaline peel different from an acid peel?** Most professional peels use acids (glycolic, lactic, salicylic, TCA) to exfoliate. An alkaline peel works in the opposite direction on the pH scale, using an alkaline solution to break down the protein bonds holding dead skin cells together. This allows deep cleansing and exfoliation without the inflammatory response acids can cause, making it particularly suitable for sensitive or reactive skin. - **Is it gentler than a traditional peel?** For sensitive and reactive skin, yes. There is less stinging and less visible peeling than a comparable acid peel. For deep wrinkles and advanced ageing, acid peels or TCA are more aggressive and therefore deliver more dramatic change. Your therapist will recommend the right modality. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 4-6 sessions spaced 2-4 weeks apart. Results build progressively, clearer pores, brighter tone, smoother texture. Maintenance every 1-2 months preserves the result. - **Can it be used on the body?** Yes. Alkaline peeling is particularly effective on body areas prone to thickening and roughness, elbows, knees, heels, and keratosis pilaris on the backs of arms or thighs. - **Can I combine it with other treatments?** Yes, alkaline peels pair well with LED, microneedling, hydrating facials, or Dermalux. We often use them as a skin prep before deeper treatments. - **Is it safe for darker skin tones?** Yes. Alkaline peels carry a lower risk of post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation than traditional acid peels, making them a useful option across Fitzpatrick I - VI. ### Glycolic Acid Peel URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-peels/glycolic-acid-peel **Tagline:** Smooth texture and reveal radiance A glycolic acid peel is a professional exfoliating treatment designed to dissolve surface skin cells and promote rapid cell turnover. Due to its deep-penetrating properties, glycolic acid is ideal for treating uneven skin tone, fine lines, and hyperpigmentation. At Ivory Aesthetics Clinic, we utilize this targeted approach to enhance both skin tone and texture, delivering radiant, refined results with minimal downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild tingling - Downtime: Light flaking for 3-5 days - Sessions: Course of 3-6 recommended - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Visible after the first session - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Superficial exfoliation - Improves skin tone and texture - Brightens complexion - Reduces fine lines and mild pigmentation - Enhances product absorption **Ideal for:** Adults with dull, uneven skin tone, mild pigmentation, enlarged pores, fine lines, or early ageing, and those wanting a versatile, well-tolerated AHA peel suitable for monthly maintenance and a reliable brightening boost. **Indications:** - Dull or uneven skin tone - Mild pigmentation - Fine lines - Acne-prone skin - Enlarged pores **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Sensitive or compromised skin barrier - Recent isotretinoin use (within 6 months) - Severe rosacea or dermatitis - Allergy to AHA products - Recent aggressive treatments **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Discontinue retinoids, other AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 2 weeks before - Do not wax, thread, or epilate the area for 48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Tell us about photosensitising medications (doxycycline, isotretinoin, St John's wort) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support skin renewal - Apply a fragrance-free barrier moisturiser morning and night for at least 3 days - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, reapplied every 2 hours outdoors, for at least 2 weeks - Expect mild redness, tightness, or light flaking for 3-5 days - Do not pick or scrub the flaking skin - Pause retinoids, other AHAs/BHAs, and vitamin C for 5-7 days - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) for 24-48 hours - Skip makeup for 24 hours; mineral makeup thereafter - Book your next session in 2-4 weeks for cumulative brightening **FAQs:** - **What is glycolic acid and why is it so popular?** Glycolic acid is an alpha-hydroxy acid (AHA) derived from sugar cane. It has the smallest molecule size of any AHA, which means it penetrates deeply and effectively. It works by dissolving the bonds between dead skin cells, promoting rapid cell turnover, stimulating collagen, and delivering a smoother, brighter complexion. - **What strength do you use?** We use professional concentrations ranging from 20% to 70% depending on your skin type, concerns, and peel history. Beginners start at 20-30%; experienced clients with tougher pigmentation or ageing concerns may graduate to 50-70%. Always customised at consultation. - **How is it different from lactic or mandelic acid?** All are AHAs. Glycolic has the smallest molecule, most penetrating, most anti-ageing effect, but also more potential for irritation. Lactic acid is larger, more hydrating, gentler on sensitive skin. Mandelic is largest, gentlest, and best for Fitzpatrick V - VI. Your therapist will pick the right one for your skin. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 4-6 sessions spaced 2-4 weeks apart. Results are progressive, smoother texture, brighter tone, and refined pores build across the course. Monthly maintenance preserves the effect. - **Will my skin peel visibly?** At lower concentrations, light flaking for 2-3 days. At 50%+ strengths, visible peeling for 5-7 days is expected. We'll prepare you with the right expectations based on your peel. - **Is it safe for darker skin tones?** Yes, but with priming. For Fitzpatrick IV - VI we recommend 2-4 weeks of tyrosinase inhibitors (kojic acid, arbutin) before the first peel and build concentration gradually to avoid post-inflammatory pigmentation. ### Lactic Acid Peel URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-peels/lactic-acid-peel **Tagline:** Gentle hydration and exfoliation A lactic acid peel is a professional exfoliating treatment that uses lactic acid to remove damaged surface layers of the skin, promoting cell turnover and revealing fresh, healthier skin underneath. Known for being milder than other chemical peels, it is perfect for sensitive skin types or those new to chemical exfoliation. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild tingling - Downtime: Light flaking for 3-5 days - Sessions: Course of 3-6 recommended - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Visible after the first session - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Gentle exfoliation - Hydrating and brightening effect - Improves skin tone and texture - Radiant glow - Refined pores - Minimal downtime **Ideal for:** Adults with dry, dehydrated, sensitive, or reactive skin, dull complexion, or those new to chemical peels, and a safe, well-tolerated option for clients in desert climates like the UAE who struggle with moisture loss. **Indications:** - Dry or dehydrated skin - Sensitive skin - Dull complexion - Mild pigmentation - Early signs of aging **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Compromised skin barrier - Severe rosacea or dermatitis - Allergy to AHA products - Recent aggressive treatments - Recent isotretinoin use (within 6 months) **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Discontinue retinoids, other AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure and tanning for 1 week before - Do not wax, thread, or epilate the area for 48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Tell us about milk allergy, photosensitising medications or any recent peels/laser **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support hydration - Apply a rich, fragrance-free hydrating moisturiser morning and night for 3-5 days - Apply SPF 50+ every morning for at least 2 weeks - Expect mild redness and minor flaking for 2-4 days, usually less than with glycolic - Do not pick or scrub the skin - Pause retinoids, other AHAs/BHAs, and vitamin C for 3-5 days - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) for 24-48 hours - Skip makeup for 24 hours; mineral makeup thereafter - Book your next session in 2-4 weeks for cumulative results **FAQs:** - **How is lactic acid different from glycolic acid?** Both are alpha-hydroxy acids. Lactic acid has a larger molecule, so it penetrates more slowly, making it gentler than glycolic. It also has a natural hydrating effect (lactic acid is part of the skin's natural moisturising factor), so it brightens without drying. Ideal for dehydrated or sensitive skin. - **Is it a good first peel?** Excellent. Lactic acid is often the first professional peel we recommend for clients new to chemical exfoliation, gentle, hydrating, low irritation. You get brightening and smoother texture without the stronger reaction glycolic or TCA can cause. - **Will it help with pigmentation?** For mild surface pigmentation and dullness, yes. For stubborn melasma or deep post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation, stronger peels (TCA, Cosmelan) or laser are more effective. Lactic acid is ideal as a maintenance or first-line brightening treatment. - **What strength do you use?** Professional lactic peels range from 30% to 88% depending on your skin and concerns. Most clients start at 30-50% and build tolerance. We always patch test and discuss expectations before first peel. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 4-6 sessions spaced 2-4 weeks apart for visible improvement. Monthly maintenance preserves the hydration and glow. - **Is it safe for rosacea or eczema-prone skin?** For stable, non-active cases, often yes, at lower strengths, and it can even help with mild barrier repair. For active flares, we delay treatment. Your therapist will assess carefully. ### Salicylic Acid Peel URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-peels/salicylic-acid-peel **Tagline:** Clear blemishes and refine pores A Salicylic Acid Peel is an exfoliating facial that uses salicylic acid, a beta hydroxy acid (BHA), to break down the bonds between skin cells, allowing dead skin to shed and revealing fresh, new skin. As a lipid- soluble acid with Anti- Bacterial and Anti-Inflammatory properties, it works effectively to unclog pores, treat acne, and improve overall skin tone and texture. Salicylic peels come in two types: At-home peels: Mild salicylic acid products (up to 20%) gently exfoliate the top layers of skin. Professional peels: Stronger treatments (30%-50%) used by dermatologists or estheticians for deeper skin rejuvenation. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild tingling - Downtime: Light flaking for 3-5 days - Sessions: Course of 3-6 recommended - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Visible after the first session - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Brighter, Smoother Skin: Removes dead skin cells, improving texture and creating a more radiant complexion. - Shrinks Pores: Unclogs pores and helps reduce their size, promoting clearer skin. - Treats Acne and Blackheads: Reduces acne and prevents future breakouts by keeping pores clear. - Reduces Sun Damage and Fine Lines: Softens fine lines and helps improve sun-damaged skin. - Fades Dark Spots and Uneven Skin Tone: Helps reduce melasma, freckles, and post-acne pigmentation. **Ideal for:** Adults with oily, acne-prone skin, blackheads, whiteheads, enlarged pores, or post-inflammatory marks from past breakouts, particularly those whose congestion sits deep within the pores where oil-soluble acids are needed. **Indications:** - Acne-prone skin - Oily or congested skin - Blackheads and whiteheads - Enlarged pores - Post-inflammatory pigmentation **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Allergy to salicylates (aspirin) - Pregnancy (relative contraindication) - Severe skin sensitivity - Recent aggressive treatments - Use of isotretinoin within 6 months **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Discontinue retinoids, other AHAs/BHAs, benzoyl peroxide, and exfoliating scrubs 5 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure and tanning for 1 week before - Do not wax, thread, or epilate the area for 48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Tell us about any aspirin allergy, photosensitising medications, or isotretinoin use **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for a week to support skin renewal - Apply an oil-free, non-comedogenic moisturiser 1-2 times daily until peeling completes - Apply SPF 50+ (mineral, oil-free formulations for acne-prone skin) every morning for at least 2 weeks - Expect mild peeling, dryness, or tight feeling for 3-5 days, more localised around congested areas - Do not pick, scrub, or squeeze any breakouts - Pause retinoids, benzoyl peroxide, and acids for 5-7 days - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, intense cardio with sweat) for 24-48 hours - Skip makeup for 24 hours; mineral makeup thereafter - Book your next session in 2-4 weeks for cumulative clearing of congestion and pores **FAQs:** - **Why is salicylic acid so good for acne?** Salicylic acid is a beta-hydroxy acid (BHA), uniquely oil-soluble, meaning it penetrates into the sebum inside clogged pores rather than just working on the skin surface. It dissolves oil and dead cell debris from within the pore, kills acne-causing bacteria, and reduces inflammation, addressing acne at the source. - **How is it different from glycolic or lactic acid?** Glycolic and lactic (AHAs) are water-soluble, they exfoliate the surface. Salicylic (BHA) is oil-soluble, it cleans out pores from within. For oily, congested, acne-prone skin, BHA is often more effective; for dry, dull, pigmented skin, AHA is usually preferred. Your therapist will recommend based on skin type. - **What strength do you use?** Professional salicylic peels range from 20% to 30%. We start at 20% for beginners and may progress to 30% depending on tolerance and results. Stronger in-clinic than over-the-counter products. - **Will it help with acne scars?** It helps fade post-inflammatory pigmentation (the flat dark marks left after breakouts). For textural acne scars (pitted, rolling, boxcar), stronger treatments like microneedling, TCA cross, or fractional laser are needed. Salicylic is excellent for active acne and PIH. - **Can I use it if I'm on acne medication?** Most topical acne medications pair well with occasional salicylic peels, in fact, they are often combined. You must stop them 5 days before each peel. If you're on oral isotretinoin, we do not peel, wait at least 6 months after completing the course. - **Is it safe if I'm allergic to aspirin?** Salicylic acid is chemically related to aspirin. If you have a true aspirin allergy, we use an alternative peel (mandelic, alkaline). Always mention allergies at consultation. ### Vitamin C Peel URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-peels/vitamin-c-peel **Tagline:** Brighten and protect with antioxidant-rich formula The Syntha C Peel is a Vitamin C-infused skin treatment that gently exfoliates the outer layers of skin, removing dead skin cells to reveal a fresher, more radiant complexion. Enriched with Vitamins A, C, and E, this peel nourishes the skin, stimulates collagen production, and helps to protect against environmental damage. Vitamin C in the peel is 20 times more effective when applied topically than when ingested orally, delivering enhanced rejuvenation and protection. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild tingling - Downtime: Light flaking for 3-5 days - Sessions: Course of 3-6 recommended - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Visible after the first session - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Brighter, Even Complexion: Helps reduce pigmentation and promote a more even skin tone. - Skin Rejuvenation: Stimulates collagen production for firmer, more youthful-looking skin. - Hydration & Nourishment: Deeply hydrates and revitalizes the skin, leaving it plump and glowing. - Reduced Fine Lines & Wrinkles: Smoothens and tightens the skin for a fresher appearance. - Minimal Downtime: The treatment is gentle with virtually no recovery time, making it perfect for a quick skin refresh. **Ideal for:** Adults with dull, sun-damaged, or pigmentation-prone skin seeking a brightening, antioxidant-rich treatment, ideal for clients wanting a glow-boosting peel with minimal downtime and a pleasant sensory experience. **Indications:** - The Syntha C Peel is ideal for most skin types, particularly those with dry, dehydrated, or aging skin. It is also beneficial for individuals with pigmentation concerns, such as sun damage, acne scars, or uneven skin tone. If you're looking to rejuvenate your skin and protect it from environmental damage, this peel is a great option. **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Severe inflammatory skin conditions - Allergy to Vitamin C or formulation components - Compromised skin barrier - Recent aggressive treatments **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliating scrubs 3-5 days prior - Avoid sun exposure and tanning for 1 week before - Do not wax, thread, or epilate the area for 48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Tell us about any citrus or ascorbic acid allergies - Space from any other recent peel, laser, or aggressive treatment by at least 2 weeks **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days - Apply a fragrance-free hydrating moisturiser morning and night for 3-5 days - Apply SPF 50+ every morning for at least 2 weeks, vitamin C enhances the skin's photoprotection but does not replace SPF - Continue with topical vitamin C serum as part of your home routine for cumulative brightening - Expect mild flaking or dryness for 2-3 days - Do not pick or scrub the flaking skin - Pause retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and scrubs for 3 days - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga) for 24 hours - Skip makeup for 24 hours if possible; mineral formulations thereafter - Book your next session in 2-3 weeks for cumulative glow **FAQs:** - **How does a vitamin C peel work?** The Syntha C Peel uses a high-concentration blend of Vitamins A, C, and E, with vitamin C as the primary active. Topical vitamin C is up to 20 times more effective on the skin than oral supplementation. It brightens pigmentation, neutralises free radicals from sun and pollution, and stimulates collagen, all while delivering antioxidant protection. - **Is this a true chemical peel or more of a treatment mask?** It is a gentle-to-medium chemical peel with strong antioxidant support. You'll get the exfoliation and cellular turnover of a peel plus the protective benefits of topical vitamin therapy. Less aggressive than glycolic or TCA, more comfortable with a feel-good sensory experience. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 4-6 sessions spaced 2-3 weeks apart. Results build progressively, brighter tone, fewer dark spots, plumper skin. Maintenance every 4-6 weeks keeps the antioxidant protection and glow. - **Will my skin peel visibly?** Typically light flaking for 2-3 days, subtler than glycolic or TCA. A popular choice for pre-event treatments because there's minimal social downtime. - **Is it safe for all skin tones?** Yes. Vitamin C is well-tolerated across Fitzpatrick I - VI and actually helps prevent post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation, making it an excellent choice for darker skin tones. - **Can I combine it with other treatments?** Yes, vitamin C peels pair beautifully with LED, microneedling, or hydrating facials. We often use them to amplify pigmentation protocols (before or after stronger peels) or as a pre-event glow boost. ### TCA Peel URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-peels/tca-peel **Tagline:** Deep-acting peel for visible transformation The TCA peel uses trichloroacetic acid, a derivative of vinegar, to exfoliate the outer layers of the skin. By removing dead skin cells and damaged tissue, it stimulates new cell growth and reveals fresher, healthier skin underneath. Peels can range from light (10-15%) to medium (20-35%) or deep (30-35%), allowing customized treatment for various skin issues. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild tingling - Downtime: Light flaking for 3-5 days - Sessions: Course of 3-6 recommended - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Visible after the first session - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Reduces age spots, brown spots, and melasma. - Improves skin texture and elasticity. - Smooths fine lines and wrinkles. - Diminishes acne scars and hyperpigmentation. - Boosts skin hydration for a more radiant complexion. **Ideal for:** Adults with moderate-to-deep pigmentation, melasma, acne scars, fine lines, or significant sun damage who want a more transformative peel than AHA/BHA options and are prepared for 5-10 days of visible peeling and recovery. **Indications:** - Moderate pigmentation and melasma - Acne scars - Fine lines and wrinkles - Uneven skin tone and texture - Sun damage **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Recent isotretinoin use (within 6-12 months) - History of keloid scarring - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - Active herpes infection - Severe skin sensitivity - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Discontinue retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, benzoyl peroxide, and exfoliating scrubs 7 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 4 weeks before - For Fitzpatrick IV - VI skin, pre-treat with a tyrosinase inhibitor (hydroquinone, kojic acid, arbutin) for 2-4 weeks before - Start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before (even without cold sore history, we often prescribe for TCA) - Arrive with a clean, bare face - Plan 5-7 days of social downtime after each session - Tell us about isotretinoin use (must be at least 6 months post-treatment) **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for 10 days to support healing - Apply the prescribed bland healing balm (e.g. Cicaplast) every 2-3 hours for the first 48 hours - Apply SPF 50+ mineral sunscreen strictly every morning once the skin is intact, for at least 4 weeks - Expect redness, tightness, darkening, and sheet-like peeling for 5-10 days - Do NOT pick or peel the skin, let it slough naturally - Avoid sun exposure strictly for 4 weeks, the newly healed skin pigments easily - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 10 days; restart gradually with niacinamide - From day 7, restart tyrosinase inhibitors to prevent rebound pigmentation - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, intense exercise/sweat) for 72 hours and sun for 4 weeks - Mineral makeup only, from day 5 onwards once skin is intact - Book your next session at the recommended 4-6 week interval, full healing must be complete - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) to minimise bruising - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Plan for a quiet 3-5 days, no gym, no long flights, no deep-tissue massage - For buttock or thigh work, plan how you will sit and sleep for the first 48 hours (avoid prolonged pressure on the area) - Tell your doctor about any blood-thinning medications or previous filler/surgery in the area - Avoid pressure on the treated area for 48-72 hours, no sitting for long periods if buttocks were treated, no sleeping on the area - Drink 2 litres of water daily for the first week to support filler integration - Avoid intense exercise, saunas, hot tubs, and hot yoga for 72 hours - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours - Mild swelling, tenderness, and bruising are normal for 3-7 days, arnica helps - Wear loose, breathable clothing, no tight compression garments on the treated area unless specifically instructed - Review at 2 weeks, your doctor can top up if additional volume is needed - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, RF works best on well-hydrated tissue - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before; avoid fasting - Avoid alcohol the night before and the day of your session - Arrive with clean skin, free of body lotion, oil, or self-tanner on the treatment area - Wear loose, comfortable clothing - Avoid aggressive scrubs or exfoliation on the treatment area 3 days before - Inform us of any pacemaker, ICD, or metal implants in or near the treatment area, these are contraindications - If pregnant, breastfeeding, or within 3 months of delivery, we'll delay or adjust the protocol - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling and lymphatic clearance of fat - Apply a hydrating body moisturiser to the treated area for 3-5 days - Avoid direct sun exposure on treated areas and apply SPF 50+ daily - Avoid hot showers, saunas, steam rooms, and intense cardio for 24 hours - Light activity immediately; no heavy lifting for 24 hours - Mild warmth, pinkness, or a 'post-workout' feeling is normal for a few hours - Maintain balanced nutrition and regular exercise to lock in contouring results - Book your next session at 2-3 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course delivers the result - Drink at least 1.5-2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before, muscles and skin respond better when well-hydrated - Eat a normal meal 1-2 hours before your session; the muscle stimulation can be tiring on an empty stomach - Remove all jewelry and piercings in the treatment area - Tell us about any pacemaker, ICD, cochlear implant, or metal facial implants (these are contraindications) - Space Body fillers, or Profhilo body by at least 2 weeks from your Emsculpt session - Stay well-hydrated before and after each session - Expect mild muscle soreness for 24-48 hours, this is normal - Maintain a balanced diet to amplify fat-reduction results - Regular movement and core exercise supports the new muscle gains - Results build over 3 months as your body adapts and fat cells clear - Drink 2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before to improve RF conductivity - Skip moisturiser, body oil, and self-tanner on the treatment area on the day of your session - Avoid sunburn or aggressive tanning for 1 week prior - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before, do not arrive fasting - Tell us about any pacemakers, metal implants in the treatment area, or recent surgery - Drink 2 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling - Apply SPF 50+ to any treated areas exposed to sun for 1 week - Keep up with the recommended weekly cadence, the cumulative effect across 4 sessions is what delivers visible tightening - Maintain results with 1 session every 1-2 months - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, hydration supports lymphatic clearance of broken-down tissue - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) to minimise bruising - Arrive with clean, bare skin on the treatment area - Plan for a quiet 3-7 days, swelling and bruising are common - Wear loose clothing on the day, avoid tight waistbands or compression on the treated area - Tell your doctor about any enzyme allergies or blood-thinning medications - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for 7-10 days to support lymphatic clearance - Apply cold compresses for the first 24 hours to reduce swelling - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot tubs) and alcohol for 48 hours - Avoid strenuous exercise for 48 hours - Avoid aggressive massage of the area unless specifically instructed - Gentle manual lymphatic drainage from day 3 can enhance results - Expect swelling, firmness, and tenderness for 5-10 days, this is part of the mechanism - Mild bruising is common and resolves within 2 weeks; arnica helps - Apply SPF 50+ if the area is sun-exposed - Book your next session at the recommended 2-4 week interval - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Plan a quiet 1-2 days, mild swelling - Wear loose, breathable clothing, no tight compression garments on the treated area unless specifically instructed - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support booster uptake - Do not massage, press, or rub the treated area for 24-48 hours, let the micro-bumps disperse naturally - Avoid tight clothing or compression garments on the area for 24 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot tubs, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Mild swelling or injection-site bumps for 24 hours are normal and resolve quickly - Apply SPF 50+ on sun-exposed treated areas - Book your second session at 4 weeks to complete the course **FAQs:** - **What is TCA and what makes it more powerful?** Trichloroacetic Acid (TCA) is a medical peeling agent that penetrates deeper than AHAs or BHAs, reaching the mid-dermis depending on concentration. Light TCA (10-15%) addresses surface concerns. Medium TCA (20-35%) reaches deeper, treating pigmentation, acne scars, and wrinkles. Deep TCA (30-35% blended with other agents) delivers transformative change with more significant downtime. - **How is this different from a vitamin C or glycolic peel?** Vitamin C and glycolic peels work on the epidermis with minimal downtime and cumulative results. TCA reaches the papillary-to-reticular dermis in a single session, producing more dramatic change in pigmentation, texture, and wrinkles, but with significant visible peeling for 5-10 days. - **What does recovery look like day by day?** Day 1: skin feels tight, looks pink/bronzed. Days 2-3: visible darkening of pigmented areas, skin tightens further. Days 4-6: sheets of skin peel away, do not pick. Day 7-10: fresh, bright skin emerges with ongoing mild pinkness. Plan 5-7 days of minimal social exposure. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 3-4 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart for most concerns. Deeper scarring or stubborn pigmentation may need 6. We start conservatively and build concentration across the course. - **Is it safe for darker skin tones?** TCA must be used cautiously on Fitzpatrick IV - VI because of rebound hyperpigmentation risk. We prime with tyrosinase inhibitors (hydroquinone, kojic acid, arbutin) for 2-4 weeks before and use conservative concentrations. For some Fitzpatrick V - VI clients, we'll recommend non-ablative RF resurfacing or Cosmelan as safer alternatives. - **Can it treat melasma?** Yes, TCA is one of the effective treatments for melasma when paired with strict priming, sun protection, and topical maintenance. Be aware: melasma is chronic and hormonally driven, so ongoing management is needed. Cosmelan is our preferred flagship for melasma. ## Signature Body > Sculpt, smooth, and transform your body From stubborn fat reduction to cellulite smoothing and muscle toning, our body treatments use the latest FDA-approved technology to help you achieve the silhouette you want without surgery. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/signature-body-treatments ### Body Fillers URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/body-filler **Tagline:** Sculpt and enhance your body contours Body filler is a non-surgical injectable treatment designed to restore volume, enhance contours, and improve proportions in various areas of the body. It provides an effective alternative to surgical procedures with minimal downtime and immediate results. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults seeking non-surgical body contouring, buttock enhancement, hip-dip correction, calf or thigh shaping, or décolleté rejuvenation, who are at or near a stable weight and want subtle, reversible results without surgery. **Indications:** - Buttock enhancement (non-surgical augmentation) - Hip dips correction - Thigh contouring - Calf augmentation - Décolleté rejuvenation - Body asymmetry correction **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) to minimise bruising - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Plan for a quiet 3-5 days, no gym, no long flights, no deep-tissue massage - For buttock or thigh work, plan how you will sit and sleep for the first 48 hours (avoid prolonged pressure on the area) - Tell your doctor about any blood-thinning medications or previous filler/surgery in the area **Aftercare:** - Avoid pressure on the treated area for 48-72 hours, no sitting for long periods if buttocks were treated, no sleeping on the area - Drink 2 litres of water daily for the first week to support filler integration - Avoid intense exercise, saunas, hot tubs, and hot yoga for 72 hours - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours - Mild swelling, tenderness, and bruising are normal for 3-7 days, arnica helps - Wear loose, breathable clothing, no tight compression garments on the treated area unless specifically instructed - Review at 2 weeks, your doctor can top up if additional volume is needed **FAQs:** - **What is body filler made of?** We use high-density hyaluronic acid (HA) body fillers (e.g. HyaCorp or similar) or calcium hydroxylapatite (Radiesse) depending on the area and goal. Both are safe, biodegradable, and have been used globally for years. HA can be reversed with hyaluronidase if needed. - **Is this a Brazilian Butt Lift alternative?** It is a non-surgical alternative for subtle volume and shaping of the buttocks or hip dips, not a full BBL replacement. Large-volume surgical fat transfer achieves more dramatic results but carries higher risks. Body filler is a safer, reversible, lower-downtime option for moderate enhancement. - **How much filler is needed?** Varies by area and goal. Hip dips might need 20-40ml per side. Buttock contouring can require 100-200ml or more. Your doctor will assess and recommend a conservative starting volume, you can always add more over multiple sessions. - **How long do body filler results last?** HA body fillers typically last 12-18 months. Radiesse lasts 12-18 months with some biostimulatory effect beyond that. Maintenance top-ups are typical. - **Is there downtime?** Expect mild swelling, bruising, and tenderness at injection sites for 3-7 days. Avoid intense exercise, sitting directly on treated buttocks, and pressure on the area for 48-72 hours. Most clients resume desk work the next day. - **Is it safe?** In experienced hands using established products, yes. Main risks are bruising, swelling, asymmetry, and rarely, vascular issues. We use cannula technique for large-volume work and carry hyaluronidase on-site for emergencies. ### PrimeX Body URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/prime-x-body **Tagline:** Advanced body contouring and skin tightening PrimeX Body by Alma Lasers is an FDA-approved, high-power body contouring platform combining proprietary Alma Ultrasound with high-frequency Radiofrequency. It is considered one of the most powerful non-invasive contouring devices in the world, capable of targeting fat, cellulite, and skin laxity simultaneously, making it a complete body reshaping solution. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4-6 sessions - Duration: 30-90 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Every 2-3 weeks **Benefits:** - FDA-cleared, high-power dual technology - Fat reduction + skin tightening in one device - Cellulite improvement - Post-weight loss tightening - Faster, stronger results than traditional RF - Safe for all skin types - Comfortable, non-invasive, and requires no downtime **Ideal for:** Adults with stubborn fat pockets resistant to diet and exercise, loose skin on the abdomen, thighs, arms, or back, or cellulite who want a powerful non-invasive contouring solution, particularly those post-pregnancy or post-weight-loss. **Indications:** - Individuals with stubborn fat areas resistant to diet/exercise - Loose skin on abdomen, thighs, arms, or back - Cellulite on thighs/buttocks - Postpartum or post-weight-loss skin tightening - Anyone wanting visible reshaping without surgery - Suitable for both men and women. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, RF works best on well-hydrated tissue - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before; avoid fasting - Avoid alcohol the night before and the day of your session - Arrive with clean skin, free of body lotion, oil, or self-tanner on the treatment area - Wear loose, comfortable clothing - Avoid aggressive scrubs or exfoliation on the treatment area 3 days before - Inform us of any pacemaker, ICD, or metal implants in or near the treatment area, these are contraindications - If pregnant, breastfeeding, or within 3 months of delivery, we'll delay or adjust the protocol **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling and lymphatic clearance of fat - Apply a hydrating body moisturiser to the treated area for 3-5 days - Avoid direct sun exposure on treated areas and apply SPF 50+ daily - Avoid hot showers, saunas, steam rooms, and intense cardio for 24 hours - Light activity immediately; no heavy lifting for 24 hours - Mild warmth, pinkness, or a 'post-workout' feeling is normal for a few hours - Maintain balanced nutrition and regular exercise to lock in contouring results - Book your next session at 2-3 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course delivers the result - Maintenace sessions are required for optimal lasting results **FAQs:** - **How does Prime-X Body combine RF and Ultrasound?** Prime-X pairs Alma's proprietary high-frequency radiofrequency with targeted ultrasound energy. The RF heats the deep tissue to stimulate collagen and shrink fat cells, while the ultrasound disrupts stubborn fat deposits mechanically. The combination tackles fat, cellulite, and laxity simultaneously, something most single-modality devices cannot do. - **How many sessions will I need?** Most clients see best results from a course of 4-6 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart. Postpartum or post-weight-loss clients may benefit from 8-10 sessions. Results continue to improve for 2-3 months after the final session as collagen remodels. - **Is it more effective than Viora RF Body or EMSCULPT NEO?** Different tools for different jobs. EMSCULPT NEO builds muscle AND reduces fat, best for toned bodies wanting definition. Viora RF Body focuses on skin tightening and mild cellulite. Prime-X Body has a more powerful RF + ultrasound combination, ideal for combined fat reduction AND skin tightening. Your practitioner will recommend the best fit based on your goals. - **What does the treatment feel like?** A deep, warm, massage-like sensation. Most clients find it relaxing. There is no pain and no numbing required. Sessions typically last 30-60 minutes per area. - **Is it safe for darker skin tones?** Yes. Because Prime-X uses radiofrequency and ultrasound (not light), it does not target melanin and is safe across all Fitzpatrick skin types. - **Can I resume exercise after?** Light activity the same day. Avoid intense cardio, heavy lifting, saunas, and hot yoga for 24 hours. In fact, regular exercise combined with the treatment amplifies results. ### Emsculpt Neo URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/emsculpt-neo **Tagline:** Build muscle and burn fat simultaneously The only treatment that simultaneously builds muscle and reduces fat. EMSCULPT NEO combines radiofrequency heating with high-intensity electromagnetic energy to deliver results equivalent to thousands of sit-ups or squats in just 30 minutes. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Intense but manageable contractions, no burning sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4 sessions recommended - Duration: 30 minutes per area - Results: Visible after 2-4 weeks - Frequency: Twice weekly for 2 weeks **Benefits:** - Burns fat and builds muscle simultaneously - 25% average fat reduction in treated area - 30% average muscle mass increase - Non-invasive with zero downtime - FDA-approved technology **How it works:** The EMSCULPT NEO applicator delivers radiofrequency energy to heat fat cells to the point of permanent destruction, while HIFEM energy triggers powerful muscle contractions that strengthen and tone. One session is equivalent to 20,000 muscle contractions. **Ideal for:** Those looking to tone specific body areas and reduce stubborn fat pockets without surgery **Indications:** - Building muscle tone and definition in the abdomen, buttocks, arms, thighs, or calves - Reducing localised fat pockets - Improving core strength - Enhancing body contour without downtime - Clients already active who want to amplify results **Not suitable for:** - Pregnancy - Implanted electronic devices (pacemakers, defibrillators) - Metal implants in the treatment area - Hernia in the treatment zone - Recent surgery in the area **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 1.5-2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before, muscles and skin respond better when well-hydrated - Eat a normal meal 1-2 hours before your session; the muscle stimulation can be tiring on an empty stomach - Remove all jewelry and piercings in the treatment area - Tell us about any pacemaker, ICD, cochlear implant, or metal facial implants (these are contraindications) - Space Body fillers, or Profhilo body by at least 2 weeks from your Emsculpt session **Aftercare:** - Stay well-hydrated before and after each session - Expect mild muscle soreness for 24-48 hours, this is normal - Maintain a balanced diet to amplify fat-reduction results - Regular movement and core exercise supports the new muscle gains - Results build over 3 months as your body adapts and fat cells clear **FAQs:** - **Is EMSCULPT NEO just for abs?** Not at all. While the abdomen is the most popular treatment area, EMSCULPT NEO can also target the buttocks, arms, thighs, and calves. Many clients treat multiple areas for a comprehensive body transformation. - **Will I feel sore afterward?** You may feel like you have had an intense workout, with mild muscle soreness for a day or two. This is completely normal and a sign that the muscles have been effectively stimulated. ### Exion Body URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/exion-body **Tagline:** Targeted RF body contouring and skin tightening EXION Body by BTL combines monopolar radiofrequency with targeted ultrasound to firm loose skin, smooth cellulite, and refine body contours without surgery or downtime. Treatment is comfortable, energy is delivered evenly across the area, and results build cumulatively across a course. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Course of 4 + maintenance - Duration: 30-60 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Once or twice per week **Benefits:** - Tightens loose skin on abdomen, arms, thighs, and knees - Reduces the appearance of cellulite and stretch marks - Improves skin texture, tone, and elasticity - Stimulates collagen and elastin production at depth - No needles, no consumables, no downtime **How it works:** EXION Body delivers monopolar RF energy that penetrates deeply into the dermis and subcutaneous layer, heating tissue to a therapeutic temperature that triggers immediate contraction and long-term collagen remodelling. Targeted ultrasound waves work alongside the RF to refine surface texture. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting non-invasive body contouring and skin tightening on the abdomen, flanks, thighs, arms, or knees, particularly post-pregnancy, post-weight-loss, or alongside an Emsculpt Neo programme. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before to improve RF conductivity - Skip moisturiser, body oil, and self-tanner on the treatment area on the day of your session - Avoid sunburn or aggressive tanning for 1 week prior - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before, do not arrive fasting - Tell us about any pacemakers, metal implants in the treatment area, or recent surgery **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling - Apply SPF 50+ to any treated areas exposed to sun for 1 week - Keep up with the recommended weekly cadence, the cumulative effect across 4 sessions is what delivers visible tightening - Maintain results with 1 session every 1-2 months **FAQs:** - **How is EXION Body different from Emsculpt Neo?** Emsculpt Neo builds muscle and reduces fat. EXION Body tightens skin and refines surface texture. They are commonly paired, Emsculpt Neo for the underlying contour, EXION for the skin envelope. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 4 sessions is the standard starting protocol, spaced once or twice per week. Maintenance every 1-3 months keeps results consistent. - **Is there any downtime?** None. The treated area may feel mildly warm and look slightly pink for a few hours. Most clients return to normal activities, including the gym, the same day. - **Can I treat stretch marks with EXION Body?** Yes. Stretch marks respond well to RF energy that stimulates dermal remodelling. A course of 4-6 sessions, spaced 1-2 weeks apart, delivers the most consistent improvement. ### PB Serum URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/pb-serum **Tagline:** Enzyme-based fat reduction and skin smoothing PB Serum is a range of FDA-approved injectable enzyme therapies designed to treat localized fat, cellulite, fibrosis, adhesions, and scarring using a targeted combination of recombinant enzymes. Ivory Aesthetics offers two tailored formulations: Medium PB Serum and High PB Serum. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with small pockets of stubborn localised fat (double chin, flanks, arms), mild cellulite, or established scars (acne, post-surgical, fibrotic nodules) who want a non-surgical enzyme-based alternative to liposuction or scar revision. **Indications:** - Medium PB Serum - Small, stubborn localized fat pockets - Double chin - Abdomen, flanks, arms, thighs, buttocks - Grade I - II cellulite - Body contouring in non-obese patients. - High PB Serum - Hypertrophic or atrophic scars - Post-acne scars - Post-operative or post-traumatic scars - Fibrotic nodules after liposuction or surgery - Post-surgical adhesions affecting mobility or aesthetics. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, hydration supports lymphatic clearance of broken-down tissue - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) to minimise bruising - Arrive with clean, bare skin on the treatment area - Plan for a quiet 3-7 days, swelling and bruising are common - Wear loose clothing on the day, avoid tight waistbands or compression on the treated area - Tell your doctor about any enzyme allergies or blood-thinning medications **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for 7-10 days to support lymphatic clearance - Apply cold compresses for the first 24 hours to reduce swelling - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot tubs) and alcohol for 48 hours - Avoid strenuous exercise for 48 hours - Avoid aggressive massage of the area unless specifically instructed - Gentle manual lymphatic drainage from day 3 can enhance results - Expect swelling, firmness, and tenderness for 5-10 days, this is part of the mechanism - Mild bruising is common and resolves within 2 weeks; arnica helps - Apply SPF 50+ if the area is sun-exposed - Book your next session at the recommended 2-4 week interval **FAQs:** - **What is PB Serum and how does it work?** PB Serum is a range of injectable recombinant enzymes, including lipase (which breaks down fat), collagenase (which breaks down fibrotic tissue and scars), and hyaluronidase. Different formulations (Medium, High) target different indications, localised fat and cellulite versus scars and adhesions. - **Is this the same as fat-dissolving injections like Kybella or Aqualyx?** Similar goal, different mechanism. Kybella (deoxycholic acid) and Aqualyx destroy fat cell membranes. PB Serum Medium uses lipase enzyme to digest fat. PB Serum generally causes less swelling and bruising than detergent-based fat dissolvers. Your doctor will recommend the right option for your anatomy. - **How many sessions will I need?** Typically 3-6 sessions spaced 2-4 weeks apart for fat and cellulite. Scar treatment often needs 4-8 sessions. Results are progressive; you'll see visible change after 2-3 sessions. - **How effective is it for a double chin?** Very effective for mild-to-moderate submental fat in non-obese clients. Typically 2-4 sessions of PB Serum Medium reduces the double chin noticeably. For larger volumes, other options (cryolipolysis, surgical liposuction) may be more appropriate. - **What should I expect after a session?** Swelling, tenderness, warmth, and sometimes bruising at injection sites for 3-7 days. The swelling is part of the mechanism, your body is breaking down the tissue. Expect the area to look worse before it looks better. - **Is it effective for old acne scars?** PB Serum High contains collagenase, which softens dense scar tissue. For deep atrophic acne scars it often works best combined with microneedling, TCA cross, or fractional laser, your practitioner will plan a layered approach. ### Profhilo Body URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/medical-injectables/profhilo-body **Tagline:** Transform skin quality on the body Profhilo Body is an advanced injectable bioremodelling treatment specifically designed for larger body areas, targeting skin laxity, dehydration, and crepey texture. It works similarly to facial Profhilo but is adapted for body rejuvenation, particularly in areas prone to thinning and sagging skin. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with crepey, thin, or lax skin on the arms, knees, abdomen, décolleté, or inner thighs, particularly after weight loss, ageing, or pregnancy, who want to improve skin quality and firmness without surgery. **Indications:** - Skin laxity of the body - Crepey or thin skin - Dehydrated or dull skin - Loss of firmness and elasticity - Early body aging **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) - Plan a quiet 1-2 days, mild swelling - Wear loose, breathable clothing, no tight compression garments on the treated area unless specifically instructed **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support booster uptake - Do not massage, press, or rub the treated area for 24-48 hours, let the micro-bumps disperse naturally - Avoid tight clothing or compression garments on the area for 24 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot tubs, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Mild swelling or injection-site bumps for 24 hours are normal and resolve quickly - Apply SPF 50+ on sun-exposed treated areas - Book your second session at 4 weeks to complete the course **FAQs:** - **How is Profhilo Body different from facial Profhilo?** Same hybrid hyaluronic acid technology, larger syringe volume, and a different injection grid designed for the larger surface area of body regions (arms, thighs, knees, abdomen). The protocol also uses a different number of injection points per area. - **Where is it most effective?** Inner arms (bat-wings), knees, décolleté, and inner thighs, areas where skin typically thins and becomes crepey. It is less effective for post-pregnancy stretch marks or heavy abdominal laxity, where surgical or RF tightening may be needed. - **How many sessions will I need?** A 2-session course spaced 4 weeks apart is standard for each area. Results last 6-9 months; most clients book a single maintenance session every 6 months. - **When will I see results?** Subtle hydration within days. Meaningful firmness and smoothness improvement builds over 4-8 weeks and peaks at 2 months. - **Can it tighten severely sagging skin?** Honest answer, no. Profhilo Body improves skin quality, hydration, and mild-to-moderate laxity. For severe sagging (e.g. significant post-weight-loss crepe), surgical options or combined protocols with RF tightening (Prime-X Body, EXION Body) are more effective. - **Is there downtime?** Minimal. 5 injection points per area produce small bumps that settle within 24 hours. Mild tenderness and occasional bruising for 1-3 days. You can return to normal activity immediately. ### Viora Body URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/signature-body-treatments/viora-rf-body **Tagline:** Body tightening and circumference reduction Viora RF Body Contouring is a cutting-edge, non-invasive treatment designed to sculpt and tone the body, tighten loose skin, and reduce the appearance of cellulite. Powered by Viora’s proprietary MultiCORE technology and advanced Multi-Polar RF energy, this FDA- and CE-approved treatment delivers exceptional results by precisely targeting different layers of the skin and underlying tissues. Achieve a smoother, firmer, and more contoured body without surgery or downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Course of 6-10 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Weekly to fortnightly **Benefits:** - FDA- and CE-approved: Clinically proven for safety and efficacy. - Skin Tightening: Firms loose skin and improves elasticity. - Cellulite Reduction: Smooths out dimples and enhances skin texture. - Body Contouring: Reduces stubborn fat and refines body shape. - Multi-Polar RF Energy: Provides uniform, efficient heating for optimal results. - Non-invasive with No Downtime: Painless and requires no recovery time. - Customizable Treatments: Tailored to various body areas and unique client goals. **Ideal for:** Adults with loose abdominal, thigh, arm, or knee skin, from ageing, post-pregnancy, or weight loss, who want non-surgical body contouring and cellulite smoothing suitable for all skin tones **Indications:** - Have loose or sagging skin from aging, weight loss, or pregnancy. - Want to reduce cellulite or improve skin texture. - Are looking for a non-surgical option to contour and reshape their body. - This treatment is safe and effective for all skin types and tones, providing a versatile solution for body rejuvenation. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, RF works best on well-hydrated tissue - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before; avoid coming on an empty stomach - Avoid alcohol the night before and the day of your session - Arrive with clean skin, free of body lotion, oil, or self-tanner on the treatment area - Skip aggressive scrubs or exfoliation on the treatment area for 3 days before - Inform us of any pacemaker, internal defibrillator, or metal implants in or near the treatment area - If pregnant, breastfeeding, or within 3 months of delivery, we'll delay or adjust the protocol **Aftercare:** - Continue drinking 2-3 litres of water daily for the week after to support collagen remodelling and lymphatic drainage - Apply SPF 50+ to any treated area that will be sun-exposed (e.g., arms, décolletage) - Avoid hot showers, saunas, steam rooms, and very hot baths for 24 hours - Light activity immediately; avoid intense cardio or heavy lifting for 24 hours - Continue your usual body skincare; a hydrating body moisturiser supports comfort - Mild warmth, pinkness, or a 'post-workout' feeling is normal for a few hours - Keep up regular sessions, the cumulative effect across 6-10 visits is what delivers the contour - Maintain hydration, movement, and balanced nutrition to lock in your result - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, RF works best on well-hydrated tissue - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before; avoid fasting - Avoid alcohol the night before and the day of your session - Arrive with clean skin, free of body lotion, oil, or self-tanner on the treatment area - Wear loose, comfortable clothing - Avoid aggressive scrubs or exfoliation on the treatment area 3 days before - Inform us of any pacemaker, ICD, or metal implants in or near the treatment area, these are contraindications - If pregnant, breastfeeding, or within 3 months of delivery, we'll delay or adjust the protocol - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling and lymphatic clearance of fat - Apply a hydrating body moisturiser to the treated area for 3-5 days - Avoid direct sun exposure on treated areas and apply SPF 50+ daily - Light activity immediately; no heavy lifting for 24 hours - Maintain balanced nutrition and regular exercise to lock in contouring results - Schedule your cardio after the green laser session to enhance the resuts - Book your next session at 1-2 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course delivers the result **FAQs:** - **Which body areas can be treated?** The most popular areas are the abdomen, flanks, upper arms, inner and outer thighs, knees, and buttocks. Viora RF Body can also be used on the back, bra line, and above the knees. During consultation we map out the areas to target. - **Will this reduce fat or just tighten skin?** Viora RF Body primarily tightens skin, smooths cellulite, and refines contour. There is a modest fat-reduction effect through controlled dermal heating, but this is not a substitute for dedicated fat-reduction treatments. For fat reduction we can combine it with other modalities. - **Does it help with post-pregnancy loose skin?** Yes, it is one of the most requested treatments for mild to moderate post-pregnancy abdominal and flank laxity. We recommend waiting at least 3 months after delivery (6 months if breastfeeding) before starting. - **How many sessions will I need?** Typically 6-10 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart, depending on the area and starting laxity. You may start seeing changes from session 3, with optimal results 2-3 months after your final session. Maintenance every 4-6 months preserves the result. - **Can I exercise or swim after treatment?** Light activity is fine immediately. Avoid saunas, steam rooms, very hot showers, and intense cardio for 24 hours. You can swim the next day. In fact, regular exercise and a balanced diet are the best way to lock in the contouring result. - **Is it safe on darker skin tones and stretch marks?** Yes. Because it uses radiofrequency rather than light, it does not target pigment and is safe across all Fitzpatrick skin types. It is also often used to improve the appearance of stretch marks alongside body contouring. ### Emerald Green Laser URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/emerald-green-laser **Tagline:** Non-invasive fat reduction with cold laser Emerald Green Laser is a non-invasive fat reduction treatment that uses low-level laser technology to target adipose tissue, stimulating fat cell reduction and supporting body contouring. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 6 sessions plus maintenance - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Weekly to fortnightly **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Best used before other body contouring treatments to support metabolism, immune function, and cellular health **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, Green laser works best on well-hydrated tissue - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before; avoid fasting - Avoid alcohol the night before and the day of your session - Arrive with clean skin, free of body lotion, oil, or self-tanner on the treatment area - Wear loose, comfortable clothing - Avoid aggressive scrubs or exfoliation on the treatment area 3 days before - If pregnant, breastfeeding, or within 3 months of delivery, we'll delay or adjust the protocol **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling and lymphatic clearance of fat - Apply a hydrating body moisturiser to the treated area for 3-5 days - Avoid direct sun exposure on treated areas and apply SPF 50+ daily - Light activity immediately; no heavy lifting for 24 hours - Maintain balanced nutrition and regular exercise to lock in contouring results - Schedule your cardio after the green laser session to enhance the results - Book your next session at 1-2 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course delivers the result **FAQs:** - **How will I feel after the treatment?** Many clients report feeling more energised and refreshed within hours of their session. The full benefits develop over the following days as your body absorbs and utilises the nutrients. - **How often should I book sessions?** Frequency depends on your wellness goals. Some clients benefit from weekly sessions during an initial phase, while others maintain with monthly visits. Your practitioner will recommend a schedule tailored to your needs. ### HYPOXI URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/signature-body-treatments/hypoxi **Tagline:** Targeted fat reduction with vacuum-assisted training HYPOXI is a low-intensity training method that combines gentle exercise with alternating vacuum and compression therapy to target stubborn fat zones, abdomen, hips, thighs, and arms, while improving skin tone and cellulite. Developed in Austria and clinically backed, it works with the body's own circulation rather than against it. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None, a relaxing low-impact session - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Course of 12 recommended - Duration: 30 minutes - Results: Visible across 3-6 weeks - Frequency: Twice per week **Benefits:** - Targets fat from problem zones, hips, thighs, abdomen, arms - Improves skin tone and the appearance of cellulite - Boosts lymphatic drainage and circulation - Low-impact and joint-friendly - Pairs effectively with Emsculpt Neo or EXION Body **How it works:** You perform light cycling or stepping inside a HYPOXI chamber while alternating vacuum and compression cycles redirect blood flow to fat-burning zones. The pressure differential mobilises fat from targeted areas more efficiently than conventional exercise alone. **Ideal for:** Adults with stubborn fat in specific zones who want a low-impact, sustainable way to refine body shape, particularly when general exercise has plateaued. **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before, avoid heavy or sugary food - Drink 500ml of water before your session - Wear comfortable, breathable clothing - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Tell us about any cardiovascular conditions or recent surgery before booking **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water in the 4 hours after your session, hydration accelerates fat metabolism - Avoid high-fat, high-sugar foods for 4 hours after - Maintain 2 sessions per week for the full 12-session course - Pair with strength work or Emsculpt Neo to compound results **FAQs:** - **Do I need to be fit to do HYPOXI?** No. The exercise component is intentionally low-impact and easy to sustain, it's the vacuum and compression cycles that do the targeted fat-mobilising work. Most clients describe sessions as gentle. - **How quickly will I see results?** Most clients see measurable change in 6-8 sessions, with full course results visible across 12 sessions completed twice per week. We measure circumference at the start to track progress. - **What should I wear and bring?** Comfortable workout-style clothing and a water bottle. We provide everything else for the chamber session. - **Can I combine HYPOXI with other body treatments?** Yes. HYPOXI is regularly paired with Emsculpt Neo (for muscle), EXION Body (for skin tightening), and Pressotherapy (for lymphatic finishing) within the same week. ### Shockwave Therapy URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/signature-body-treatments/shockwave-therapy **Tagline:** Break down cellulite for good Using high-energy acoustic waves, Shockwave therapy targets cellulite, improves circulation, and stimulates collagen production for smoother, firmer skin. This FDA-approved technology delivers visible results without any invasive procedures. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild vibrating sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 6-10 sessions recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Progressive over treatment course - Frequency: Once a week **Benefits:** - Significantly reduces cellulite appearance - Improves blood circulation - Tightens and firms skin - Stimulates lymphatic drainage - FDA-approved Zimmer technology **How it works:** The Zimmer device delivers focused acoustic waves into the tissue, creating micro-cavitation bubbles that disrupt the fibrous bands causing cellulite dimpling. This also stimulates blood flow, lymphatic drainage, and new collagen formation. **Ideal for:** Best used as an additional treatment alongside other body contouring procedures to reduce cellulite and improve skin texture **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before treatment, hydration supports circulation and lymphatic response - Avoid heavy meals immediately before the session - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours prior - Inform your practitioner if you have any medical conditions, varicose veins, or are on blood-thinning medications - Wear comfortable clothing and ensure easy access to the treatment area **Aftercare:** - Maintain high water intake to support lymphatic drainage and fat metabolism - Mild redness, warmth, or sensitivity in the treated area may occur - Avoid intense exercise, heat (sauna, steam), and alcohol for 24 hours - Light activity such as walking is recommended to enhance circulation - Follow a healthy lifestyle including balanced diet, regular exercise, and proper hydration, this is essential for optimal results - A course of sessions is recommended for best outcome **FAQs:** - **How quickly will I see results?** Most clients notice improvement after 3 to 4 sessions, with optimal results visible after completing the full course of 6 to 10 sessions. Results continue to improve for several weeks after the last treatment. ### Pressotherapy URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/signature-body-treatments/pressotherapy **Tagline:** Lymphatic drainage and detoxification Pressotherapy is a non-invasive treatment designed to stimulate the lymphatic system, improve blood circulation, and detoxify the body. This advanced therapy uses controlled air pressure to gently compress specific areas of the body, such as the legs, arms, and abdomen. It encourages the movement of lymph fluid, promoting the removal of toxins, excess water, and metabolic waste. Renowned for its versatility, Pressotherapy is commonly used for reducing fluid retention, enhancing body contours, post-surgical recovery, and combating cellulite. It’s a relaxing, effective treatment suitable for both therapeutic and aesthetic purposes. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Course of 6-10 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Weekly to fortnightly **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with fluid retention, sluggish lymphatic circulation, tired or heavy legs, post-surgical swelling (post-liposuction or post-filler), cellulite, or travel-related swelling, and anyone looking for a relaxing detoxifying add-on to body contouring treatments. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 24-48 hours before treatment, hydration enhances lymphatic drainage - Avoid heavy meals immediately before the session - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours prior - Wear comfortable clothing - Inform your practitioner of any medical conditions (e.g. circulatory issues, recent surgery, pregnancy) **Aftercare:** - Maintain high water intake to support lymphatic drainage and toxin elimination - Increased urination may occur, this is a normal response - Light activity such as walking is recommended to stimulate circulation - Avoid alcohol and excessive salt intake immediately after treatment - Follow a healthy lifestyle including hydration, balanced diet, and regular movement to enhance and maintain results - A course of treatments is recommended for optimal outcomes **FAQs:** - **How does pressotherapy actually work?** You wear inflatable compression garments (legs, arms, and sometimes abdomen) connected to a machine that sequentially inflates and deflates chambers in programmed rhythms. This mimics manual lymphatic drainage massage, pushing lymphatic fluid through the body's drainage pathways, reducing swelling and improving circulation. - **Is pressotherapy a weight-loss treatment?** Honestly, no, not in terms of fat loss. It reduces water weight, bloating, and circumference temporarily by clearing fluid, and improves the appearance of cellulite and skin texture. For actual fat loss, combine with RF body contouring, EMSCULPT NEO, or PB Serum. - **When is the best time to have pressotherapy?** Excellent immediately after long-haul flights, post-surgery (with medical clearance), after body filler or fat-dissolving injections to accelerate clearance, or as a standalone treatment for heavy legs, bloating, or PMS-related fluid retention. - **How many sessions will I need?** A single session delivers noticeable relief from heaviness and swelling. For cellulite or post-surgical protocols, 6-10 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart are recommended. Maintenance weekly or fortnightly is popular for wellness. - **Who should avoid pressotherapy?** Pregnancy, DVT (deep vein thrombosis) or significant venous disease, severe heart or kidney disease, active infections or skin conditions in the treatment area, recent fractures or injuries, and severe uncontrolled hypertension. Your therapist will screen at booking. - **Does it hurt?** Not at all, it's deeply relaxing. Most clients describe it as a rhythmic, full-body massage. Many fall asleep during the session. ### Arosha Body Wrap URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/signature-body-treatments/arosha-body-wrap **Tagline:** Botanical body wrap for cellulite and tone The Arosha Body Wrap is an innovative, non-invasive treatment designed to contour, tone, and rejuvenate targeted areas of the body. This advanced body treatment uses specialized wraps infused with potent botanically-based formulas to address concerns like cellulite, poor skin tone, and stubborn fat deposits. By hydrating and firming the skin, Arosha Body Wraps leave your body feeling smoother, more toned, and refreshed. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Course of 6-10 recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Weekly to fortnightly **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Adults with mild-to-moderate cellulite, sluggish circulation, dull or dehydrated body skin, or localised fluid retention, and anyone looking for a relaxing, non-invasive body treatment with an immediate tightening and toning effect. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to support circulation - Avoid a heavy meal in the 1-2 hours before your session - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Arrive with clean, bare skin, no body lotion, oil, or self-tanner - Remove jewellery and wear comfortable clothing you can change back into easily - Empty your bladder before the session - Tell us about any allergies (especially to plants, algae, caffeine, or menthol), pregnancy, or cardiovascular conditions - For cellulite protocols, plan your course when you can commit to consistent weekly sessions **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water in the hours after to support fluid clearance - Move gently, a 20-minute walk amplifies the result - Avoid heavy, salty meals immediately after - Do not shower for at least 4-6 hours after (allows the botanicals to continue working) - Avoid saunas, steam rooms, and hot tubs for 24 hours - Mild warmth, tingling, or pinkness is normal for a few hours - Apply SPF 50+ if the area will be sun-exposed - Book sessions weekly or fortnightly for cumulative results; combine with pressotherapy or RF for enhanced contouring **FAQs:** - **What is in the Arosha wrap?** Arosha wraps use bandages soaked in specialist botanical formulas, including caffeine, algae extracts, menthol, and plant-derived actives, selected to target the client's specific concern (cellulite, toning, detox). Each wrap is a concentrated, professional-strength formula not available for home use. - **Is it just temporary water loss?** Honestly, yes, part of the immediate effect comes from fluid reduction and vasoconstriction. But regular sessions combined with the botanicals genuinely improve microcirculation, lymphatic drainage, and cellulite appearance over a course. It works best as part of a broader body protocol, not a standalone weight-loss solution. - **What areas can be treated?** Legs, thighs, abdomen, back, arms, and buttocks. We can focus on specific 'problem zones' or do a full-body wrap depending on your goals. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 6-10 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart gives the best cumulative results. Many clients maintain with monthly sessions. Pre-event single sessions offer immediate temporary tightening. - **Can I combine it with other body treatments?** Yes, Arosha pairs beautifully with pressotherapy (same session) and as a complement to RF body contouring or EMSCULPT NEO. We often alternate modalities in a single treatment plan. - **Who should avoid body wraps?** Pregnancy, heart or kidney conditions, severe varicose veins or DVT history, active skin infections in the treatment area, open wounds, and allergy to any botanical components. Always mention current medications and medical history. ### DMK Body Mask URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/signature-body-treatments/dmk-body-wrap **Tagline:** Enzyme therapy for the body The DMK Body Wrap is a cutting-edge, non-invasive body sculpting treatment designed to firm, tone, and tighten the skin while delivering visible inch-loss in just one session. Targeting areas like the arms, legs, stomach, back, thighs, and buttocks, this treatment is suitable for both men and women seeking smoother, more contoured skin without the need for downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Course of 6-10 recommended - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Weekly to fortnightly **Benefits:** - Tightened and Toned Skin: Restores firmness to areas prone to sagging or laxity. - Visible Inch-Loss: Helps sculpt and slim targeted areas after just one session. - Immediate Results: Noticeable changes in skin tone and texture. - Non-Invasive with No Downtime: Perfect for busy schedules as you can return to daily activities immediately. - Customizable Treatment: Designed to meet individual body-sculpting goals. **Ideal for:** Adults with body skin laxity, cellulite, post-pregnancy tone loss, or stubborn areas on the arms, thighs, abdomen, or back, particularly those familiar with and loyal to DMK's enzyme-led approach to skin transformation. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to support the enzymatic action - Avoid a heavy meal in the 1-2 hours before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Arrive with clean, bare skin, no body lotion, oil, deodorant, or self-tanner - Remove jewellery; bring comfortable clothing - Empty your bladder before the session - Tell us of any allergies, recent peels or laser on the body, pregnancy, or cardiovascular conditions - Plan your course when you can commit to weekly or fortnightly sessions for consistency **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water in the hours after to support the detoxifying and enzyme clearance - Move gently, light walking amplifies the lymphatic effect - Do not shower or use strong body products for at least 6-8 hours post-wrap (enzymes continue working) - Avoid heavy, salty, or processed meals immediately after - Avoid saunas, steam rooms, and hot tubs for 24 hours - Mild skin warmth, tingling, or pinkness is normal - Apply SPF 50+ on treated areas that will be sun-exposed - Follow the DMK home skincare regime your therapist recommends, enzymes work synergistically with DMK's corrective topicals - Book your next session in 1-2 weeks for the cumulative tightening and contouring effect **FAQs:** - **What is DMK Body and how is it different from other wraps?** DMK (Danné Montague-King) is a paramedical skincare brand built around enzyme therapy, applying formulated enzymes to the skin to 'reverse osmosis' toxins and stimulate cellular renewal. The DMK Body Wrap combines this enzymatic action with botanicals and contouring masks, producing visible inch-loss and firming that other botanical wraps cannot match. - **Is the inch-loss permanent?** Partially, immediate results include measurable inch-loss from fluid reduction and tightening. Cumulative collagen stimulation and lymphatic improvement over a course of sessions produce longer-lasting toning. As with any body treatment, results are maintained through lifestyle, diet, hydration, and activity. - **What does the treatment feel like?** The enzymatic phase creates a warm, tightening, pulsating sensation, a unique feeling clients often describe as 'skin plasmatic'. It's unusual but not uncomfortable. After the wrap removal, the skin feels smooth, firm, and glowing. - **How many sessions will I need?** Best results come from a course of 6-10 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart. Single sessions deliver a noticeable pre-event boost. Maintenance monthly or every 6 weeks preserves the toned effect. - **Can it be combined with other treatments?** Yes, DMK Body pairs well with DMK facials, RF tightening (Viora Body, Prime-X Body), pressotherapy, and EMSCULPT NEO. Your therapist can design a layered plan. - **Who should avoid this treatment?** Pregnancy, breastfeeding (some enzyme formulations), active skin infections or open wounds, severe cardiovascular disease, pacemakers (in specific combined protocols), and known allergies to DMK ingredients. Always mention medical conditions and medications. ### InBody Analysis URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/signature-body-treatments/inbody-analysis **Tagline:** Bioelectrical body composition assessment InBody Analysis is a precision body composition assessment that measures muscle mass, fat mass, water distribution, and segmental body data using bioelectrical impedance. In about a minute, the InBody machine generates a detailed report showing where lean mass and fat are distributed across the body, intracellular and extracellular water balance, visceral fat, and basal metabolic rate. The data is used to set a clear baseline before starting body treatments, track progress objectively over time, and tailor the protocol to what your body actually needs rather than what the scale alone suggests. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Painless - Downtime: None - Sessions: Repeated at intervals to track progress - Duration: Under 5 minutes - Results: Detailed report immediately after the scan - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks during a body programme **Benefits:** - Quantifies muscle, fat, and water distribution objectively - Tracks progress independent of weight on the scale - Identifies visceral fat and metabolic risk markers - Personalises body treatments to your actual composition - Provides motivation through clear, repeatable data **How it works:** The InBody device uses Direct Segmental Multi-Frequency Bioelectrical Impedance Analysis (DSM-BIA). You stand on the platform and hold the handles; a tiny, imperceptible electrical current passes through the body via electrodes on the hands and feet. Different tissues, muscle, fat, water, conduct the current differently. The device measures these differences across multiple frequencies and segments (arms, trunk, legs) to produce a precise breakdown of body composition without any estimation from height and weight alone. **Ideal for:** Anyone starting a body contouring or wellness programme, clients tracking progress through fat reduction, muscle building, or post-pregnancy recovery, and those who want objective data to guide treatment choices and lifestyle changes. **Pre-treatment care:** - Avoid heavy meals for at least 2-3 hours before the assessment - Avoid intense exercise on the same day prior to measurement - Stay well hydrated, but avoid excessive water intake immediately before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours prior - Remove metal accessories and wear light, comfortable clothing - For best accuracy, perform the test under similar conditions each time **Aftercare:** - No downtime or restrictions after the assessment - Results will be reviewed and explained by your practitioner - The assessment will guide your personalized treatment plan - This analysis is offered as part of all our body treatments to track progress and optimize results - Follow recommended lifestyle changes including hydration, nutrition, and exercise based on your results **FAQs:** - **Is the test safe?** Yes. The current is well below the threshold of perception and is considered safe for the vast majority of adults. People with implanted electronic devices (pacemakers, ICDs) and pregnant women should not use the InBody and will be assessed differently. - **How accurate is it?** Modern multi-frequency segmental BIA correlates very well with research-grade methods like DEXA. Best accuracy comes from testing under similar conditions each time, hydrated, before food, in light clothing, with no recent heavy exercise. - **How often should I test?** For tracking a body programme, every 4-6 weeks is enough to capture meaningful change. More frequent testing can be misleading because of normal day-to-day fluctuations in hydration. ## Eye Rejuvenation > Specialised care for the delicate eye area Our dedicated eye rejuvenation treatments address the unique concerns of the delicate periocular area, from fine lines and laxity to dark circles and hollowness. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/eye-rejuvenation ### EMFACE Eyes URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/eye-rejuvenation/emface-eyes **Tagline:** Non-invasive eye area rejuvenation EMFACE Eyes is a non-invasive treatment that combines synchronized radiofrequency (RF) and high-intensity facial electromagnetic stimulation (HIFES) to improve skin quality and strengthen underlying muscles around the eyes. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4-6 sessions - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - Non-invasive and needle-free - Combines RF and HIFES technology - Improves skin laxity and tone - Reduces fine lines and wrinkles - Enhances muscle tone around the eyes - No downtime **Ideal for:** Adults with early brow heaviness, crow's feet, hooded or softened upper lids who want needle-free eye rejuvenation that targets both skin and the underlying muscle **Indications:** - Fine lines and wrinkles around the eyes - Mild skin laxity - Tired or aged appearance - Early signs of aging - Patients seeking non-invasive rejuvenation **Not suitable for:** - Metal implants or electronic devices in treatment area - Pacemakers or implanted defibrillators - Pregnancy - Active infections or skin conditions - Recent surgery in treatment area - Severe skin laxity requiring surgical intervention **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 1.5-2 liters of water daily for 48 hours before, muscles and skin respond better when well-hydrated - Eat a normal meal 1-2 hours before your session; the muscle stimulation can be tiring on an empty stomach - Arrive with clean skin, free of heavy makeup or oils - Remove all facial jewelry and piercings in the treatment area - Tell us about any pacemaker, ICD, cochlear implant, or metal facial implants (these are contraindications) - Space Botox, fillers, or threads by at least 2 weeks from your EMFACE® session **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 liters of water daily for the week after, hydration supports both collagen remodeling and muscle recovery - Maintain your usual skincare routine and SPF; no restrictions - You may feel a mild post-workout-like tenderness in the cheeks or forehead for 24 hours, this is normal - No restrictions on makeup, sun exposure, or activity, most clients go straight back to work - Complete your full 4-session course for best collagen and muscle-tone results; maintenance every 3-6 months keeps the lift **FAQs:** - **How is EMFACE Eyes different from regular EMFACE?** EMFACE Eyes uses a specially designed smaller applicator calibrated for the periorbital area. It targets the frontalis (forehead lift) and orbicularis oculi muscles along with the delicate skin around the eyes, lifting the brow and smoothing crow's feet without touching the eyelid itself. - **Will it help with hooded or heavy upper eyelids?** By toning the frontalis muscle, EMFACE Eyes can visibly lift the brow, which in turn opens the eye area and reduces the appearance of hooding. It's not a replacement for blepharoplasty in severe cases, but for mild to moderate heaviness the effect can be striking. - **Is it safe with Botox in the forehead?** Yes, with appropriate spacing. We recommend having EMFACE Eyes at least 2 weeks before or after forehead Botox. Many clients find the combination gives a more natural lift than either treatment alone. - **What does it feel like around the eyes?** Warm tingling from the RF and a muscle-twitch pulling sensation from HIFES, a little stronger than on the cheeks because the skin is thinner. It is comfortable, not painful, and requires no numbing. - **How many sessions will I need?** 4 sessions spaced 7-10 days apart is the standard course. A maintenance session every 3-6 months keeps the brow and crow's-feet improvements visible. - **Who should avoid EMFACE Eyes?** Pregnancy, pacemakers or implanted defibrillators, cochlear implants, metal implants in the treatment area, active eye or skin infection, and severe laxity needing surgical blepharoplasty. Your practitioner will screen for all of this. ### Eye Booster URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/eye-rejuvenation/eye-booster **Tagline:** Revitalise the delicate eye area Restylane Eyelight is a hyaluronic acid (HA) filler specifically designed to treat hollowness and dark shadows under the eyes. It restores lost volume, brightens the under-eye area, and enhances natural contours. Restylane Vital Hydrate Booster is a skin-revitalizing HA treatment that deeply hydrates and improves the skin’s texture, making the delicate under-eye area smoother, firmer, and more radiant. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Brightens dark under-eye circlesSmooths and plumps hollow areasDeeply hydrates and restores skin elasticityReduces fine lines and crepey textureProvides long-lasting, natural-looking results **Ideal for:** Adults with mild-to-moderate under-eye hollowness, dark shadows, and dehydrated, crepey periorbital skin, particularly those who want combined structural correction (Restylane Eyelight) and skin quality improvement (Vital) in a single protocol. **Indications:** - Individuals experiencing sunken or tired-looking eyes - Those with mild to moderate under-eye hollowness or dark circlesAnyone seeking a natural, refreshed appearance without surgeryPeople who want to improve skin hydration and elasticity around the eyes **Not suitable for:** - Active infection or inflammation at injection site - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - Allergy to product components - Autoimmune disorders (relative) - Blood clotting disorders or anticoagulant therapy - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to minimise fluid shifts - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required), the eye area bruises easily - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin around the eyes - Remove contact lenses before the session - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Plan a quiet 3-5 days, bruising and swelling are common **Aftercare:** - Apply cold compresses for 10 minutes at a time for the first 6 hours to reduce swelling - Sleep with your head slightly elevated for 2-3 nights - Avoid makeup for 12-24 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - Do not rub, press, or massage the area for 48 hours - Expect small raised bumps or mild swelling for 24-72 hours, these resolve naturally - Apply SPF 50+ daily once makeup resumes - Pause retinoids and strong actives for 3 days - Review at 2 weeks, your doctor can top up Eyelight if further volume is needed, and book Vital top-ups as part of the protocol **FAQs:** - **What makes Restylane Eyelight different from standard tear-trough filler?** Restylane Eyelight is a hyaluronic acid filler specifically developed for the under-eye area, lower viscosity, higher lift capacity, and designed to integrate softly into the thin tear-trough skin without causing puffiness or Tyndall effect. It is CE-marked and approved for this indication. - **What does Restylane Vital add to the treatment?** Restylane Vital is a skin booster, micro-droplets of cross-linked hyaluronic acid delivered superficially to deeply hydrate, thicken, and improve the texture of thin, crepey skin. Used together, Eyelight addresses volume while Vital improves skin quality. - **How quickly will I see results?** Immediate structural improvement from Eyelight, though final settling takes 1-2 weeks as swelling subsides. Vital's skin-quality improvements build over 4-6 weeks and peak at 3 months. - **Do I need both products, or just one?** Depends on your anatomy. Pure hollowing benefits from Eyelight alone; crepey, dehydrated under-eye skin benefits from Vital alone; many clients have both issues and benefit from the combined protocol. Your doctor will advise at consultation. - **How long do results last?** Eyelight typically lasts 9-12 months. Vital skin-quality improvements last 4-6 months and are usually refreshed every 6 months. A combined maintenance approach keeps the area looking refreshed. - **Will there be bruising?** Mild bruising and swelling are common around the eyes, plan for 3-5 days of downtime. Stopping blood-thinning supplements 5-7 days before and arnica afterwards helps minimise bruising. ### Salmon DNA Eyes URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/eye-rejuvenation/salmon-dna-eyes **Tagline:** PDRN regenerative therapy for the eye area Salmon DNA Eyes is a cutting-edge, regenerative skin treatment specifically designed to rejuvenate the delicate under-eye area. Using highly purified polynucleotides derived from natural DNA, this therapy works with your skin’s biological mechanisms to repair, strengthen and revitalise tired, dull, or ageing under-eye skin. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24 hours - Sessions: 4-6 sessions - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - Gradual improvement of fine lines and crepey texture - Enhanced deep hydration and moisture retention - Increased skin elasticity and resilience - Brighter, healthier under-eye appearance - Supports natural collagen and elastin regeneration - Works synergistically with other aesthetic treatments **Ideal for:** Adults with thin, crepey, or dehydrated under-eye skin, mild dark circles, or hollow-looking tear troughs who want regenerative repair (not volume), particularly those who do not want filler or who need skin quality improvement before filler. **Indications:** - Fine lines and wrinkles around the eyes - Crepey or thin skin - Dark circles and tired appearance - Dehydrated periocular skin - Patients seeking regenerative, non-volumizing treatment **Not suitable for:** - Active infection or inflammation at injection site - Known allergy to fish or product components - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - Autoimmune disorders (relative) - Blood clotting disorders or anticoagulant therapy - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to prime the tissue - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required) to minimise bruising - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Remove contact lenses before the session; reapply the next day - Let us know of any fish/shellfish allergy or autoimmune condition - Plan a quiet 2-3 days, avoid major social events as mild swelling and bumps are common **Aftercare:** - Apply cold compresses for 10 minutes at a time for the first 6 hours to reduce swelling - Expect small raised bumps, mild swelling, and possible bruising for 24-72 hours, all normal - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support tissue repair - Avoid makeup for 12-24 hours to protect the injection sites - Avoid heat (saunas, hot showers, hot yoga) and alcohol for 24 hours - Do not rub, press, or massage the treated area for 48 hours - Apply SPF 50+ daily once makeup resumes, the skin is sensitive - Pause retinoids and strong actives for 3 days - Book your next session at the recommended 3-4 week interval for cumulative results **FAQs:** - **What are polynucleotides and how do they work?** Polynucleotides (PN) or PDRN are purified, highly fragmented DNA chains derived from salmon, structurally compatible with human DNA. When injected into the skin, they bind to cellular receptors that stimulate fibroblast activity, collagen production, hydration, and tissue repair. Unlike filler, they don't add volume, they rebuild skin quality from within. - **Is this the same as filler?** No. Filler (usually hyaluronic acid) physically lifts hollows by adding volume. Salmon DNA regenerates the skin tissue itself, thickening thin under-eye skin, improving elasticity, and brightening. Many clients combine both: polynucleotides first to rebuild skin quality, then filler if volume is still needed. - **Is it safe if I'm allergic to fish or shellfish?** The polynucleotides are ultra-purified, proteins that cause fish allergy are removed. However, if you have severe fish allergy, we recommend discussing with your doctor and we will review whether a patch test is appropriate before injection. - **Does it hurt and will I bruise?** Numbing cream is applied for 20-30 minutes beforehand. You'll feel tiny pricks during injection. Mild bruising, swelling, and small raised bumps are common for 12-48 hours. Avoid aspirin, ibuprofen, and alcohol 48 hours before to minimise bruising. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 3-4 sessions spaced 2-3 weeks apart. Results build progressively, skin quality, brightness, and elasticity improve across the course. Maintenance every 4-6 months preserves the effect. - **When will I see results?** Subtle improvements in hydration within a week. Meaningful brightening, thickening, and smoother texture after 2-3 sessions. Full effect at 2-3 months after completing the course. ### Under-Eye Filler URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/eye-rejuvenation/eye-filler **Tagline:** Brighten tired eyes and smooth hollows Eye filler (tear trough filler) involves the injection of hyaluronic acid dermal filler to restore volume, reduce hollowness, and improve dark circles under the eyes. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Restores under-eye volume - Reduces dark circles and shadowing - Improves tired appearance - Immediate results - Minimally invasive **Ideal for:** Adults with genuine tear-trough hollowing or volume-loss dark circles that cast a shadow, not pigmentation-based dark circles. Ideal for those who look persistently tired despite adequate sleep, where the under-eye structure has lost volume. **Indications:** - Tear trough hollowing - Dark circles due to volume loss - Mild under-eye bags (non-fat prolapse) - Tired or aged appearance **Not suitable for:** - Active infection or inflammation - Severe eye bags (fat herniation) - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - Allergy to HA fillers or lidocaine - Bleeding disorders or anticoagulant therapy - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to minimise fluid shifts - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil, vitamin E, and ginkgo for 5-7 days before (unless medically required), the tear-trough area bruises easily - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before your appointment - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Remove contact lenses before the session - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Plan a quiet 3-5 days, bruising and swelling are common here **Aftercare:** - Apply cold compresses for 10 minutes at a time for the first 6 hours to reduce swelling - Sleep with your head slightly elevated for 2-3 nights - Avoid makeup for 12-24 hours to protect the injection sites - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - No vigorous exercise, yoga inversions, or heavy lifting for 24-48 hours - Do not rub, press, or massage the area unless specifically instructed - Expect mild swelling for 3-7 days and possible bruising for up to 2 weeks, arnica can help - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Review at 2 weeks, your doctor will check the result and can top up or dissolve if needed **FAQs:** - **Will under-eye filler fix my dark circles?** Only if the darkness is caused by hollowing that casts a shadow. If your dark circles are pigmentation-based (brown/grey tone rather than a shadow), filler will not help, brightening peels, Salmon DNA, or Q-switch laser are better options. Your doctor will pinch-test and assess your anatomy to determine the true cause. - **How long do under-eye fillers last?** Typically 9-18 months. The tear trough is a low-movement area, so the filler lasts longer than lip filler. Some clients find hyaluronic acid lingers even longer here. - **Is it safe? I've heard of complications.** In expert hands with cannula technique and small amounts of the right product, under-eye filler is very safe. The main risks, Tyndall effect (bluish discolouration), fluid retention, and vascular events, are minimised by experienced doctors using low-viscosity HA placed deep against the bone. Your doctor will discuss risks honestly and can dissolve filler with hyaluronidase if needed. - **What about eye bags from fat herniation?** Filler cannot fix protruding fat pads, in fact, it can make them look worse. Surgical lower-lid blepharoplasty is the appropriate solution. Your doctor will give you an honest assessment. - **How long do I need to take off socially?** Plan for 3-5 days. Bruising and swelling are common in the periorbital area. Many clients take a Friday appointment and recover over the weekend. - **Can I combine under-eye filler with other treatments?** Yes, often sequentially. We may recommend Salmon DNA or polynucleotides first to thicken and brighten the skin, then filler 4 weeks later for structural volume. Combining both gives the most natural, refreshed result. ### Fractional Resurfacing Eyes URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/eye-rejuvenation/fractional-eye-resurfacing **Tagline:** Targeted eye-area renewal with fractional laser IPIXEL is an advanced fractional skin resurfacing treatment utilizing Fractional Er:YAG laser technology on the Harmony XL Pro device by Alma Lasers. It focuses on rejuvenating the delicate eye area, addressing concerns such as fine lines, wrinkles, dark circles, and skin laxity while promoting natural regeneration with minimal downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: 3-4 days - Sessions: 4-6 sessions - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - Ablative fractional technology - Targets deeper wrinkles and skin laxity - Improves skin texture and firmness - Stimulates collagen remodeling - Minimal downtime with significant results **Ideal for:** Adults with moderate-to-deep crow's feet, crepey lower-lid skin, sun damage, or periorbital pigmentation who want advanced fractional laser resurfacing and are prepared for 3-7 days of social downtime. **Indications:** - Moderate to deep wrinkles around the eyes - Skin laxity and crepey skin - Photoaging and sun damage - Texture irregularities - Patients seeking advanced rejuvenation **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Recent isotretinoin use (6-12 months) - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - History of keloid scarring - Active herpes simplex infection - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before to support skin recovery - Stop retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliants 5-7 days prior - Avoid unprotected sun exposure, tanning beds, and self-tanner for 2 weeks before - Start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before (even without cold sore history, we sometimes prescribe for periorbital laser) - Arrive with a clean, bare face - Remove contact lenses and eyelash extensions before the session - Plan for 5-7 days of social downtime **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for 10 days to support healing - Apply the prescribed post-care ointment (typically a bland healing balm) every 2-3 hours for the first 48 hours - Apply SPF 50+ mineral sunscreen once the skin is intact (from day 3), avoid direct application too close to the eye on day 1-2 - Expect redness, swelling, and fine crusting for 3-7 days - Avoid sun exposure strictly for 4 weeks, the newly healed skin pigments easily - Do not pick the micro-crusts; let them slough naturally - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, intense exercise) for 72 hours - Skip makeup until the skin is fully intact (typically day 5-7); use mineral formulations only - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 10 days; restart gradually - Book your next session at the recommended interval **FAQs:** - **What is Er:YAG fractional laser and how is it different from CO2?** Both are ablative fractional lasers. Er:YAG (2940nm) is absorbed more precisely by water in the skin and has a cooler thermal effect, meaning less surrounding tissue damage, faster healing, and lower risk of pigmentation changes. CO2 (10600nm) penetrates deeper but with more downtime. For the delicate periorbital skin, Er:YAG offers an excellent balance of resurfacing and recovery. - **Is it safe so close to the eye?** Yes, performed by trained practitioners using Alma's Harmony XL Pro with the specialised Eye Tip. Protective corneal shields are placed under the eyelids, and the beam is precisely calibrated. Safety depends entirely on operator skill, which is why we train extensively on periorbital protocols. - **What does recovery look like?** Day 1: pink, warm, mildly swollen eyes, similar to sunburn. Days 2-3: fine bronzed crusting and peeling. Days 4-5: natural sloughing reveals smoother, brighter skin. Most clients feel comfortable in public from day 5-7 with mineral makeup. Full resolution of any pinkness takes 10-14 days. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 2-4 sessions spaced 6-8 weeks apart. Results are progressive, texture and wrinkles visibly improve with each session. Maintenance every 12 months keeps the result. - **How does this compare to HIFU or RF Eyes?** Fractional laser resurfaces, targeting wrinkles, texture, and pigmentation. HIFU and RF Eyes tighten, targeting laxity and lift. Many clients do both in sequence: laser first for skin quality, then RF/HIFU for tightening. - **Is it safe for darker skin tones?** Er:YAG is safer for Fitzpatrick IV skin than CO2, but pigmentation risk still exists for Fitzpatrick V - VI. A test patch is recommended and your practitioner may suggest a non-ablative RF alternative for deeper tones. ### Thermage FLX Eyes URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/eye-rejuvenation/thermage-flx-eyes **Tagline:** Radiofrequency tightening for the eyes Thermage FLX Eyes is a precision, non-invasive treatment designed to tighten, lift, and smooth the delicate skin around the eyes, including both upper and lower eyelids. As one of the only FDA-approved treatments for the eyelid area, Thermage Eyes offers a safe, advanced solution to rejuvenate and firm the eye contour without surgery or downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4-6 sessions - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - FDA-approved for use on both upper and lower eyelids, one of the only technologies cleared for this sensitive area - Smooths fine lines, crow’s feet, and under-eye wrinkles - Firms and lifts drooping eyelids and softens under-eye puffiness - Delays the need for blepharoplasty by improving eyelid laxity and skin support naturally - Single treatment with long-lasting results (up to 12 months or more) - Non-surgical, non-invasive, and suitable for all skin types **Ideal for:** Adults with moderate upper or lower eyelid laxity, crow's feet, or hooded lids who want a single-session FDA-cleared eyelid tightening as an alternative or precursor to blepharoplasty **Indications:** - Notice hooded eyelids, under-eye crepiness, or loss of firmness around the eyes - Want to delay or avoid surgical eyelid procedures (blepharoplasty) - Seek natural lifting and rejuvenation using FDA-approved radiofrequency technology - Prefer no downtime and subtle, progressive improvement **Not suitable for:** - Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices - Metal implants in treatment area - Pregnancy - Active infections or skin conditions - Severe laxity requiring surgical intervention **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink at least 2 litres of water daily for 2-3 days before, well-hydrated tissue is essential for effective monopolar RF - Eat a full meal before your appointment - Remove eyelash extensions 24 hours before; reapply after - Remove contact lenses at the start of your session - Arrive with a clean, bare face around the eyes - Space Botox, under-eye filler, or PDO threads by at least 2 weeks - Inform us of any pacemaker, ICD, cochlear implant, or metal implants around the eyes, these are contraindications **Aftercare:** - Continue drinking 2+ litres of water daily for 2 weeks, hydration is essential for the collagen response - Apply SPF 50+ daily; the eye area is highly prone to photodamage - Mild redness, warmth, or puffiness may last a few hours to overnight, cold compresses help - Resume normal skincare, eye cream, and makeup immediately - Avoid very hot showers, saunas, and hot yoga for 24 hours - Be patient, the full lifting effect builds over 2-6 months as collagen remodels **FAQs:** - **Is Thermage FLX Eyes really FDA-approved for the eyelid?** Yes. It is one of the only non-surgical, non-ablative treatments specifically FDA-approved to tighten and smooth skin on the upper and lower eyelids. A specialised Eye Tip applicator is used. - **Will one session really be enough?** Thermage FLX Eyes is designed as a single-session treatment. You will see mild tightening immediately, with the full collagen-driven lift developing over 2-6 months. Most clients repeat every 1-2 years to maintain the result. - **What does it feel like on the eyelids?** The Eye Tip delivers brief heat pulses with a cooling burst. You may feel a deep warming and a quick hot-cold sensation on each pulse. Vibration technology (CPT) distracts nerve signals and keeps the treatment tolerable without numbing. - **Can this replace a blepharoplasty (eyelid surgery)?** For mild to moderate hooding and laxity, yes, many clients delay or avoid surgery by maintaining with Thermage Eyes. For severe fat herniation or significant excess skin, surgical blepharoplasty gives a more definitive result. We'll tell you honestly during consultation. - **Is there any downtime?** None in most cases. Some clients notice mild redness or puffiness for a few hours. You can apply light makeup and return to work immediately. - **How does this compare to Viora RF Eyes?** Viora RF Eyes is a comfortable course of 4-6 sessions for early laxity and fine lines. Thermage FLX Eyes is a higher-intensity single session for more established laxity, hooding, or heavier eyelids. We often recommend one or the other based on your tissue, not both. ### Viora Eyes URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/eye-rejuvenation/viora-rf-eyes **Tagline:** Radiofrequency for the delicate eye area VIORA Eyes is a non-invasive radiofrequency (RF) eye rejuvenation treatment designed to tighten, firm, and revitalize the delicate skin around the eyes. It targets early signs of ageing such as fine lines, laxity, and mild under-eye hollowness without injections or surgery. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable warming sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 4-6 sessions - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Gradual over 2-3 months - Frequency: Every 12-18 months for maintenance **Benefits:** - Visible tightening of delicate upper and lower eyelid skin - Reduction in fine lines and crepey texture - Improved collagen production for long-term firmness - Brighter, more refreshed eye appearance - Non-invasive alternative to surgical eye lifting - Quick treatment with no needles and no downtime **Ideal for:** Adults in their late 20s to 50s with early-to-moderate eye ageing, fine lines, crepey texture, or mild laxity, who want natural collagen stimulation without needles, surgery, or downtime **Indications:** - Patients in their late 20s to 50s noticing early to moderate eye ageing - Individuals with mild skin laxity who are not ready for blepharoplasty - Clients with fine lines that are too delicate for aggressive treatments - Patients wanting eye rejuvenation without fillers or injectables - Those looking for maintenance after Botox or filler - Anyone wanting a natural collagen-stimulating solution **Not suitable for:** - Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices - Metal implants in treatment area - Pregnancy - Active infections or skin conditions - Severe skin laxity requiring surgical intervention - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, the thin periorbital skin especially benefits from good hydration - Remove eyelash extensions 24 hours before your session; reapply after - Remove contact lenses at the start of your appointment - Arrive with clean skin - Space Botox, under-eye filler, PDO threads, or blepharoplasty recovery by at least 2-4 weeks - Tell us about any metal implants, pacemakers, or electronic devices **Aftercare:** - Continue drinking 2 litres of water daily for the next week to support collagen remodelling - Apply SPF 50+ daily, the eye area is very prone to photodamage - Use only a gentle, fragrance-free eye cream for the first 24 hours - Mild redness or warmth is normal and resolves within a few hours - Avoid hot showers, saunas, and steam rooms for 24 hours - Resume regular skincare, makeup, and lash extensions the next day - Keep up with your weekly or fortnightly sessions for the full collagen-building effect **FAQs:** - **How is Viora RF Eyes different from HIFU or Thermage Eyes?** Viora RF Eyes uses multi-frequency radiofrequency that heats superficial to mid-depth tissue at a comfortable, warming intensity, ideal for fine lines and early laxity over a course of sessions. Thermage Eyes is a higher-intensity, single-session monopolar RF for deeper laxity. HIFU uses focused ultrasound at precise depths for lifting. Your practitioner will match device to your tissue. - **Does it help with crow's feet and under-eye crepiness?** Yes, these are the strongest indications. By stimulating collagen and elastin in the delicate periorbital skin, Viora RF Eyes progressively smooths fine lines and improves the crepey quality of lower eyelid skin. - **Will it make my eye bags or dark circles disappear?** Not directly. Eye bags caused by fat herniation need surgical or injectable correction. Dark circles from pigmentation or hollowing need different treatments (e.g. tear-trough filler, Salmon DNA, brightening protocols). Viora RF Eyes improves skin quality and mild laxity, which often makes the area look refreshed overall. - **How many sessions will I need?** 4-6 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart. A maintenance session every 4-6 months preserves the result. Collagen remodelling continues for 2-3 months after your final session. - **Is it safe with eyelash extensions?** We recommend removing eyelash extensions before treatment, as the applicator glides close to the lash line and the warming sensation can loosen adhesive. You can reapply extensions the day after your session. ### TCA Eye Treatment URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/eye-rejuvenation/tca-eye-treatment **Tagline:** Targeted peel for dark circles and under-eye renewal Trichloroacetic Acid (TCA) is a highly effective FDA-approved chemical peel known for its ability to rejuvenate the skin around the eyes. It stimulates collagen production, improves skin texture, and reduces fine lines, dark spots, and puffiness in this delicate area. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild tingling - Downtime: Light flaking for 3-5 days - Sessions: Course of 3-6 recommended - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Visible after the first session - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Improves fine lines and wrinkles - Reduces pigmentation and dark circles - Enhances skin texture and firmness - Stimulates collagen production - Hydrates and Revitalizes **Ideal for:** Adults with periorbital pigmentation, sun damage, fine crepey texture, or stubborn dark circles with a pigmentation component, who are comfortable with 3-5 days of peeling and want a targeted, cost-effective alternative to laser for the eye area. **Indications:** - Fine lines around the eyes - Crepey skin texture - Periocular pigmentation - Early signs of aging - Patients seeking non-invasive rejuvenation **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Recent isotretinoin use (within 6-12 months) - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - History of keloid scarring - Active herpes simplex infection - Severe skin sensitivity - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Stop retinoids, AHAs/BHAs, and exfoliants 5-7 days prior (they intensify the peel) - Avoid unprotected sun exposure and tanning for 2 weeks before - For Fitzpatrick IV - VI, pre-treat with a tyrosinase inhibitor (e.g. hydroquinone, arbutin, kojic acid) for 2-4 weeks before if advised - Remove contact lenses and eye makeup before the session - Arrive with a clean, bare face, no eye cream or SPF on the treatment area - If you have a cold sore history, start antiviral prophylaxis 24 hours before - Plan a quiet 3-5 days, visible darkening and peeling are expected **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 7 days to support skin repair - Do not pick or peel the skin, allow it to slough naturally over 3-5 days - Apply the prescribed bland healing balm or ceramide moisturiser 2-3 times daily - Apply SPF 50+ mineral sunscreen once the skin is intact (day 2-3), strict sun avoidance for 2-4 weeks is essential to prevent rebound pigmentation - Skip eye makeup for 24-48 hours; resume mineral formulations once peeling completes - Pause retinoids, vitamin C, and acids for 7-10 days - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, intense exercise) for 48-72 hours - Book your next session at the recommended 2-4 week interval **FAQs:** - **What is TCA and why is it used on the eyes?** Trichloroacetic Acid (TCA) is a controlled medical peeling agent that creates precise, superficial-to-medium depth exfoliation. In low, specialist concentrations it is used around the delicate eye area to break up pigmentation, stimulate collagen, and smooth fine lines. Only a trained practitioner should apply TCA near the eyes, it is not a home treatment. - **Will I peel visibly?** Yes, this is the point. Expect darkening of the skin for 1-3 days (pigment lifts to the surface), followed by fine flaking and peeling around the eyes for 3-5 days. Most clients keep a low profile for the first 3 days then apply mineral makeup over the residual peeling. - **How quickly will I see results?** Brightness and evenness begin to show as peeling completes, typically around day 5-7. Full result from a course of 3-6 sessions builds over 2-3 months as collagen remodelling continues. - **Is this safe for darker skin tones?** TCA must be used cautiously on Fitzpatrick IV - VI due to the risk of post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation. Your practitioner may prime the skin with tyrosinase inhibitors (e.g. hydroquinone, kojic acid) for 2-4 weeks beforehand and use lower concentrations. In some cases, a non-ablative RF or Salmon DNA Eyes may be safer alternatives. - **How is this different from a full-face TCA peel?** Lower concentration and more careful application, the periorbital skin is thin and delicate. We use a specific eye protocol, avoiding the lash margin and inner canthus, with eye protection in place throughout. - **Can I combine this with other eye treatments?** Yes. Many clients follow a course with Salmon DNA Eyes or Viora RF Eyes for combined regeneration, pigmentation correction, and tightening. ## Advanced Hair Treatments > Regain confidence with fuller, stronger hair Hair thinning and loss can be distressing, but our advanced hair restoration treatments offer real solutions. From growth-factor therapies to innovative exosome treatments, we help stimulate natural hair regrowth and thickness. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-hair-treatments ### MCT Exosome Hair Therapy URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-hair-treatments/mct-exosome-hair **Tagline:** MCT exosome technology for hair restoration MCT Exosome Hair Therapy is a cutting-edge regenerative treatment that uses Meta Cell Technology (MCT) to harness the healing power of your body’s own cells. It delivers highly concentrated, bioactive exosomes directly to the scalp to revitalize hair follicles, stimulate growth, reduce thinning, and improve overall scalp health. This advanced approach goes beyond traditional hair treatments by targeting the root causes of hair loss at a cellular level. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild pinching during injections - Downtime: No significant downtime - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Visible in 3-6 months - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Promotes new hair growth by activating dormant follicles. - Reduces hair thinning, shedding, and breakage. - Strengthens existing hair strands and improves overall hair quality. - Enhances scalp health, circulation, and nutrient delivery. - Creates a healthier follicle environment by reducing inflammation. - Natural and non-invasive with minimal downtime. **Ideal for:** Men and women with moderate-to-advanced hair thinning, pattern hair loss, or stubborn scalp concerns who want the most advanced regenerative option available, particularly those who have had limited success with PRF or standard hair filler. **Indications:** - Individuals experiencing hair thinning or loss due to aging, hormonal changes, stress, or genetic predisposition. - Those with weak, brittle, or slow-growing hair who want thicker, healthier strands. - Clients with dry or inflamed scalp conditions seeking improved scalp health. - Patients looking for a non-surgical regenerative alternative to promote natural hair renewal. **Not suitable for:** - Active infections or open wounds - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - Autoimmune disorders (relative) - Immunocompromised patients - Allergy to product components - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, well-hydrated blood gives a better PRF yield - Wash your hair the evening before your session (scalp must be clean but not freshly irritated) - Eat a full meal 1-2 hours before your session (blood draw on an empty stomach can cause lightheadedness) - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen (unless medically required) to reduce bruising - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Avoid chemical scalp treatments (dye, bleach, straightening) for 1 week before - Tell us about any anticoagulant medications, anaemia, or low platelet counts **Aftercare:** - Do not wash your hair for at least 24 hours, longer if advised - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support healing - Avoid touching, rubbing, or massaging the treated area for 24 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - Avoid direct sun exposure on the scalp for 48 hours; wear a hat if outdoors - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Mild redness, tenderness, or tiny scabs at injection points for 24-72 hours are normal - Pause hair colouring, chemical straightening for 1 week - Pause retinoids and actives for 3 days - Book your next session at the recommended 4 week interval, consistency across the course is critical **FAQs:** - **What is MCT Exosome Hair Therapy?** MCT (Meta Cell Technology) Exosome Therapy uses highly concentrated exosomes, microscopic extracellular vesicles derived from stem cells that carry regenerative signals (proteins, growth factors, genetic instructions) between cells. Delivered to the scalp via microneedling, they activate dormant follicles and instruct follicle cells to regenerate at a cellular level. - **How is this different from PRF or PRP for hair?** PRP/PRF uses your own blood-derived growth factors, personalised but variable in concentration. Exosomes deliver a standardised, ultra-concentrated dose of regenerative signalling, often containing 10-100 times more growth factors per dose. For advanced thinning or when PRF has plateaued, exosomes offer the next step. - **Are the exosomes from humans or animals?** Ethical sourcing matters. We use plant-derived or biotech-produced exosomes (not animal or human), which are stable, sterile, and consistent batch-to-batch. This eliminates ethical and safety concerns associated with some earlier exosome products. - **How many sessions will I need?** Typically 3-4 sessions spaced 4-6 weeks apart for visible results. Maintenance every 4-6 months keeps follicles active. Results continue to improve for up to 6 months after your course completes. - **When will I see results?** Reduced shedding within 4-6 weeks. New hair growth visible from month 3. Peak density improvement at 6 months. Results compound with ongoing treatment. - **Is there downtime?** Minimal. Mild scalp redness and tenderness for 24 hours. Strict 48-hour avoidance of heat, sweat, and hair products. Most clients resume normal activities the same day with these precautions. ### Hair Filler URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-hair-treatments/hair-filler **Tagline:** FDA-approved peptide and HA therapy for thicker hair Hair Filler is a cutting-edge, non-surgical solution for hair thinning and loss. This FDA- approved treatment rejuvenates the scalp and strengthens hair follicles using a potent blend of peptides, growth factors, and hyaluronic acid. It promotes natural hair regrowth, improves hair density, and restores thickness, providing a safe and effective alternative to invasive procedures like hair transplants. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild pinching during injections - Downtime: No significant downtime - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Visible in 3-6 months - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Stimulates hair follicles - Improves scalp health and circulation - Reduces hair thinning and shedding - Supports hair density and growth - Minimally invasive **Ideal for:** Men and women with early-to-moderate hair thinning, male or female pattern hair loss, or telogen effluvium from stress, postpartum, or hormonal changes, particularly those looking for a non-surgical alternative or complement to hair transplant surgery. **Indications:** - Hair thinning (male and female pattern) - Early-stage alopecia - Weak or fragile hair - Hair loss due to stress or hormonal changes **Not suitable for:** - Active scalp infections or inflammation - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - Autoimmune conditions affecting scalp - Allergy to product components - Bleeding disorders or anticoagulant therapy - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Wash your hair the evening before your session (scalp must be clean but not freshly irritated) - Do not apply hair products (serums, leave-in conditioners, oils, sprays) on the day of treatment - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil before (unless medically required) - Avoid chemical scalp treatments (dye, bleach, straightening) for 1 week before - Tell us about any autoimmune conditions, anticoagulant medications, or scalp conditions **Aftercare:** - Do not wash your hair for at least 24 hours, longer if advised - Drink 2 litres of water daily for a week to support scalp recovery - Avoid vigorous exercise, saunas, and steam rooms for 24-48 hours (sweat + open injection points) - Do not apply hair products (shampoo, conditioner, styling products, oils) for 24 hours - Do not massage or rub the scalp aggressively for 48 hours - Avoid direct sun exposure on the scalp for 48 hours; wear a hat if outdoors - Mild redness, tenderness, or tiny scabs at injection points for 24-72 hours are normal - Pause hair colouring, chemical straightening for 1 week - Book your next session at the recommended 2 weeks interval, consistency across the course is critical **FAQs:** - **What is a hair filler and how does it work?** Hair fillers are specialist injectable formulations combining peptides, amino acids, growth factors, and cross-linked hyaluronic acid. Delivered in precise micro-injections across the scalp, they nourish the follicles, improve scalp microcirculation, extend the anagen (growth) phase, and strengthen existing strands while stimulating dormant follicles. - **How is this different from PRF or exosome hair therapy?** PRF uses your own blood's growth factors. Exosomes deliver cellular messenger vesicles for regenerative signalling. Hair fillers deliver a standardised, pre-formulated blend of bio-active ingredients, consistent from session to session. Many clients rotate or combine these in a layered protocol. - **How many sessions will I need?** Typically 4-6 sessions spaced 2-4 weeks apart. Results build progressively, reduced shedding visible within 4-6 weeks, new growth visible from month 3, peak density improvement at 6 months. Maintenance every 3-6 months preserves the result. - **Does it hurt?** Some discomfort is expected, micro-injections across a numbed scalp feel like small pinches. Topical anaesthetic is applied 20-30 minutes beforehand. Most clients tolerate it well. Sessions last around 45 minutes. - **Is this a replacement for minoxidil or finasteride?** Complementary. Minoxidil and finasteride are topical and oral medications that address the biological drivers of hair loss. Hair filler is a localised nourishment and stimulation treatment. For best results, many clients combine approaches, ask your doctor about the right plan. - **Will new hair stop growing if I stop treatment?** Honest answer, hair biology continues its course. Without maintenance, gradual thinning resumes over 6-12 months. Ongoing maintenance sessions (every 3-6 months) are needed to preserve the improvement long-term. ### PRF Hair URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-hair-treatments/prf-hair **Tagline:** Platelet-rich fibrin scalp injections, the next-generation PRP PRF Hair is the next generation of platelet-rich therapy for the scalp. Drawn from your own blood and spun without anticoagulants, PRF produces a slower-spinning, fibrin-rich preparation that contains a higher concentration of platelets, white blood cells, and stem cells than traditional PRP, all suspended in a natural fibrin matrix that releases its growth factors gradually over days. Used for hair restoration, PRF supports follicle health, prolongs the growth phase, and improves scalp quality with a sustained-release mechanism. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild stings, comfortable with scalp numbing - Downtime: Minimal, brief tenderness - Sessions: Course of sessions recommended - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Visible improvement over 3-6 months - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks initially, then maintenance **Benefits:** - Higher concentration of platelets, white cells, and stem cells than PRP - Sustained release of growth factors via the fibrin matrix - No anticoagulants, fully autologous - Supports follicle health and prolongs the growth phase - Compatible with most clients suitable for PRP **How it works:** Blood is drawn into special PRF tubes that contain no anticoagulants and spun at a lower speed than PRP. This gentler centrifugation produces a fibrin clot rich in platelets, white blood cells, and circulating stem cells. The PRF is drawn up and injected across the scalp in a precise grid. Because the fibrin matrix traps the growth factors, they are released gradually over the following days rather than all at once, supporting a more sustained regenerative signal to the follicles. **Ideal for:** Adults with early-to-moderate hair thinning who want a fully autologous, growth-factor-led approach to hair restoration, particularly those seeking the next-generation alternative to traditional PRP. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, well-hydrated blood gives a better PRF yield - Wash your hair the evening before your session (scalp must be clean but not freshly irritated) - Eat a full meal 1-2 hours before your session (blood draw on an empty stomach can cause lightheadedness) - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen (unless medically required) to reduce bruising - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Avoid chemical scalp treatments (dye, bleach, straightening) for 1 week before - Tell us about any anticoagulant medications, anaemia, or low platelet counts **Aftercare:** - Do not wash your hair for at least 24 hours, longer if advised - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support healing - Avoid touching, rubbing, or massaging the treated area for 24 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - Avoid direct sun exposure on the scalp for 48 hours; wear a hat if outdoors - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Mild redness, tenderness, or tiny scabs at injection points for 24-72 hours are normal - Pause hair colouring, chemical straightening for 1 week - Pause retinoids and actives for 3 days - Book your next session at the recommended 4 week interval, consistency across the course is critical **FAQs:** - **How is PRF different from PRP?** PRF skips anticoagulants and uses a slower spin, producing a fibrin-rich clot that releases growth factors slowly over days. PRP is liquid and releases its payload more quickly. Both can be effective; PRF tends to deliver a higher cell concentration with sustained release. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course is typically recommended in the early phase, followed by maintenance sessions to sustain the effect. Your practitioner will tailor the schedule based on your scalp at consultation. - **Is there any downtime?** Most clients return to normal activity the same day. Mild scalp tenderness or pinpoint marks at injection points typically resolve within 24-48 hours. ### Mesotherapy Exosome Hair URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-hair-treatments/exosome-hair-therapy **Tagline:** Next-generation hair restoration Exosome Hair Therapy uses a concentrated vial of growth factors applied to the scalp via microneedling. This is not an injectable treatment and is not derived from your own plasma. The exosome solution is applied topically during microneedling to stimulate dormant hair follicles and promote thicker, healthier hair growth. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal with numbing - Downtime: No significant downtime - Sessions: 2-3 sessions recommended - Duration: 60-90 minutes - Results: Visible in 3-6 months - Frequency: Monthly for 2-3 months **Benefits:** - Stimulates dormant hair follicles - Promotes thicker, healthier hair growth - FDA-approved technology - Applied topically via microneedling - Non-invasive alternative to transplant **How it works:** Exosomes are tiny vesicles packed with growth factors, proteins, and genetic material that instruct cells to regenerate. When injected into the scalp, they awaken dormant follicles and create an optimal environment for hair growth. **Ideal for:** Those experiencing hair thinning or early-stage hair loss who want a non-surgical solution **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Wash your hair the evening before your session (scalp must be clean but not freshly irritated) - Do not apply hair products (serums, leave-in conditioners, oils, sprays) on the day of treatment - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil before (unless medically required) - Avoid chemical scalp treatments (dye, bleach, straightening) for 1 week before - Tell us about any autoimmune conditions, anticoagulant medications, or scalp conditions **Aftercare:** - Do not wash your hair for at least 24 hours, longer if advised - Drink 2 litres of water daily for a week to support scalp recovery - Avoid vigorous exercise, saunas, and steam rooms for 24-48 hours (sweat + open injection points) - Do not apply hair products (shampoo, conditioner, styling products, oils) for 24 hours - Do not massage or rub the scalp aggressively for 48 hours - Avoid direct sun exposure on the scalp for 48 hours; wear a hat if outdoors - Mild redness, tenderness, or tiny scabs at injection points for 24-72 hours are normal - Pause hair colouring, chemical straightening for 1 week - Book your next session at the recommended 2 weeks interval, consistency across the course is critical **FAQs:** - **How is exosome therapy different from PRP for hair?** While PRP uses growth factors from your blood, exosome therapy delivers a much higher concentration of regenerative factors. Exosomes also contain genetic instructions that tell follicle cells to regenerate, making them potentially more effective for hair restoration. ### PRP Hair URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-hair-treatments/prp-hair **Tagline:** Platelet-rich plasma scalp injections for hair density PRP Hair uses your own platelet-rich plasma, drawn from a small blood sample and processed in a centrifuge, to deliver a concentrated dose of growth factors directly into the scalp. The growth factors stimulate dormant hair follicles, prolong the active growth phase of existing hair, and improve scalp circulation. Over a course of sessions, PRP can visibly improve hair density, slow shedding, and support follicle health, particularly in early-to-moderate androgenetic and post-partum hair thinning. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild stings, comfortable with scalp numbing - Downtime: Minimal, brief tenderness or pinpoint marks - Sessions: Course of sessions recommended - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Visible improvement over 3-6 months - Frequency: Every 4 weeks initially, then maintenance **Benefits:** - Uses your own platelets, no synthetic ingredients - Stimulates dormant follicles and prolongs the growth phase - Improves scalp circulation and follicle health - Slows shedding and supports density - Pairs well with topical and oral hair regimes **How it works:** A small blood sample is drawn from the arm and spun in a centrifuge to separate platelets from red and white cells. The resulting platelet-rich plasma contains a concentrated mix of growth factors (PDGF, VEGF, IGF-1, EGF, TGF-β). The PRP is then injected across the scalp in a precise grid using fine needles. The growth factors signal dormant follicles to re-enter the growth phase, support the existing follicles already producing hair, and stimulate blood supply to the treated area. **Ideal for:** Adults with early-to-moderate androgenetic alopecia, post-partum or stress-related shedding, or thinning along the part line or crown, particularly those who want to support natural hair growth without medication or who use PRP alongside topical or oral therapy. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, well-hydrated blood gives a better PRF yield - Wash your hair the evening before your session (scalp must be clean but not freshly irritated) - Eat a full meal 1-2 hours before your session (blood draw on an empty stomach can cause lightheadedness) - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen (unless medically required) to reduce bruising - Avoid alcohol for 48 hours before - Avoid chemical scalp treatments (dye, bleach, straightening) for 1 week before - Tell us about any anticoagulant medications, anaemia, or low platelet counts **Aftercare:** - Do not wash your hair for at least 24 hours, longer if advised - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 5-7 days to support healing - Avoid touching, rubbing, or massaging the treated area for 24 hours - Avoid heat (saunas, hot yoga, hot showers) and alcohol for 24-48 hours - Avoid direct sun exposure on the scalp for 48 hours; wear a hat if outdoors - No strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ once makeup resumes - Mild redness, tenderness, or tiny scabs at injection points for 24-72 hours are normal - Pause hair colouring, chemical straightening for 1 week - Pause retinoids and actives for 3 days - Book your next session at the recommended 4 week interval, consistency across the course is critical **FAQs:** - **How is PRP Hair different from PRF Hair?** Both use your own blood. PRP is processed with anticoagulants to keep the platelets in liquid form. PRF (platelet-rich fibrin) skips anticoagulants, producing a slower-release fibrin matrix with a different growth-factor and white-cell profile. Both have evidence for hair restoration; the right choice depends on your scalp, biology, and practitioner preference. - **Is the procedure painful?** The blood draw is a standard venepuncture. The scalp injections feel like small stings; topical numbing or a vibration device are used for sensitivity, and most clients tolerate the session comfortably. - **Who is not a good candidate?** PRP works best on follicles that are still alive but underperforming. Areas of complete, long-standing baldness rarely respond. Active scalp infections, certain blood disorders, and pregnancy are typical contraindications. Your practitioner will assess suitability at consultation. ### Clear & Brilliant Hair URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-hair-treatments/clear-brilliant-hair **Tagline:** Clear & Brilliant non-ablative laser for scalp and hair quality Clear & Brilliant Hair adapts the same gentle, non-ablative fractional laser used for facial rejuvenation to the scalp. Delivered in micro-thermal zones across the treated area, the laser stimulates the scalp's healing response, improves circulation, and supports the local environment around the hair follicles. Used as part of a broader hair programme, often alongside injectable therapies such as PRP, PRF, exosomes, or hair filler, Clear & Brilliant scalp treatment can support overall scalp health and follicle function. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable, mild warmth - Downtime: Minimal - Sessions: Course of sessions recommended - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Cumulative across the course - Frequency: Every 3-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Stimulates the scalp's healing response - Improves local circulation and follicle environment - Pairs well with PRP, PRF, exosomes, and hair filler - Comfortable, no significant downtime - Suitable for a wide range of scalp types **How it works:** The Clear & Brilliant fractional laser delivers thousands of microscopic thermal zones in a controlled grid across the treatment area. On the scalp, this triggers a localised healing cascade, fresh collagen, growth factor release, and improved microcirculation, which supports the environment in which hair follicles operate. The non-ablative nature of the laser means the surface is not broken, so recovery is minimal. **Ideal for:** Adults using a multi-modality approach to hair restoration who want scalp-level laser support alongside their injectable hair regime; those with diffuse thinning who want to optimise scalp health. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Wash your hair the evening before your session (scalp must be clean but not freshly irritated) - Do not apply hair products (serums, leave-in conditioners, oils, sprays) on the day of treatment - Stop aspirin, ibuprofen, fish oil before (unless medically required) - Avoid chemical scalp treatments (dye, bleach, straightening) for 1 week before - Tell us about any autoimmune conditions, anticoagulant medications, or scalp conditions **Aftercare:** - Do not wash your hair for at least 24 hours, longer if advised - Drink 2 litres of water daily for a week to support scalp recovery - Avoid vigorous exercise, saunas, and steam rooms for 24-48 hours (sweat + open injection points) - Do not apply hair products (shampoo, conditioner, styling products, oils) for 24 hours - Do not massage or rub the scalp aggressively for 48 hours - Avoid direct sun exposure on the scalp for 48 hours; wear a hat if outdoors - Mild redness, tenderness, or tiny scabs at injection points for 24-72 hours are normal - Pause hair colouring, chemical straightening for 1 week - Book your next session at the recommended 2 weeks interval, consistency across the course is critical **FAQs:** - **Is this a standalone hair restoration treatment?** Clear & Brilliant scalp treatment is most effective as part of a broader hair programme rather than as a standalone primary therapy. It supports the environment around the follicles and is typically combined with injectable therapies. - **Is it painful?** Most clients describe a warm, prickling sensation. The non-ablative protocol is designed to be tolerable without numbing for most clients; topical numbing can be added for sensitivity. - **Will my hair shed afterwards?** Some clients notice a brief synchronised shedding phase shortly after starting any active hair programme, this is part of the cycle resetting and is not a sign of treatment failure. Continued sessions support new growth coming through. ### Signature Cool-Jet Hair URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/advanced-hair-treatments/cool-jet-hair **Tagline:** Cooling jet delivery of active hair boosters Cool-Jet is an advanced, FDA- approved, non-invasive hair restoration therapy that combines motorized cold therapy with jet plasma technology. This innovative treatment stimulates hair follicle growth, improves scalp health, and boosts hair density by increasing blood flow and encouraging natural regeneration, all without surgery or significant downtime. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Mild pinching during injections - Downtime: No significant downtime - Sessions: Course of 4-6 recommended - Duration: 45 minutes - Results: Visible in 3-6 months - Frequency: Every 2-4 weeks **Benefits:** - Stimulates Hair Follicles: Encourages robust hair growth and reactivates dormant follicles. - Boosts Hair Density: Promotes thicker, fuller hair in treated areas. - Non-Invasive and Comfortable: No incisions or surgery required, with minimal discomfort. - Quick Recovery: No downtime, allowing immediate return to daily activities. - Safe and Proven Technology: A trusted method with effective, lasting results. **Ideal for:** Men and women with early-stage hair thinning, reactive scalp conditions, or post-procedure scalp sensitivity who want a completely needle-free, gentle hair restoration option, particularly clients who cannot tolerate needles or microneedling. **Indications:** - Individuals experiencing early-stage hair thinning or hair loss. - Those seeking a non-surgical, natural hair restoration solution. - Clients looking for a quick, effective treatment with minimal disruption to their schedule. **Not suitable for:** - Active scalp infections or inflammation - Open wounds or lesions - Severe scalp conditions (psoriasis, dermatitis) - Pregnancy or breastfeeding (depending on products used) - Allergy to treatment serums - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Wash your hair the evening before, scalp should be clean - Do not apply hair products (oils, sprays, leave-in conditioners) on the day - Avoid chemical scalp treatments (dye, bleach, straightening) for 1 week before - Remove hair accessories (clips, pins, extensions) before the session - Tell us about any scalp conditions or allergies to the serum blend - Come with a dry scalp, no oil treatments the day before **Aftercare:** - Do not wash your hair for 12-24 hours to allow the actives to work - Drink 2 litres of water daily for a week - Maintain gentle scalp hygiene with a mild, sulfate-free shampoo - Avoid vigorous exercise that causes significant scalp sweating for 24 hours - Avoid direct strong sun on the scalp for 24 hours - Resume normal styling from day 2 - Mild scalp pinkness or tingling immediately after is normal and resolves within an hour - Book your next session in 1-2 weeks for cumulative benefit **FAQs:** - **How does Cool-Jet work on the scalp?** Cool-Jet combines motorised cold therapy with jet plasma technology. The cold applicator reduces inflammation and vasoconstricts, then dilates to increase blood flow (a natural pumping action that delivers oxygen and nutrients to follicles). The jet plasma creates temporary micro-pores in the scalp surface, allowing active serums to penetrate deeply without needles. - **Is it truly needle-free?** Yes. Cool-Jet uses cold therapy and ionised plasma gas, no needles, no microneedling. This makes it an excellent choice for clients who dislike needles or who have reactive scalps that respond poorly to microneedling. - **How does it compare to PRF or Hair Filler?** PRF and Hair Filler use injections to deliver growth factors or peptides directly. Cool-Jet delivers active serums topically via plasma-enabled penetration, less invasive, less deep, but also less uncomfortable. Cool-Jet is often the best starting point or a complement for those already doing injectable protocols. - **How many sessions will I need?** A course of 6-8 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart. Reduced shedding visible from week 4, new growth and improved density from month 3. Maintenance every 4-6 weeks preserves results. - **Does it have any benefits beyond hair growth?** Yes, Cool-Jet also calms an inflamed scalp, reduces oiliness, and improves conditions like seborrheic dermatitis and itchy scalp. Many clients report better scalp comfort and reduced dandruff as a welcome side effect. - **Is there any downtime?** None. The treatment is completely painless, with no redness, no crusting, and no restrictions on daily activities. You can return to normal life immediately. ## IV Therapy > Tailored IV vitamin and wellness drips Our IV Therapy menu delivers vitamins, minerals, antioxidants, and amino acids directly into the bloodstream for full bioavailability, bypassing the digestive system. Each formulation is selected during consultation based on your goals, energy, immunity, recovery, skin and hair, longevity, and is administered by a DHA-licensed nurse in a comfortable clinic setting. Every drip uses the full vial, never split. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/iv-therapy ### Snow White IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/snow-white-iv-drip **Tagline:** Glutathione-led brightening infusion for clearer, more even skin Our signature brightening infusion centred on high-dose reduced glutathione, the body's master antioxidant, paired with vitamin C, alpha-lipoic acid, and B-complex to support a more even skin tone, reduce oxidative stress, and promote a luminous, refreshed appearance. Every session uses the full vial, never split. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 6-10 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Gradual brightening across 4-8 weeks - Frequency: Weekly during a course, monthly for maintenance **Benefits:** - High-dose reduced glutathione for even, brighter skin tone - Powerful antioxidant support, neutralises free-radical damage - Supports the liver's natural detoxification pathways - Improves skin clarity, radiance, and luminosity - 100% absorption, bypasses the digestive system **How it works:** After a brief health check by our DHA-licensed nurse, a tiny IV line is placed and the full-vial brightening formula is delivered over 60 minutes. Glutathione works at a cellular level to inhibit excess melanin production and quench oxidative stress, while vitamin C and alpha-lipoic acid amplify its antioxidant effect. Results build gradually across a course of sessions. **Ideal for:** Adults who want a more even, luminous complexion, support for sun-exposed or stressed skin, or an antioxidant boost as part of a wider skin protocol. Best results when combined with daily SPF and a brightening homecare routine. **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before your session, do not come fasting - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before to make vein access easier - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Wear a loose-sleeved top for easy arm access - Tell us about any allergies (especially to sulphur, vitamins, or preservatives), medications, asthma, and pregnancy or breastfeeding status - Wear SPF daily in the days leading up to your course, skin protected from UV responds best **Aftercare:** - Drink an additional 1-1.5L of water across the rest of the day - Resume normal activity immediately, you can go straight back to work - Eat a balanced meal within an hour - Apply SPF 50+ daily and reapply through the day, glutathione's effect builds when skin is protected from UV - Mild bruising or tenderness at the insertion site may last a few days, ice if needed - Book your full course (6-10 sessions) and monthly maintenance for the most consistent brightening result **FAQs:** - **How is this different from a topical brightening cream?** Topical brighteners work on the surface layers of the skin and depend on consistent application. An IV-delivered glutathione formula reaches every cell in the body via the bloodstream, supporting an even, luminous result from the inside out. Most clients find topical and IV protocols work best together. - **How many sessions will I need?** Most clients start with a course of 6-10 sessions, scheduled weekly or fortnightly, then move to monthly maintenance. Some see a glow after the first session, but the most consistent results come from a full course. - **Is it safe?** Glutathione is a naturally occurring antioxidant in the body, and the IV protocol we use follows pharmaceutical-grade safety standards. Every drip is administered by a DHA-licensed nurse after a brief health screen. We'll discuss any contraindications, such as severe asthma, sulphur allergy, or active pregnancy, at consultation. - **Will my skin tone change?** The treatment supports your skin's natural even tone, it reduces excess melanin caused by sun damage and oxidative stress, but it will not change your underlying skin colour. Think 'luminous version of you', not a different complexion. ### Immune Boost IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/immune-boost-iv-drip **Tagline:** Immune support, energy, and muscle recovery A high-potency infusion combining vitamin C, zinc, B-complex, and amino acids to rebuild immune resilience, support energy production, and accelerate muscle recovery. Ideal before flu season, after illness, or during demanding training phases. Every session uses the full vial, never split. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Many feel benefits within hours - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Reinforces immune defences with high-dose vitamin C and zinc - Boosts cellular energy with full B-complex - Accelerates muscle recovery and repair - Supports faster rebound after illness or intense training - 100% absorption, bypasses the digestive system **How it works:** After a brief health check by our DHA-licensed nurse, a tiny IV line is placed and the full-vial infusion is delivered over 60 minutes. You relax, read, or work during the session. Because the nutrients enter the bloodstream directly, benefits are felt far faster than oral supplementation. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting proactive immune support, before travel, ahead of flu season, during recovery from illness, or alongside an intense training schedule **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before your session, do not come fasting - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before to make vein access easier - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Wear a loose-sleeved top for easy arm access - Tell us about any allergies (especially to vitamins or preservatives), medications, and pregnancy or breastfeeding status - If you're caffeine-sensitive, skip coffee on the morning of your session, some formulas are gently stimulating **Aftercare:** - Drink an additional 1-1.5L of water across the rest of the day - Resume normal activity immediately, you can go straight back to work - Eat a balanced meal within an hour - Keep the injection site covered and clean for 2-4 hours - Mild bruising or tenderness at the insertion site may last a few days, ice if needed - Book your 2-session or 6-session package to build and maintain immune resilience **FAQs:** - **Why is Ivory's Immune Boost different from other IV clinics?** Many clinics dilute or split one vial across two sessions. At Ivory, every drip uses the full vial, and each formula is independently stability-tested, so every infusion meets the same pharmaceutical-grade standard. You get the full clinical dose, every time. - **How quickly will I feel the effect?** Many clients feel lighter, more focused, and more energised within 2-6 hours. Immune-support benefits build over 24-48 hours and last longer with a course of 2 or 6 sessions. - **Can I do this if I'm already sick?** If you have mild viral symptoms, an Immune Boost drip may support your recovery. If you have fever, active infection, or severe symptoms, we'll reschedule, IV is best used for prevention and recovery, not during acute illness. - **Is it safe during pregnancy or breastfeeding?** Not during pregnancy without obstetric clearance. For breastfeeding clients, we adjust the formula and advise accordingly. Always disclose during your consultation. ### Gut Cleanse IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/gut-cleanse-iv-drip **Tagline:** Improved digestion, absorption, and well-being Formulated to reset gut function with glutamine, magnesium, B vitamins, and key minerals. Supports the intestinal lining, improves nutrient absorption, and restores the gut-immunity link. Ideal after antibiotic courses, bloating episodes, or chronic digestive fatigue. Full-vial dosing, every time. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Felt within 24-72 hours - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Supports repair of the intestinal lining - Improves digestion and nutrient absorption - Eases bloating and gut-related fatigue - Strengthens the gut-immunity connection - Full vial, stability-tested formula **How it works:** The infusion delivers glutamine, magnesium, B vitamins, and minerals directly into circulation, bypassing a compromised gut. Your nurse conducts a brief check, places the IV line, and the full vial runs over 60 minutes while you relax. **Ideal for:** Adults managing bloating, sluggish digestion, post-antibiotic recovery, food sensitivities, or chronic low energy linked to gut health **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before (bland, easy to digest, nothing heavy or greasy) - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol and very spicy foods for 24 hours before - Tell us about any gastrointestinal conditions, food allergies, or current medications - Wear a loose-sleeved top **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of additional water over the rest of the day - Eat gentle, gut-friendly meals (bone broth, cooked vegetables, lean protein) for 24 hours - Avoid alcohol, very processed, or very spicy foods for the rest of the day - Resume normal activity immediately - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Many clients notice less bloating and better digestion within 48-72 hours **FAQs:** - **Why use IV for gut health instead of oral supplements?** A compromised gut may not absorb oral supplements reliably. IV delivery bypasses the digestive system entirely, giving your cells the raw materials they need while your gut heals. Ideal as a kickstart alongside diet and lifestyle changes. - **How many sessions will I need?** For a noticeable reset, most clients do a course of 2-6 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart. Maintenance sessions monthly can support longer-term gut health. - **Can I combine this with probiotics or other supplements?** Yes. The Gut Cleanse drip works alongside oral probiotics, digestive enzymes, and lifestyle changes. Share your current supplement stack during consultation. - **What's the 'full vial' difference?** Some clinics split one vial across two patients. At Ivory, every Gut Cleanse IV uses the full vial, plus stability testing, so you receive the complete clinical dose every session. ### Detox IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/detox-iv-drip **Tagline:** Immunity boost, muscle recovery, and hangover cure A rebalancing infusion with glutathione, vitamin C, B vitamins, and electrolytes, designed to rehydrate, neutralise free radicals, and clear metabolic waste. The most-requested drip after travel, late nights, or events. Full-vial dosing, stability tested. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Often felt within 1-3 hours - Frequency: As needed or weekly **Benefits:** - Rapid rehydration with balanced electrolytes - Glutathione, the body's master antioxidant, at therapeutic dose - Clears post-event or post-travel brain fog - Supports muscle recovery after intense activity - Proven hangover relief **How it works:** The infusion combines electrolytes, antioxidants, and B vitamins. After a brief health check, the full-vial infusion runs over 60 minutes in a comfortable reclining room. The glutathione neutralises oxidative stress while electrolytes restore hydration and mineral balance. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting quick recovery from travel, events, alcohol, or intense training, or ongoing antioxidant support for radiant skin and mental clarity **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before, don't arrive on an empty or very full stomach - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before your appointment - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before if possible (we can still treat you if you're hungover) - Wear a loose-sleeved top - Tell us about any sulfur-containing drug allergies (sulfa antibiotics), glutathione contains sulfur **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of water over the rest of the day to support the detox pathway - Eat a nourishing meal within an hour - Avoid alcohol for the rest of the day - Resume normal activity, you'll likely feel lighter and clearer-headed within a few hours - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Some clients notice a subtle 'garlic' or sulfur taste at the back of the throat from glutathione, this resolves within an hour **FAQs:** - **Does it really work for hangovers?** Yes, and faster than drinking water and resting alone. The IV replaces lost fluids and electrolytes immediately, while glutathione helps clear the metabolic byproducts that cause hangover symptoms. Most clients feel noticeably better within 1-2 hours. - **How is glutathione better delivered via IV?** Oral glutathione is poorly absorbed because the digestive system breaks it down. IV delivery puts it straight into circulation, where it can act as a free-radical scavenger throughout the body. - **Can I do this regularly?** Yes. Many clients book a Detox drip monthly for ongoing antioxidant support, or weekly during demanding seasons. The 6-session package offers better value for regular users. - **Why the 'full vial' matters here** Glutathione is dose-dependent. Splitting a vial halves the therapeutic effect. At Ivory, every Detox drip uses the full vial and is stability-tested, you get the full antioxidant dose every time. ### Hair IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/hair-iv-drip **Tagline:** Detox, hair, nails, and well-being Targeted support for hair and nail health with biotin, zinc, selenium, iron-free amino acids, and B vitamins. Addresses dullness, thinning, and slow growth from the inside out, pairs beautifully with topical or in-clinic hair treatments. Full-vial dosing every session. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Visible over 6-12 weeks - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Delivers biotin, zinc, and selenium at therapeutic dose - Supports hair follicle health and growth cycle - Strengthens nails, less splitting and peeling - Improves keratin production from within - Pairs with in-clinic hair therapies for compounding effect **How it works:** The formula combines B vitamins, biotin, amino acids, and trace minerals known to support hair and nail matrix cells. Delivered directly into the bloodstream, the nutrients reach the scalp and nail beds faster and more completely than oral supplements. **Ideal for:** Adults noticing thinning, brittleness, slower growth, or dullness in hair and nails, especially during stress, post-partum, post-weight-loss, or alongside an in-clinic hair programme **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before your appointment - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Wear a loose-sleeved top - Tell us about current hair loss, post-partum status, thyroid conditions, or any iron-deficiency diagnosis, this guides the protocol **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of additional water across the rest of the day - Eat a protein-rich meal within an hour, hair matrix cells need amino acids - Resume normal activity immediately - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Commit to the full 6-session course for measurable hair and nail improvement - Pair with a gentle scalp care routine and in-clinic hair therapy for compounding results **FAQs:** - **When will I see a difference in my hair?** Hair grows slowly, most clients notice stronger nails within 2-3 weeks, and improved hair shine, density, and shedding reduction over 6-12 weeks. A course of 6 sessions paired with in-clinic hair therapy delivers the most visible result. - **Is it effective if my hair loss is hormonal or genetic?** The Hair IV supports the nutrients your follicles need, but it doesn't treat underlying hormonal or genetic causes directly. For hormonal or androgenetic hair loss, we combine it with targeted in-clinic therapies (PRF, exosomes, topical treatments) and recommend appropriate medical review. - **How does this compare to oral biotin supplements?** Oral biotin has variable absorption (20-50%). IV delivery puts the full dose directly into circulation, faster, more predictable, and more effective as a kickstart. We often recommend IV for 6 sessions, then maintain with oral. - **Can I combine this with Hair Filler or MCT Exosome therapy?** Yes, they complement each other. IV nourishes systemically while in-clinic therapies stimulate the scalp directly. Many clients do a 6-session IV course alongside a 3-session scalp programme. ### Radiant Skin Glow IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/radiant-skin-glow-iv-drip **Tagline:** Rejuvenate, glow, and restore from within The signature beauty infusion, high-dose glutathione, vitamin C, and collagen-supporting amino acids for visibly brighter, more even, and more luminous skin. Pairs beautifully with facials, peels, and energy-based treatments. Full-vial dosing, stability tested. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Visible brightening within days; deeper results over a course - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - High-dose glutathione for skin brightening and antioxidant support - Vitamin C at therapeutic dose for collagen synthesis and tone - Amino acids that feed collagen and elastin production - Improves luminosity, evenness, and overall skin quality - Complements in-clinic facials and energy-based treatments **How it works:** The formula delivers high-dose glutathione, vitamin C, and collagen-supporting nutrients directly into circulation. Glutathione down-regulates melanin production for a more even tone, while vitamin C and amino acids feed the fibroblasts that produce collagen and elastin. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting brighter, more even, luminous skin, particularly clients with pigmentation concerns, dullness from stress or travel, or those preparing for an event **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before to maximise the glutathione effect - Avoid heavy sun exposure in the 48 hours before (and SPF 50+ always) - Tell us about any sulfa-drug allergies (glutathione contains sulfur) - Wear a loose-sleeved top **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of water across the rest of the day, glutathione works best with good hydration - Apply SPF 50+ every morning for the following week; your skin will be slightly more photo-responsive - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours to preserve the antioxidant effect - Continue your usual skincare routine; pair with a vitamin C serum for compounding effect - Book your in-clinic facial or brightening treatment 24-48 hours after for best visible results - Some clients notice a subtle sulfur taste at the back of the throat, resolves within an hour **FAQs:** - **Will it lighten my skin?** Radiant Skin Glow doesn't lighten your natural skin tone, it evens pigmentation, reduces dullness, and restores natural luminosity. Glutathione balances melanin production rather than bleaching the skin. - **How does this pair with facials or peels?** Beautifully. The IV feeds your skin from within while your in-clinic treatments work on the surface. Many clients schedule Radiant Skin Glow 24-48 hours before a major facial or a wedding/event for a compounded effect. - **How soon will I see a glow?** A subtle, immediate brightening is often visible within 24-48 hours. The deeper improvements in tone and luminosity develop across a course of 6 sessions spaced weekly or fortnightly. - **Why a higher dose than the standard Multivitamin IV?** Radiant Skin Glow uses therapeutic-level glutathione specifically calibrated for the skin, substantially more than a general wellness drip. And as always, the full vial is used per session, never split. ### NAD+ 250mg IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/nad-250mg-iv-drip **Tagline:** Fountain of youth, age reversal, DNA repair, addiction recovery A 250mg nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD+) infusion, the master coenzyme for cellular energy, DNA repair, and longevity. Used clinically for neurological resilience, metabolic health, and recovery from addiction or burnout. Administered slowly over 60 minutes with a DHA-licensed nurse present throughout. Full-vial dosing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion; some clients feel flushing during infusion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Often felt within hours; cumulative over a course - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Supports mitochondrial function and cellular energy - Promotes DNA repair and cellular resilience - Enhances mental clarity, focus, and cognitive performance - Supports recovery from burnout, jet lag, or substance-use recovery - Complements peptide therapy and longevity protocols **How it works:** NAD+ is a coenzyme present in every cell, essential for converting nutrients into energy and repairing DNA. Levels decline sharply with age, stress, and illness. A 250mg IV infusion restores NAD+ directly to tissues, delivered slowly over 60 minutes to minimise flushing and maximise cellular uptake. **Ideal for:** Adults focused on longevity, cognitive performance, metabolic health, or recovery from burnout, jet lag, or substance dependence, and those starting or maintaining a longevity protocol **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a full, balanced meal 1-2 hours before, NAD+ on an empty stomach can intensify flushing - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol and recreational drugs for 24 hours before - If you have cardiac or blood pressure conditions, share them during consultation, we may adjust the protocol - Allow extra time: the infusion runs 60 minutes and we typically add 15-20 minutes for pre-infusion check-in - Bring a book, headphones, or work, most clients relax throughout **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of water across the rest of the day - Eat a nourishing, protein-rich meal within 1-2 hours - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours - Expect improved clarity and energy within hours; effects build across a course - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - For longevity protocols, most clients do an initial course of 6 sessions then monthly maintenance **FAQs:** - **How is 250mg different from 500mg?** 250mg is the starting dose, ideal for first-time NAD+ users, ongoing maintenance, or anyone sensitive to infusion flushing. 500mg is the higher therapeutic dose for more advanced protocols or deeper deficiency. We often recommend starting at 250mg and progressing to 500mg if tolerated. - **Will I feel anything during the infusion?** NAD+ can cause transient chest tightness, flushing, or a 'hot' sensation, this is normal, not harmful, and resolves by slowing the drip. Our nurse stays with you throughout and adjusts the flow rate for your comfort. - **Is there evidence for anti-ageing and DNA repair?** NAD+ is one of the most-studied longevity coenzymes, with mechanistic evidence for sirtuin activation and DNA repair. Human outcome data on anti-ageing is still emerging, we position NAD+ as a cellular support, not a cure, and recommend it alongside exercise, sleep, and nutrition. - **How does the 'full vial' commitment apply to NAD+?** NAD+ is a dose-dependent therapy, splitting the vial halves the effect. At Ivory, every NAD+ drip uses the full 250mg (or 500mg) vial, and each batch is stability-tested. You receive the full therapeutic dose, every time. ### NAD+ 500mg IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/nad-500mg-iv-drip **Tagline:** Advanced longevity dose, age reversal, DNA repair, recovery A 500mg NAD+ infusion for clients already established on NAD+ therapy or pursuing an intensive longevity, neurological, or addiction-recovery protocol. Delivered slowly over 60 minutes with a DHA-licensed nurse throughout. Full-vial dosing every session. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion; flushing common with higher dose - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes (may be extended for tolerance) - Results: Cumulative across a course - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Higher therapeutic dose for advanced longevity protocols - Maximises mitochondrial and cellular energy recovery - Supports DNA repair, sirtuin activation, and cellular resilience - Used clinically in intensive recovery and neurological resilience protocols - Complements peptide therapy and functional medicine programmes **How it works:** NAD+ at 500mg is the higher-tier dose for deeper cellular impact. Delivered slowly and carefully over 60 minutes (sometimes longer depending on tolerance), with continuous nurse supervision. The slower rate minimises flushing while maximising uptake into tissues. **Ideal for:** Adults already established on NAD+ at 250mg, or pursuing intensive longevity, cognitive-performance, or recovery protocols under medical guidance **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a full, balanced meal 1-2 hours before, 500mg on an empty stomach intensifies flushing - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol and caffeine for 24 hours before if possible - Confirm cardiac history, medications, and supplement stack during consultation - Allow 90 minutes total for the appointment (infusion may extend for comfort) - Bring something comfortable, slippers, cardigan, headphones, book **Aftercare:** - Drink 2L of water across the rest of the day - Eat a protein-rich meal within 1-2 hours - Avoid alcohol, caffeine, and heavy exercise for the rest of the day - Expect deeper fatigue for the first few hours after a 500mg session, this is normal and resolves with rest - Improved clarity, focus, and energy typically felt the next day and builds across a course - For longevity protocols, most clients pair NAD+ with peptide therapy and functional medicine guidance **FAQs:** - **Should I start at 500mg?** No, we recommend starting at 250mg to gauge your tolerance to NAD+. If you handle 250mg well and your protocol calls for a deeper dose, we progress to 500mg in subsequent sessions. - **What should I expect during a 500mg infusion?** Flushing, warmth, or transient chest tightness is more common at the higher dose. Our nurse stays with you throughout and slows the infusion rate as needed for comfort. The infusion may extend beyond 60 minutes if we slow the rate. - **How often should I do 500mg sessions?** Typically weekly during a loading phase (4-6 sessions), then monthly or every 6 weeks for maintenance. Your protocol is personalised based on goals and response. - **Are there any contraindications?** Pregnancy, breastfeeding, active malignancy, uncontrolled cardiac conditions, and severe kidney or liver disease are relative contraindications. We conduct a full health review before any NAD+ session. ### Fat Burning IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/fat-burning-iv-drip **Tagline:** Weight management, metabolic and liver support, PCOS A metabolic-support infusion combining L-carnitine, taurine, B-complex, choline, and methylation cofactors. Designed to support fat metabolism, liver function, insulin sensitivity, and energy, ideal alongside structured weight-management, PCOS protocols, or diabetic health support. Full-vial dosing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Gradual, cumulative across a course with diet and activity - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Supports fat metabolism with L-carnitine and taurine - Boosts liver detoxification pathways - Supports insulin sensitivity and metabolic health - Enhances energy for exercise and recovery - Pairs with medical weight management, PCOS, and diabetic support programmes **How it works:** L-carnitine transports fatty acids into mitochondria for energy production. Combined with B vitamins, choline, and methylation support, the formula helps optimise the metabolic machinery that processes fat. It works best as a support to diet, activity, and, where prescribed, medical weight-management therapies. **Ideal for:** Adults on a structured weight-management, PCOS, or metabolic-health programme, or those wanting to support energy and fat metabolism alongside lifestyle changes. Not a substitute for diet, activity, or medical treatment. **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light, balanced meal 1-2 hours before, carnitine IV on an empty stomach can cause nausea - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Bring a list of current medications, supplements, and any weight-management treatments you're on - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Let us know about thyroid conditions, diabetes, PCOS, or any cardiac conditions - Wear comfortable, loose-sleeved clothing **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of water across the rest of the day - Eat a protein-rich meal within an hour - A gentle walk or workout within 2-6 hours can amplify the fat-metabolism effect - Avoid alcohol for the rest of the day - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Commit to a course of 6 sessions alongside diet and exercise for measurable support **FAQs:** - **Will this make me lose weight on its own?** No IV drip is a weight-loss treatment on its own, and we don't position it that way. The Fat Burning IV supports the metabolic pathways that convert fat to energy, so it works best alongside a structured diet, activity, and any medical weight-management plan you're on. - **Is it safe with PCOS or diabetes?** The formula is designed with metabolic conditions in mind and can be a useful support alongside medical treatment. We adjust the protocol based on your specific diagnosis, medications, and bloodwork, share these during consultation. - **Can I do this alongside weight-management medications?** Yes, including alongside GLP-1 receptor agonists and other prescribed therapies, with medical oversight. Share your full medication list during consultation so we tailor the protocol. - **How soon will I see a change?** The IV supports metabolism rather than producing direct weight loss. Clients on a structured programme often notice improved energy for workouts within days, with body-composition changes developing across a 6-12 week programme. ### Multivitamin IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/multivitamin-iv-drip **Tagline:** The classic Myers' cocktail, our most popular drip The signature all-rounder, a balanced blend of B vitamins, vitamin C, magnesium, calcium, and trace minerals based on the Myers' cocktail. Supports energy, immunity, skin, hair, and general resilience. Our most-requested drip, and a great first infusion for new clients. Full-vial dosing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Often felt within hours - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Based on the well-established Myers' cocktail formula - Full B-complex for cellular energy - Therapeutic vitamin C for immunity and antioxidant support - Magnesium for nerve, muscle, and sleep support - Our most popular drip, ideal for first-time IV clients **How it works:** The Myers' cocktail, developed by Dr John Myers in the 1960s, is the original and most widely-used IV nutrient protocol. It provides a broad, balanced spectrum of vitamins and minerals directly into circulation, making it the best 'first IV' for someone wanting general wellness support without a narrower clinical target. **Ideal for:** First-time IV clients, busy professionals, frequent travellers, and anyone wanting a well-rounded energy, immunity, and skin-quality boost **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before, don't come fasting - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Wear a loose-sleeved top for easy arm access - Tell us about any allergies (especially to vitamins or preservatives) and current medications - If it's your first IV, arrive 10 minutes early for a full health check-in **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5L of additional water across the rest of the day - Resume normal activity, most clients feel a noticeable energy lift within 2-6 hours - Eat a balanced meal within an hour - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Mild bruising at the site may last a few days, ice if needed - Consider a 6-session course for sustained well-being **FAQs:** - **Why is this the most popular drip?** Because it does the most for the widest range of people. The Myers' cocktail supports energy, immunity, skin, hair, and general resilience, it's a reliable all-rounder. Clients who need more targeted support often rotate in with Detox, Radiant Skin Glow, or Immune Boost drips. - **How often should I have it?** For ongoing wellness, most clients do weekly or fortnightly sessions for 4-6 weeks, then monthly. For pre-event or travel-prep, a single session 24-48 hours before is ideal. - **Can I add glutathione or NAD+ to this drip?** We offer specific drips for glutathione (Detox, Radiant Skin Glow) and NAD+ (NAD 250mg, NAD 500mg) rather than add-ons, this lets us deliver the full therapeutic dose every time, using the full vial with stability testing. - **Is this safe for pregnancy?** We don't offer IV drip therapy during pregnancy without an obstetrician's letter of clearance. For breastfeeding clients we adjust the formula. Always disclose during your consultation. ### Vitamin D3 IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/vitamin-d3-iv-drip **Tagline:** Double-dosage vitamin D3 for immunity, energy, skin, and hair A high-dose vitamin D3 infusion for clients with confirmed or suspected deficiency, common in the UAE due to indoor lifestyles and sun avoidance. Supports immunity, bone health, mood, skin, and hair. Double-dosage formula, full vial, stability tested. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Rising vitamin D levels within days; mood and energy often felt sooner - Frequency: Monthly until levels normalise, then as maintenance **Benefits:** - Double-dosage vitamin D3 for rapid replenishment - Supports immune function, especially respiratory health - Promotes bone and muscle health - Linked to mood, energy, and sleep quality - Particularly valuable for UAE residents with indoor lifestyles or sun avoidance **How it works:** Vitamin D3 (cholecalciferol) is produced in the skin from sun exposure and is essential for immune, bone, and mood health. Deficiency is common in the UAE due to indoor lifestyles and SPF use. An IV infusion raises serum levels faster than oral supplementation, especially in clients with absorption issues or severe deficiency. **Ideal for:** Adults with confirmed or suspected vitamin D deficiency, indoor-lifestyle professionals, post-partum women, anyone with bone density concerns, or clients noticing fatigue, low mood, or frequent colds **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal with some healthy fat (avocado, nuts, olive oil) 1-2 hours before, vitamin D3 is fat-soluble - Bring any recent vitamin D blood test results - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Tell us if you're already taking oral vitamin D supplements so we can coordinate - Let us know about kidney conditions, sarcoidosis, or history of hypercalcaemia, these affect vitamin D dosing **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5L of additional water across the rest of the day - Eat a fat-containing meal within an hour to support absorption - Resume normal activity immediately - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Plan a follow-up blood test 8-12 weeks after your course to confirm levels have normalised - Once normalised, switch to a daily oral dose or quarterly IV for maintenance **FAQs:** - **Why 'double dosage'?** A double-dosage vitamin D3 IV delivers a higher therapeutic dose than standard oral or injectable options, appropriate for clients with low blood levels who need a faster correction. We still recommend a baseline blood test (or recent result) to confirm your deficiency range. - **Do I need a blood test first?** We recommend it, knowing your baseline lets us personalise dose and frequency. If you have a recent result, bring it. If not, we can arrange a quick blood test before or at your first session. - **How often should I repeat it?** For confirmed deficiency, monthly until levels normalise (usually 3-6 sessions). Then every 2-3 months as maintenance, or swap to oral supplements once levels are stable. - **Is vitamin D3 better oral or IV?** For most people, oral is fine if they take it consistently. IV is better when: levels are very low, absorption is poor, you've struggled with oral supplements, or you want a fast correction. We'll guide you on the best path. - **The 'full vial' difference** Many clinics halve a vitamin D vial across two patients. At Ivory, every Vitamin D3 drip uses the full, double-dosage vial, and is stability-tested, so the therapeutic dose is reliable every time. ### Vitamin C IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/vitamin-c-iv-drip **Tagline:** Double-dosage vitamin C for immunity, energy, skin, and hair A high-dose vitamin C infusion, well beyond what the digestive system can absorb orally. Supports immune function, antioxidant defence, collagen synthesis, and skin brightening. Double-dosage formula, full-vial dosing with stability testing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Often felt within hours; skin effects over a course - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Double-dosage vitamin C, bypasses the oral absorption ceiling - Supports immune function and respiratory health - Promotes collagen synthesis for skin, hair, and nails - Powerful antioxidant, neutralises free radicals - Brightens and evens skin tone over a course **How it works:** The digestive system caps vitamin C absorption at around 200mg regardless of how much is taken orally, the rest is excreted. IV delivery bypasses this limit, pushing plasma levels far higher for therapeutic effect. High-dose vitamin C supports immunity, collagen production, and antioxidant defence in a way oral doses cannot. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting high-dose immune support, collagen-building for skin and joints, post-illness recovery, or brighter and more even-toned skin across a course **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Tell us about any kidney conditions, history of kidney stones, or G6PD deficiency, these affect vitamin C dosing - Let us know about iron supplementation, vitamin C enhances iron absorption - Wear a loose-sleeved top **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of water across the rest of the day - Resume normal activity immediately - Eat a balanced meal within an hour - Apply SPF 50+, vitamin C supports collagen synthesis, and sun protection preserves it - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Pair with a topical vitamin C serum for compounding skin effect - Book a course of 6 sessions for visible skin-tone improvement **FAQs:** - **Why 'double dosage'?** Double-dosage vitamin C is a therapeutic-range dose, well beyond what oral supplements can deliver. Ideal for clients recovering from illness, preparing for high physical demand, or wanting collagen and skin-tone effects that oral vitamin C can't produce. - **Is more vitamin C always better?** For most healthy adults, IV vitamin C at this range is safe. Very high doses are contraindicated in G6PD deficiency (a genetic enzyme condition) and should be used carefully with kidney conditions or certain medications. We screen for these before treatment. - **How does this compare to the Radiant Skin Glow drip?** Radiant Skin Glow combines high-dose glutathione and vitamin C with amino acids, broader beauty focus. Vitamin C IV is more targeted, ideal when the primary goal is immune support, collagen building, or recovery. Many clients rotate them. - **The 'full vial' difference** Other clinics sometimes split a vitamin C vial across sessions. At Ivory, every Vitamin C IV uses the full, double-dosage vial and is stability-tested, the therapeutic dose is consistent every time. ## Wellness & Longevity > Holistic wellness from the inside out Our medically supervised IV drip menu delivers vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants directly into your bloodstream for maximum absorption. Many clinics split one vial across two sessions. At Ivory, every IV drip uses the full vial, plus independent stability testing, so every infusion meets the same pharmaceutical-grade standard. From immune support and skin glow to NAD+ longevity protocols, each drip is selected for your goals and administered by our DHA-licensed nurse. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity ### Peptide Therapy URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/peptide-therapy **Tagline:** Targeted peptides for wellness and longevity Peptide Therapy is an advanced wellness and longevity treatment that uses bioactive amino-acid sequences to stimulate targeted functions in the body, such as fat metabolism, tissue repair, hormone regulation, sleep improvement, performance enhancement, and immune support. We partner with top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to ensure all peptides are medically compounded to the highest safety and sterility standards. We use medical-grade, prefilled peptide pens for accuracy, sterility, and high patient compliance, as outlined in the clinical protocols provided in the physician reference files **At a glance:** - Pain level: Just the needle insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: As needed or ongoing - Duration: No fixed duration, pen-based self-administration - Results: Benefits typically noticed after several weeks of consistent use - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Supports fat loss and improved body composition - Enhances tissue repair, recovery & regeneration - Boosts metabolism, energy, and vitality - Supports hormonal balance, libido, and reproductive health - Enhances sleep quality, stress regulation, and cognitive wellness - Strengthens immune resilience & cellular health - Improves skin, hair, collagen health, and anti-aging effects - Can be combined safely with other clinic treatments for a comprehensive wellness plan **Ideal for:** Adults seeking personalised, medically supervised longevity and wellness support, weight management, recovery, sleep, libido, immunity, or anti-ageing cellular health, who are comfortable with at-home self-administration via pen injector under ongoing medical guidance. **Indications:** - Peptide Therapy is ideal for people who: - Want to improve metabolic health or manage weight - Are looking for enhanced recovery, tissue repair or anti-aging support - Experience hormonal imbalances, low libido or fertility concerns - Want better sleep, stress resilience, or cognitive balance - Seek immune support or anti-aging cellular care - Wish to complement aesthetics, wellness, or longevity treatments - This therapy is suitable for adult men and women under medical supervision. **Not suitable for:** - Pregnancy or breastfeeding - Active malignancy (relative) - Severe uncontrolled medical conditions - Known allergy to peptide compounds - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Complete any pre-treatment blood work your doctor requests (thyroid panel, HbA1c, lipids, hormone levels, kidney and liver function) - Bring a full list of current medications, supplements, and medical conditions to your consultation - Fast as instructed if blood work is scheduled - Be honest about lifestyle factors, alcohol, smoking, sleep, exercise, diet, they affect peptide response - Tell your doctor about any history of cancer, diabetes, thyroid disorders, or autoimmune conditions - Plan a follow-up schedule for dose review and monitoring **Aftercare:** - Follow your prescribed dosing schedule strictly, consistency is essential for peptide benefit - Store injectable peptides as instructed (refrigerated in most cases) - Rotate injection sites as taught to avoid lipodystrophy - Maintain 2+ litres of water daily, balanced nutrition, regular movement, and adequate sleep, peptides amplify a healthy lifestyle, they don't replace it - Track your response in a simple journal (energy, sleep, appetite, weight, body composition) - Report any side effects to your doctor immediately, nausea, headaches, injection site issues, mood changes - Attend all scheduled follow-ups for dose adjustment and blood work - Do not exceed prescribed doses or combine with other peptides without medical review - Avoid drinking alcohol while on your peptide treatment - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, RF works best on well-hydrated tissue - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before; avoid fasting - Avoid alcohol the night before and the day of your session - Arrive with clean skin, free of body lotion, oil, or self-tanner on the treatment area - Wear loose, comfortable clothing - Avoid aggressive scrubs or exfoliation on the treatment area 3 days before - Inform us of any pacemaker, ICD, or metal implants in or near the treatment area, these are contraindications - If pregnant, breastfeeding, or within 3 months of delivery, we'll delay or adjust the protocol - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling and lymphatic clearance of fat - Apply a hydrating body moisturiser to the treated area for 3-5 days - Avoid direct sun exposure on treated areas and apply SPF 50+ daily - Light activity immediately; no heavy lifting for 24 hours - Maintain balanced nutrition and regular exercise to lock in contouring results - Schedule your cardio after the green laser session to enhance the resuts - Book your next session at 1-2 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course delivers the result - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 24-48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin for maximum light penetration - Avoid photosensitising products 48 hours prior (retinoids, some AHAs, strong vitamin C) - Avoid tanning beds and aggressive sun exposure in the 3 days before - Inform us of any photosensitising medications (isotretinoin, doxycycline, St John's wort, some antidepressants) - Remove contact lenses before treatment, we provide protective eyewear - Keep hydrated with 2 litres of water daily - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, while LED itself contains no UV, good sun protection supports the collagen response - Resume normal skincare immediately, no restrictions on makeup or actives - If combined with another treatment (peel, microneedling, laser), follow that treatment's aftercare instructions - Avoid very hot showers, saunas, or steam rooms for a few hours if you feel warm (rare) - Book sessions in a consistent cadence (weekly or bi-weekly) for cumulative anti-ageing or acne benefits **FAQs:** - **What are peptides and how do they work?** Peptides are short chains of amino acids that act as biological signalling molecules, instructing cells and tissues to perform specific functions. Different peptides target different systems, some stimulate growth hormone release (BPC-157, CJC-1295), some promote fat metabolism and appetite regulation (semaglutide, tirzepatide), some support skin and tissue repair (GHK-Cu), and others influence sleep, libido, or immunity. - **Is this legal and medically supervised?** Yes, at Ivory Aesthetics, peptide therapy is prescribed and supervised by our doctors after a full medical consultation, blood work where appropriate, and ongoing review. We only use pharmaceutical-grade, regulated compounds sourced through licensed compounding pharmacies. Off-label or unregulated peptides are not used. - **How are peptides administered?** Most peptides are self-administered via a small pen injector at home, similar to insulin pens. Your doctor trains you on technique, schedule, and storage. Some peptides are delivered as nasal sprays or oral tablets. - **How long before I notice benefits?** Varies by peptide and goal. Weight-management peptides typically show appetite changes within 1-2 weeks. Recovery and skin-quality peptides show benefit over 4-8 weeks. Growth hormone peptides (for sleep, body composition) typically take 8-12 weeks for visible change. - **Are there side effects?** All medications carry risks, your doctor will discuss the specific side effect profile of the peptide prescribed. Common considerations include injection site reactions, nausea with GLP-1 peptides, or water retention with growth hormone peptides. Regular monitoring and dose titration minimise side effects. - **Can peptides be combined with aesthetic treatments?** Yes, that's part of why they complement our clinic's approach. Recovery and skin-quality peptides enhance results from facials, laser, and microneedling. Metabolic peptides pair well with body contouring. Your doctor will ensure all treatments are compatible. ### Snow White IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/snow-white-iv-drip **Tagline:** Glutathione-led brightening infusion for clearer, more even skin Our signature brightening infusion centred on high-dose reduced glutathione, the body's master antioxidant, paired with vitamin C, alpha-lipoic acid, and B-complex to support a more even skin tone, reduce oxidative stress, and promote a luminous, refreshed appearance. Every session uses the full vial, never split. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 6-10 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Gradual brightening across 4-8 weeks - Frequency: Weekly during a course, monthly for maintenance **Benefits:** - High-dose reduced glutathione for even, brighter skin tone - Powerful antioxidant support, neutralises free-radical damage - Supports the liver's natural detoxification pathways - Improves skin clarity, radiance, and luminosity - 100% absorption, bypasses the digestive system **How it works:** After a brief health check by our DHA-licensed nurse, a tiny IV line is placed and the full-vial brightening formula is delivered over 60 minutes. Glutathione works at a cellular level to inhibit excess melanin production and quench oxidative stress, while vitamin C and alpha-lipoic acid amplify its antioxidant effect. Results build gradually across a course of sessions. **Ideal for:** Adults who want a more even, luminous complexion, support for sun-exposed or stressed skin, or an antioxidant boost as part of a wider skin protocol. Best results when combined with daily SPF and a brightening homecare routine. **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before your session, do not come fasting - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before to make vein access easier - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Wear a loose-sleeved top for easy arm access - Tell us about any allergies (especially to sulphur, vitamins, or preservatives), medications, asthma, and pregnancy or breastfeeding status - Wear SPF daily in the days leading up to your course, skin protected from UV responds best **Aftercare:** - Drink an additional 1-1.5L of water across the rest of the day - Resume normal activity immediately, you can go straight back to work - Eat a balanced meal within an hour - Apply SPF 50+ daily and reapply through the day, glutathione's effect builds when skin is protected from UV - Mild bruising or tenderness at the insertion site may last a few days, ice if needed - Book your full course (6-10 sessions) and monthly maintenance for the most consistent brightening result **FAQs:** - **How is this different from a topical brightening cream?** Topical brighteners work on the surface layers of the skin and depend on consistent application. An IV-delivered glutathione formula reaches every cell in the body via the bloodstream, supporting an even, luminous result from the inside out. Most clients find topical and IV protocols work best together. - **How many sessions will I need?** Most clients start with a course of 6-10 sessions, scheduled weekly or fortnightly, then move to monthly maintenance. Some see a glow after the first session, but the most consistent results come from a full course. - **Is it safe?** Glutathione is a naturally occurring antioxidant in the body, and the IV protocol we use follows pharmaceutical-grade safety standards. Every drip is administered by a DHA-licensed nurse after a brief health screen. We'll discuss any contraindications, such as severe asthma, sulphur allergy, or active pregnancy, at consultation. - **Will my skin tone change?** The treatment supports your skin's natural even tone, it reduces excess melanin caused by sun damage and oxidative stress, but it will not change your underlying skin colour. Think 'luminous version of you', not a different complexion. ### Immune Boost IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/immune-boost-iv-drip **Tagline:** Immune support, energy, and muscle recovery A high-potency infusion combining vitamin C, zinc, B-complex, and amino acids to rebuild immune resilience, support energy production, and accelerate muscle recovery. Ideal before flu season, after illness, or during demanding training phases. Every session uses the full vial, never split. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Many feel benefits within hours - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Reinforces immune defences with high-dose vitamin C and zinc - Boosts cellular energy with full B-complex - Accelerates muscle recovery and repair - Supports faster rebound after illness or intense training - 100% absorption, bypasses the digestive system **How it works:** After a brief health check by our DHA-licensed nurse, a tiny IV line is placed and the full-vial infusion is delivered over 60 minutes. You relax, read, or work during the session. Because the nutrients enter the bloodstream directly, benefits are felt far faster than oral supplementation. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting proactive immune support, before travel, ahead of flu season, during recovery from illness, or alongside an intense training schedule **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before your session, do not come fasting - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before to make vein access easier - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Wear a loose-sleeved top for easy arm access - Tell us about any allergies (especially to vitamins or preservatives), medications, and pregnancy or breastfeeding status - If you're caffeine-sensitive, skip coffee on the morning of your session, some formulas are gently stimulating **Aftercare:** - Drink an additional 1-1.5L of water across the rest of the day - Resume normal activity immediately, you can go straight back to work - Eat a balanced meal within an hour - Keep the injection site covered and clean for 2-4 hours - Mild bruising or tenderness at the insertion site may last a few days, ice if needed - Book your 2-session or 6-session package to build and maintain immune resilience **FAQs:** - **Why is Ivory's Immune Boost different from other IV clinics?** Many clinics dilute or split one vial across two sessions. At Ivory, every drip uses the full vial, and each formula is independently stability-tested, so every infusion meets the same pharmaceutical-grade standard. You get the full clinical dose, every time. - **How quickly will I feel the effect?** Many clients feel lighter, more focused, and more energised within 2-6 hours. Immune-support benefits build over 24-48 hours and last longer with a course of 2 or 6 sessions. - **Can I do this if I'm already sick?** If you have mild viral symptoms, an Immune Boost drip may support your recovery. If you have fever, active infection, or severe symptoms, we'll reschedule, IV is best used for prevention and recovery, not during acute illness. - **Is it safe during pregnancy or breastfeeding?** Not during pregnancy without obstetric clearance. For breastfeeding clients, we adjust the formula and advise accordingly. Always disclose during your consultation. ### Gut Cleanse IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/gut-cleanse-iv-drip **Tagline:** Improved digestion, absorption, and well-being Formulated to reset gut function with glutamine, magnesium, B vitamins, and key minerals. Supports the intestinal lining, improves nutrient absorption, and restores the gut-immunity link. Ideal after antibiotic courses, bloating episodes, or chronic digestive fatigue. Full-vial dosing, every time. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Felt within 24-72 hours - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Supports repair of the intestinal lining - Improves digestion and nutrient absorption - Eases bloating and gut-related fatigue - Strengthens the gut-immunity connection - Full vial, stability-tested formula **How it works:** The infusion delivers glutamine, magnesium, B vitamins, and minerals directly into circulation, bypassing a compromised gut. Your nurse conducts a brief check, places the IV line, and the full vial runs over 60 minutes while you relax. **Ideal for:** Adults managing bloating, sluggish digestion, post-antibiotic recovery, food sensitivities, or chronic low energy linked to gut health **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before (bland, easy to digest, nothing heavy or greasy) - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol and very spicy foods for 24 hours before - Tell us about any gastrointestinal conditions, food allergies, or current medications - Wear a loose-sleeved top **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of additional water over the rest of the day - Eat gentle, gut-friendly meals (bone broth, cooked vegetables, lean protein) for 24 hours - Avoid alcohol, very processed, or very spicy foods for the rest of the day - Resume normal activity immediately - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Many clients notice less bloating and better digestion within 48-72 hours **FAQs:** - **Why use IV for gut health instead of oral supplements?** A compromised gut may not absorb oral supplements reliably. IV delivery bypasses the digestive system entirely, giving your cells the raw materials they need while your gut heals. Ideal as a kickstart alongside diet and lifestyle changes. - **How many sessions will I need?** For a noticeable reset, most clients do a course of 2-6 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart. Maintenance sessions monthly can support longer-term gut health. - **Can I combine this with probiotics or other supplements?** Yes. The Gut Cleanse drip works alongside oral probiotics, digestive enzymes, and lifestyle changes. Share your current supplement stack during consultation. - **What's the 'full vial' difference?** Some clinics split one vial across two patients. At Ivory, every Gut Cleanse IV uses the full vial, plus stability testing, so you receive the complete clinical dose every session. ### Detox IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/detox-iv-drip **Tagline:** Immunity boost, muscle recovery, and hangover cure A rebalancing infusion with glutathione, vitamin C, B vitamins, and electrolytes, designed to rehydrate, neutralise free radicals, and clear metabolic waste. The most-requested drip after travel, late nights, or events. Full-vial dosing, stability tested. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Often felt within 1-3 hours - Frequency: As needed or weekly **Benefits:** - Rapid rehydration with balanced electrolytes - Glutathione, the body's master antioxidant, at therapeutic dose - Clears post-event or post-travel brain fog - Supports muscle recovery after intense activity - Proven hangover relief **How it works:** The infusion combines electrolytes, antioxidants, and B vitamins. After a brief health check, the full-vial infusion runs over 60 minutes in a comfortable reclining room. The glutathione neutralises oxidative stress while electrolytes restore hydration and mineral balance. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting quick recovery from travel, events, alcohol, or intense training, or ongoing antioxidant support for radiant skin and mental clarity **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before, don't arrive on an empty or very full stomach - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before your appointment - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before if possible (we can still treat you if you're hungover) - Wear a loose-sleeved top - Tell us about any sulfur-containing drug allergies (sulfa antibiotics), glutathione contains sulfur **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of water over the rest of the day to support the detox pathway - Eat a nourishing meal within an hour - Avoid alcohol for the rest of the day - Resume normal activity, you'll likely feel lighter and clearer-headed within a few hours - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Some clients notice a subtle 'garlic' or sulfur taste at the back of the throat from glutathione, this resolves within an hour **FAQs:** - **Does it really work for hangovers?** Yes, and faster than drinking water and resting alone. The IV replaces lost fluids and electrolytes immediately, while glutathione helps clear the metabolic byproducts that cause hangover symptoms. Most clients feel noticeably better within 1-2 hours. - **How is glutathione better delivered via IV?** Oral glutathione is poorly absorbed because the digestive system breaks it down. IV delivery puts it straight into circulation, where it can act as a free-radical scavenger throughout the body. - **Can I do this regularly?** Yes. Many clients book a Detox drip monthly for ongoing antioxidant support, or weekly during demanding seasons. The 6-session package offers better value for regular users. - **Why the 'full vial' matters here** Glutathione is dose-dependent. Splitting a vial halves the therapeutic effect. At Ivory, every Detox drip uses the full vial and is stability-tested, you get the full antioxidant dose every time. ### Hair IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/hair-iv-drip **Tagline:** Detox, hair, nails, and well-being Targeted support for hair and nail health with biotin, zinc, selenium, iron-free amino acids, and B vitamins. Addresses dullness, thinning, and slow growth from the inside out, pairs beautifully with topical or in-clinic hair treatments. Full-vial dosing every session. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Visible over 6-12 weeks - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Delivers biotin, zinc, and selenium at therapeutic dose - Supports hair follicle health and growth cycle - Strengthens nails, less splitting and peeling - Improves keratin production from within - Pairs with in-clinic hair therapies for compounding effect **How it works:** The formula combines B vitamins, biotin, amino acids, and trace minerals known to support hair and nail matrix cells. Delivered directly into the bloodstream, the nutrients reach the scalp and nail beds faster and more completely than oral supplements. **Ideal for:** Adults noticing thinning, brittleness, slower growth, or dullness in hair and nails, especially during stress, post-partum, post-weight-loss, or alongside an in-clinic hair programme **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before your appointment - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Wear a loose-sleeved top - Tell us about current hair loss, post-partum status, thyroid conditions, or any iron-deficiency diagnosis, this guides the protocol **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of additional water across the rest of the day - Eat a protein-rich meal within an hour, hair matrix cells need amino acids - Resume normal activity immediately - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Commit to the full 6-session course for measurable hair and nail improvement - Pair with a gentle scalp care routine and in-clinic hair therapy for compounding results **FAQs:** - **When will I see a difference in my hair?** Hair grows slowly, most clients notice stronger nails within 2-3 weeks, and improved hair shine, density, and shedding reduction over 6-12 weeks. A course of 6 sessions paired with in-clinic hair therapy delivers the most visible result. - **Is it effective if my hair loss is hormonal or genetic?** The Hair IV supports the nutrients your follicles need, but it doesn't treat underlying hormonal or genetic causes directly. For hormonal or androgenetic hair loss, we combine it with targeted in-clinic therapies (PRF, exosomes, topical treatments) and recommend appropriate medical review. - **How does this compare to oral biotin supplements?** Oral biotin has variable absorption (20-50%). IV delivery puts the full dose directly into circulation, faster, more predictable, and more effective as a kickstart. We often recommend IV for 6 sessions, then maintain with oral. - **Can I combine this with Hair Filler or MCT Exosome therapy?** Yes, they complement each other. IV nourishes systemically while in-clinic therapies stimulate the scalp directly. Many clients do a 6-session IV course alongside a 3-session scalp programme. ### Radiant Skin Glow IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/radiant-skin-glow-iv-drip **Tagline:** Rejuvenate, glow, and restore from within The signature beauty infusion, high-dose glutathione, vitamin C, and collagen-supporting amino acids for visibly brighter, more even, and more luminous skin. Pairs beautifully with facials, peels, and energy-based treatments. Full-vial dosing, stability tested. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Visible brightening within days; deeper results over a course - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - High-dose glutathione for skin brightening and antioxidant support - Vitamin C at therapeutic dose for collagen synthesis and tone - Amino acids that feed collagen and elastin production - Improves luminosity, evenness, and overall skin quality - Complements in-clinic facials and energy-based treatments **How it works:** The formula delivers high-dose glutathione, vitamin C, and collagen-supporting nutrients directly into circulation. Glutathione down-regulates melanin production for a more even tone, while vitamin C and amino acids feed the fibroblasts that produce collagen and elastin. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting brighter, more even, luminous skin, particularly clients with pigmentation concerns, dullness from stress or travel, or those preparing for an event **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before to maximise the glutathione effect - Avoid heavy sun exposure in the 48 hours before (and SPF 50+ always) - Tell us about any sulfa-drug allergies (glutathione contains sulfur) - Wear a loose-sleeved top **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of water across the rest of the day, glutathione works best with good hydration - Apply SPF 50+ every morning for the following week; your skin will be slightly more photo-responsive - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours to preserve the antioxidant effect - Continue your usual skincare routine; pair with a vitamin C serum for compounding effect - Book your in-clinic facial or brightening treatment 24-48 hours after for best visible results - Some clients notice a subtle sulfur taste at the back of the throat, resolves within an hour **FAQs:** - **Will it lighten my skin?** Radiant Skin Glow doesn't lighten your natural skin tone, it evens pigmentation, reduces dullness, and restores natural luminosity. Glutathione balances melanin production rather than bleaching the skin. - **How does this pair with facials or peels?** Beautifully. The IV feeds your skin from within while your in-clinic treatments work on the surface. Many clients schedule Radiant Skin Glow 24-48 hours before a major facial or a wedding/event for a compounded effect. - **How soon will I see a glow?** A subtle, immediate brightening is often visible within 24-48 hours. The deeper improvements in tone and luminosity develop across a course of 6 sessions spaced weekly or fortnightly. - **Why a higher dose than the standard Multivitamin IV?** Radiant Skin Glow uses therapeutic-level glutathione specifically calibrated for the skin, substantially more than a general wellness drip. And as always, the full vial is used per session, never split. ### NAD+ 250mg IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/nad-250mg-iv-drip **Tagline:** Fountain of youth, age reversal, DNA repair, addiction recovery A 250mg nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD+) infusion, the master coenzyme for cellular energy, DNA repair, and longevity. Used clinically for neurological resilience, metabolic health, and recovery from addiction or burnout. Administered slowly over 60 minutes with a DHA-licensed nurse present throughout. Full-vial dosing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion; some clients feel flushing during infusion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Often felt within hours; cumulative over a course - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Supports mitochondrial function and cellular energy - Promotes DNA repair and cellular resilience - Enhances mental clarity, focus, and cognitive performance - Supports recovery from burnout, jet lag, or substance-use recovery - Complements peptide therapy and longevity protocols **How it works:** NAD+ is a coenzyme present in every cell, essential for converting nutrients into energy and repairing DNA. Levels decline sharply with age, stress, and illness. A 250mg IV infusion restores NAD+ directly to tissues, delivered slowly over 60 minutes to minimise flushing and maximise cellular uptake. **Ideal for:** Adults focused on longevity, cognitive performance, metabolic health, or recovery from burnout, jet lag, or substance dependence, and those starting or maintaining a longevity protocol **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a full, balanced meal 1-2 hours before, NAD+ on an empty stomach can intensify flushing - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol and recreational drugs for 24 hours before - If you have cardiac or blood pressure conditions, share them during consultation, we may adjust the protocol - Allow extra time: the infusion runs 60 minutes and we typically add 15-20 minutes for pre-infusion check-in - Bring a book, headphones, or work, most clients relax throughout **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of water across the rest of the day - Eat a nourishing, protein-rich meal within 1-2 hours - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours - Expect improved clarity and energy within hours; effects build across a course - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - For longevity protocols, most clients do an initial course of 6 sessions then monthly maintenance **FAQs:** - **How is 250mg different from 500mg?** 250mg is the starting dose, ideal for first-time NAD+ users, ongoing maintenance, or anyone sensitive to infusion flushing. 500mg is the higher therapeutic dose for more advanced protocols or deeper deficiency. We often recommend starting at 250mg and progressing to 500mg if tolerated. - **Will I feel anything during the infusion?** NAD+ can cause transient chest tightness, flushing, or a 'hot' sensation, this is normal, not harmful, and resolves by slowing the drip. Our nurse stays with you throughout and adjusts the flow rate for your comfort. - **Is there evidence for anti-ageing and DNA repair?** NAD+ is one of the most-studied longevity coenzymes, with mechanistic evidence for sirtuin activation and DNA repair. Human outcome data on anti-ageing is still emerging, we position NAD+ as a cellular support, not a cure, and recommend it alongside exercise, sleep, and nutrition. - **How does the 'full vial' commitment apply to NAD+?** NAD+ is a dose-dependent therapy, splitting the vial halves the effect. At Ivory, every NAD+ drip uses the full 250mg (or 500mg) vial, and each batch is stability-tested. You receive the full therapeutic dose, every time. ### NAD+ 500mg IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/nad-500mg-iv-drip **Tagline:** Advanced longevity dose, age reversal, DNA repair, recovery A 500mg NAD+ infusion for clients already established on NAD+ therapy or pursuing an intensive longevity, neurological, or addiction-recovery protocol. Delivered slowly over 60 minutes with a DHA-licensed nurse throughout. Full-vial dosing every session. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion; flushing common with higher dose - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes (may be extended for tolerance) - Results: Cumulative across a course - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Higher therapeutic dose for advanced longevity protocols - Maximises mitochondrial and cellular energy recovery - Supports DNA repair, sirtuin activation, and cellular resilience - Used clinically in intensive recovery and neurological resilience protocols - Complements peptide therapy and functional medicine programmes **How it works:** NAD+ at 500mg is the higher-tier dose for deeper cellular impact. Delivered slowly and carefully over 60 minutes (sometimes longer depending on tolerance), with continuous nurse supervision. The slower rate minimises flushing while maximising uptake into tissues. **Ideal for:** Adults already established on NAD+ at 250mg, or pursuing intensive longevity, cognitive-performance, or recovery protocols under medical guidance **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a full, balanced meal 1-2 hours before, 500mg on an empty stomach intensifies flushing - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol and caffeine for 24 hours before if possible - Confirm cardiac history, medications, and supplement stack during consultation - Allow 90 minutes total for the appointment (infusion may extend for comfort) - Bring something comfortable, slippers, cardigan, headphones, book **Aftercare:** - Drink 2L of water across the rest of the day - Eat a protein-rich meal within 1-2 hours - Avoid alcohol, caffeine, and heavy exercise for the rest of the day - Expect deeper fatigue for the first few hours after a 500mg session, this is normal and resolves with rest - Improved clarity, focus, and energy typically felt the next day and builds across a course - For longevity protocols, most clients pair NAD+ with peptide therapy and functional medicine guidance **FAQs:** - **Should I start at 500mg?** No, we recommend starting at 250mg to gauge your tolerance to NAD+. If you handle 250mg well and your protocol calls for a deeper dose, we progress to 500mg in subsequent sessions. - **What should I expect during a 500mg infusion?** Flushing, warmth, or transient chest tightness is more common at the higher dose. Our nurse stays with you throughout and slows the infusion rate as needed for comfort. The infusion may extend beyond 60 minutes if we slow the rate. - **How often should I do 500mg sessions?** Typically weekly during a loading phase (4-6 sessions), then monthly or every 6 weeks for maintenance. Your protocol is personalised based on goals and response. - **Are there any contraindications?** Pregnancy, breastfeeding, active malignancy, uncontrolled cardiac conditions, and severe kidney or liver disease are relative contraindications. We conduct a full health review before any NAD+ session. ### Fat Burning IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/fat-burning-iv-drip **Tagline:** Weight management, metabolic and liver support, PCOS A metabolic-support infusion combining L-carnitine, taurine, B-complex, choline, and methylation cofactors. Designed to support fat metabolism, liver function, insulin sensitivity, and energy, ideal alongside structured weight-management, PCOS protocols, or diabetic health support. Full-vial dosing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Gradual, cumulative across a course with diet and activity - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Supports fat metabolism with L-carnitine and taurine - Boosts liver detoxification pathways - Supports insulin sensitivity and metabolic health - Enhances energy for exercise and recovery - Pairs with medical weight management, PCOS, and diabetic support programmes **How it works:** L-carnitine transports fatty acids into mitochondria for energy production. Combined with B vitamins, choline, and methylation support, the formula helps optimise the metabolic machinery that processes fat. It works best as a support to diet, activity, and, where prescribed, medical weight-management therapies. **Ideal for:** Adults on a structured weight-management, PCOS, or metabolic-health programme, or those wanting to support energy and fat metabolism alongside lifestyle changes. Not a substitute for diet, activity, or medical treatment. **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light, balanced meal 1-2 hours before, carnitine IV on an empty stomach can cause nausea - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Bring a list of current medications, supplements, and any weight-management treatments you're on - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Let us know about thyroid conditions, diabetes, PCOS, or any cardiac conditions - Wear comfortable, loose-sleeved clothing **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of water across the rest of the day - Eat a protein-rich meal within an hour - A gentle walk or workout within 2-6 hours can amplify the fat-metabolism effect - Avoid alcohol for the rest of the day - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Commit to a course of 6 sessions alongside diet and exercise for measurable support **FAQs:** - **Will this make me lose weight on its own?** No IV drip is a weight-loss treatment on its own, and we don't position it that way. The Fat Burning IV supports the metabolic pathways that convert fat to energy, so it works best alongside a structured diet, activity, and any medical weight-management plan you're on. - **Is it safe with PCOS or diabetes?** The formula is designed with metabolic conditions in mind and can be a useful support alongside medical treatment. We adjust the protocol based on your specific diagnosis, medications, and bloodwork, share these during consultation. - **Can I do this alongside weight-management medications?** Yes, including alongside GLP-1 receptor agonists and other prescribed therapies, with medical oversight. Share your full medication list during consultation so we tailor the protocol. - **How soon will I see a change?** The IV supports metabolism rather than producing direct weight loss. Clients on a structured programme often notice improved energy for workouts within days, with body-composition changes developing across a 6-12 week programme. ### Multivitamin IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/multivitamin-iv-drip **Tagline:** The classic Myers' cocktail, our most popular drip The signature all-rounder, a balanced blend of B vitamins, vitamin C, magnesium, calcium, and trace minerals based on the Myers' cocktail. Supports energy, immunity, skin, hair, and general resilience. Our most-requested drip, and a great first infusion for new clients. Full-vial dosing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Often felt within hours - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Based on the well-established Myers' cocktail formula - Full B-complex for cellular energy - Therapeutic vitamin C for immunity and antioxidant support - Magnesium for nerve, muscle, and sleep support - Our most popular drip, ideal for first-time IV clients **How it works:** The Myers' cocktail, developed by Dr John Myers in the 1960s, is the original and most widely-used IV nutrient protocol. It provides a broad, balanced spectrum of vitamins and minerals directly into circulation, making it the best 'first IV' for someone wanting general wellness support without a narrower clinical target. **Ideal for:** First-time IV clients, busy professionals, frequent travellers, and anyone wanting a well-rounded energy, immunity, and skin-quality boost **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before, don't come fasting - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Wear a loose-sleeved top for easy arm access - Tell us about any allergies (especially to vitamins or preservatives) and current medications - If it's your first IV, arrive 10 minutes early for a full health check-in **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5L of additional water across the rest of the day - Resume normal activity, most clients feel a noticeable energy lift within 2-6 hours - Eat a balanced meal within an hour - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Mild bruising at the site may last a few days, ice if needed - Consider a 6-session course for sustained well-being **FAQs:** - **Why is this the most popular drip?** Because it does the most for the widest range of people. The Myers' cocktail supports energy, immunity, skin, hair, and general resilience, it's a reliable all-rounder. Clients who need more targeted support often rotate in with Detox, Radiant Skin Glow, or Immune Boost drips. - **How often should I have it?** For ongoing wellness, most clients do weekly or fortnightly sessions for 4-6 weeks, then monthly. For pre-event or travel-prep, a single session 24-48 hours before is ideal. - **Can I add glutathione or NAD+ to this drip?** We offer specific drips for glutathione (Detox, Radiant Skin Glow) and NAD+ (NAD 250mg, NAD 500mg) rather than add-ons, this lets us deliver the full therapeutic dose every time, using the full vial with stability testing. - **Is this safe for pregnancy?** We don't offer IV drip therapy during pregnancy without an obstetrician's letter of clearance. For breastfeeding clients we adjust the formula. Always disclose during your consultation. ### Vitamin D3 IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/vitamin-d3-iv-drip **Tagline:** Double-dosage vitamin D3 for immunity, energy, skin, and hair A high-dose vitamin D3 infusion for clients with confirmed or suspected deficiency, common in the UAE due to indoor lifestyles and sun avoidance. Supports immunity, bone health, mood, skin, and hair. Double-dosage formula, full vial, stability tested. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Rising vitamin D levels within days; mood and energy often felt sooner - Frequency: Monthly until levels normalise, then as maintenance **Benefits:** - Double-dosage vitamin D3 for rapid replenishment - Supports immune function, especially respiratory health - Promotes bone and muscle health - Linked to mood, energy, and sleep quality - Particularly valuable for UAE residents with indoor lifestyles or sun avoidance **How it works:** Vitamin D3 (cholecalciferol) is produced in the skin from sun exposure and is essential for immune, bone, and mood health. Deficiency is common in the UAE due to indoor lifestyles and SPF use. An IV infusion raises serum levels faster than oral supplementation, especially in clients with absorption issues or severe deficiency. **Ideal for:** Adults with confirmed or suspected vitamin D deficiency, indoor-lifestyle professionals, post-partum women, anyone with bone density concerns, or clients noticing fatigue, low mood, or frequent colds **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal with some healthy fat (avocado, nuts, olive oil) 1-2 hours before, vitamin D3 is fat-soluble - Bring any recent vitamin D blood test results - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Tell us if you're already taking oral vitamin D supplements so we can coordinate - Let us know about kidney conditions, sarcoidosis, or history of hypercalcaemia, these affect vitamin D dosing **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5L of additional water across the rest of the day - Eat a fat-containing meal within an hour to support absorption - Resume normal activity immediately - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Plan a follow-up blood test 8-12 weeks after your course to confirm levels have normalised - Once normalised, switch to a daily oral dose or quarterly IV for maintenance **FAQs:** - **Why 'double dosage'?** A double-dosage vitamin D3 IV delivers a higher therapeutic dose than standard oral or injectable options, appropriate for clients with low blood levels who need a faster correction. We still recommend a baseline blood test (or recent result) to confirm your deficiency range. - **Do I need a blood test first?** We recommend it, knowing your baseline lets us personalise dose and frequency. If you have a recent result, bring it. If not, we can arrange a quick blood test before or at your first session. - **How often should I repeat it?** For confirmed deficiency, monthly until levels normalise (usually 3-6 sessions). Then every 2-3 months as maintenance, or swap to oral supplements once levels are stable. - **Is vitamin D3 better oral or IV?** For most people, oral is fine if they take it consistently. IV is better when: levels are very low, absorption is poor, you've struggled with oral supplements, or you want a fast correction. We'll guide you on the best path. - **The 'full vial' difference** Many clinics halve a vitamin D vial across two patients. At Ivory, every Vitamin D3 drip uses the full, double-dosage vial, and is stability-tested, so the therapeutic dose is reliable every time. ### Vitamin C IV Drip URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/vitamin-c-iv-drip **Tagline:** Double-dosage vitamin C for immunity, energy, skin, and hair A high-dose vitamin C infusion, well beyond what the digestive system can absorb orally. Supports immune function, antioxidant defence, collagen synthesis, and skin brightening. Double-dosage formula, full-vial dosing with stability testing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tiny prick at insertion - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Single or course of 2 or 6 - Duration: 60 minutes - Results: Often felt within hours; skin effects over a course - Frequency: Weekly to monthly **Benefits:** - Double-dosage vitamin C, bypasses the oral absorption ceiling - Supports immune function and respiratory health - Promotes collagen synthesis for skin, hair, and nails - Powerful antioxidant, neutralises free radicals - Brightens and evens skin tone over a course **How it works:** The digestive system caps vitamin C absorption at around 200mg regardless of how much is taken orally, the rest is excreted. IV delivery bypasses this limit, pushing plasma levels far higher for therapeutic effect. High-dose vitamin C supports immunity, collagen production, and antioxidant defence in a way oral doses cannot. **Ideal for:** Adults wanting high-dose immune support, collagen-building for skin and joints, post-illness recovery, or brighter and more even-toned skin across a course **Pre-treatment care:** - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before - Drink 500ml - 1L of water in the 2 hours before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Tell us about any kidney conditions, history of kidney stones, or G6PD deficiency, these affect vitamin C dosing - Let us know about iron supplementation, vitamin C enhances iron absorption - Wear a loose-sleeved top **Aftercare:** - Drink 1.5-2L of water across the rest of the day - Resume normal activity immediately - Eat a balanced meal within an hour - Apply SPF 50+, vitamin C supports collagen synthesis, and sun protection preserves it - Keep the insertion site clean and covered for 2-4 hours - Pair with a topical vitamin C serum for compounding skin effect - Book a course of 6 sessions for visible skin-tone improvement **FAQs:** - **Why 'double dosage'?** Double-dosage vitamin C is a therapeutic-range dose, well beyond what oral supplements can deliver. Ideal for clients recovering from illness, preparing for high physical demand, or wanting collagen and skin-tone effects that oral vitamin C can't produce. - **Is more vitamin C always better?** For most healthy adults, IV vitamin C at this range is safe. Very high doses are contraindicated in G6PD deficiency (a genetic enzyme condition) and should be used carefully with kidney conditions or certain medications. We screen for these before treatment. - **How does this compare to the Radiant Skin Glow drip?** Radiant Skin Glow combines high-dose glutathione and vitamin C with amino acids, broader beauty focus. Vitamin C IV is more targeted, ideal when the primary goal is immune support, collagen building, or recovery. Many clients rotate them. - **The 'full vial' difference** Other clinics sometimes split a vitamin C vial across sessions. At Ivory, every Vitamin C IV uses the full, double-dosage vial and is stability-tested, the therapeutic dose is consistent every time. ### Emerald Green Laser URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/emerald-green-laser **Tagline:** Non-invasive fat reduction with cold laser Emerald Green Laser is a non-invasive fat reduction treatment that uses low-level laser technology to target adipose tissue, stimulating fat cell reduction and supporting body contouring. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Comfortable - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 6 sessions plus maintenance - Duration: 45-60 minutes - Results: Visible after 3-4 sessions - Frequency: Weekly to fortnightly **Benefits:** - Personalised to your skin and goals - Performed by qualified practitioners - Clinically proven technology **Ideal for:** Best used before other body contouring treatments to support metabolism, immune function, and cellular health **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, Green laser works best on well-hydrated tissue - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before; avoid fasting - Avoid alcohol the night before and the day of your session - Arrive with clean skin, free of body lotion, oil, or self-tanner on the treatment area - Wear loose, comfortable clothing - Avoid aggressive scrubs or exfoliation on the treatment area 3 days before - If pregnant, breastfeeding, or within 3 months of delivery, we'll delay or adjust the protocol **Aftercare:** - Drink 2-3 litres of water daily for the first week to support collagen remodelling and lymphatic clearance of fat - Apply a hydrating body moisturiser to the treated area for 3-5 days - Avoid direct sun exposure on treated areas and apply SPF 50+ daily - Light activity immediately; no heavy lifting for 24 hours - Maintain balanced nutrition and regular exercise to lock in contouring results - Schedule your cardio after the green laser session to enhance the results - Book your next session at 1-2 weeks, consistency across the 4-6 session course delivers the result **FAQs:** - **How will I feel after the treatment?** Many clients report feeling more energised and refreshed within hours of their session. The full benefits develop over the following days as your body absorbs and utilises the nutrients. - **How often should I book sessions?** Frequency depends on your wellness goals. Some clients benefit from weekly sessions during an initial phase, while others maintain with monthly visits. Your practitioner will recommend a schedule tailored to your needs. ### Dermalux LED Treatment URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/dermalux-led **Tagline:** Medical LED therapy for skin healing and glow Dermalux LED is a non-invasive light therapy treatment that uses clinically proven wavelengths to stimulate cellular activity, promote healing, and improve overall skin health. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None, a relaxing experience - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: Monthly for ongoing results - Duration: 60-75 minutes - Results: Immediate glow - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks **Benefits:** - FDA- and CE-approved: A globally trusted, safe, and effective treatment. - Anti-bacterial: Reduces acne by targeting bacteria and inflammation. - Rejuvenates Skin: Stimulates collagen for firmer, smoother skin. - Eases Rosacea and Redness: Soothes irritated skin and reduces sensitivity. - Accelerates Healing: Promotes recovery after treatments like chemical peels or microneedling. - Versatile: Suitable for all skin types and can be combined with other treatments. - Boosts Skin Health: Encourages vitamin D production, cell regeneration, and serotonin release for radiant, healthier skin. **Ideal for:** Clients with inflammatory acne, rosacea, redness, sensitivity, or slow post-procedure recovery, and anyone looking for a relaxing, completely non-invasive skin-health treatment that pairs beautifully with microneedling, peels, or laser. **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 24-48 hours before - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin for maximum light penetration - Avoid photosensitising products 48 hours prior (retinoids, some AHAs, strong vitamin C) - Avoid tanning beds and aggressive sun exposure in the 3 days before - Remove contact lenses before treatment, we provide protective eyewear **Aftercare:** - Keep hydrated with 2 litres of water daily - Apply SPF 50+ every morning, while LED itself contains no UV, good sun protection supports the collagen response - Resume normal skincare immediately, no restrictions on makeup or actives - If combined with another treatment (peel, microneedling, laser), follow that treatment's aftercare instructions - Avoid very hot showers, saunas, or steam rooms for a few hours if you feel warm (rare) - Book sessions in a consistent cadence (weekly or bi-weekly) for cumulative anti-ageing, anti-inflammatory or acne benefits **FAQs:** - **What are the different LED wavelengths and what do they do?** Dermalux uses three clinically proven wavelengths: Blue (415nm) kills P. acnes bacteria and calms active breakouts; Red (633nm) stimulates fibroblasts and collagen for anti-ageing; Near-Infrared (830nm) penetrates deepest to accelerate healing and reduce inflammation. Most sessions combine all three in a multi-wavelength programme tailored to your concerns. - **Is LED just a wellness trend, or is there science behind it?** LED phototherapy is backed by over 30 years of clinical research, originally developed by NASA for wound healing. Dermalux is a medical CE Class IIa device used in dermatology clinics globally for acne, rosacea, eczema, psoriasis, and post-laser recovery. - **What does a session feel like?** Completely relaxing. You lie beneath a large LED canopy for 20 minutes while warm, bright light bathes your skin. There is no heat, no discomfort, and no UV, you can close your eyes and rest. - **How many sessions will I need?** For acute concerns (active acne, inflammation, post-procedure healing) we recommend 2-3 sessions per week for 4 weeks. For anti-ageing and maintenance, weekly sessions for 6-8 weeks, then fortnightly. Results build cumulatively, consistency is key. - **Can it be used with other treatments?** Yes. LED is often added to the same session as a facial, microneedling, peel, or laser to accelerate recovery, reduce post-treatment redness, and enhance collagen response. There are virtually no contraindications with other aesthetic treatments. - **Who should avoid LED therapy?** Anyone taking photosensitising medications (e.g. isotretinoin, certain antibiotics, St John's wort), those with active skin cancer, epilepsy triggered by flashing light, or lupus should avoid or get medical clearance. Always tell your therapist about current medications. ### Emsella Chair URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/energy-based-rejuvenations/btl-emsella **Tagline:** Strengthen your pelvic floor effortlessly Emsella uses high-intensity focused electromagnetic energy to strengthen the entire pelvic floor musculature. You remain fully clothed while the chair delivers approximately 11,000 supramaximal contractions per session, significantly stronger than voluntary muscle contractions. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Tingling and contracting sensation - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: 6 sessions recommended - Duration: 30 minutes - Results: Noticeable after 2-3 sessions - Frequency: Twice weekly for 3 weeks **Benefits:** - Strengthens pelvic floor muscles by 95% - Reduces incontinence episodes - Remain fully clothed during treatment - Completely non-invasive - Quick 28-minute sessions **How it works:** You simply sit fully clothed on the Emsella chair, which delivers focused electromagnetic energy to the pelvic floor muscles. This triggers thousands of supramaximal contractions, strengthening the muscles far beyond what voluntary exercises can achieve. **Ideal for:** Those experiencing pelvic floor weakness, urinary incontinence, or post-pregnancy muscle recovery **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1-1.5 litres of water before your session, hydration supports muscle function - Empty your bladder immediately before treatment for comfort - Wear comfortable clothing, treatment is performed fully clothed - Avoid heavy meals right before the session - Inform your practitioner if you have any metal implants, pacemakers, or are pregnant - Consistency is key, plan your sessions as recommended for optimal results **Aftercare:** - Resume normal daily activities immediately, no downtime required - Mild muscle contractions or pelvic soreness may be felt, similar to exercise - Maintain hydration to support muscle recovery - Avoid alcohol immediately after treatment if possible to support neuromuscular response - Continue recommended treatment schedule for best results - Improvements are gradual and build over the course of sessions **FAQs:** - **Is Emsella just for women?** Yes, men can absolutely benefit from Emsella. Indications for men include urinary incontinence, erectile dysfunction support, sexual wellness, and core stability. Pelvic floor strengthening is important for both genders. ### Facial Acupuncture URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/acupuncture **Tagline:** Ancient holistic approach to natural beauty Acupuncture is a therapeutic technique involving the insertion of fine sterile needles into specific points on the body to regulate energy flow (Qi), relieve pain, and promote healing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, topical numbing applied - Downtime: Mild swelling or bruising for 24-48 hours - Sessions: Single session per area - Duration: 30-45 minutes - Results: Visible within 1-2 weeks - Frequency: Every 6-12 months depending on product **Benefits:** - Holistic treatment approach - Pain management and relaxation - Improves circulation and energy flow - Supports overall wellness - Minimally invasive **Ideal for:** Adults looking for a holistic, needle-based alternative or complement to aesthetic treatments, particularly those seeking stress reduction, improved skin glow, reduced tension lines, and overall wellness benefits alongside modern aesthetic care. **Indications:** - Musculoskeletal pain - Stress and anxiety - Headaches and migraines - Fatigue and low energy - General wellness support **Not suitable for:** - Bleeding disorders - Severe needle phobia - Active infections or skin lesions at insertion sites - Pregnancy (certain points contraindicated) - Patients on anticoagulant therapy (relative) **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before - Eat a light meal 1-2 hours before, do not come on an empty stomach - Avoid caffeine, alcohol, and stimulants for 4 hours before the session - Arrive with clean, makeup-free skin - Wear loose, comfortable clothing, body points may also be used - Tell us about any bleeding disorders, anticoagulant medications, recent injectables, or pregnancy - Avoid strenuous exercise immediately before the session - Arrive 10 minutes early to settle and fill in a TCM consultation form **Aftercare:** - Drink 2 litres of water after the session to support circulation - Rest and take it easy for the remainder of the day, avoid strenuous exercise for 24 hours - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours - Apply SPF 50+ if going outdoors, you may feel more photosensitive briefly - Mild soreness at needle points, occasional small bruising, or a feeling of deep relaxation are all normal - If a needle point bleeds slightly, apply gentle pressure with tissue - Keep a journal of how you feel over 24-48 hours, energy, sleep, appetite, mood - Eat a nourishing meal and avoid heavy processed food after the session - Book your next session at the recommended weekly or fortnightly interval for cumulative benefit **FAQs:** - **What is facial (cosmetic) acupuncture?** Facial acupuncture uses ultra-fine sterile needles inserted at specific points on the face and body, based on Traditional Chinese Medicine (TCM) principles. The needles stimulate microcirculation, trigger a mild collagen-building response, and release muscle tension, producing a subtly brighter, more relaxed appearance while supporting overall wellbeing. - **How is this different from Botox or filler?** Very different mechanism. Botox relaxes muscles pharmacologically; filler adds volume. Facial acupuncture works gradually through the body's own healing response, no pharmaceuticals, no synthetic materials. Results are subtler and more dependent on regular sessions. Many clients combine both, aesthetic treatments for structural change, acupuncture for wellness, stress, and glow. - **Does it hurt?** Minimal. The needles are much finer than medical needles, most clients feel a brief prickle or barely anything. Many find the session so relaxing they fall asleep. - **How many sessions will I need?** A traditional TCM course is 10 sessions spaced 1-2 weeks apart, followed by monthly maintenance. For wellness concerns (stress, sleep, pain), frequency varies with condition. Your acupuncturist will design a plan at consultation. - **What are realistic results?** Expect improved skin glow, reduced facial tension, softened fine lines, calmer breakouts, and an overall relaxed appearance over a course. It is not a dramatic anti-ageing treatment like laser or filler, but a gentle, cumulative wellness-to-beauty approach. - **Is it safe if I have Botox or filler?** Generally yes, but spacing is important. We recommend at least 2 weeks between injectables and facial acupuncture, and your acupuncturist avoids acupuncture points directly over filler or Botox-treated areas. ### Oligo Scan Analysis URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/wellness-longevity/oligo-scan **Tagline:** Non-invasive mineral and heavy metal screening OligoScan is a quick, non-invasive test that measures the levels of minerals, trace elements, and heavy metals in your body using a specialized light scanner. This advanced technology provides an instant analysis, helping to detect nutritional deficiencies and toxic metal buildup, so you can take steps toward better health. **At a glance:** - Pain level: None, completely non-invasive - Downtime: No downtime - Sessions: As needed or ongoing - Duration: 15-20 minutes - Results: Results generated within minutes - Frequency: Twice a year recommended **Benefits:** - Non-invasive and painless - Immediate results - Assesses mineral deficiencies and toxicities - Supports personalized treatment plans - Quick and efficient procedure **Ideal for:** Adults experiencing fatigue, skin or hair concerns, weight-loss plateaus, or looking for preventative health assessment, and those on detox, supplementation, or IV therapy programmes who want to track mineral and heavy metal status over time. **Indications:** - Patients with fatigue or low energy - Hair loss or skin concerns - Nutritional deficiencies - Detoxification programs - Preventative health assessments - Weight loss patients **Not suitable for:** - Open wounds or skin lesions on hand - Severe skin conditions affecting scan area - Inability to remain still during scan - Unrealistic expectations **Pre-treatment care:** - Drink 1.5-2 litres of water daily for 48 hours before, proper hydration improves scan accuracy - Avoid moisturiser, hand cream, or any lotion on both palms on the day of the scan - Remove rings, bracelets, and watches before the scan - Wash your hands with soap and water on arrival (if any product residue); let them fully dry - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours before - Bring a list of current supplements and medications to help interpret results - Consider pre-treatment blood work if you have specific concerns (iron, vitamin D, B12, thyroid) **Aftercare:** - Receive and review your written report with the practitioner - Implement recommended supplementation, dietary adjustments, or IV drip protocols as advised - Continue your usual daily activities immediately, no restrictions - Drink 2 litres of water daily to support any recommended detox or mineral balancing protocols - Retest in 3-6 months to measure progress objectively - Book confirmatory blood or hair tests if any significant findings warrant it - Pair with IV vitamin therapy, peptide wellness, or targeted supplement plans for comprehensive care **FAQs:** - **How does OligoScan work?** OligoScan uses spectrophotometry, a specialised light-based scanner placed briefly on four points on your palm. The light measures how specific wavelengths are absorbed by tissue, calculating intracellular levels of minerals (magnesium, zinc, calcium, iron, selenium, and more), trace elements, and heavy metals (lead, mercury, aluminium, arsenic, cadmium). Results are ready within minutes. - **How is this different from a blood test?** Blood tests measure extracellular (serum) levels, which reflect recent intake. OligoScan measures intracellular tissue levels, reflecting long-term bioavailability, what is actually being used inside your cells. The two tests are complementary; OligoScan gives a different view of your mineral status. - **Is the science validated?** Honest answer: OligoScan is a useful screening tool that gives directional information, but it is not a replacement for definitive laboratory testing. For significant concerns (heavy metal toxicity, severe deficiency), we'll recommend confirmatory blood or hair testing. Many clients find it a helpful starting point for a wellness plan. - **How long does the scan take?** The scan itself takes about 2 minutes. Consultation to review results and create a personalised plan takes 15-20 minutes. - **How often should I retest?** Every 3-6 months during an active wellness plan (detox, supplementation, IV therapy course). Annually for preventative monitoring. Tracking changes over time is where OligoScan adds real value. - **What happens after my results?** Your doctor or wellness practitioner reviews the findings, explains them in plain language, and recommends next steps, which may include targeted supplementation, dietary changes, IV drips, detox protocols, or confirmatory lab tests. You receive a personalised written report. ### InBody Analysis URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/signature-body-treatments/inbody-analysis **Tagline:** Bioelectrical body composition assessment InBody Analysis is a precision body composition assessment that measures muscle mass, fat mass, water distribution, and segmental body data using bioelectrical impedance. In about a minute, the InBody machine generates a detailed report showing where lean mass and fat are distributed across the body, intracellular and extracellular water balance, visceral fat, and basal metabolic rate. The data is used to set a clear baseline before starting body treatments, track progress objectively over time, and tailor the protocol to what your body actually needs rather than what the scale alone suggests. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Painless - Downtime: None - Sessions: Repeated at intervals to track progress - Duration: Under 5 minutes - Results: Detailed report immediately after the scan - Frequency: Every 4-6 weeks during a body programme **Benefits:** - Quantifies muscle, fat, and water distribution objectively - Tracks progress independent of weight on the scale - Identifies visceral fat and metabolic risk markers - Personalises body treatments to your actual composition - Provides motivation through clear, repeatable data **How it works:** The InBody device uses Direct Segmental Multi-Frequency Bioelectrical Impedance Analysis (DSM-BIA). You stand on the platform and hold the handles; a tiny, imperceptible electrical current passes through the body via electrodes on the hands and feet. Different tissues, muscle, fat, water, conduct the current differently. The device measures these differences across multiple frequencies and segments (arms, trunk, legs) to produce a precise breakdown of body composition without any estimation from height and weight alone. **Ideal for:** Anyone starting a body contouring or wellness programme, clients tracking progress through fat reduction, muscle building, or post-pregnancy recovery, and those who want objective data to guide treatment choices and lifestyle changes. **Pre-treatment care:** - Avoid heavy meals for at least 2-3 hours before the assessment - Avoid intense exercise on the same day prior to measurement - Stay well hydrated, but avoid excessive water intake immediately before - Avoid alcohol for 24 hours prior - Remove metal accessories and wear light, comfortable clothing - For best accuracy, perform the test under similar conditions each time **Aftercare:** - No downtime or restrictions after the assessment - Results will be reviewed and explained by your practitioner - The assessment will guide your personalized treatment plan - This analysis is offered as part of all our body treatments to track progress and optimize results - Follow recommended lifestyle changes including hydration, nutrition, and exercise based on your results **FAQs:** - **Is the test safe?** Yes. The current is well below the threshold of perception and is considered safe for the vast majority of adults. People with implanted electronic devices (pacemakers, ICDs) and pregnant women should not use the InBody and will be assessed differently. - **How accurate is it?** Modern multi-frequency segmental BIA correlates very well with research-grade methods like DEXA. Best accuracy comes from testing under similar conditions each time, hydrated, before food, in light clothing, with no recent heavy exercise. - **How often should I test?** For tracking a body programme, every 4-6 weeks is enough to capture meaningful change. More frequent testing can be misleading because of normal day-to-day fluctuations in hydration. ## Peptides > Medical-grade peptide protocols for wellness, recovery, and longevity Targeted peptide therapies dispensed as medical-grade prefilled pens, supplied by top-tier compounding pharmacies. Each protocol is initiated under clinician supervision and self-administered at home with full training and ongoing follow-up. We carry peptides supporting recovery, sleep, body composition, hormonal axis support, sexual health, immune function, and longevity. Browse the full category at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides ### AOD-9604 URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/aod-9604 **Tagline:** Targeted lipolysis peptide for fat metabolism AOD-9604 is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. AOD-9604 mimics the lipolytic fragment of human growth hormone, signalling the body to mobilise stored fat for energy without the broader systemic effects of full GH. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Pen + 3 to 4 refills - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 25IU daily in the morning before breakfast **Benefits:** - Fat metabolism - Anti-obesity - Lipolysis **How it works:** AOD-9604 mimics the lipolytic fragment of human growth hormone, signalling the body to mobilise stored fat for energy without the broader systemic effects of full GH. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults pursuing targeted fat loss alongside lifestyle, nutrition, and metabolic support under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### BPC-157 URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/bpc-157 **Tagline:** Body protective compound for tendon, joint, and gut healing BPC-157 is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. BPC-157 is a stable peptide derived from a protein found in gastric juice. It promotes angiogenesis, accelerates collagen deposition, and supports repair of tendons, ligaments, joints, and the GI mucosal lining. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Pen + 3 to 4 refills - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 15IU daily, same time each evening on an empty stomach **Benefits:** - Tendon, ligament, joint, and GI healing - Accelerates angiogenesis and collagen formation **How it works:** BPC-157 is a stable peptide derived from a protein found in gastric juice. It promotes angiogenesis, accelerates collagen deposition, and supports repair of tendons, ligaments, joints, and the GI mucosal lining. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults recovering from soft-tissue injuries, post-training inflammation, or chronic gut concerns, under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### CJC-1295 & Ipamorelin URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/cjc-1295-ipamorelin **Tagline:** Synergistic GHRH + GHRP combination for growth hormone release CJC-1295 & Ipamorelin is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. CJC-1295 (a GHRH analog) and Ipamorelin (a selective GHRP) work synergistically to amplify natural pulsatile growth hormone release without spiking cortisol or prolactin. The combination supports fat loss, deeper sleep, and recovery. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Pen + 3 to 4 refills - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 10IU 5 days a week, in the evening, 3 hours post meal **Benefits:** - Synergistic GHRH+GHRP for GH release - Fat loss - Sleep - Anti-aging **How it works:** CJC-1295 (a GHRH analog) and Ipamorelin (a selective GHRP) work synergistically to amplify natural pulsatile growth hormone release without spiking cortisol or prolactin. The combination supports fat loss, deeper sleep, and recovery. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults pursuing healthy ageing, recovery, body composition, and sleep optimisation under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### CJC-1295 URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/cjc-1295 **Tagline:** Long-acting GHRH analog for sustained GH and IGF-1 support CJC-1295 is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. CJC-1295 is a modified growth-hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH) analog with extended half-life, supporting elevated baseline GH and IGF-1 over time. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Pen + 3 to 4 refills - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 10IU 5 days a week, in the evening, 3 hours post meal **Benefits:** - Long-acting GHRH analog for weekly use - Enhances GH and IGF-1 **How it works:** CJC-1295 is a modified growth-hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH) analog with extended half-life, supporting elevated baseline GH and IGF-1 over time. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults seeking longer-acting GH support for recovery, body composition, and longevity protocols **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### DSIP URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/dsip **Tagline:** Delta sleep-inducing peptide for sleep and stress regulation DSIP is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. Delta Sleep-Inducing Peptide (DSIP) modulates sleep architecture, supports neuroprotection, and helps regulate the body's stress response. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Minimum 1, maximum 4 refills - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 10IU every night, 3 hours before bed **Benefits:** - Sleep improvement - Neuroprotection - Stress regulation **How it works:** Delta Sleep-Inducing Peptide (DSIP) modulates sleep architecture, supports neuroprotection, and helps regulate the body's stress response. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults with disrupted sleep, high stress load, or recovery-focused protocols under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### Epithalon URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/epithalon **Tagline:** Telomerase activator for longevity and pineal regulation Epithalon is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. Epithalon is a synthetic tetrapeptide that activates telomerase and supports pineal gland regulation, with research links to circadian rhythm normalisation and longevity protocols. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: No refill, repeat the cycle after 6 months - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 100IU every 3 days, used for 15 days only per cycle **Benefits:** - Telomerase activator - Promotes longevity - Anti-aging and pineal gland regulation **How it works:** Epithalon is a synthetic tetrapeptide that activates telomerase and supports pineal gland regulation, with research links to circadian rhythm normalisation and longevity protocols. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults pursuing longevity, circadian rhythm, and anti-aging optimisation under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### GHK-Cu URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/ghk-cu **Tagline:** Copper peptide for skin repair, collagen, and hair growth GHK-Cu is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. GHK-Cu is a naturally occurring copper-binding tripeptide that activates skin remodelling pathways, increases collagen and elastin synthesis, supports follicle health, and reduces inflammatory signalling. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Repeat 3 to 4 times yearly - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 10IU daily for 6 weeks **Benefits:** - Skin repair - Collagen - Hair growth - Anti-inflammatory **How it works:** GHK-Cu is a naturally occurring copper-binding tripeptide that activates skin remodelling pathways, increases collagen and elastin synthesis, supports follicle health, and reduces inflammatory signalling. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults targeting skin quality, hair density, and recovery alongside other aesthetic protocols **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### IGF-1 LR3 URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/igf-1-lr3 **Tagline:** Long-acting IGF-1 analog for muscle hypertrophy IGF-1 LR3 is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. IGF-1 LR3 is an extended-release analog of insulin-like growth factor 1, promoting muscle protein synthesis, hypertrophy, and recovery alongside training. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: 1 month on, 1 month off - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 20IU after workout, 4 days a week **Benefits:** - Promotes muscle hypertrophy - Fat loss - Improved sleep **How it works:** IGF-1 LR3 is an extended-release analog of insulin-like growth factor 1, promoting muscle protein synthesis, hypertrophy, and recovery alongside training. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults focused on body composition, training adaptation, and recovery, under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### Ipamorelin URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/ipamorelin **Tagline:** Selective GHRP for natural growth hormone release Ipamorelin is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. Ipamorelin is a selective growth hormone releasing peptide (GHRP) that triggers pulsatile GH release without significantly raising cortisol or prolactin. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Pen + 3 to 4 refills - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 10IU 5 days a week, in the evening, 3 hours post meal **Benefits:** - GHRP for natural GH release - Fat loss - Improved sleep **How it works:** Ipamorelin is a selective growth hormone releasing peptide (GHRP) that triggers pulsatile GH release without significantly raising cortisol or prolactin. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults seeking gentle GH support for body composition, sleep, and recovery **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### Kisspeptin-10 URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/kisspeptin-10 **Tagline:** Hormonal axis support for testosterone and fertility Kisspeptin-10 is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. Kisspeptin-10 stimulates luteinising hormone (LH) release via the hypothalamic-pituitary-gonadal axis, supporting endogenous testosterone production and reproductive function. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: No refill - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 10IU daily, same time each day **Benefits:** - Stimulates LH - Supports testosterone and fertility **How it works:** Kisspeptin-10 stimulates luteinising hormone (LH) release via the hypothalamic-pituitary-gonadal axis, supporting endogenous testosterone production and reproductive function. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults investigating hormonal axis support and fertility under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### MOTS-C URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/mots-c **Tagline:** Mitochondrial peptide for metabolic and energy support MOTS-C is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. MOTS-C is a mitochondrial-derived peptide that supports cellular energy metabolism, improves insulin sensitivity, and influences body composition through metabolic signalling. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Repeat after 6 months - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 50IU 3 times a week for 1.5 months, then once a week for a month **Benefits:** - Mitochondrial function - Metabolic support - Insulin sensitivity - Energy - Fat loss **How it works:** MOTS-C is a mitochondrial-derived peptide that supports cellular energy metabolism, improves insulin sensitivity, and influences body composition through metabolic signalling. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults focused on metabolic health, energy, and longevity under medical guidance **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### PT-141 URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/pt-141 **Tagline:** Melanocortin agonist for libido and sexual function PT-141 is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. PT-141 (bremelanotide) is a melanocortin receptor agonist that acts on the central nervous system to enhance sexual desire and arousal in both men and women. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Refill if needed - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 10IU 30 minutes before sexual intercourse **Benefits:** - Libido enhancement in men and women - Treats ED and FSD **How it works:** PT-141 (bremelanotide) is a melanocortin receptor agonist that acts on the central nervous system to enhance sexual desire and arousal in both men and women. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults investigating sexual dysfunction or low libido under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### Sermorelin URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/sermorelin **Tagline:** GHRH analog for endogenous growth hormone release Sermorelin is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. Sermorelin is a GHRH analog that stimulates the pituitary to release growth hormone in a natural, pulsatile pattern, supporting recovery, lean mass, and sleep quality. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Repeat after 6 months - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 20IU every day at bedtime **Benefits:** - Stimulates endogenous GH release - Supports lean body mass and recovery **How it works:** Sermorelin is a GHRH analog that stimulates the pituitary to release growth hormone in a natural, pulsatile pattern, supporting recovery, lean mass, and sleep quality. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults pursuing healthy ageing, lean body composition, and recovery under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### Thymosin Alpha-1 URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/thymosin-alpha-1 **Tagline:** Immune-modulating peptide for T-cell function Thymosin Alpha-1 is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. Thymosin Alpha-1 supports T-cell maturation and immune balance, with research applications in chronic infections, immunosenescence, and post-illness recovery. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Repeat after 6 months - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 15IU daily, or 55IU twice per week **Benefits:** - Immune modulation - Antiviral - Supports T-cell function **How it works:** Thymosin Alpha-1 supports T-cell maturation and immune balance, with research applications in chronic infections, immunosenescence, and post-illness recovery. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults with weakened immune resilience, recovery from illness, or those pursuing immune optimisation under medical guidance **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### Thymosin Beta-4 (TB-4) URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/thymosin-beta-4 **Tagline:** Tissue repair and angiogenesis peptide Thymosin Beta-4 (TB-4) is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. Thymosin Beta-4 promotes cell migration, angiogenesis, and tissue regeneration, supporting recovery from injury and post-surgical healing. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Repeat after 6 months - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 25IU daily for 20 days only **Benefits:** - Wound healing - Tissue repair - Angiogenesis - Post-surgical recovery **How it works:** Thymosin Beta-4 promotes cell migration, angiogenesis, and tissue regeneration, supporting recovery from injury and post-surgical healing. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults recovering from injury, surgery, or chronic soft-tissue issues, under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### NAD+ URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/nad-plus-peptide **Tagline:** Cellular coenzyme for energy, focus, and longevity NAD+ is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. NAD+ (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide) is a coenzyme central to cellular energy production, DNA repair, and sirtuin-driven longevity pathways. The peptide-pen format complements IV NAD+ infusions for sustained baseline support. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Pen + 2 refills - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 10IU 5 days a week, 2 days off **Benefits:** - Boosts energy levels - Supports mental clarity and focus - Helps reduce fatigue - Supports cellular repair and anti-ageing - Aids metabolism - Supports overall wellness and vitality **How it works:** NAD+ (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide) is a coenzyme central to cellular energy production, DNA repair, and sirtuin-driven longevity pathways. The peptide-pen format complements IV NAD+ infusions for sustained baseline support. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults pursuing energy, cognitive performance, and longevity protocols alongside lifestyle and medical guidance **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### BPC-157 & Thymosin Beta-4 (TB-500) URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/bpc-157-tb-500 **Tagline:** Combined healing protocol for soft tissue and recovery BPC-157 & Thymosin Beta-4 (TB-500) is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. Combining BPC-157 with Thymosin Beta-4 layers their mechanisms, BPC-157 drives angiogenesis and collagen formation, while TB-4 promotes cell migration and tissue regeneration, for a broader recovery and healing response. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Pen + 3 to 4 refills - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: Treatment protocol depends on the concern **Benefits:** - Tendon and ligament healing - Muscle injury recovery - Wound healing (cutaneous and post-surgical) - GI mucosal protection - Anti-inflammatory and pain reduction - Cellular and anti-aging vitality **How it works:** Combining BPC-157 with Thymosin Beta-4 layers their mechanisms, BPC-157 drives angiogenesis and collagen formation, while TB-4 promotes cell migration and tissue regeneration, for a broader recovery and healing response. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults with injury recovery, chronic soft-tissue issues, or post-surgical healing needs, under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### Glow Peptide (BPC-157 + TB-500 + GHK-Cu) URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/glow-peptide **Tagline:** Aesthetic and recovery peptide blend for skin, hair, and joints Glow Peptide (BPC-157 + TB-500 + GHK-Cu) is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. The Glow Peptide blend combines BPC-157, TB-500, and GHK-Cu, layering tissue regeneration, angiogenesis, and copper-peptide skin and follicle remodelling into a single aesthetic-focused protocol. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Pen + 3 to 4 refills - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: Treatment protocol depends on the concern **Benefits:** - Skin anti-aging and collagen density - Hair follicle activation - Tendon and ligament healing - Joint inflammation reduction - Post-injury recovery - Systemic energy and vitality - Wellness and immune balance **How it works:** The Glow Peptide blend combines BPC-157, TB-500, and GHK-Cu, layering tissue regeneration, angiogenesis, and copper-peptide skin and follicle remodelling into a single aesthetic-focused protocol. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults seeking a combined skin, hair, and recovery protocol under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. ### KLOW Peptide Complex (BPC-157, TB-4, GHK-Cu, KPV) URL: https://ivoryaesthetics.com/services/peptides/klow-peptide-complex **Tagline:** Four-peptide complex for tissue healing and dermal repair KLOW Peptide Complex (BPC-157, TB-4, GHK-Cu, KPV) is a medical-grade peptide protocol delivered via prefilled pen, sourced through a top-tier compounding pharmacy. The KLOW complex layers four complementary peptides, BPC-157, Thymosin Beta-4, GHK-Cu, and KPV, to accelerate tissue healing, support angiogenesis, stimulate dermal repair, and dampen inflammatory signalling. **At a glance:** - Pain level: Minimal, small subcutaneous self-injection - Downtime: None - Sessions: Repeat after a 2 to 4 week rest period - Duration: Self-administered at home - Results: Progressive over the protocol cycle - Frequency: 10IU daily for 4 to 8 weeks. Maintenance: 3 injections per week for 4 additional weeks **Benefits:** - Accelerates tissue healing - Promotes wound healing and angiogenesis - Stimulates collagen and dermal repair - Reduces inflammatory signalling **How it works:** The KLOW complex layers four complementary peptides, BPC-157, Thymosin Beta-4, GHK-Cu, and KPV, to accelerate tissue healing, support angiogenesis, stimulate dermal repair, and dampen inflammatory signalling. The pen is dispensed after a clinician consultation, with full training on self-administration and ongoing follow-up. **Ideal for:** Adults with combined recovery, skin, and inflammatory concerns, under medical supervision **FAQs:** - **Is this self-administered?** Yes. After your initial consultation and clinical review, your medical-grade pen is dispensed and you administer doses at home. We provide full training, written instructions, and ongoing follow-up. - **How are these peptides sourced?** All peptides are medically compounded by top-tier compounding pharmacies, including Magenta Rx Compounding Pharmacy in Dubai, to the highest sterility and quality standards. We do not use grey-market or research-grade products. - **Who decides if this peptide is right for me?** Every peptide protocol is initiated only after a medical consultation with our clinician. We review your goals, medical history, current medications, and bloods (where indicated) before dispensing. # Journal > Long-form articles by Shohreh Bagherian on aesthetic treatments, skin science, wellness, and longevity protocols. All content is first-party clinical perspective from a practitioner with 20+ years of experience. Browse all articles at https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal ## Treating acne scars: our layered approach **Author:** Dr. Halla Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-09-11 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/acne-scar-layered-treatment **Tags:** acne scars, microneedling, fractional laser, scar treatment > Different scar types respond to different modalities. Combining them thoughtfully outperforms any single treatment. Acne scars are not one thing. There are icepick, boxcar, rolling, and atrophic scars, and each responds best to a different modality. Successful treatment usually combines several tools across a series of sessions. Icepick scars. Narrow, deep, sharply defined. These respond best to TCA CROSS (a very targeted chemical technique that damages the scar base to trigger collagen re-fill) and occasional punch excision. Fractional laser and microneedling alone rarely fill them fully. Boxcar scars. Wider, well-defined edges, shallower than icepick. Fractional resurfacing (iPixel or fractional CO2), medical microneedling with radiofrequency, and subcision of tethered edges are the mainstays. Rolling scars. Broad, shallow undulations from fibrous tethering below the skin. Subcision (releasing the tethers with a fine needle) plus a biostimulator or filler to lift the depression, followed by a resurfacing modality to refine texture. Atrophic and general textural change. Fractional non-ablative resurfacing (Clear + Brilliant, Fraxel) over a series of sessions, combined with medical microneedling for depth, gradually rebuild dermal density. The role of salmon DNA and growth factors. Polynucleotides (salmon DNA) infused after microneedling can accelerate the collagen and elastin response. We often combine microneedling with salmon DNA in the same session for clients with moderate to severe scarring. Why this takes time. Scar remodelling is a real biological process, not a cosmetic overlay. New collagen takes 60 to 90 days to organise. A full course of scar treatment is typically 6 to 8 sessions across 6 to 9 months, with visible progression at each stage. What we address first. Any active acne. Treating scars while the skin is still producing new lesions is a losing strategy, we stabilise the current acne (see our adult acne piece for the approach) before starting scar work. Post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation versus scars. What often distresses clients as scars are actually flat dark marks (PIH), not textural scars. Those respond to a different protocol entirely, brightening acids, targeted laser, and sun protection, without the collagen-remodelling work needed for true textural scars. We identify which is which at consultation. The honest read. There is no single treatment that gives dramatic improvement in one session for genuine acne scarring. There are combinations that produce 50 to 70 percent visible improvement across a course. That is what we work toward. **Related treatments:** medical-microneedling, ipixel-fractional-resurfacing, clear-brilliant, salmon-dna ## Adult acne after 30: why it happens and what actually helps **Author:** Dr. Halla Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-09-09 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/adult-acne-after-thirty **Tags:** acne, adult acne, hormonal acne, skin science > Adult acne rarely responds to the same protocol you used at 16. Hormones, barrier, and stress all sit differently. Acne after 30 is a different problem than teenage acne, and the treatment plans that worked at 16 rarely work now. Understanding what has changed makes it easier to treat. What is different in adult acne. Hormonal fluctuation across the menstrual cycle, perimenopause, and stress-related cortisol shifts drive most adult acne. The lesions tend to be deeper, more painful, and concentrated on the lower face and jawline, not the T-zone. Skin is often more sensitive than it was in adolescence, and aggressive treatments can trigger post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation that lasts longer than the acne itself. What usually does not work well. Harsh drying acids applied daily to an already-compromised barrier. Retinoids introduced at full strength without gradual acclimatisation. Antibiotics as a long-term solo strategy, they lose effect and disrupt the skin microbiome. Over-cleansing. What usually does work. A calmer, layered approach. Barrier repair before treatment, so the skin is resilient enough to tolerate active ingredients. Prescription-strength topicals (adapalene, azelaic acid, sometimes clindamycin) introduced slowly. In-clinic protocols like clear skin laser (targeted 1064nm), medical microneedling (with growth factor infusion), or salicylic acid peels used cyclically, not weekly. If hormonal patterns are the driver, a conversation with the client's gynaecologist about combined oral contraceptives or spironolactone may be appropriate. Post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation. In Middle Eastern and darker skin tones this is often the more distressing residual issue, dark marks that persist for months after the lesion has cleared. Prevention is easier than treatment, sun protection is not optional, and picking or squeezing lesions produces the deepest, most stubborn marks. When to escalate. Cystic or scarring acne, or acne unresponsive to a three-month course of appropriate topicals, deserves a dermatology assessment. Isotretinoin (Roaccutane) remains one of the most effective long-term solutions for severe or resistant adult acne, prescribed with the appropriate monitoring. The honest read. Adult acne is a slower, more patient problem to solve than teenage acne. What tends to fail is the search for one aggressive fix. What tends to succeed is a calm, layered plan sustained over three to six months. **Related treatments:** clearskin-laser-acne, medical-microneedling, dmk-facial, salicylic-acid-peel ## Peptide therapy: what it is, who it is for, what to expect **Author:** Dr. Ruba Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-09-07 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/peptide-therapy-what-it-is **Tags:** peptide therapy, peptides, wellness, longevity > A category of medical wellness tools that is often misrepresented online. Here is what we actually use, and why. Peptides are short chains of amino acids that act as signalling molecules in the body. Some occur naturally, some are synthetic. In clinical use they can support tissue repair, muscle preservation, sleep quality, recovery from injury, and specific wellness concerns. What peptide therapy is not. It is not a shortcut to weight loss, and we do not prescribe it as one. It is not a substitute for adequate sleep, protein intake, resistance training, or medical care of underlying conditions. If a peptide is being marketed to you as a fix for something a peptide has never demonstrated to fix, be sceptical. The peptides we work with. We work within a defined clinical protocol using peptides with established safety data, sourced through licensed pharmacies. Common examples in our practice include ipamorelin and CJC-1295 (growth hormone axis support), BPC-157 (tissue repair), thymosin alpha-1 (immune modulation), NAD+ (cellular energy), and GHK-Cu (skin quality). How they are administered. Most peptides are given as subcutaneous injections, self-administered by the client after a clinical training session. Cycles are typically 8 to 12 weeks on, followed by a break, with regular blood work between cycles. Who peptide therapy is right for. Adults in their 30s and beyond who are already looking after the basics (sleep, nutrition, movement) and want targeted support for recovery, tissue repair, or age-related decline in specific systems. The intake conversation always covers current health, medications, and goals. Who it is not right for. Anyone with active cancer, uncontrolled endocrine conditions, or who is pregnant or breastfeeding. Anyone looking for a shortcut. Anyone unwilling to have baseline blood work before starting a cycle. The honest read. Peptide therapy sits at the interesting edge of wellness and medicine, and the online conversation about it is often overheated. Used within a defined clinical protocol, with baseline testing and follow-up, it can be a meaningful addition to a client's health strategy. Used outside that context it is a risk without a clear benefit. **Related treatments:** peptide-therapy, ipamorelin, cjc-1295, bpc-157 ## Radiesse for jawline definition and lower-face structure **Author:** Dr. Ruba Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-09-04 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/radiesse-jawline-lower-face **Tags:** radiesse, jawline, collagen stimulator, dermal fillers > Calcium hydroxyapatite for immediate lift and long-term collagen support. Radiesse is a dual-action injectable, immediate volume and structure from calcium hydroxyapatite (CaHA) microspheres, plus a longer collagen-stimulating response over the following months. How it works. Radiesse consists of CaHA microspheres suspended in a gel carrier. The gel provides immediate volume the moment it is placed. Over the following weeks the gel is absorbed, and the CaHA microspheres remain, acting as a scaffold that the body's own collagen and elastin build around. Both the immediate structural effect and the collagen response last, typically 12 to 18 months. Where it works best. The jawline, the pre-jowl sulcus (the depression in front of the jowl), the chin, the temples, and the lower cheek. It is well suited to areas that benefit from structural definition rather than soft plumping. The technique. Radiesse is placed deep, typically on the periosteum (the layer directly on the bone), to give lasting structural support. We use a blunt cannula in most areas, which reduces bruising and, when placed correctly, reduces vascular risk. How it differs from HA filler. HA filler is softer and better suited to areas where movement and expression matter, lips, tear troughs, superficial nasolabial lines. Radiesse is firmer, providing structure where the face needs a scaffold. Both have their place, and we often use them in the same client for different areas. How it differs from Sculptra. Sculptra is a pure biostimulator with no immediate volume. Radiesse gives immediate volume plus a collagen response. When a client wants same-day change plus long-term collagen support, Radiesse is often the better tool. What to expect. Immediate visible change, some swelling and tenderness for 24 to 48 hours, occasional mild bruising. Result settles at around one week. Longevity typically 12 to 18 months, sometimes longer. Who it does not suit. Radiesse is not reversible in the way HA fillers are, so we are conservative about placement and volume. We do not use it in the lips, tear troughs, or nose. Clients wanting a completely reversible option should choose HA filler. The honest read. Radiesse is one of our go-to tools for lower-face contouring, particularly the jawline. Used with a light hand it produces subtle definition that reads as bone structure, not filler. **Related treatments:** radiesse, sculptra, dermal-fillers ## Sculptra: how a collagen biostimulator differs from a filler **Author:** Dr. Halla Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-09-02 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/sculptra-collagen-biostimulator **Tags:** sculptra, collagen stimulator, biostimulator, anti-ageing > Poly-L-lactic acid does not add volume directly. It triggers your own collagen production over months. Sculptra is often described alongside dermal fillers, but its mechanism is fundamentally different. Understanding that difference determines who it is right for. Fillers versus biostimulators. A hyaluronic acid filler occupies space in tissue and gives immediate volume. The result is visible the moment it is injected. A biostimulator does not add lasting volume itself, instead, its microparticles trigger a controlled inflammatory response in the dermis that produces new type I collagen over three to six months. What Sculptra is made of. Poly-L-lactic acid (PLLA), a biocompatible material that has been used in medical implants for decades. It is reconstituted with sterile water before injection and is fully absorbed by the body over 18 to 24 months. What remains is your own new collagen. Who Sculptra suits. Clients in their 40s, 50s, and beyond who have lost volume across the mid-face, temples, cheeks, and jawline. Clients who want a gradual, natural-looking rejuvenation rather than an immediate change. Clients with mild to moderate skin laxity where volume restoration itself contributes to a lift. The protocol. Typically two to three sessions spaced four to six weeks apart. Each session uses one to two vials. Full results are visible three to six months after the final session and last two to three years. What to expect immediately after treatment. Some swelling and mild tenderness for 24 to 72 hours. We ask clients to massage the treated areas five minutes, five times a day, for five days after each session. This helps distribute the product evenly and reduces the risk of nodules. Risks and how we manage them. Small palpable nodules are the most-discussed potential risk. Modern reconstitution protocols (higher dilution, longer hydration time) and diligent post-treatment massage reduce the risk considerably. We reconstitute at least 24 hours before treatment. Who Sculptra does not suit. Clients wanting immediate volume are better served by hyaluronic acid filler. Clients with active infection, autoimmune conditions affecting the skin, or a history of keloid scarring need a careful risk assessment. The honest read. Sculptra is one of the most rewarding treatments when the goal is quality rather than quantity, real collagen rebuilt over months, in the client's own tissue. **Related treatments:** sculptra, radiesse, profhilo, karisma-collagen ## Lip filler: what a natural result actually looks like **Author:** Dr. Ruba Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-08-31 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/lip-filler-what-natural-looks-like **Tags:** lip filler, dermal fillers, hyaluronic acid > Volume that follows the anatomy, not a template, and why 1ml is often the right answer. The gap between a natural lip filler result and a treated look is not a matter of product volume alone. It is a combination of assessment, injection technique, and knowing when to stop. The assessment. Before any product is drawn up we assess the resting shape of the lips, the ratio of upper to lower lip, the philtral columns, the vermilion border definition, and the way the lips move during speech and smiling. Each of these guides where the filler goes, and where it does not go. Why 1ml is often the right answer. For most first-time clients, 1ml of hyaluronic acid filler is more than enough to add meaningful volume, define the border, and hydrate the tissue. Splitting that 1ml carefully between the upper and lower lip, and placing more at the vermilion border than in the body, produces a result that reads as your own lips, just a better version. What produces a visibly treated look. Placing too much product in the body of the lip creates the sausage or duck shape most clients want to avoid. Placing filler above the vermilion border migrates upward and shortens the philtrum. Chasing symmetry that does not exist naturally makes both lips look artificial. Product choice. We use hyaluronic acid fillers formulated specifically for lip tissue, from established manufacturers. HA is reversible with hyaluronidase if you ever want to dissolve. We do not use permanent fillers anywhere on the face, and we do not use body-grade filler in the lips. What to expect. Immediate swelling for 24 to 72 hours that settles to the final result at around 10 to 14 days. Mild bruising in some clients. Longevity of 6 to 12 months depending on your metabolism and the product. Aftercare that matters. Avoid heat (hot yoga, sauna) for 48 hours, sleep on your back if possible, and avoid pressing on the treated area. Do not judge the final result until day 14. Who lip filler does not suit. Active cold sores at the time of treatment, hyaluronic acid allergy (rare), or unrealistic expectations of what filler can achieve. If you want lips that look like someone else's, we will have an honest conversation before starting. **Related treatments:** dermal-fillers, botox ## Emsculpt Neo: how muscle building and fat reduction happen in one session **Author:** Dr. Ruba Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-08-28 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/emsculpt-neo-muscle-and-fat **Tags:** emsculpt neo, body contouring, muscle building > The physics of combining HIFEM contractions with radiofrequency heating in the same 30 minutes. Emsculpt Neo is one of the more interesting body devices to enter clinical use in the last five years. It combines two modalities that historically required separate devices, high-intensity focused electromagnetic (HIFEM) contractions for muscle, and radiofrequency (RF) for fat, and applies both simultaneously in one 30-minute session. The muscle side. HIFEM produces supramaximal muscle contractions at a rate you cannot achieve voluntarily. In a standard 30-minute session, the treated muscle group performs the equivalent of tens of thousands of contractions. The muscle responds by hypertrophying, building both fibre size and improved neuromuscular recruitment. The fat side. The RF component heats the subcutaneous fat layer to approximately 42 to 45 degrees Celsius, a temperature range in which apoptosis (programmed cell death) of adipocytes occurs. The body clears the dead fat cells through normal metabolic pathways over the following weeks. Why doing both at once matters. The RF also acts as a warm-up for the muscle, reducing the discomfort of the HIFEM contractions and, according to the peer-reviewed literature, improving the muscle's response. Treating both tissues in the same session is more efficient than sequential treatments, and the published outcomes support a synergistic effect. Session protocol. Four to six sessions spaced one week apart. Results build for 60 to 90 days after the final session. Maintenance sessions every three to six months to preserve muscle tone. Who it suits. Clients with a BMI generally below 30, who are already reasonably active and want to refine tone in the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, or arms. Post-partum clients seeking abdominal wall recovery, once cleared by their obstetrician. Who it does not suit. Clients using Emsculpt Neo as a substitute for weight loss will be disappointed. It is a body-contouring platform, not a weight-loss tool. Clients with metal implants in the treatment area, pacemakers, or active pregnancy cannot be treated. The honest read. Emsculpt Neo delivers measurable results when the client is already close to their goal and wants to refine, not remodel. In that population the outcomes are among the most consistent of any body treatment we offer. **Related treatments:** emsculpt-neo, exion-body, prime-x-body ## Thermage FLX: the 30-minute non-surgical facelift, explained **Author:** Dr. Halla Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-08-26 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/thermage-flx-non-surgical-facelift **Tags:** thermage flx, skin tightening, non-surgical facelift, radiofrequency > Monopolar radiofrequency for skin tightening that lasts, without any incisions. Thermage FLX is a monopolar radiofrequency treatment that heats the deep dermis to trigger a controlled collagen response. It is one of the few non-surgical treatments with a track record of results that hold for one to two years from a single session. How it works. A vibrating tip is passed systematically across the face and neck. Each pulse delivers RF energy deep enough to reach the fibrous septa in the subcutaneous layer, the structures that support skin position on the face. The heat causes immediate collagen contraction and triggers a longer neocollagenesis response that builds for three to six months. FLX versus the older Thermage. The FLX generation delivers larger tip sizes, faster treatment times, integrated cooling that reduces discomfort meaningfully, and a comfort pulse algorithm. A full face plus neck now takes about 45 minutes, down from 90 on the previous platform. Who it suits. Clients with early to moderate skin laxity in their 40s and 50s who want a lifted, more contoured look without surgery. Clients who cannot commit to surgical downtime. Clients with active lifestyles. What to expect during the session. Each pulse feels like a brief heat sensation followed by a cooling burst. Most clients tolerate the treatment well without oral pain relief. Some clients take a mild anti-anxiety oral dose before the session, which we discuss at consultation. Timeline of results. Immediate collagen contraction gives a subtle tightening you may notice within days. The larger neocollagenesis response builds gradually and peaks at three to six months. Results typically hold for 12 to 24 months. Who it does not suit. Very significant skin laxity is better addressed surgically for a durable result. Clients with metal implants in the treatment area, pacemakers, or active skin conditions in the treatment field are not candidates. The honest read. Thermage FLX is one of the treatments in our clinic that clients most often return for. It is not a facelift and does not replicate one. What it does is meaningful tightening with almost no downtime and a result that holds long enough to justify the investment. **Related treatments:** thermage-flx, ultherapy, titanium-lift ## Soprano Titanium: why we chose it for laser hair removal **Author:** Marwa Hassan **Published:** 2026-08-24 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/soprano-titanium-why-we-picked-it **Tags:** soprano titanium, laser hair removal, diode laser > Three wavelengths in one applicator, safe on darker skin tones, and comfortable enough for the face. There are dozens of laser hair removal platforms on the market. We chose Soprano Titanium as our primary system after direct comparison with alexandrite, Nd:YAG, and standard diode devices. Here is why. Three wavelengths in one applicator. Soprano Titanium delivers 755nm, 810nm, and 1064nm simultaneously. Each wavelength targets a different depth of the hair follicle and a different phase of the growth cycle. The clinical outcome is a broader depth of treatment per pass than a single-wavelength device can achieve. Safe on Fitzpatrick IV to VI. The 1064nm Nd:YAG component is what makes this platform safe on darker skin tones, including South Asian, Middle Eastern, and African skin. Older diode-only systems carry a real risk of post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation on these skin types. Soprano Titanium mitigates that risk considerably. In-motion technology. Rather than the traditional stamp-and-flash approach, the applicator is moved continuously across the treatment area while the laser fires at low fluence at a high repetition rate. The cumulative energy reaches therapeutic levels while individual pulses stay below the pain threshold. Most clients describe the sensation as warm rather than sharp. Comfortable enough for the face and bikini. Areas that used to require topical anaesthetic on stamp-based devices are typically well tolerated without any numbing on Soprano. This matters, faster set-up, and no lingering numbness after the session. Session cadence. Six to eight sessions spaced four to six weeks apart for facial hair, six to eight weeks apart for body areas. Maintenance sessions once or twice a year after the initial course, depending on hormonal factors and area treated. Who Soprano Titanium is not ideal for. Grey, white, or very fine blonde hair does not have enough melanin for any hair removal laser to target effectively. Electrolysis is the honest answer for those cases. Clients on Roaccutane or with recent tan should postpone treatment. It is a workhorse platform, not a miracle. What it does exceptionally well is deliver consistent, comfortable, safe results on every skin type we treat in Dubai. **Related treatments:** soprano-titanium, candela-gentlemax-pro ## HydraFacial versus a deep-cleansing facial: what actually differs **Author:** Banafsheh Ghorbi **Published:** 2026-08-22 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/hydrafacial-vs-deep-cleansing-facial **Tags:** hydrafacial, facials, extractions > One is a machine-led protocol with measurable extraction. The other is manual and depends heavily on the therapist. Both treatments serve similar goals, clearer, brighter, more hydrated skin. But the mechanism, consistency of result, and who each suits are meaningfully different. The HydraFacial protocol. A three-step machine-led sequence: exfoliation with a low-suction abrasive tip, salicylic and glycolic acid to loosen impaction, then vacuum extraction combined with hyaluronic acid infusion. The extraction is quantifiable, the machine collects debris in a visible canister. The pressure and acid concentration are consistent across sessions and across therapists. The deep-cleansing facial. A trained aesthetician performs steaming, manual exfoliation, hands-on extraction of comedones, and a treatment mask. The depth and completeness of the extraction depend on the therapist's technique, skin sensitivity, and how much time is allocated. Where HydraFacial wins. Consistency. Every session extracts to a similar depth, regardless of therapist. It is well-suited to clients who fly in from other cities and cannot rely on the same aesthetician every time. The infusion step delivers actives more evenly than manual application. Where a deep-cleansing facial wins. Individual attention. A skilled aesthetician can adjust technique to each area of the face, spend longer on stubborn comedones, and treat inflamed skin more gently than any machine tip. For clients with cystic acne or active inflammation, manual care is often the better call. Downtime and results. HydraFacial has zero downtime, you can wear makeup within an hour. A deep-cleansing facial can leave some redness for a few hours, particularly after extraction. Both give same-day glow and are best repeated monthly for cumulative benefit. Who each suits. Choose HydraFacial for congested but otherwise healthy skin, event prep, and consistent monthly maintenance. Choose a deep-cleansing facial for inflammatory acne, sensitive skin that reacts to acids, or when you want a treatment that adapts in real time. At Ivory we offer both, and often recommend alternating them across the year depending on what the skin is doing at each visit. **Related treatments:** hydrafacial, dmk-facial, nimue-facial ## Emface: what it is and how it actually works **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-08-20 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/emface-what-and-how **Tags:** emface, facial toning, non-invasive, skin lifting > Facial toning that treats muscle and skin in the same session, without needles. Emface is one of the few devices that treats two tissues at once. It uses synchronised radiofrequency (RF) for the skin and high-intensity facial electrical stimulation (HIFES) for the underlying muscles, in a single 20-minute session on the face. There are no needles and no downtime. How it works. Four hands-free applicators sit on the forehead and cheeks. The RF heats the dermis to trigger collagen and elastin remodelling, the same principle behind more familiar tightening treatments. The HIFES current activates the frontalis and zygomatic muscle groups at a much higher rate than they would fire voluntarily, strengthening the muscles that lift the mid-face. Who it suits. Clients in their 30s and 40s starting to see the beginnings of mid-face descent, but not yet at the stage for a thread lift or surgical intervention. Clients who want a natural lift without changing their features. Clients with active lifestyles who cannot afford recovery time. What the protocol looks like. Four sessions, one per week. Results begin to show at the second or third session and continue to build for 60 to 90 days after the fourth. We recommend one or two maintenance sessions per year. What to expect during the session. A warm, wave-like sensation from the RF, and a firm tapping feeling from the HIFES contractions. Most clients describe it as unusual rather than uncomfortable. You can drive, work, and wear makeup immediately afterwards. Who it does not suit. Anyone with metal implants in the treatment area, pacemakers, active facial infections, or who is pregnant. Skin with very significant laxity generally responds better to ultrasound or RF microneedling as the primary tool, with Emface as a supporting treatment. The honest read. Emface is not a facelift and does not replace one. What it does exceptionally well is preserve the mid-face lift you already have, and give a subtle lift to clients who are not ready for anything more invasive. Combined with an aesthetic assessment, it is one of the most rewarding maintenance treatments we offer. **Related treatments:** emface ## Inside Ivory: how we choose technology **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-29 **Category:** Inside Ivory **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/how-we-choose-technology **Tags:** technology, philosophy, equipment > Why we test before we buy, and why we sometimes pass on the most-hyped platforms. When a new aesthetic technology launches, manufacturers approach clinics aggressively. Demos, training, financing options. Many clinics buy quickly to be first to market with the new platform. We have learned to be slow. Our process. We track new platforms through the FDA approval timeline and the early peer-reviewed clinical literature. We follow what experienced practitioners abroad are saying after the launch hype settles. We attend trade events to see the platforms in person and ask hard questions of the engineers. We talk to clinics that have had the equipment for six to twelve months and ask what their honest experience has been. Only after this does the platform come up for serious consideration. Even then, we run a clinical trial of our own, treating a small group of clients (with their full informed consent) on a test basis, photographing and measuring outcomes, comparing the result to what we can achieve with our existing equipment. If the new platform delivers materially better outcomes for a real population of clients, we proceed. Why this slowness. Many launched platforms quietly disappoint. The early marketing claims do not hold up to longer clinical use. The platforms that survive five years are the ones with real evidence, the rest are forgotten. By being slow, we miss the early novelty period but we acquire what actually works. What we have passed on. Quite a few. Without naming specific platforms, we have declined plasma devices, certain bioactive injectables, several light-based platforms, and a number of "next generation" treatments that did not pass our internal trial. Some of these are now standard in other clinics. We are not embarrassed about declining them. What we have invested in. Established RF platforms (Thermage, Exion, Viora, Venus Viva). Trusted laser families (Soprano, Candela, Alma). Bio-remodelling injectables from manufacturers with strong clinical evidence. Body sculpting platforms with substantial peer-reviewed support. We tend to choose proven over novel. The result is a treatment menu that is less novel than some clinics offer but more reliable session by session. The same approach extends to product brands, training partners, and continuing education. Our clients receive what works, not what is currently in fashion. We will continue to evaluate new platforms as they emerge. We will continue to be slow. That is the standard we built the clinic on. ## Q-switched laser for tattoo and pigmentation **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-27 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/q-switched-laser-pigmentation-tattoo **Tags:** q-switched, tattoo removal, pigmentation > How the same laser technology serves two different uses, and the careful protocols each needs. The Q-switched laser is one of the most versatile platforms in our arsenal. The same wavelengths, delivered with slightly different settings, address pigmentation concerns and tattoo removal. The protocols are different and the outcomes need different framing. For pigmentation. Q-switched laser at low energy is used to break down excess melanin in conditions like sun spots, lentigines, and certain types of melasma. The pulse is so short that the energy targets the pigment without significant heat damage to surrounding tissue. The fragmented pigment is then cleared by the body's lymphatic system over the following weeks. What works well. Discrete sun spots and lentigines respond best, often with one to three sessions delivering meaningful clearance. Melasma is more complex and needs a careful programme, low-energy sessions paired with strict home care and sun avoidance. Ephelides (freckles) respond but tend to recur with sun exposure. What does not work. Deep dermal pigmentation that has been present from childhood (some birthmarks). Pigmentation in actively inflamed skin, treating without addressing the underlying inflammation first risks rebound darkening. Skin types where the pigmentation is closely matched to the surrounding skin tone, the risk of hypopigmentation with treatment is higher. For tattoo removal. The same Q-switched laser, but at higher energy and with wavelengths matched to the ink colour, is the established standard. Black ink responds best, followed by dark blue. Red and yellow are more difficult, white ink can sometimes darken with laser exposure (we test a small area first). What to expect for tattoo removal. Multiple sessions, six to ten typically, eight weeks apart. The tattoo fades progressively across the course. Some tattoos clear fully, some leave a residual ghost. We never promise complete clearance, we map progress with photographs and adjust expectations as the course unfolds. What clients should know. SPF 50+ on the treated area for two weeks before and after every session. Avoiding sun exposure to allow the body to clear fragmented pigment. Patience across the timeline, neither pigmentation nor tattoo removal is rapid. A careful consultation includes test patches for clients with darker skin tones to confirm the response before committing to a full course. **Related treatments:** qs-laser-pigmentation, clearlift-rejuvenation ## Hyperhidrosis treatment: an under-discussed use of anti-wrinkle injections **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-24 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/hyperhidrosis-treatment-under-discussed **Tags:** hyperhidrosis, sweating, anti-wrinkle > Excessive sweating responds well to the same injection family used for facial lines, and it changes quality of life. Hyperhidrosis, excessive sweating, is one of the most quality-of-life-affecting conditions that we treat. Many clients have lived with it for years before realising there is a clinical solution. The treatment is well established and the results are striking. What the treatment does. The same injection family used for facial lines is administered into the dermis of the affected area, blocking the nerve signals that activate sweat glands. Sweating in the treated area reduces dramatically, with the effect typically holding for around six to nine months. Where we treat. The underarms, by far the most common request. The palms, where excessive sweating affects writing, gripping, and social comfort. The soles, where it affects shoes and gait. The face and scalp, where it affects daily presentation. The session. Around 30 minutes for the underarms, slightly longer for palms and soles. Multiple small injection points across the treatment area. The needle is fine and the depth is shallow, so the discomfort is modest. We use topical numbing cream and ice for palm and sole treatments, where the skin is more sensitive. What to expect. The effect begins within 3 to 7 days and is typically full by 14 days. The reduction lasts six to nine months, sometimes longer. Most clients book twice yearly for sustained control. Practical effects. Clients consistently describe the change as transformative. No longer planning outfits around sweat visibility. No longer avoiding handshakes. No longer changing shirts multiple times a day. The quality-of-life improvement is genuinely meaningful. What it does not do. It does not affect the sweat glands in other parts of the body, the body's overall ability to thermoregulate is unaffected. It does not cause compensatory sweating elsewhere, despite a common concern about this. The body is not compensating for missing sweat from a small treated area. Who should consider it. Anyone whose sweating affects their daily life. The threshold for considering treatment is not "diagnosed hyperhidrosis," it is "this is bothering me." If you are reading this article and recognising the description, the consultation is worth having. **Related treatments:** hyperhidrosis-treatment, botox ## PT-141: sexual wellness for women **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-22 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/pt-141-sexual-wellness-women **Tags:** sexual wellness, pt-141, peptides, women's health > A peptide for arousal and libido that works differently from the hormone-based approaches. Sexual wellness is one of the less openly discussed areas of clinical care, but one where many women have meaningful concerns. PT-141, also known as bremelanotide, is a peptide that has shown utility for arousal disorders in women, working through a fundamentally different mechanism than hormone-based approaches. How it works. PT-141 acts on melanocortin receptors in the central nervous system. The receptors are involved in regulating sexual arousal pathways. Unlike testosterone or other hormonal approaches, PT-141 does not change baseline hormone levels, it works on a more immediate, on-demand basis. Who it can help. Women experiencing hypoactive sexual desire disorder, defined as persistent low desire that causes distress and is not explained by other medical or relationship factors. Women on certain medications (notably SSRIs) that have reduced libido as a side effect. Postmenopausal women where lifestyle and topical approaches have not addressed the concern. How it is delivered. PT-141 is administered as a subcutaneous injection, taken before anticipated sexual activity. Onset is typically 30 to 60 minutes after the dose. Effects last several hours. It is not taken daily, it is used episodically. What to expect. Most clients respond to a low starting dose. Side effects can include facial flushing, mild nausea on first doses (which usually fades with continued use), and occasionally headache. We start at the lowest effective dose and titrate up only if needed. Who should not use it. Clients with uncontrolled high blood pressure, certain cardiovascular conditions, or melanoma history. We screen carefully. PT-141 has effects on blood pressure that we evaluate at consultation. How we manage the conversation. With dignity and clinical care. The consultation includes a discussion of the wider picture, relationship factors, sleep, medications, hormone status, mental health, since arousal concerns are usually multifactorial. PT-141 is a tool within a broader conversation, not a substitute for it. This is not a peptide we promote casually. It is appropriate for specific clinical situations and requires proper screening, follow-up, and an honest conversation about expectations. **Related treatments:** pt-141 ## Eye filler: why we use less than most **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-20 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/eye-filler-less-than-most **Tags:** eye filler, under-eye, tear trough > The under-eye is the most-treated and most-mistreated area in aesthetics. Our approach is conservative. Eye filler is the most-asked-for and most-mistreated injectable in the industry. Done well, it transforms tired-looking eyes with subtle, natural results. Done poorly, it causes puffiness, lumps, bluish shadowing, and a face that looks worse than before. Our approach is conservative. Many clients come to us expecting filler and leave with a different plan. There are good reasons. The under-eye anatomy. The skin is thin. The vasculature is close to the surface. Filler placed even slightly off-target can pool, migrate, attract water (causing puffiness), and become visible. The product can also produce a bluish discolouration called the Tyndall effect, which is difficult to reverse and can last months. Who is a good candidate. Clients with genuine tear trough hollowing where the bone is recessed and the structural void is what creates the dark shadow. Skin in good condition (thicker, less translucent). No significant puffiness or fluid retention in the area. Who is not a good candidate. Clients with very thin or pigmented skin. Anyone with eye area puffiness, the filler often makes it worse, not better. Clients whose dark circles are vascular (the blue or purple shadow you see in clear skin), filler does not fix that. Clients with skin quality concerns alongside hollowing, the skin needs treatment first. What we use instead. For most clients with under-eye concerns, salmon DNA polynucleotides are a better starting point. They address skin quality and texture, the very things that filler does not improve. After a course of polynucleotides, we reassess whether any filler is actually needed. When we do use filler. Small volumes, deep placement (on the bone, not in the soft tissue), conservative technique. We rarely use more than 0.3 to 0.5 ml total across both sides in a single session. We can always add more, we cannot easily remove the excess. The honest framing. Eye filler is a precise tool with a narrow indication. It is not the default treatment for tired-looking eyes. A proper consultation should explore the alternatives before reaching for the syringe. **Related treatments:** dermal-fillers, salmon-dna-eyes ## Skin barrier repair after over-exfoliation **Author:** Dr. Halla Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-07-17 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/skin-barrier-repair-after-overexfoliation **Tags:** skin barrier, over-exfoliation, recovery > What to do when actives have gone too far, and how to rebuild a healthy skin barrier. Over-exfoliation is one of the most common skin problems we see in clinic, and one of the most easily missed at home. Clients come in with sensitivity, redness, stinging from products, persistent dryness, and sometimes breakouts. The cause is rarely what they are looking for, it is what they have been doing to themselves. What over-exfoliation looks like. Skin that stings when applying water-based products. Persistent redness or flushing. Patches of dryness alongside areas of unexpected oiliness. Increased sensitivity to any product, including those that have always been fine. Sometimes breakouts that follow no logical trigger. What causes it. Layering multiple actives, retinol plus AHA plus BHA plus vitamin C, often daily, without recovery days. Daily exfoliating toners. Frequent chemical peels at home. Aggressive cleansing routines, often with multiple steps and high-pH cleansers. Mechanical exfoliation, scrubs and brushes, on top of chemical exfoliation. The repair protocol. Pause every active for two to four weeks. Hydration and barrier ingredients only, ceramides, niacinamide, panthenol, hyaluronic acid, squalane. Gentle low-pH cleanser, applied with fingers, no friction. Bland moisturiser, applied to damp skin. SPF 50+ daily without exception. In-clinic support. LED light therapy is the single most useful treatment during a barrier repair phase, calming inflammation and accelerating recovery without disturbing the skin further. Hydrating facials with no extractions or exfoliation steps. We may use a calming or hydrating booster series to support the repair. What to avoid in the repair phase. Anything new. Anything advertised as resurfacing, exfoliating, or active. Hot water, hot yoga, saunas, anything that drives flushing. Picking, rubbing, friction of any kind. Reintroducing actives. After four weeks of barrier-focused care, we reintroduce one active at a time, at low concentration, twice a week. We layer in others slowly, never more than one new addition every two weeks. Many clients are surprised at how much less they need. The lesson. More is not better. Skincare maximalism is one of the most reliable causes of poor skin we see. Effective skin is barrier-healthy skin first, active-treated skin second. **Related treatments:** dermalux-led, hydrafacial ## Gua sha facial: facial massage in modern aesthetics **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-15 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/gua-sha-modern-aesthetics **Tags:** gua sha, lymphatic, facial massage > An ancient practice, applied with modern technique, with a real role in a treatment plan. Gua sha is an ancient Chinese practice that has had a recent resurgence in skincare and wellness circles. At Ivory, we use a modernised version as part of certain facial protocols, with realistic claims about what it does and does not do. What it is. Gua sha uses a smooth-edged tool, often jade or quartz, drawn across the skin in specific patterns and directions. The pressure is firm but not painful. The technique stimulates microcirculation, supports lymphatic drainage, and produces a temporary firming and contouring effect. What it can do. Immediate softening of facial puffiness, particularly around the eyes and jawline, by supporting lymphatic clearance. Mild jaw and forehead tension relief through fascial release. A temporary contour and definition effect that holds for several hours, useful before events. Improved absorption of subsequently applied serums and creams. What it does not do. Permanently change facial structure. Lift the face in a way comparable to surgery, threads, or even non-surgical lifting platforms. Replace any of the treatments we run for skin quality, texture, or laxity. Where we use it. As part of the closing protocol of certain facials, particularly for clients with persistent fluid retention or puffiness. As a standalone short session before events when a quick, subtle improvement is wanted. As a teaching session where we show the client how to do a basic version at home. Home practice. A simple daily gua sha routine, three to five minutes, supports the in-clinic work between sessions. We teach the basic technique during the session and recommend a tool to use. The home version is gentler than the in-clinic version. Who should be careful. Clients with very thin skin or rosacea, where the friction can trigger flushing. Anyone with recent injectables in the treatment area, wait at least two weeks before any massage-based work. Clients with skin conditions that contraindicate friction. It is not a standalone aesthetic solution. It is a complementary practice that pairs well with the rest of a programme. **Related treatments:** gua-sha-facial ## Lip rejuvenation without filler **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-13 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/lip-rejuvenation-without-filler **Tags:** lips, rejuvenation, non-filler > Sometimes the right answer for the lips is not filler. Lip filler has become a default. Many clients walk in asking for filler when what they actually want is a refreshed, smooth, slightly more defined lip without obvious enhancement. The conversation about non-filler lip rejuvenation is one we have often. What the lips lose with age. Volume, yes, but also definition (the philtrum, the cupid's bow, the vermilion border), hydration, and surface texture. Filler addresses volume well and definition partially, but it does little for texture and surface quality. Aggressive filler can make the lips look unnatural without solving the texture issues. Non-filler options we offer. ClearLift Lips uses Q-switched laser to rejuvenate the lip surface, improving texture, slight pigmentation, and overall quality. A course of three sessions, four weeks apart, with subtle but cumulative improvements. Viora RF Lips delivers radiofrequency around and through the lip tissue to stimulate collagen and improve firmness and definition at the vermilion border. Particularly useful for clients with lines around the lip area (smoker's lines, though most clients have these without ever having smoked). Polynucleotide therapy. The same salmon DNA family used for under-eye rejuvenation works well in the perioral area. Small, multiple shallow injection points improve skin quality, fine lines, and resilience over a course of sessions. Topical work. A consistent daily protocol with retinol around the lips (carefully, not on the lips themselves), peptide-rich serums, and a high-quality SPF on the lips is the foundation. Without this, in-clinic treatments produce less durable results. When filler is still the right answer. Volume restoration where the lip has genuinely lost mass. Targeted contour correction in a specific area. Asymmetry correction that texture work cannot address. The combination. Many of our clients run a non-filler programme alongside very subtle, lip-balanced filler. The combination addresses texture, quality, and modest volume restoration in a way that looks natural and ages well. The bigger principle. The lips deserve the same multi-pillar thinking as the rest of the face. Filler is one tool, not the default. **Related treatments:** viora-rf-lips, clearlift-lips, salmon-dna ## MOTS-C: the mitochondrial peptide **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-10 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/mots-c-mitochondrial-peptide **Tags:** mots-c, peptides, metabolism, longevity > A small peptide encoded by mitochondrial DNA, used in metabolic and longevity protocols. MOTS-C is a relatively recent addition to peptide protocols and one with a specific scientific story. It is a peptide encoded not in nuclear DNA but in mitochondrial DNA, the only known mitochondrially-derived peptide in clinical use. Its primary role is in cellular metabolism and energy production. Why it is interesting. Mitochondrial function declines with age, contributing to the gradual loss of energy, slower recovery, and metabolic flexibility that most people experience in their forties and beyond. MOTS-C supports mitochondrial efficiency and metabolic regulation, which is why it has moved from research into longevity-focused clinical protocols. What clients use it for. Metabolic support during a body composition programme. Improved exercise tolerance and recovery. Energy and clarity, particularly for clients whose fatigue has not responded to addressing the obvious factors (sleep, nutrition, thyroid, iron). Anti-ageing protocols as one component of a wider plan. How we run it. The protocol is typically 8 to 12 weeks of weekly or twice-weekly subcutaneous injections. Dosing is conservative, especially when starting, and titrated up based on response and tolerance. What clients report. Improved exercise capacity and faster recovery. Less afternoon energy slump. Modest improvements in body composition, particularly when paired with strength training. The effects are subtle compared to some peptides but typically more sustained. What we screen for. Baseline metabolic panel including fasting glucose and lipids, since MOTS-C affects glucose handling. Thyroid status. Any active oncological or autoimmune presentations. Who is not a good candidate. Pregnant or breastfeeding clients. Anyone with active type 1 diabetes without specific medical supervision. Clients with a personal history of certain mitochondrial diseases. The honest framing. MOTS-C is one of the newer peptides in clinical use. The body of clinical evidence is smaller than for older peptides like BPC-157 or CJC-1295. We treat it as a promising tool within a longevity programme, not as a first-line intervention. We run it for clients who have addressed the foundational factors and are looking for additional, more targeted layers. We monitor blood work at the midpoint of the protocol and adjust based on response. As with any peptide, this is a clinical protocol, not a supplement. **Related treatments:** mots-c ## Carbon laser peel before a wedding **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-08 **Category:** Seasonal **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/carbon-laser-before-a-wedding **Tags:** wedding, carbon laser, instant glow > The timing, the protocol, and what to do with skincare in the week before. Carbon laser peel is one of the best pre-wedding treatments we offer. Thirty minutes, no downtime, immediate glow that holds for three to five days. The timing matters, and so does what you do in the days around it. Timing. Three to five days before the wedding is the sweet spot. Closer than 48 hours and the skin may still be slightly more reflective than you want for makeup application. Earlier than five days and you start to lose the peak glow. Book the session on the Tuesday before a Saturday wedding for a good balance. Skincare in the week before. Stop retinoids three to five days before the session. Avoid acid exfoliants (AHA, BHA) for two days before. The morning of the session, cleanse only, no actives. SPF 50+ throughout the week. The session. The thin layer of pharmaceutical-grade carbon is brushed on, allowed to settle into the pores, and then targeted with Q-switched laser. The carbon vaporises with the laser energy, lifting impurities and dead cells. There is no real discomfort, most clients describe it as a series of small warm pulses. What to do after. SPF 50+, religiously, for the next week. Skip workouts and saunas for 24 hours. Hydrating skincare only, no active acids or retinoids until after the event. The skin will feel slightly tight for an hour or two, then settles into a brighter, smoother state by the next morning. Pair it with. A hydrating multi-step facial three weeks before the wedding gives a deeper hydration baseline. LED light therapy two days before the carbon peel calms any residual redness or sensitivity. A bridal lash and brow appointment can be done the same day as the carbon peel without issue. What not to do. Try anything new in the week before the wedding. Layer multiple aggressive treatments in the final fortnight. Skip the consultation, every face responds slightly differently and we want to know what we are working with before the session. For most brides, this is the simplest, most reliable pre-wedding treatment in our menu. **Related treatments:** carbon-laser-peel, hydrafacial ## AOD-9604: a peptide for stubborn fat **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-06 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/aod-9604-stubborn-fat **Tags:** aod-9604, peptides, body composition > A fragment of growth hormone designed to mobilise fat without the wider systemic effects of full GH. AOD-9604 is a synthetic peptide modelled on a fragment of human growth hormone. It was developed to retain the lipolytic, fat-mobilising effects of growth hormone without the wider metabolic and growth effects. For clients with stubborn fat that has not responded to diet and exercise, it is one tool in the body composition toolkit. How it works. AOD-9604 signals the breakdown of stored triglycerides and reduces the rate at which new fat is stored. It does not directly cause weight loss, what it does is shift the balance of fat metabolism so that, paired with appropriate diet and training, fat loss occurs more readily. Who tends to benefit. Clients in a sustained calorie deficit who have plateaued. Those with localised, stubborn fat that diet alone has not shifted. Clients whose body composition has stalled despite consistent training. AOD-9604 is not for clients new to a fat loss programme, the foundational work of diet and movement needs to be in place first. What to expect. The protocol is typically 8 to 12 weeks of daily subcutaneous injections via a medical-grade prefilled pen. The peptide is delivered each morning. The injection technique is shallow and the dose is small. Realistic outcome. Most clients see a measurable shift in body composition across a 12-week course paired with appropriate diet and training. Body composition shifts more than scale weight in many cases. We measure with InBody scans at baseline, midpoint, and end to track this objectively. What it is not. A magic body composition fix. The peptide accelerates the work, it does not replace it. Clients hoping for transformation without effort will be disappointed. The clients who get the best result are the ones who treat the peptide as an enhancement of a programme they are already running. We screen with blood work before starting, particularly fasting glucose, lipids, and liver function. Diabetic clients need specific clearance. We do not run AOD-9604 alongside other growth hormone secretagogues without specific protocol planning. The honest framing. AOD-9604 is a tool for clients who are committed to body composition work and want a measurable accelerant. It is not a substitute for the underlying work. **Related treatments:** aod-9604 ## Body filler explained: when, where, and why not **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-03 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/body-filler-explained **Tags:** body filler, hands, decollete > A targeted tool for hand rejuvenation and minor body contouring, not a body-wide answer. Body filler is a specific tool with a specific role. It is not a body-wide answer to loose skin or volume loss, and it is not the same product as facial filler though it lives in the same family. Where we use it. The dorsum of the hands, where volume loss exposes tendons and veins and is one of the most ageing changes that hand-care alone cannot address. Targeted gluteal augmentation, used carefully, in clients who want subtle contour improvement without surgery. Volume restoration in areas of the decollete where bio-remodelling alone has not been sufficient. How it is different from facial filler. Body filler products are typically denser, more cross-linked, and designed to integrate into the deeper tissue planes of the body. The volume per session is larger, and the technique is different from facial work. What hand rejuvenation involves. Filler is injected via a cannula into the dorsum of the hand, between the tendons. The result is immediate softening of the bony appearance and reduction in vein prominence. The treatment integrates over the following week. A second session is sometimes needed for fuller correction. Result lasts approximately 12 to 18 months. What we will not do. Large-volume gluteal augmentation. The risks of cosmetic complications scale up with volume, and that work belongs in a surgical setting with the appropriate environment and team. Calf augmentation. Other large-volume body work outside our scope. We refer to plastic surgery for those concerns. Pre-care and aftercare. Avoid blood-thinning supplements (fish oil, vitamin E, gingko) for a week before to minimise bruising. Avoid the use of the treated area for 24 hours. Light activity is fine, intense activity should wait 48 hours. The clients who get the best result from body filler are those treating a specific, localised concern, not those hoping to address general body laxity. Threading aesthetic, body sculpting, and skin quality treatments are different tools for different problems. A clear consultation matches the tool to the goal. If filler is not the right answer for what you are describing, we will say so and recommend something else. **Related treatments:** body-filler, dermal-fillers ## Why a 45-minute consultation matters **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-07-01 **Category:** Inside Ivory **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/forty-five-minute-consultation **Tags:** consultation, philosophy > Anything shorter does not allow us to do the job well. We have learned this the hard way. When I started in this industry, consultations were 15 minutes. The convention was to look at the client briefly, recommend a package, and book the first session. The client left feeling rushed, the practitioner did not have enough context to do their best work, and the result was often disappointing. At Ivory, every consultation is 45 minutes. That is not a marketing position, it is a clinical necessity. The first 15 minutes are about you and not your skin. Sleep, stress, diet, training, medications, family history. These are the variables that change how your skin will respond to anything we do. The next 15 minutes are the examination. Under proper lighting, with magnification, with photographs taken for the file. We classify your concerns by severity, identify what you have not mentioned but that is contributing, and look at the interplay between concerns. Pigmentation in the context of dryness behaves differently than pigmentation in the context of oily skin. The final 15 minutes are the plan. On paper. With sequencing across months. With clear non-negotiables for at-home work. With honest pricing. With explicit notes about what we will not recommend, and why. The clients who do best are the ones who take this hour seriously. They come in having thought about what they want. They answer the questions honestly. They take the written plan home, sit with it, and book the first session when they are sure. The clients who rush through, decide on the spot, and skip parts of the home protocol are the ones who come back disappointed. We do not run aggressive sales conversations during the consultation. We never push a treatment in the room. If a client says they want to think about it, we send the plan by email and leave them to decide. This is the work. The treatments are the easy part. ## Hair restoration in women: a different protocol **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-29 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/hair-restoration-in-women **Tags:** hair restoration, female, androgenetic > Female pattern hair loss needs a different approach to the male protocols that dominate the conversation. Female pattern hair loss looks and behaves differently from male pattern hair loss. The common pattern is gradual thinning across the central scalp rather than receding at the temples. The cause is often multifactorial, hormonal, nutritional, and genetic combined. The protocol is different. The first step is diagnostic. We trichoscope the scalp to confirm the pattern and rule out other causes (telogen effluvium, scarring alopecias, autoimmune patterns). We run a blood panel that includes ferritin, full thyroid function, vitamin D, B12, and where appropriate, androgens, prolactin, and sex hormone binding globulin. Why ferritin matters. Iron stores below 70 ng/mL are strongly associated with female hair shedding. Replacing iron when stores are low is one of the most reliably effective interventions, and it is often missed because routine blood work flags only frank anaemia, not low ferritin. Why thyroid matters. Subclinical hypothyroidism causes diffuse hair thinning that does not respond to topical or in-clinic protocols until the thyroid is addressed. Once underlying causes are screened and managed, the in-clinic protocol begins. We typically run a course of PRP scalp injections, four to six sessions, four weeks apart, alongside topical minoxidil (which works well in women, often better than in men). Exosome therapy may be added for clients at a more advanced stage or those who have plateaued on PRP. Hormonal modulators (spironolactone, in particular) are sometimes part of the conversation but are managed in collaboration with the client's general practitioner or endocrinologist. We do not start hormonal medications independently. The protocol takes patience. Hair grows about 1 cm per month. Visible regrowth takes four to six months. We photograph at baseline and at three-month intervals so the small daily changes accumulate visibly. For most women, a sustained six to twelve month protocol delivers measurable improvement. Maintaining the result requires ongoing care, not a one-off treatment. **Related treatments:** prp-hair, mct-exosome-hair, exosome-hair-therapy ## Oligo scan: what a mineral and toxin analysis tells you **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-26 **Category:** Inside Ivory **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/oligo-scan-mineral-toxin-analysis **Tags:** oligo scan, minerals, heavy metals, diagnostics > A non-invasive scan that maps your mineral status and heavy metal exposure in five minutes. The Oligo scan is a non-invasive spectrophotometric analysis that measures the levels of essential minerals, trace elements, and heavy metals in the tissues. The probe is placed against the palm in four positions. Five minutes later, you have a detailed report. What it measures. Essential minerals (magnesium, zinc, iron, selenium, copper, manganese, and others), the balance and ratios between them, and the presence of heavy metals (aluminium, arsenic, cadmium, mercury, lead, and similar). The output is a graphic showing where each marker sits relative to optimal range. Why we use it. Many wellness symptoms have nutrient deficiencies or imbalances as a contributing cause. Hair thinning, fatigue, poor sleep, slow recovery, and unexplained skin changes can all relate to mineral status. The scan gives us an objective starting point. What it is not. The Oligo scan is a screening tool, not a definitive diagnostic. If it flags concerning levels of a heavy metal, we follow up with a urine or hair sample analysis through a clinical laboratory to confirm before treating. If it shows deficiency, we confirm with serum testing where indicated. How we act on results. Mild deficiencies are usually addressed through targeted oral supplementation and dietary changes. Moderate to severe deficiencies, or imbalances that affect specific symptoms, may indicate IV protocols. Heavy metal elevations, when confirmed clinically, lead to chelation protocols managed alongside other clinical care. A typical client journey. A consultation to map symptoms and history. An Oligo scan and a baseline blood panel. A targeted nutritional and IV protocol designed around the findings. A repeat scan and blood panel at three months to confirm improvement. The scan is also useful as a baseline for clients who feel well but want to build a longevity protocol from objective data. Knowing where you start is the prerequisite for measuring progress. We do not recommend treatments based on a single scan with no context. The data informs a conversation, it does not replace one. **Related treatments:** oligo-scan ## Vitamin D3 deficiency in the Gulf: how to test and treat **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-24 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/vitamin-d3-deficiency-gulf **Tags:** vitamin d, deficiency, blood work > Despite the sun, vitamin D deficiency is widespread in the Gulf. Here is the protocol. Vitamin D deficiency is one of the most common findings in clients we run blood work for in Dubai. The reasons are familiar. Time indoors during the hottest months. Modest clothing patterns. Effective sun protection. Diet not particularly rich in dietary vitamin D sources. Some genetic variants affecting vitamin D metabolism. What deficiency does. Low vitamin D levels are linked to fatigue, mood changes, poor sleep, muscle weakness, slower recovery from training, and over the long term, bone density loss. The symptoms are vague and often dismissed as stress or ageing. The test. We measure 25-hydroxyvitamin D as part of the baseline panel for almost every wellness protocol we run. Reference ranges vary but most laboratories consider 50 to 75 nmol/L as adequate and above 75 as optimal. Many of our clients arrive below 30, which is frank deficiency. The protocol. For mild deficiency, oral D3 supplementation at a dose your clinician calibrates to your level is the first line. We often pair it with vitamin K2 to support the body's distribution of calcium that vitamin D mobilises. Take it with a meal containing some fat for absorption. For moderate to severe deficiency, or for clients with documented malabsorption, a vitamin D3 IV course delivers a higher dose more rapidly. A typical protocol is two to four IVs across one to two months, followed by maintenance with oral supplementation and a repeat blood test at three months to confirm levels have come up. What to avoid. Single mega-dose oral D3 (300,000 IU loads) is occasionally promoted but carries risks of acute hypercalcaemia and should only be done under direct medical supervision with monitoring. This is not a fashionable wellness add-on. It is straightforward clinical replacement for a common, measurable deficiency. The blood test should drive the protocol. Treating without testing risks overdoing it, treating with vague symptoms but normal levels misses the real cause. **Related treatments:** vitamin-d3-iv-drip ## Detox IV protocols: realistic expectations **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-22 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/detox-iv-realistic-expectations **Tags:** detox, iv therapy, liver support > The word detox is overused. Here is what these IVs actually do and do not do. Detox is one of the most overused words in wellness. Most of the time, the body's own detox systems, the liver, kidneys, lymphatic system, and skin, do the work without any help. So what is a detox IV actually doing. What it can do. A well-formulated detox IV delivers nutrients that support liver phase one and phase two detoxification pathways. Glutathione, the body's master antioxidant, often the centrepiece. Alpha-lipoic acid, another antioxidant that works synergistically. B-complex, particularly methylated forms, which support liver metabolic pathways. Vitamin C for general antioxidant load. Trace minerals. When clients see meaningful benefit. After a high-toxin exposure period, heavy alcohol intake during a holiday or wedding season, exposure to environmental toxicants, recovery from a course of medications that loaded the liver. After acute viral or bacterial illness where oxidative stress was high. During a sustained training programme where the body's antioxidant systems are under load. What it does not do. It does not flush mystery toxins from the body that the liver and kidneys somehow missed. It does not undo a chronic poor diet, sedentary lifestyle, or sleep deprivation. It does not replace medical care for liver or kidney disease, those need diagnosis and treatment, not wellness IVs. A typical detox protocol at Ivory is a single session or a short course of three sessions across two weeks during a period of higher demand. Maintenance is irregular and goal-driven rather than a fixed schedule. We screen for kidney function before the protocol because glutathione and the other antioxidant agents are processed through normal renal pathways. We ask about medications, particularly any that affect liver enzymes. Pregnant or breastfeeding clients usually do not run this protocol. The honest framing. The detox IV is part of a recovery and antioxidant support toolkit. It is meaningful when used at the right moments and oversold when used habitually. We help clients calibrate which they are doing. **Related treatments:** detox-iv-drip ## Karisma RH collagen explained **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-19 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/karisma-rh-collagen **Tags:** recombinant collagen, skin booster, regenerative > Recombinant human collagen as a skin booster: what it does, how it differs, and when we use it. Most skin boosters work by delivering hyaluronic acid into the skin to hydrate and signal collagen production indirectly. Karisma is different. It uses recombinant human collagen, the actual building block, directly delivered into the dermis. What recombinant human collagen is. Identical in structure to the collagen the body produces, manufactured through recombinant DNA technology rather than animal sources. There is no risk of allergic reaction tied to animal-derived collagen, and the structure is exactly what the dermis is built from. How it differs from hyaluronic acid skin boosters. HA boosters add hydration and signal fibroblasts to produce more of the skin's own collagen and elastin. Karisma delivers collagen directly, supplementing the structural framework while also signalling regeneration. For clients whose primary concern is skin thinness and loss of structural support rather than hydration, this can be a better fit. What it treats well. Mature skin showing thinning rather than just dryness. Crepey textures around the eyes, neck, and decollete. Clients who have not had as much success with hyaluronic acid boosters and want an alternative protocol. A typical course is three sessions, two to three weeks apart. The injection technique uses multiple shallow points across the treatment area. Sessions are 30 to 45 minutes. Topical anaesthetic is applied for comfort. Tiny bruises at injection points sometimes appear and resolve within a few days. Results build across two months as the delivered collagen integrates and the regenerative signal triggers the skin's own production. The cumulative effect is firmer, smoother, more youthful-looking skin with a quality rather than a volume change. Who should consider it. Clients in their late forties and beyond with thinning skin. Anyone who has plateaued with hyaluronic acid boosters. Those who want a more structural, longer-lasting result than facials and surface treatments can deliver. We discuss the choice between recombinant collagen and other boosters at consultation. There is no universal best, the right answer depends on what your skin needs. **Related treatments:** karisma-collagen ## Profhilo Body: arms, neck, and decollete **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-17 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/profhilo-body-explained **Tags:** profhilo, body, bio-remodelling > Where to use bio-remodelling on the body, and where it is not the right fit. Bio-remodelling has earned its place in facial protocols. The body version, Profhilo Body, is less talked about but equally useful for a specific set of concerns. Where it works best. The neck, where skin laxity and crepiness are early signs of ageing and where surgical options feel disproportionate. The decollete, where sun damage and thinning skin create a textured appearance that creams cannot reach. The inner arms, where loose, crepey skin is a common concern in clients who have lost weight or are in their late forties and beyond. The inner thighs and knees, similar story. The mechanism is the same as the facial version. A high concentration of stabilised hyaluronic acid is delivered subdermally at a set of mapped injection points. It spreads, hydrates, and signals fibroblast activity, leading to gradual collagen and elastin remodelling. The skin firms across two months. A typical body protocol is two sessions, four weeks apart, with a top-up at six to twelve months. The session takes 30 to 45 minutes depending on the area. We use topical anaesthetic for the inner arms and inner thighs where the skin is more sensitive. Recovery is minimal. The treated area may have small raised bumps for two to three hours, similar to the facial version, that resolve quickly. Light bruising at injection points sometimes appears and clears within a few days. You can return to normal activity immediately, but we ask that you avoid intense heat (saunas, hot yoga) for 24 hours. Where it is not the right answer. Significant laxity that has crossed beyond what skin-quality work can address. Loose skin after major weight loss often needs surgery, not bio-remodelling. Significant fat accumulation that contributes to the appearance of loose skin needs body sculpting first. For mild to moderate skin quality and firmness concerns on the body, this is one of the most reliable, low-risk options we offer. **Related treatments:** profhilo-body, profhilo ## Multivitamin IV: who actually needs it **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-15 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/multivitamin-iv-who-needs-it **Tags:** iv therapy, multivitamin, wellness > Not everyone needs IV vitamins. Here is how to know whether you are one of the people who do. Multivitamin IV is the most common starting point for IV therapy, and also the most commonly misused. Not everyone needs one. Here is who typically benefits and who is better off elsewhere. Who genuinely benefits. Clients with documented vitamin and mineral deficiencies confirmed by blood work. Those with malabsorption conditions (coeliac, post-bariatric, inflammatory bowel disease). High training loads or chronic stress states that increase nutrient demand. Frequent travellers dealing with sustained jet lag and disrupted eating patterns. Anyone recovering from acute illness. Who does not need it. Clients with a balanced diet, no malabsorption, and no documented deficiency. For these clients, oral supplementation with selected, well-absorbed forms is more cost-effective. The IV adds nothing measurable beyond a pleasant experience. What is in our multivitamin protocol. A B-complex (including methylated forms for clients with MTHFR variants), vitamin C, magnesium, zinc, glutathione, and trace minerals. The full clinical dose, never split, administered over 60 minutes. What to expect. Most clients feel an energy and clarity uplift within hours. Sleep that night is often deeper. The acute effect lasts three to seven days. Cumulative benefits, particularly for energy and skin clarity, build across a course of four to six sessions, two to four weeks apart. How we decide who to recommend it to. We review your blood work, ask about your diet and supplementation, and look at your goals. If your goal is general wellness and your diet is solid, we may suggest a different protocol like NAD+ or Glutathione targeted at a specific outcome. If you are nutrient-deplete and oral has not closed the gap, the multivitamin IV is the right tool. The honest framing. IV multivitamin is a wellness experience for many clients. For some, it is a clinical intervention. We try to make clear which it is for you. **Related treatments:** multivitamin-iv-drip ## Microneedling for stretch marks **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-12 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/microneedling-for-stretch-marks **Tags:** stretch marks, microneedling, rf > What works, what does not, and the realistic timeline for visible change. Stretch marks are scars. The fibres within the dermis have torn and the skin has healed with a different architecture, sometimes shiny, sometimes pigmented, often slightly indented. No treatment will erase them completely. Treatments can soften them significantly. The first thing we look at is age and colour. Red or purple stretch marks, called striae rubrae, are recent and have more vascular involvement. They respond better to treatment than older, white stretch marks (striae albae), which are more established scars. Newer marks tend to soften noticeably with a proper protocol. Older marks see meaningful but more modest change. What works. Microneedling and RF microneedling are the foundation of stretch mark treatment. They create controlled micro-injuries in the skin and trigger remodelling of the collagen and elastin in the affected dermis. RF microneedling reaches the deeper layers where stretch marks live, which is why we prefer it for established marks. A course is typically four to six sessions, four to six weeks apart. Some clients add fractional laser between sessions for the pigmented or textural component. The full result takes three to six months after the last session as the collagen remodels. What does not work. Topical creams marketed as stretch mark cures. They may improve hydration and surface appearance briefly, but they do not change the underlying scar architecture. Crash exfoliating treatments. Anything promising single-session results. What helps the result. Consistent home care with retinoids (outside of pregnancy and breastfeeding), vitamin C, and SPF on the treated area. Stable body weight during the protocol. Patience with the timeline. We photograph stretch marks at the start of every protocol because the day-to-day change is small but the cumulative change is real. The comparison shot at six months is what tells the truth. **Related treatments:** medical-microneedling, exion-rf-microneedling ## Why we screen blood work before peptide protocols **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-10 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/blood-work-before-peptides **Tags:** peptides, safety, blood work > Peptides are pharmacologically active. They deserve the same clinical screening as any other prescribed therapy. Peptides have moved into mainstream wellness so quickly that the clinical framework around them has sometimes lagged behind. We see clients who have been started on peptide courses without any blood work, without a medical history review, and without a clear protocol exit point. That is not how we run them. Why blood work matters. Peptides act on specific receptors and signalling pathways. Growth-hormone-releasing peptides, for example, change IGF-1 levels, which we want to track. Sleep and longevity peptides affect inflammation markers and cortisol, which baseline values help us interpret. Thyroid status, liver and kidney function, fasting glucose and HbA1c, lipids, and a complete blood count form the standard baseline panel for most peptide protocols we run. What we screen for explicitly. Hormonal imbalances that change which peptide is appropriate. Liver enzyme elevations that change which peptides to avoid. Kidney function that determines dose adjustment. Cardiovascular risk markers when the goal involves growth hormone axis stimulation. Cancer-relevant markers in clients with a personal or family history. Cost-effective screening. The full baseline panel costs a fraction of a peptide course. Running it adds 7 to 10 days to the start, while we await results, but it makes the protocol meaningfully safer and the results easier to interpret. We repeat key markers at the midpoint of any sustained protocol, typically at week 12, and again at the end. The comparison is what tells us whether to continue, adjust, or stop. Who needs to be especially careful. Clients with a personal or family cancer history. Anyone on prescription medications that interact with hormonal axes. Anyone with thyroid disorders. Pregnant or breastfeeding clients. We have specific protocols for each scenario, and sometimes the right answer is to delay or decline peptide therapy entirely. A clinic that starts you on peptides without blood work or a medical history review is not running a clinical protocol. It is running a sales process. **Related treatments:** cjc-1295-ipamorelin, bpc-157, thymosin-alpha-1 ## Sclerotherapy for spider veins **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-08 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/sclerotherapy-for-spider-veins **Tags:** sclerotherapy, spider veins, vascular > When laser is not the right tool for visible leg veins. Spider veins on the legs are a common concern and one of the most often miss-treated. Many clients are told they need laser. For most leg spider veins, laser is not the first line. Sclerotherapy is. What it is. A solution is injected into the visible vein through a very fine needle. The solution irritates the vein wall, causing it to collapse and gradually be reabsorbed by the body over the following weeks. The vein disappears from view. Why we choose it over laser for legs. Laser energy is absorbed by haemoglobin in the blood, but on the legs it has to pass through skin and tissue to reach veins that often sit deeper than facial vasculature. The energy required is high, the discomfort is more, and the bruising potential is greater. Sclerotherapy targets the vein directly with much less collateral effect. A session takes 30 to 45 minutes depending on the area. Most clients describe the sensation as a brief sting at each injection point. Afterwards, compression stockings for one to two weeks support the closure. Light activity is encouraged, sitting for long periods is discouraged. Results build across four to eight weeks. Most clients need two to three sessions, four weeks apart, to clear a given area. Larger or denser networks may need more. Who is not a good candidate. Active deep vein thrombosis, certain clotting disorders, pregnancy, severe heart conditions. We screen carefully and request relevant test results when needed. Larger varicose veins, not the small spider veins, often need surgical or radiofrequency vein closure first, then sclerotherapy addresses the remaining cosmetic veins. A consultation includes mapping the affected areas, photographing them, and discussing realistic outcomes. We do not promise a single result, we plan a course with measurable checkpoints. Clients who follow the compression protocol and avoid heavy heat exposure post-procedure get the best results. **Related treatments:** lp-yag-laser ## The case for an InBody analysis before body work **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-05 **Category:** Inside Ivory **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/inbody-analysis-before-body-work **Tags:** body analysis, metrics, inbody > A 60-second body composition scan that changes how we plan and measure outcomes. Body treatment without measurement is guesswork. Most clients who come in asking for body work have a clear idea of their goal but no objective way to track progress. An InBody analysis takes 60 seconds and changes that. What it measures. Body composition by segment, total fat mass, total muscle mass, visceral fat, intracellular and extracellular water balance, and segmental analysis showing how each region of the body compares to baseline. We can see exactly where muscle is sitting versus fat, where fluid is being held, and how balance changes across a treatment course. Why this matters. Many clients see their scale weight go up during a course of body sculpting and conclude the treatment is not working. The scale does not tell the truth. An InBody scan at the start, midpoint, and end of a course shows what is actually happening, muscle gain, fat reduction, even if total weight has not moved. The opposite also happens. A client may drop scale weight during a programme and be pleased, only for InBody to reveal that the loss was largely water and a small amount of muscle, with body fat percentage unchanged. That is a course that needs adjusting. How we use it. We run an InBody scan before starting any sustained body programme, body sculpting, RF body, peptide-supported fat metabolism. We repeat it at three points across the protocol so we can see the trajectory. The graphs are the most honest conversation we have with clients about whether the work is delivering. A scan can also stand alone, no commitment to a body programme, as a baseline understanding of your composition and where your priorities should be. We do not push body programmes that the data does not support. If a client's composition is in good shape and their goal is a single contour concern, we will say so and recommend a more targeted approach. **Related treatments:** inbody-analysis, emsculpt-neo ## DMK enzyme therapy: a different approach to facials **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-03 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/dmk-enzyme-therapy-different-approach **Tags:** facial, enzyme therapy, advanced > Why a 90-minute facial built around an enzyme masque produces results most other facials cannot. DMK enzyme therapy is not a regular facial. It is built around a specific masque that sets firm against the skin, then uses an enzyme reaction to create what the protocol calls reverse osmosis, flushing waste from the skin tissue while drawing in nutrients. The session takes 90 minutes and is genuinely different in sensation from any other facial. A double cleanse and exfoliation prepare the skin. The enzyme masque is applied across the face, neck, and decollete. As it sets, the skin pulses and tightens, the visible signal of the reaction working through the tissue. After around 45 minutes, the masque is gently removed and a customised serum protocol is applied. What it is good for. Clients with sluggish circulation, dull or congested skin, persistent puffiness, mild laxity, or sensitivity that has not responded to standard hydrating facials. The enzyme work supports lymphatic clearance, improves microcirculation, and gradually firms the skin across a course of treatments. What to expect. The first session is often a reset. Clients usually look slightly red or pink for an hour or two afterwards, then the skin settles into a brighter, firmer, more even state by the next day. The cumulative effect from a course of four to six sessions, two to four weeks apart, is meaningful skin quality improvement. Who should be careful. Clients with active inflammatory acne, very thin or fragile skin, or recent ablative treatments may need a different starting point. Pregnant clients can usually have an adjusted protocol but we discuss it. Pair it with. DMK enzyme therapy works particularly well alongside LED light therapy, oral antioxidant support, and a consistent at-home regimen that focuses on barrier health. We design the home protocol alongside the in-clinic plan, the two compound each other. For clients who feel they have done everything topical and want a deeper, more clinical reset, this is the facial to consider. **Related treatments:** dmk-facial, dmk-body-wrap ## BPC-157 explained: not just for athletes **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-06-01 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/bpc-157-not-just-for-athletes **Tags:** peptides, recovery, bpc-157 > A peptide first studied for gut healing now widely used for soft-tissue repair. BPC-157 is one of the most studied recovery peptides in current use. It was originally derived from a protein found in gastric juice and first researched for gut healing. The research and clinical experience since has shown it supports soft-tissue repair across joints, tendons, and ligaments. Who tends to benefit. Clients with slow-healing tendon and ligament discomfort from training. Anyone recovering from surgery, with surgeon's awareness. Clients with chronic gut inflammation as part of a broader gastrointestinal protocol. Some clients with persistent joint stiffness that has not responded to conventional approaches. How it is delivered. BPC-157 is most commonly run as a four to six week course of daily subcutaneous injections via a medical-grade prefilled pen. The dose is small and the injection is shallow, similar in size and technique to insulin delivery. We provide full training before you start and check in across the course. What clients report. The most consistent feedback is reduced inflammation in a specific area, faster return to training, and better tolerance of high-load activity. Less consistent but reported, improved gut comfort for those running it alongside dietary changes. What we screen for. As with any peptide, we run baseline blood work, review your medical history, and discuss medications. BPC-157 is generally well tolerated but is not appropriate for everyone, particularly clients with active cancer, certain autoimmune presentations, or pregnancy. It is also not magic. Peptides are tools within a broader recovery framework that includes sleep, training load management, nutrition, and conventional medical care. We treat BPC-157 as an accelerator, not a substitute, and we say so at consultation. A typical course at Ivory runs eight to twelve weeks and is reviewed at the midpoint. If the course is not delivering measurable change, we stop and reassess. We do not extend protocols indefinitely without a clear reason. **Related treatments:** bpc-157, bpc-157-tb-500 ## What we look at during a trichoscopy **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-29 **Category:** Inside Ivory **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/what-trichoscopy-shows **Tags:** trichoscopy, hair loss, diagnostics > The 30-second scalp examination that changes how we plan hair restoration. Before we recommend any hair restoration protocol, we run a trichoscopy. A handheld dermoscopy device magnifies the scalp 20 to 70 times, allowing us to assess what is actually happening at the follicle level. What we look for. Hair shaft diameter variation, which signals miniaturisation, the early step in pattern hair loss. Scalp condition, redness, scaling, oiliness, all of which inform the protocol. Empty follicles versus follicles with miniaturised hairs, which tells us whether regrowth is biologically possible in a given area. Yellow dots, peripilar signs, and other patterns that distinguish androgenetic alopecia from telogen effluvium, traction, scarring, or autoimmune patterns. Why this matters. A client may walk in convinced they have one type of hair loss when the trichoscopy shows another. The protocol changes. Treating androgenetic alopecia with the same approach as a stress-driven telogen effluvium produces underwhelming results. Treating scarring alopecia with regenerative therapies meant for non-scarring loss wastes time and money. The exam takes around 30 seconds per region. We take photographs for the file so we can track progress objectively over the months that follow. At the three-month review point, we re-examine and compare. Hair growth is slow, and clients sometimes underestimate the change because they see themselves daily. Side-by-side magnified images at three months tell the truth. We do not start any hair protocol, PRP, exosomes, mesotherapy, peptide-based regrowth, without this exam first. It is included in the consultation. If you have been told you need a course of hair injections without a scalp examination, push back. A protocol without a baseline is just a guess. For clients new to hair restoration, a trichoscopy alone, with no treatment plan, is a useful first step. We can show you what is happening, explain the options, and let you decide. **Related treatments:** prp-hair, mct-exosome-hair ## Vitamin C IV: when oral supplementation isn't enough **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-27 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/vitamin-c-iv-when-oral-isnt-enough **Tags:** vitamin c, iv therapy, antioxidant > Why intravenous vitamin C delivers what high-dose oral supplements often cannot. Oral vitamin C plateaus. Above a certain single-dose threshold, intestinal absorption drops sharply and most of the rest is excreted. To reach plasma levels that have an antioxidant, immune-supportive, or collagen-stimulating effect, you need a different delivery route. IV vitamin C bypasses the gut. The full dose enters circulation, producing substantially higher plasma levels than oral supplementation can achieve. That is what allows the therapeutic effects clients book this protocol for, immune support, antioxidant load during stress periods or after travel, skin collagen support as a foundation alongside topical and treatment protocols. A typical IV session is 60 minutes. The vial is delivered as the full clinical dose, never split, by our DHA-licensed nurse after a brief health check. You can read, work, or rest through it. Who is this for. Clients with high oxidative stress loads, athletes in peak training, frequent travellers, anyone recovering from illness, clients running a brightening or skin-quality programme who want internal support alongside topical work. Who should not have it. Anyone with a known glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase (G6PD) deficiency, which we always screen for before vitamin C IV, as high-dose vitamin C in G6PD-deficient patients can trigger haemolysis. We screen for kidney disease, iron overload conditions, and active cancer treatments without oncology clearance. This is not a daily supplement. It is a periodic, clinically-administered boost, generally once every two to four weeks during a course, with maintenance every one to three months thereafter. We discuss the right interval for you at consultation. For most clients, the most measurable effect is on energy, recovery, and skin clarity across a course of four to six sessions. The brightening benefit compounds with topical vitamin C in your morning routine, the IV builds the internal load, the topical delivers the surface effect. **Related treatments:** vitamin-c-iv-drip ## Five questions to ask before any laser treatment **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-25 **Category:** Inside Ivory **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/five-questions-before-any-laser **Tags:** laser, consultation, expectations > Most laser disappointments come from mismatched expectations, not equipment. Most disappointments with laser treatment come from a poor match between treatment and goal, not from the equipment itself. Before booking any laser session anywhere, ask these five questions. One. Which platform is being used and why is it the right one for my skin type and concern. There is no universal laser. The right wavelength depends on the target, hair, pigment, vasculature, water, collagen, and on your skin tone. A clinician who cannot answer this should not be touching you with a laser. Two. What is the realistic outcome from a single session, and from a full course. A course is usually four to six sessions for most aesthetic goals, but the per-session improvement should be specific, not vague. "Better skin" is not an answer. A clear description of which concern will change, and by roughly how much, is. Three. What is the downtime, and when can I return to normal activities. Carbon laser peel, none. Fractional ablative resurfacing, three to seven days. Be honest with yourself about your schedule before booking. Four. What are the contraindications I should disclose. Recent isotretinoin use, active herpes, certain medications, pregnancy, melasma history, recent sun exposure, all change the calculation. A practitioner who does not ask is taking shortcuts. Five. What is the home protocol around treatment. Sun avoidance before and after. Specific products to start or stop. SPF non-negotiable. If a clinic does not send you a written pre-care and aftercare protocol, the result will be inconsistent. Most clinics in Dubai have similar equipment. The thing that distinguishes results is what happens during these five questions and the consultation that surrounds them. **Related treatments:** soprano-titanium, clearskin-laser-acne, qs-laser-pigmentation ## PRP versus PRF: which platelet treatment for what **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-22 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/prp-versus-prf-which-platelet-treatment **Tags:** prp, prf, regenerative > Two platelet-derived therapies, similar principles, different best uses. PRP and PRF both start with your own blood. The difference is in how it is processed and what comes out the other end. Both work, but they are not interchangeable. PRP, platelet-rich plasma, is spun at higher speeds to separate red cells from a plasma layer rich in platelets and their growth factors. We add a small amount of anticoagulant to keep it liquid for injection. PRP is the established standard for hair restoration, fine line improvement, and as an adjunct to microneedling. PRF, platelet-rich fibrin, is spun at lower speeds without anticoagulant. The result is a slower-releasing matrix containing platelets, white blood cells, and a fibrin scaffold. PRF works more like a sustained-release version of PRP, releasing growth factors over the days following injection rather than all at once. When we choose PRF over PRP. Under-eye work where a slower, gentler release reduces puffiness and produces a more natural settle. Scarring protocols where the sustained signal supports better tissue remodelling. Combination treatments where we want the growth-factor effect to persist between sessions. When we stay with PRP. Hair restoration, where the injection pattern across the scalp benefits from a more fluid product. General skin rejuvenation as part of a microneedling protocol. Most cost-effective regenerative work. Both are drawn at consultation, spun on-site, and used within an hour. Neither involves a foreign substance, your body is the source. Both have a short post-treatment swelling window of 24 to 48 hours. Tell us your priority at consultation, hair, under-eye, scarring, general skin, and we will recommend the version best suited to it. If a clinic offers only one of the two, that is your answer for which treatment you will get, regardless of what you actually need. **Related treatments:** prp-treatment, prf-treatment ## Inside Ivory: how we consult and recommend **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-19 **Category:** Inside Ivory **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/inside-ivory-how-we-consult **Tags:** consultation, philosophy, personalisation > A walk through the consultation process, what we ask, what we look for, and how a plan is built. A consultation at Ivory is 45 minutes. We have learned the hard way that anything shorter does not allow us to do the job properly, and anything longer becomes a sales conversation. The first 15 minutes are about you, not your skin. We ask about your sleep, your stress, your hydration, your training, your medications, your family history. We ask what you do for work and how much time you spend outdoors. We ask about your skincare routine, the products you use, the order you use them in, and how often you actually apply each one. This part feels personal because it is. Skin is the most visible indicator of internal health, and the best treatment plan starts with knowing the person, not the surface. Clients who skip this part and want us to go straight to the mirror often leave with the wrong plan. The next 15 minutes are the examination. We look at your skin under good clinical lighting, we use a magnification tool, sometimes we take photographs for the file. We classify your concerns, pigmentation versus texture versus laxity, and rate the severity of each. We compare what we see to what you described and identify gaps. The final 15 minutes are the plan. We present the options on paper. Which treatments are first-line for your concerns. What sequencing makes sense over the next three to six months. What at-home work is non-negotiable. What it will cost, in time and money. What we honestly do not recommend, and why. We never push a single session at first consultation. We send you home with the written plan, the home protocol, and time to think. Clients who book a course of treatment based on a considered plan stay with us for years. Clients who were rushed into a one-off rarely come back. The treatment is the easy part. The consultation is where the work actually happens. ## Pelvic floor strengthening: why it matters **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-17 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/pelvic-floor-strengthening-women **Tags:** pelvic floor, emsella, postpartum, women's health > A non-invasive way to address postpartum changes, mild incontinence, and pelvic floor weakness. Pelvic floor weakness is a topic women rarely raise at first consultation. The symptoms, mild incontinence when laughing or coughing, postpartum changes, reduced sensation, are often quietly tolerated. The Emsella chair is one of the most quietly transformative treatments we offer for these concerns. You sit, fully clothed, on a chair that delivers focused electromagnetic energy to the pelvic floor muscles. Each session, around 28 minutes, triggers thousands of supramaximal contractions, far more than any voluntary Kegel routine could achieve. A typical course is six to twelve sessions, twice a week for three to six weeks. Many clients notice improvement after two or three sessions, with the durable change building across the full course. The treatment is not just for postpartum women. We see clients across all life stages. Perimenopausal and postmenopausal women dealing with tissue laxity. Younger athletes whose high-impact training has weakened the pelvic floor. Men with mild urinary incontinence, sexual wellness concerns, or post-prostatectomy recovery (with surgeon's clearance). There is no pain. The sensation is a deep contraction, similar to a strong workout in the pelvic area. You can read, work, or rest during the session. No recovery period afterwards. Who should not have it. Anyone with metal implants in the treatment area. Pacemakers and other electronic implants. Pregnancy. Active pelvic infection. We screen carefully at consultation. For women dealing with postpartum changes or mild incontinence, this is often the first treatment we recommend before any more invasive option. It is dignified, fully clothed, and reliably effective. The conversation it deserves to start is the one we are happy to lead. **Related treatments:** btl-emsella ## Summer skincare in Dubai: protecting against UV damage **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-15 **Category:** Seasonal **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/summer-skincare-uv-protection **Tags:** spf, summer, uv, prevention > Why SPF is the most powerful, cheapest, and most often skipped step in any skin protocol. Every treatment we offer is harder to do well, slower to deliver results, and easier to undo if you do not protect your skin from UV every day. SPF is the single most powerful anti-ageing step available, and it is the one most clients quietly skip. A few things worth saying clearly. SPF 50+ should be applied every morning, even when you are indoors most of the day. UV penetrates windows. UVA, which causes ageing and pigmentation, transmits through clouds and glass. Daily, not occasional. It should be reapplied every two to three hours when you are outdoors. Once-a-day application becomes effectively SPF 15 by afternoon. A single tube of SPF should last one month with proper use. If yours lasts six, you are not applying enough. For Middle Eastern skin tones, mineral or hybrid sunscreens that lean into iron oxide ingredients also block visible light, which contributes to melasma and pigmentation in a way pure UV filters do not. We can recommend specific products at consultation. If you are running a pigmentation protocol, our depigmentation peel, brightening peels, Q-switch laser for sun spots, SPF is not optional. It is the half of the treatment that happens at home. Skip it and the in-clinic work cannot do what it is meant to do. In the same vein, summer in Dubai is the season to reduce direct exposure where possible. Schedule outdoor activity for early morning or evening. Wear hats and UPF clothing for prolonged exposure. Reapply after swimming or heavy sweat. None of this is glamorous. All of it works. The clients with the calmest, most even, most resilient skin in their fifties are almost always the ones who built a daily SPF habit in their twenties. It is the closest thing in skincare to a sure bet. **Related treatments:** cosmelan-peel, qs-laser-pigmentation ## Body wraps and lymphatic drainage explained **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-13 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/body-wraps-and-lymphatic-drainage **Tags:** body wrap, lymphatic, cellulite, circulation > What a botanical body wrap actually does, and where the temporary effect ends and the cumulative effect begins. Body wraps have been around long enough to have generated a lot of myth. The honest answer about what they do is in two parts. There is an immediate effect, real but temporary. And there is a cumulative effect, slower but more meaningful. The immediate effect. A body wrap soaked in a concentrated botanical formulation, applied tightly, draws fluid out of the tissue through osmosis and improves microcirculation. The skin looks firmer, the silhouette tighter, the texture smoother. Some of this is fluid reduction, plain and simple. That part lasts hours to a day. The cumulative effect. Across a course of six to ten sessions, the active ingredients, caffeine, algae extracts, menthol, and plant-derived actives, support circulation, lymphatic clearance, and gradual improvement in cellulite appearance. Skin elasticity tends to improve, and clients report fewer water retention episodes. This part is the real value. Body wraps work best in combination with other body work. We often pair them with pressotherapy in the same session for lymphatic finishing, and with shockwave therapy or RF body contouring between visits. The combinations compound. A wrap on its own, without the rest of the protocol, gives a pleasant but limited result. Hydration matters. We ask clients to drink 1.5 to 2 litres of water daily for the two days before and after each session. Without that, the lymphatic clearance the wrap is supporting cannot move what it needs to move. Who should be careful. Clients with cardiovascular conditions, severe varicose veins, or known allergies to botanical ingredients should disclose at consultation. Pregnant clients should wait. Clients with active skin infections in the treatment area should reschedule. A single body wrap is a lovely pre-event treatment. A six-session course is where the real, sustainable change happens. **Related treatments:** arosha-body-wrap, dmk-body-wrap ## Aptos thread lift: candidates, recovery, and results **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-11 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/aptos-thread-lift-candidates-recovery **Tags:** threads, aptos, lift, non-surgical > Threads sit between filler and surgery, useful in the right hands, overused in the wrong ones. Thread lifts have been in and out of fashion for two decades. The current generation of biocompatible, absorbable threads, like the Aptos range we use, has improved meaningfully in safety and predictability. The honest truth is that threads still need very careful patient selection. What they are. Threads are biocompatible filaments, often with small barbs or cones, placed under the skin to provide immediate mechanical lift and stimulate collagen remodelling for several months. They absorb over six to twelve months, leaving collagen scaffolding behind. Who is the right candidate. Clients in their forties to early sixties with moderate jawline laxity or cheek descent but good underlying skin quality. The skin needs to be reasonably elastic to hold the thread and produce a natural-looking result. Clients with very loose or thin skin are not good candidates, the threads can pucker or be visible. What you should not expect. A facelift result. Threads provide subtle lift, in the range of millimetres, not the structural change surgery delivers. Anyone marketing threads as a substitute for surgery is overpromising. The session itself takes around 60 to 90 minutes. We use local anaesthetic. The threads are placed through small entry points, then drawn into position. Most clients experience moderate bruising, swelling, and tightness for one to two weeks. Sleeping on your back and avoiding strong facial movement for the first ten days is essential. The result settles over four to eight weeks. The lift is most visible in the lower face and jawline. The collagen remodelling that builds behind it adds firmness across the following months. We do not run thread lifts as a first treatment for clients who have never had injectables. Bio-remodelling, RF tightening, or Sculptra often achieve more with less risk for many clients. Threads are a precise tool with a specific role, not a general solution. **Related treatments:** aptos-thread-lift ## Four treatments for the eye area, and how to choose **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-09 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/eye-rejuvenation-four-treatments **Tags:** eye area, under-eye, crow's feet, brow lift > EMFACE Eyes, polynucleotides, RF, and Thermage each address a different concern around the eye. The eye area is the most expressive part of the face and one of the first to show change. Different concerns need different treatments, and many of our clients arrive expecting filler when something else is the better fit. EMFACE Eyes addresses muscle tone around the brow and the eye, gently lifting the brow position and strengthening the muscles that support the upper eyelid. It is the treatment we recommend most often for clients whose eyelid feels heavier in photos but where the skin itself is in good condition. Four sessions, twenty minutes each, weekly. Salmon DNA polynucleotides for the under-eye target skin quality. Crepiness, thin skin, the dark shadow that comes from translucency rather than pigment. Three to four sessions, two to three weeks apart, with the build happening over two months. This is the treatment we now recommend over filler for most under-eye concerns. RF microneedling around the eye, our Viora platform, is for clients with mild laxity at the outer corner and fine crow's feet that have started to deepen. The radiofrequency delivers gentle heat to remodel collagen across a small course of sessions. Thermage FLX Eyes is the strongest non-surgical option for upper eyelid laxity and brow heaviness. A single session, around 60 minutes, with the result building across two to six months. Particularly useful for clients in their late forties and beyond who want a meaningful lift without surgery. Many of our clients combine two of these across a sequenced six-month plan. The decisions about which and in what order come from a thorough consultation, family history, photographs, and what you want most. The wrong treatment in the eye area is more visible than anywhere else. Take the time to plan it properly, and where filler is not the right answer, do not let anyone push it. **Related treatments:** emface-eyes, salmon-dna-eyes, viora-rf-eyes, thermage-flx-eyes ## Pressotherapy: what lymphatic drainage actually does **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-07 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/pressotherapy-explained **Tags:** pressotherapy, lymphatic, body, recovery > Why sequential pneumatic compression earns its place between body sculpting sessions. Pressotherapy looks unassuming. You put on a set of inflatable compression boots and trousers, lie back, and let the machine do its work for 45 minutes. The compression cycles up and down the body sequentially, mimicking the lymphatic system's natural drainage pattern. What it actually does. The lymphatic system clears interstitial fluid, cellular waste, and excess proteins from tissues, returning them to circulation. It does not have its own pump, so it relies on muscle movement, breathing, and external compression. When the system is sluggish, the body retains fluid, holds inflammation longer, and recovers more slowly from any stress, training, treatment, travel, illness. Pressotherapy gives the lymphatic system a strong external assist. The result is reduced fluid retention, faster recovery, lighter legs, less puffiness, and better tolerance of any other body work happening at the same time. We book it for three main client groups. First, anyone undergoing body contouring treatments like body sculpting or RF, where lymphatic clearance compounds the result. Second, post-procedure clients, after surgery (with surgeon's clearance), after travel, after high training loads. Third, clients with persistent fluid retention or sluggish circulation, often paired with movement and nutritional support. Each session is 45 minutes, no downtime, no discomfort. Most clients describe it as deeply relaxing, many fall asleep. The effect is cumulative across a course of six to eight sessions, with single sessions delivering a noticeable but shorter-lived benefit. What it is not. Pressotherapy is not a fat reduction treatment. It does not directly remove cellulite. It is a circulatory and lymphatic support modality, valuable on its own and even more valuable when paired with other body work. If you have severe varicose veins, deep vein thrombosis history, kidney conditions, or heart conditions, we will not run pressotherapy without medical clearance. Always disclose your history during the consultation. **Related treatments:** pressotherapy ## LED light therapy for sensitive and reactive skin **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-05 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/led-light-therapy-sensitive-skin **Tags:** led therapy, sensitive skin, rosacea, barrier > When other treatments are too aggressive, calibrated light wavelengths offer real benefit without irritation. Some clients walk into the clinic having tried every active they could find at the pharmacy. Their skin is reactive, flushed, sometimes broken out. They have been told they need a strong peel or aggressive laser, and they are afraid. LED light therapy is one of the few treatments designed for exactly this client. Calibrated wavelengths of light penetrate the skin at known depths and trigger biological responses without heat, abrasion, or downtime. Red light at 633nm stimulates fibroblasts and supports collagen production. Near-infrared at 830nm reduces inflammation. Blue light at 415nm targets acne-causing bacteria. For sensitive, reactive, or rosacea-prone skin, a course of LED, often layered with our calming hydrating facial protocol, can do more than aggressive treatments would. The sessions are 20 minutes, no contact, no discomfort, no recovery period. A typical course is six to ten sessions across three to four weeks, then maintenance every four to six weeks. Most clients see a calmer baseline within two sessions, with the more durable improvements building over the full course. LED is also the recovery tool we reach for after every more intensive treatment. After microneedling, fractional laser, or a peel, a 20-minute LED session reduces inflammation, accelerates healing, and brings the skin to a more presentable state within hours rather than days. We often build it into the same-day plan. What LED is not. It is not a substitute for treatments your skin actually needs. If you have textural scarring, pigmentation, or deep wrinkles, you need treatments that work at depth. LED is a foundational, supportive layer, not a primary intervention for those concerns. For sensitive-skin clients trying to find a starting point, LED is often the right answer. We can build outward from there. **Related treatments:** dermalux-led ## Building your personalised treatment plan **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-03 **Category:** Inside Ivory **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/building-your-personalised-plan **Tags:** consultation, treatment planning, personalisation > How we sequence treatments across three, six, and twelve months for clients with multiple goals. Every client who walks into Ivory has more than one concern. Maybe they want their skin to glow, the volume in their cheeks to soften without filler, and the laxity in their jawline to firm up. Maybe they want all three by a specific date. The single biggest mistake we see in this industry is treating each concern in isolation. We see clients who have had three different treatments in three different clinics, all in the same month, and the results have cancelled each other out, irritated their skin, or wasted their money. A real treatment plan is sequenced. Some treatments need to come before others. Some pair well in the same session. Some need a buffer between them. The science of sequencing is what most clinics are not selling, and it is what separates a one-off facial from a meaningful long-term transformation. A typical plan we build looks like this. Month one, foundations. We treat the most fundamental layer first, often hydration, barrier health, and pigmentation. This often means a bio-remodelling treatment, brightening, and a hydrating facial course. Month two to three, texture and quality. With the foundation in place, we move to texture, fine lines, and skin remodelling. This is where microneedling, fractional laser, or gentle peels come in. Month four to six, structure. With the skin in better condition, we can plan precise structural work if it is needed, fillers, biostimulators, threads. This is also where we layer in lifting work like Thermage or Ultherapy where indicated. Month six to twelve, maintenance. Once the result is built, the work is keeping it. Quarterly bio-remodelling, monthly facials, annual lifting sessions, and a strict home protocol. We map this on paper at the first consultation. You leave with a clear, written plan. We review it at every session and adjust as your skin responds. That is what personalised care actually means. ## Snow White IV: the brightening protocol explained **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-05-01 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/snow-white-iv-protocol **Tags:** iv therapy, glutathione, brightening, skin tone > How a glutathione-led infusion supports a more even, luminous skin tone across a course. Glutathione is the body's master antioxidant, produced in the liver and present in every cell. Among its many roles, it inhibits an enzyme called tyrosinase, which the body uses to produce melanin. When glutathione levels are higher, melanin production at the cellular level is gently reduced, leading to a more even, luminous skin tone. The Snow White IV protocol delivers a clinical dose of reduced glutathione directly into the bloodstream, paired with vitamin C and alpha-lipoic acid that amplify and stabilise its antioxidant effect. The full vial, never split, delivered over 60 minutes by a DHA-licensed nurse. The result is not skin lightening in the sense of changing your underlying skin colour. It is the support of your skin's natural, even tone. Pigmentation caused by sun damage, hormonal flux, or oxidative stress reduces gradually over a course of sessions. The skin looks brighter, more radiant, more reflective. A typical first course is six to ten sessions, weekly or fortnightly, then monthly maintenance. Some clients see a noticeable glow after the first session. The more consistent improvements build across the full course. Snow White works best when combined with a daily SPF 50+ routine and a brightening topical protocol. Without sun protection, the underlying photoaging keeps generating new pigmentation, undoing the IV work between sessions. We always discuss the at-home component during consultation. Who should not have it. Clients with a known allergy to sulphur or any vitamin or preservative ingredient. Pregnant or breastfeeding clients. Anyone with severe asthma. We screen at consultation. For clients who want a more even tone and are committed to the full course plus daily SPF, this is one of our most reliable protocols. **Related treatments:** snow-white-iv-drip ## Peptides for sleep, recovery, and longevity **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-29 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/peptides-for-sleep-recovery-longevity **Tags:** peptides, sleep, recovery, longevity > A starting guide to the most asked-about peptide protocols, BPC-157, CJC-1295, Ipamorelin, and more. Peptide therapy has moved from athlete circles into mainstream wellness over the last five years. At Ivory, we run protocols for clients who are interested in recovery, sleep, longevity, and body composition. Here is a starting view of what each major peptide actually does. BPC-157. A peptide originally derived from a protein found in gastric juice, used to support tissue repair, gut health, and recovery from injury. Common protocol for clients dealing with persistent joint discomfort, slow-to-heal soft tissue injuries, or post-surgical recovery. CJC-1295 and Ipamorelin. Often used together. They stimulate the body's natural release of growth hormone in a pulsatile, physiological pattern. Common protocol for clients seeking improved sleep depth, better recovery from training, and gradual improvements in body composition. Most clients run it for three to six months and reassess. Ipamorelin alone. Similar to the combination but milder, often chosen by clients new to peptides or those who prefer a lighter starting protocol. Epithalon. Used for longevity protocols, particularly around sleep architecture and circadian rhythm. Often run as short courses, two to four weeks, repeated quarterly. Thymosin Alpha-1. Immune support, particularly for clients with recurrent infections or chronic immune dysregulation. Run in cycles, not continuously. PT-141. Used in protocols for sexual health, prescribed in carefully managed contexts. Every peptide protocol at Ivory starts with a doctor consultation, baseline blood work, and a clear written plan with start and review dates. Peptides are pharmacologically active. They are not a supplement. We do not start anyone on a course without proper screening, and we review progress with bloodwork at three months. If a clinic offers you peptides without a doctor consultation and baseline labs, that is not a peptide clinic, that is a vending machine. **Related treatments:** bpc-157, cjc-1295-ipamorelin, epithalon ## How Profhilo Structura adds gentle structure **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-27 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/profhilo-structura-explained **Tags:** profhilo-structura, bio-remodelling, subtle lift > Standard bio-remodelling hydrates. Structura adds a layer of subtle structural support. Standard bio-remodelling, the original Profhilo formulation, is placed in the superficial layer of skin and stimulates collagen and elastin remodelling for an overall improvement in skin quality. Structura is the same family but a slightly different application. The product uses a different cross-linking technology and is placed deeper, in the subdermal plane. The result is the same bio-remodelling and hydration benefit, plus a layer of gentle structural support. Think of it as Profhilo with a light lifting effect. Where it shines. The lower face, where some clients want a subtle firming without committing to filler. The cheek area, where there has been mild volume loss but where filler would be too much. The temples, where thinning is gradual and a slow rebuild looks more natural than instant correction. Where it does not replace anything else. If you want a sharper jawline or a higher cheekbone, you need filler. If you want a complete face lift, you need surgery. Structura is for the in-between, the natural firming and gentle support that clients in their forties and fifties often ask for without quite knowing how to describe it. A typical course is two sessions, four weeks apart. The injection technique uses small amounts at five precise points per side, similar to the original Profhilo protocol but deeper. Twenty minutes per session, no downtime, immediate return to normal life. It pairs well with EMFACE for muscle work, with bio-remodelling for skin quality at the superficial level, and with Thermage or Ultherapy for deeper tightening. The combinations are something we design together at consultation, sequencing them to build over six to twelve months. Many clients come in asking for "filler" and walk out with a plan that combines Structura, bio-remodelling, and one targeted area of filler. The result looks like nothing in particular, which is exactly the point. **Related treatments:** profhilo-structura, profhilo ## Salmon DNA (PDRN) for the under-eye area **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-25 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/salmon-dna-for-under-eyes **Tags:** under-eye, pdrn, polynucleotides, regenerative > How polynucleotide therapy helps thin, hollowed, or pigmented under-eyes where filler is too risky. The under-eye area is one of the most requested treatment zones and one of the most technically difficult. The skin is thin, the anatomy is variable, and filler placed even slightly off-target can produce lumps, puffiness, or a bluish discolouration that lasts months. Polynucleotide therapy, often called salmon DNA, has changed how we treat the under-eye. The product, highly purified polynucleotides derived from salmon DNA, is biocompatible and bioregenerative. Rather than adding volume, it stimulates fibroblast activity, improves skin quality, and supports the natural firmness of the tissue. Where filler adds, polynucleotides repair. The under-eye becomes less crepey, less translucent, less hollow-looking, and less prone to the dark shadow that often comes from thin skin showing the vasculature beneath. Across three to four sessions, two to three weeks apart, most clients see meaningful improvement. We use this often as a first-line treatment for clients who want a refreshed under-eye but for whom filler is not the right answer. That includes clients with thin skin, prominent vasculature, pigmentation under the eye, or fine crepiness without significant volume loss. The session takes around 30 minutes. We use the smallest needles, multiple shallow injection points, and topical anaesthetic. Most clients describe it as mildly uncomfortable, not painful. The treated area may swell slightly for 24 hours, and tiny bruises sometimes appear at injection points but resolve within a few days. We often combine polynucleotides with skin-quality work in the same area, gentle LED, fractional non-ablative laser if indicated, and a strict home protocol. The cumulative effect builds across the course. If you have been told you need filler under your eyes, ask whether polynucleotides have been considered first. For many people, they are the better answer. **Related treatments:** salmon-dna-eyes, salmon-dna ## Hair restoration: PRP, exosomes, and mesotherapy **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-23 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/hair-restoration-prp-vs-exosomes **Tags:** hair restoration, prp, exosomes, mesotherapy > Three injectable hair treatments, all helpful, used for different stages and budgets. Hair thinning is one of the most common reasons clients book a consultation, and one where the right protocol depends heavily on where in the process you are. Three options we recommend most often, and how to choose between them. PRP. Platelet-rich plasma is drawn from your own blood, spun to concentrate the growth factors, and injected into the scalp. It is the established standard for early to moderate hair thinning. A course of three to six sessions, four weeks apart, with maintenance every six months. Most clients see reduced shedding within the first two months and visible regrowth across four to six months. Exosome therapy. Newer, more potent, and more expensive. Exosomes are extracellular vesicles loaded with growth factors and signalling molecules, sourced from carefully selected pharmaceutical-grade stem cell cultures. They deliver a more concentrated regenerative signal than PRP and are particularly useful for clients who have plateaued on PRP or who are at a more advanced stage of thinning. Mesotherapy. Vitamin, peptide, and growth-factor microinjections placed across the scalp at a shallow depth. Less invasive than PRP or exosomes, more affordable per session, but generally fewer dramatic results. Mesotherapy works best as a maintenance protocol between PRP or exosome courses, or for clients with mild concerns who want a starting point. We almost always combine these injectable protocols with a non-injectable component, low-level laser scalp therapy, topical minoxidil, oral finasteride for male clients where appropriate, and nutritional review. Single-pillar treatment plans underperform. The treatment we recommend depends on your stage of hair loss, family history, medical context, and budget. We start with a scalp examination and trichoscopy at consultation, take baseline photographs, and design the plan around what we see. No two protocols look identical. If a clinic offers you a fixed package without examining your scalp, walk away. **Related treatments:** prp-hair, mct-exosome-hair, exosome-hair-therapy ## Choosing between Thermage FLX and Ultherapy **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-21 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/thermage-versus-ultherapy **Tags:** lift, tightening, non-surgical, rf, ultrasound > Both lift and tighten without surgery, but they work differently. Here is how we choose. Thermage and Ultherapy are the two most established non-surgical lifting platforms. Both offer meaningful results without surgery, both are gradual, and both require a single annual or biannual session rather than a course. The choice between them depends on what is going on in your skin. Thermage FLX uses monopolar radiofrequency to heat the deeper dermis, stimulating collagen contraction and remodelling across the months that follow. The effect is broad, particularly good for overall skin tightening, jowls, the neck, and laxity that is more about thinning skin than dropping structure. One session, around 60 to 90 minutes depending on the area, with results building over four to six months. Ultherapy uses microfocused ultrasound to deliver heat at very specific depths, the same plane a surgeon works in during a facelift. The effect is more lifting and structural, particularly good for the brow, the deep jawline, and the under-chin area. One session, again around 60 to 90 minutes, results building across two to six months. How to decide between them. If your concern is "my skin looks thinner and less firm overall," Thermage is usually the right answer. If your concern is "my jawline has dropped" or "my brow is heavy," Ultherapy is usually the right answer. For many clients in their late forties and beyond, the combination across one year, Thermage first, then Ultherapy six months later, delivers the most complete result. Both treatments have a discomfort component. We use topical anaesthetic, breaks during the session, and conservative settings to make them tolerable. Most clients describe the sensation as warmth with intermittent sharper pulses. Both have minimal downtime, you walk out, no recovery period, no obvious change for the first few weeks. The lifting happens slowly. Neither replaces a facelift. They are non-surgical, and the results, while real, are subtler than what surgery delivers. For the right candidate, that is exactly the appeal. **Related treatments:** thermage-flx, ultherapy ## Five reasons we recommend the hydrating multi-step facial **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-19 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/five-reasons-hydrating-multi-step-facial **Tags:** facial, hydration, hydradermabrasion, glow > The patented multi-step facial earns its place in most treatment plans. Here is why. Some treatments are popular because of marketing. The hydrating multi-step facial, often called by its brand name, is popular for a simpler reason. It does what it says, reliably, in 45 minutes, with no downtime. Five reasons we book it for almost every type of client. First, the cleansing depth. The patented vortex tip lifts dirt, oil, and dead cells from the pores using suction and a gentle exfoliating serum. It is the closest you can get to a deep manual extraction without the pinching or the redness that follows. Second, the hydration. The same vortex delivers a hyaluronic acid and peptide solution into the skin during the suction step. The result is plumper, more reflective skin immediately, not just after a few hours. Third, the customisation. We add booster serums during the session based on what your skin needs that day, brightening for pigmentation, growth factors for early ageing, peptides for sensitivity, salicylic for congestion. The base treatment stays the same, the serum changes. Fourth, the LED finish. Most sessions end with a 10-minute LED light therapy step, calming for sensitive skin, antibacterial for acne-prone skin, or red for general rejuvenation. It compounds the result. Fifth, the lack of downtime. You can walk out, return to work, attend a meeting, or fly later the same day. We book it in the morning of weddings, photoshoots, and important meetings without hesitation. Who should look at something else. Clients with active inflammatory acne or recent sunburn. Anyone with very thin, fragile skin who cannot tolerate suction. Pregnant clients in the first trimester, depending on the booster choice. For everyone else, a monthly hydrating multi-step facial is the simplest, most reliable foundation we can offer. **Related treatments:** hydrafacial ## NAD+ explained: longevity, sleep, and recovery **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-17 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/nad-plus-explained **Tags:** nad+, longevity, iv therapy, wellness > What the molecule does, when it makes a difference, and why our protocol uses the full clinical dose. NAD+ has gone from a niche longevity supplement to one of the most asked-for IV therapies in Dubai. The growth is justified, but it is also surrounded by hype. Here is what NAD+ actually does and when it makes a meaningful difference. NAD+, nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide, is a coenzyme present in every cell of the body. It plays a central role in energy production at the mitochondrial level, in DNA repair, and in cellular signalling. Levels decline with age, and that decline correlates with the gradual loss of energy, focus, and sleep quality that most people start to notice in their forties. Replacing NAD+ via IV delivers a clinical dose directly into the bloodstream, bypassing the digestive losses that limit oral supplementation. We offer two protocols, 250mg for clients new to NAD+ or wanting a maintenance dose, and 500mg for those committed to a longevity programme. What clients report consistently across a course. Better sleep depth within the first session or two. Improved mental clarity and focus. Faster physical recovery from training. Reduced reliance on caffeine for energy. Some clients also notice improved mood and reduced cravings, though that is more variable. The session takes 90 minutes. NAD+ infused too quickly causes flushing and discomfort, so we deliver it slowly, often with a vitamin co-factor blend. You can read, work, or rest through it. There is no downtime afterwards. Who should not have it. Anyone with active liver or kidney disease without clearance from their physician. Pregnant or breastfeeding clients. We screen for these at consultation. NAD+ is not a magic bullet for ageing. But for clients building a longevity protocol that combines sleep, training, nutrition, and supplements, NAD+ IV every two to four weeks adds a measurable layer that is hard to replicate orally. **Related treatments:** nad-250mg-iv-drip, nad-500mg-iv-drip ## Body sculpting after pregnancy: a measured approach **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-15 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/body-sculpting-after-pregnancy **Tags:** postpartum, body sculpting, diastasis, recovery > When to start, what works, and the importance of clearing things with your obstetrician first. Many of our clients ask about body treatments after pregnancy. Our first answer is always the same. Talk to your obstetrician, then come to us. Most non-invasive body treatments are safe to start three to six months after delivery, provided your obstetrician has cleared you, you are no longer breastfeeding for some protocols, and there are no complications from pregnancy or delivery. We never start without explicit medical clearance. The most common post-pregnancy concerns are abdominal laxity, weakened core muscles, and stubborn fat deposits that have not responded to diet and exercise. Each needs a different treatment. For muscle weakness and mild diastasis recti, we recommend our body sculpting device, which combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic energy to strengthen muscles with simultaneous fat reduction. It can deliver the equivalent of thousands of muscle contractions per session, far more than voluntary exercise can achieve. A course of four to six sessions, two per week, restores meaningful core strength. For skin laxity, particularly around the abdomen, RF treatments work better. They stimulate collagen and elastin in the deeper layers and tighten the surface over a course of sessions. We sometimes pair this with EXION RF Microneedling for tighter, smoother skin. For pelvic floor weakness, which is very common after delivery, the Emsella chair is non-invasive, fully clothed, and effective. Six to twelve sessions over six weeks deliver supramaximal contractions that strengthen the pelvic floor far beyond voluntary Kegels. What we will not do. Aggressive ablative treatments in the early postpartum window. Anything with significant pain medication requirements while breastfeeding. Any combination that has not been discussed with your obstetrician. Healing from pregnancy is its own work. Treatments come after that, not in place of it. **Related treatments:** emsculpt-neo, viora-rf-body, exion-body ## What changes after anti-wrinkle injections **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-13 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/what-changes-after-anti-wrinkle-injections **Tags:** botox, anti-wrinkle, injectables, expressions > A small dose changes more than you might expect, jaw tension, brow position, even how your skin reflects light. Anti-wrinkle injections, often called by their brand names, are the most common injectable treatment in the world. They are also the most misunderstood. Done well, they are subtle. Done poorly, they are obvious. The active ingredient relaxes specific muscles, preventing them from contracting forcefully. Where this is useful, the forehead, the area between the brows, the crow's feet. Where it can become problematic, frozen expressions, dropped brows, a tight smile, anywhere the dose has been placed too aggressively or in the wrong site. Our approach at Ivory is conservative. We use the smallest dose that achieves the result you want, and we plan for you to come back in two weeks for a free top-up if needed. It is much easier to add a tiny amount than to wait three months for an over-treatment to wear off. What changes after a session. Most clients see the line they were treating soften across 7 to 14 days, peaking at 4 weeks. Beyond that, a few things happen that we point out at consultation. Jaw tension often eases when we treat the masseter, a use case popular with people who clench at night. Brow position can be subtly lifted if we target the right muscles, opening up the eye area. Sebaceous oil production can reduce slightly when treating the forehead, which can help oily-skin clients. What does not change. Skin quality. Pores. Pigmentation. These need different treatments. Anti-wrinkle injections are precise tools for muscle activity, nothing more. If you are considering it for the first time, we will go through your facial expressions during consultation and map exactly where to inject and where to avoid. Sometimes we recommend skipping it altogether, particularly for clients whose movement is part of their character. **Related treatments:** botox ## Cellulite: realistic expectations from technology **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-11 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/cellulite-realistic-expectations **Tags:** cellulite, body, shockwave, lymphatic > What current cellulite treatments can and cannot do, and how to build a meaningful course. Cellulite is one of the most asked-about concerns and one of the most misrepresented in marketing. No treatment, anywhere, removes cellulite permanently. Anything claiming otherwise is overselling. What treatments can do is reduce the visible appearance significantly, soften the dimpled texture, and improve skin firmness over a course. The catch is that the improvement is incremental, requires a sustained programme, and depends on factors outside the clinic, hydration, diet, movement, and weight stability. The treatment we recommend most often is shockwave therapy. Acoustic waves break down the fibrous bands that pull skin inward to create the dimpled appearance, while stimulating circulation and lymphatic drainage. A course of six to ten sessions delivers visible softening. Most clients pair this with pressotherapy to support lymphatic clearance between sessions. For clients who want to address cellulite alongside body contouring, we add RF body treatments or our body sculpting protocol. The combination addresses both the surface texture and the underlying tissue. What does not work, despite the marketing, is any single-session miracle. Topical creams. Massage on its own without sustained programme. Crash diets. These all have their place, but not as a treatment for cellulite. What does work, consistently, is a six-week programme of in-clinic sessions paired with two litres of water daily, regular movement, and avoiding crash weight changes. Clients who follow that plan see real, photographable improvement. We measure circumference and take consistent photos before, during, and after every cellulite programme. That is how we know whether something is working. If it is not, we stop and recommend something else. **Related treatments:** shockwave-therapy, pressotherapy, arosha-body-wrap ## RF microneedling versus traditional microneedling **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-09 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/rf-microneedling-vs-traditional **Tags:** microneedling, radiofrequency, skin texture > When the radiofrequency upgrade is worth it, and when standard microneedling is the better fit. Microneedling has become a default treatment in every clinic. The basic premise has not changed in years, fine needles create controlled micro-injuries in the skin, which triggers a wound-healing response and stimulates collagen. Done well, it improves texture, reduces fine lines, and softens early scarring. The newer variant, RF microneedling, delivers radiofrequency energy through the needle tips into the deeper dermis. The result is a stronger remodelling response at depth, where standard microneedling cannot reach. We see it making a real difference for textural scarring, advanced skin laxity, and deeper wrinkles. So which one. For superficial textural concerns, mild fine lines, or as part of a general rejuvenation course, standard medical microneedling works well and costs less. The downtime is shorter, the recovery gentler. For acne scars with depth, skin laxity around the jawline, or stretch marks, RF microneedling is more effective. The tradeoff is a longer recovery, two to four days of pinkness and dryness, and a higher per-session cost. Most clients see meaningful change across three sessions spaced four weeks apart. There is one practical advantage of the RF version that is often overlooked. Because the heat is delivered into the dermis through insulated needles, the top layer of skin recovers faster than you might expect from a deep treatment. The downtime is mostly cosmetic. Both treatments require sun avoidance for two weeks before and after. Both pair well with growth factor serums or PRP applied during the session to amplify the result. We discuss whether to add either at consultation. If you cannot decide, start with standard microneedling. If the result is not what you wanted, we can move you to RF for the next course. **Related treatments:** medical-microneedling, exion-rf-microneedling ## Carbon laser peel: instant glow with acne benefits **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-07 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/carbon-laser-peel-instant-glow **Tags:** carbon laser, instant glow, acne, pores > How a 30-minute laser facial brightens skin, refines pores, and calms breakouts without downtime. Carbon laser peel is the closest thing we offer to an instant, walk-in walk-out glow. A thin layer of pharmaceutical-grade carbon is brushed across the face, allowed to settle into pores, and then targeted with Q-switched laser. The carbon vaporises with the laser energy, lifting impurities and dead cells with it. The effect is twofold. First, the gentle exfoliation. Pores look refined, the skin reflects light better, and makeup applies more smoothly for several days after. Second, the laser energy stimulates collagen at depth, so a course of sessions delivers a gradual textural improvement, not just an immediate glow. It is also one of the few facials that genuinely helps active mild-to-moderate acne. The laser targets the bacteria that contribute to breakouts and reduces sebum production. Clients with congestion-prone skin often book a session before an important event and notice fewer breakouts in the days that follow, the opposite of what they fear. Thirty minutes, no downtime, no peeling. The skin can be mildly pink for an hour or two. SPF 50+ for the next 48 hours, and avoid scrubs or active acids that night. A single session is wonderful before a wedding, a flight, or a photoshoot. For longer-lasting results, a course of three to six sessions across two to three months delivers compound benefits, less congestion, smaller-looking pores, and a brighter, more even tone. It is not the right treatment for everyone. If you have very sensitive skin, active dermatitis, or recent injectables in the treatment area, we will recommend something gentler. **Related treatments:** carbon-laser-peel ## EMFACE: lifting facial muscles without needles **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-04-05 **Category:** Treatments **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/emface-without-injections **Tags:** emface, non-invasive, muscle, lift > Twenty minutes, no injections, and the effect of a workout for the muscles that lift the face. EMFACE is one of the few non-invasive treatments where you can feel something is working during the session. The applicators sit gently on your forehead and cheeks and combine two technologies, radiofrequency to remodel collagen, and HIFES to stimulate the muscles that lift the face. You are not exercising in the way you would in a gym. The device is doing the work. But the principle is similar. The facial muscles tone over a course of treatments, and the supporting tissue tightens, lifting features that gravity has slowly pulled down. Twenty minutes per session. Four to six sessions, one week apart. No needles, no downtime. You can walk out and back to work the same morning. Most clients feel a mild post-workout sensation in the face for a few hours afterwards, and that is exactly what you should expect. Who is it for. The honest answer is people in their late thirties to early sixties who have noticed loss of definition in the cheek, jawline softening, or a tired look that does not match how they feel. It pairs well with bio-remodelling and Sculptra, the muscle work compounds the skin quality work. Who should skip it. Anyone with metallic implants, pacemakers, or active inflammatory skin conditions in the treatment area. Pregnant clients. We screen for these at consultation. EMFACE will not replace a facelift. It is not designed to. What it does is offer a measurable, non-invasive way to lift and tone the face across two months, with results that hold for around 12 months with single maintenance sessions. For most of our clients, that is exactly what they want. **Related treatments:** emface, emface-eyes ## Pigmentation in Middle Eastern skin: what works **Author:** Dr. Halla Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-04-03 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/pigmentation-in-middle-eastern-skin-what-works **Tags:** pigmentation, melasma, skin of colour, cosmelan > Melasma, sun damage, and post-inflammatory marks need a careful protocol on Fitzpatrick III to V skin. Pigmentation in Middle Eastern and South Asian skin is one of the most common reasons clients come to see us. It is also one of the easiest things to treat badly. Aggressive lasers, the wrong peel, or skipping the priming phase can trigger rebound pigmentation that takes months to settle. The first principle is to slow down. Skin tones rated Fitzpatrick III to V need to be primed with tyrosinase inhibitors, hydroquinone or its alternatives, for two to four weeks before any active treatment. This reduces the risk of post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation, the very thing we are trying to treat. For superficial sun damage and uneven tone, our depigmentation peel programme, what most know as Cosmelan, is the strongest tool. It is applied in-clinic, then continued at home for several months with a maintenance cream. Results are dramatic but the home protocol is non-negotiable, miss it and the pigment returns. For melasma, the rules are different. Melasma is hormonal and chronic. We can lighten it significantly but it requires ongoing management, sun protection, daily home care, and periodic maintenance treatments. Q-switched laser at low energy, used carefully, is part of the long-term plan but not the first step. Vascular pigmentation, like redness, telangiectasia, and rosacea-adjacent flushing, responds to a different family of treatments, AFT laser and dermalux LED, not the depigmentation protocols. Two universal rules. SPF 50+ every day, every day, every day. And manage your expectations across months, not weeks. Pigmentation that took years to settle does not lift in a single session, no matter what anyone promises. We are honest about timelines at the start. The clients who get the best results are the ones who commit to the full programme. **Related treatments:** cosmelan-peel, qs-laser-pigmentation, salicylic-acid-peel ## Treating acne scars: a sequenced plan **Author:** Dr. Halla Sheikh Ali **Published:** 2026-04-01 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/treating-acne-scars-a-sequenced-plan **Tags:** acne scars, microneedling, fractional, skin texture > Why no single treatment fixes acne scarring, and how we build a 6-month protocol. Acne scars are layered. Some are pigmented marks left behind after a breakout, post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation. Some are textural, ice-pick, boxcar, or rolling scars. Some are both. No single treatment fixes all of them, and any clinic that says otherwise is overpromising. We start every consultation by classifying the scars under good clinical lighting. Pigmented marks respond to brightening peels, fractional non-ablative laser, and a strict home protocol with tyrosinase inhibitors and daily SPF. Most fade significantly within three to six months of consistent care. Textural scarring is harder. Ice-pick scars often need targeted TCA cross, a small amount of trichloroacetic acid placed precisely into each pit, repeated across several sessions. Boxcar and rolling scars respond better to RF microneedling, which combines mechanical injury with radiofrequency to stimulate remodelling at depth. We sequence these treatments with subcision for tethered scars when needed. Pigment first, texture second. That is the rule. Treating texture while pigment is still active can worsen the pigmented component. We almost always start with two months of brightening and home care before moving to resurfacing. The full protocol takes six to nine months, including four to six in-clinic sessions and a strict daily routine. Clients who follow the plan see meaningful change. Clients who skip the home care do not. We do not promise complete clearance. We do promise a measurable improvement, scored at the start and at the end so we can both see the difference. Bring photographs of your skin at its worst, before any treatment, to your consultation. The comparison six months later is often the most rewarding part of the work. **Related treatments:** medical-microneedling, ipixel-fractional-resurfacing, exion-rf-microneedling ## Why we use the full vial for every IV drip **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-03-30 **Category:** Wellness **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/why-we-use-the-full-vial **Tags:** iv therapy, standards, pharmaceutical-grade > Many clinics split one vial across two clients. We do not. If you have shopped around for IV therapy in Dubai, you may have noticed that prices vary wildly. There is a reason, and it matters. A standard IV vial of high-dose nutrients, the kind used in formulations for immunity, glow, or NAD+, is designed to deliver one full clinical dose. Some clinics split that vial across two clients, charging less per session, but each client receives half the active ingredient. They feel less, and the benefit does not last as long. At Ivory, every IV drip uses the full vial. That is a clinic policy, not a marketing line. Each vial is also independently stability tested before use, so every infusion meets the same pharmaceutical-grade standard, the formulation does not lose potency between deliveries. The result is what you would expect from a proper clinical dose. Clients feel the difference within hours, especially for the immune, glow, and NAD+ protocols. Energy improves, sleep deepens, and skin clarity builds across a course. The session takes 60 minutes, and you can read, work, or rest through it. There is one other thing worth saying. Every drip is administered by a DHA-licensed nurse after a brief health check, no exceptions. We screen for cardiovascular conditions, recent medication changes, pregnancy, and breastfeeding before any line is placed. If anything is unclear, we will reschedule. This is the standard you should expect from any IV clinic in Dubai. If a price seems too good to be true, ask whether the vial is being split. The answer tells you everything. **Related treatments:** immune-boost-iv-drip, radiant-skin-glow-iv-drip, nad-500mg-iv-drip ## Pre-Eid skincare prep: a 14-day plan **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-03-28 **Category:** Seasonal **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/pre-eid-skincare-prep-14-day-plan **Tags:** seasonal, preparation, facial, eid > How to schedule treatments and at-home care to walk into Eid with calm, glowing skin. Preparing for Eid is one of our busiest times. Clients want their skin to look its best for family gatherings and photographs, and most of them ask the same question: how late can I leave it. Two weeks is enough for a meaningful glow. Less than a week, and we focus on gentle radiance treatments only. More than two weeks, and we can plan a sequence that includes mild resurfacing. Day 14 to 10. This is the window for any treatment with even a small recovery, hydrating multi-step facials, gentle peels, and LED therapy. Avoid anything ablative unless we have planned it well in advance. Day 9 to 5. Switch to non-invasive radiance work. A signature facial, dermaplaning, or a calming LED session. At home, skip strong actives like retinoids and acid exfoliants. Focus on hydration, vitamin C, and SPF every day. Day 4 to 2. Only the lightest of treatments at this stage. Lymphatic drainage massage is excellent. A polish-and-glow facial with no extractions. Keep at-home products to gentle hydration and barrier support. Day 1 and morning of. Hydrate inside and out. Lots of water. A hydrating sheet mask the night before. SPF in the morning even if you are indoors most of the day. If you have a wedding or major event the same week, book your final treatment seven days before, never the day before. Skin sometimes responds in ways we cannot predict, and a week leaves room to settle. The clients who walk into Eid looking their best are the ones who planned the entire fortnight, not the ones who tried to fix everything in 48 hours. **Related treatments:** hydrafacial, dermalux-led, cool-jet-facial ## Sculptra versus filler: when each is right **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-03-26 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/sculptra-versus-filler-when-each-is-right **Tags:** sculptra, filler, collagen, biostimulator > A collagen biostimulator and a hyaluronic acid filler are not interchangeable. Here is how to choose. Sculptra and hyaluronic acid filler are sometimes pitched as alternatives. They are not. They do different things on different timelines, and choosing between them depends on what you actually want. Hyaluronic acid filler is structural. We inject it into a specific area, cheek, lip, jawline, and the result is immediate. The product adds volume that can be shaped during the session and dissolved later if you change your mind. It is a precise tool for a specific outcome. Sculptra is a collagen biostimulator. It is poly-L-lactic acid, the same biocompatible material used in dissolvable sutures. We inject it across larger areas of the face, and instead of adding volume directly, it triggers your skin to produce new collagen over the following weeks and months. The result builds slowly, typically across three sessions spaced six weeks apart, and lasts up to two years. Filler is the right answer when you want a precise contour change you can see today. Sculptra is the right answer when you want to slow the gradual collagen loss that comes with ageing and rebuild structural support over time. Many clients use both. We use filler to address a specific concern and Sculptra in the background to maintain the underlying foundation. There is one practical difference worth knowing. Filler is reversible. Sculptra is not. We never start a Sculptra course without a long conversation about whether it is the right fit, your medical history, and what you can expect at each stage. Both treatments at Ivory are performed by our doctors, not by aestheticians. That is a non-negotiable for injectable work. **Related treatments:** sculptra, dermal-fillers ## Laser hair removal in summer Dubai: what changes **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-03-24 **Category:** Seasonal **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/summer-laser-hair-removal-what-changes **Tags:** laser, hair removal, summer, sun protection > Why timing, tan, and aftercare matter more from April through September. Dubai summer changes how we approach laser hair removal. The heat, the sun, and the time spent in pools and at the beach all add complexity that we plan for during consultation. The first conversation we have is about your sun exposure in the two weeks before your session. Recently tanned skin, even from incidental exposure, sits at a higher risk of pigmentation change when treated. Our Soprano Titanium platform is safer than most lasers for warmer skin tones, but we still ask clients to avoid direct sun for at least two weeks before a session and the same after. We also adjust treatment intervals through summer. The hair growth cycle does not change with the season, but recovery does. Some clients prefer shorter sessions on smaller areas more frequently. Others time their full-body course to start in October and finish in March, so the result is in place before summer travel. The second thing we talk about is product. Self-tanner, scrubs, retinol, and acid exfoliants all need to come out of your routine for the week before a session and the few days after. We send a detailed pre-care guide before every booking so there is no guesswork. If you are starting a course this summer, plan to be patient about pool and beach time in the 24 hours after each session. Light activity is fine. Avoid hot showers, hot tubs, and direct sun. SPF 50+ every day, reapplied. Most importantly, do not pick or scratch any treated area, leave it alone and let it settle. These are small adjustments. They make the difference between a smooth result and a stubborn one. **Related treatments:** soprano-titanium, candela-gentlemax-pro ## The case for bio-remodelling, not filler **Author:** Shohreh Bagherian **Published:** 2026-03-22 **Category:** Skin Science **URL:** https://ivoryaesthetics.com/journal/the-case-for-bio-remodelling-not-filler **Tags:** profhilo, skin quality, bio-remodelling > Why we recommend Profhilo for clients who want quality, not volume. Most clients walk in asking for "filler" when what they really want is better skin. Their face does not need volume, it needs hydration, elasticity, and bounce. This is where bio-remodelling treatment, what most clinics call Profhilo, has changed the conversation. Bio-remodelling injectables work differently from traditional fillers. Instead of adding lift in one specific area, they deliver a high concentration of stabilised hyaluronic acid that spreads under the skin and signals the body to remodel its own collagen and elastin. The result over two sessions, four weeks apart, is a face that looks more hydrated, firmer, and refreshed without anyone being able to tell you've had anything done. Five injection points per side. Twenty minutes start to finish. No need to be careful about smiling afterwards. Most clients are back to normal life within the hour and start to see the result around week four to six. This is not a treatment for someone who wants a sharper cheekbone or a fuller lip, that is what filler is for. It is for the person who looks in the mirror and feels their skin has lost its glow, even though nothing structural has changed. If you spend a lot of time outdoors, travel often, or are entering your mid-thirties, bio-remodelling is usually the first thing we recommend before any structural work. We start every consultation with a clear conversation about what you actually want. If bio-remodelling is the right answer, we will tell you. If you need something else, we will say that too. **Related treatments:** profhilo